sanctions - User contributions [en]

Template:Unbulleted indent list

2022-04-07T15:37:01Z

Zoran: Created page with "{{<includeonly>safesubst:</includeonly>#invoke:list|unbulleted|list_style=margin-left:{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}};text-indent:-{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}}}}<noinclude> {{documenta..."

{{<includeonly>safesubst:</includeonly>#invoke:list|unbulleted|list_style=margin-left:{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}};text-indent:-{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}}}}<noinclude>
{{documentation}}

</noinclude>

Module:List

2022-04-07T15:36:38Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module outputs different kinds of lists. At the moment, bulleted, -- unbulleted, horizontal, ordered, and horizontal ordered lists are supported. local libUtil = requ..."

-- This module outputs different kinds of lists. At the moment, bulleted,
-- unbulleted, horizontal, ordered, and horizontal ordered lists are supported.

local libUtil = require('libraryUtil')
local checkType = libUtil.checkType
local mTableTools = require('Module:TableTools')

local p = {}

local listTypes = {
['bulleted'] = true,
['unbulleted'] = true,
['horizontal'] = true,
['ordered'] = true,
['horizontal_ordered'] = true
}

function p.makeListData(listType, args)
-- Constructs a data table to be passed to p.renderList.
local data = {}

-- Classes
data.classes = {}
if listType == 'horizontal' or listType == 'horizontal_ordered' then
table.insert(data.classes, 'hlist hlist-separated')
elseif listType == 'unbulleted' then
table.insert(data.classes, 'plainlist')
end
table.insert(data.classes, args.class)

-- Main div style
data.style = args.style

-- Indent for horizontal lists
if listType == 'horizontal' or listType == 'horizontal_ordered' then
local indent = tonumber(args.indent)
indent = indent and indent * 1.6 or 0
if indent > 0 then
data.marginLeft = indent .. 'em'
end
end

-- List style types for ordered lists
-- This could be "1, 2, 3", "a, b, c", or a number of others. The list style
-- type is either set by the "type" attribute or the "list-style-type" CSS
-- property.
if listType == 'ordered' or listType == 'horizontal_ordered' then
data.listStyleType = args.list_style_type or args['list-style-type']
data.type = args['type']

-- Detect invalid type attributes and attempt to convert them to
-- list-style-type CSS properties.
if data.type
and not data.listStyleType
and not tostring(data.type):find('^%s*[1AaIi]%s*$')
then
data.listStyleType = data.type
data.type = nil
end
end

-- List tag type
if listType == 'ordered' or listType == 'horizontal_ordered' then
data.listTag = 'ol'
else
data.listTag = 'ul'
end

-- Start number for ordered lists
data.start = args.start
if listType == 'horizontal_ordered' then
-- Apply fix to get start numbers working with horizontal ordered lists.
local startNum = tonumber(data.start)
if startNum then
data.counterReset = 'listitem ' .. tostring(startNum - 1)
end
end

-- List style
-- ul_style and ol_style are included for backwards compatibility. No
-- distinction is made for ordered or unordered lists.
data.listStyle = args.list_style

-- List items
-- li_style is included for backwards compatibility. item_style was included
-- to be easier to understand for non-coders.
data.itemStyle = args.item_style or args.li_style
data.items = {}
for i, num in ipairs(mTableTools.numKeys(args)) do
local item = {}
item.content = args[num]
item.style = args['item' .. tostring(num) .. '_style']
or args['item_style' .. tostring(num)]
item.value = args['item' .. tostring(num) .. '_value']
or args['item_value' .. tostring(num)]
table.insert(data.items, item)
end

return data
end

function p.renderList(data)
-- Renders the list HTML.

-- Return the blank string if there are no list items.
if type(data.items) ~= 'table' or #data.items < 1 then
return ''
end

-- Render the main div tag.
local root = mw.html.create('div')
for i, class in ipairs(data.classes or {}) do
root:addClass(class)
end
root:css{['margin-left'] = data.marginLeft}
if data.style then
root:cssText(data.style)
end

-- Render the list tag.
local list = root:tag(data.listTag or 'ul')
list
:attr{start = data.start, type = data.type}
:css{
['counter-reset'] = data.counterReset,
['list-style-type'] = data.listStyleType
}
if data.listStyle then
list:cssText(data.listStyle)
end

-- Render the list items
for i, t in ipairs(data.items or {}) do
local item = list:tag('li')
if data.itemStyle then
item:cssText(data.itemStyle)
end
if t.style then
item:cssText(t.style)
end
item
:attr{value = t.value}
:wikitext(t.content)
end

return tostring(root)
end

function p.renderTrackingCategories(args)
local isDeprecated = false -- Tracks deprecated parameters.
for k, v in pairs(args) do
k = tostring(k)
if k:find('^item_style%d+$') or k:find('^item_value%d+$') then
isDeprecated = true
break
end
end
local ret = ''
if isDeprecated then
ret = ret .. '[[Category:List templates with deprecated parameters]]'
end
return ret
end

function p.makeList(listType, args)
if not listType or not listTypes[listType] then
error(string.format(
"bad argument #1 to 'makeList' ('%s' is not a valid list type)",
tostring(listType)
), 2)
end
checkType('makeList', 2, args, 'table')
local data = p.makeListData(listType, args)
local list = p.renderList(data)
local trackingCategories = p.renderTrackingCategories(args)
return list .. trackingCategories
end

for listType in pairs(listTypes) do
p[listType] = function (frame)
local mArguments = require('Module:Arguments')
local origArgs = mArguments.getArgs(frame, {
valueFunc = function (key, value)
if not value or not mw.ustring.find(value, '%S') then return nil end
if mw.ustring.find(value, '^%s*[%*#;:]') then
return value
else
return value:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$')
end
return nil
end
})
-- Copy all the arguments to a new table, for faster indexing.
local args = {}
for k, v in pairs(origArgs) do
args[k] = v
end
return p.makeList(listType, args)
end
end

return p

Module:Exponential search

2022-04-07T15:36:15Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module provides a generic exponential search algorithm. local checkType = require('libraryUtil').checkType local floor = math.floor local function midPoint(lower, up..."

-- This module provides a generic exponential search algorithm.

local checkType = require('libraryUtil').checkType
local floor = math.floor

local function midPoint(lower, upper)
return floor(lower + (upper - lower) / 2)
end

local function search(testFunc, i, lower, upper)
if testFunc(i) then
if i + 1 == upper then
return i
end
lower = i
if upper then
i = midPoint(lower, upper)
else
i = i * 2
end
return search(testFunc, i, lower, upper)
else
upper = i
i = midPoint(lower, upper)
return search(testFunc, i, lower, upper)
end
end

return function (testFunc, init)
checkType('Exponential search', 1, testFunc, 'function')
checkType('Exponential search', 2, init, 'number', true)
if init and (init < 1 or init ~= floor(init) or init == math.huge) then
error(string.format(
"invalid init value '%s' detected in argument #2 to " ..
"'Exponential search' (init value must be a positive integer)",
tostring(init)
), 2)
end
init = init or 2
if not testFunc(1) then
return nil
end
return search(testFunc, init, 1, nil)
end

Module:TableTools

2022-04-07T15:35:29Z

Zoran: Created page with "------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -- TableTools -- --..."

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- TableTools --
-- --
-- This module includes a number of functions for dealing with Lua tables. --
-- It is a meta-module, meant to be called from other Lua modules, and should not --
-- be called directly from #invoke. --
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local libraryUtil = require('libraryUtil')

local p = {}

-- Define often-used variables and functions.
local floor = math.floor
local infinity = math.huge
local checkType = libraryUtil.checkType
local checkTypeMulti = libraryUtil.checkTypeMulti

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- isPositiveInteger
--
-- This function returns true if the given value is a positive integer, and false
-- if not. Although it doesn't operate on tables, it is included here as it is
-- useful for determining whether a given table key is in the array part or the
-- hash part of a table.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.isPositiveInteger(v)
return type(v) == 'number' and v >= 1 and floor(v) == v and v < infinity
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- isNan
--
-- This function returns true if the given number is a NaN value, and false if
-- not. Although it doesn't operate on tables, it is included here as it is useful
-- for determining whether a value can be a valid table key. Lua will generate an
-- error if a NaN is used as a table key.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.isNan(v)
return type(v) == 'number' and v ~= v
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- shallowClone
--
-- This returns a clone of a table. The value returned is a new table, but all
-- subtables and functions are shared. Metamethods are respected, but the returned
-- table will have no metatable of its own.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.shallowClone(t)
checkType('shallowClone', 1, t, 'table')
local ret = {}
for k, v in pairs(t) do
ret[k] = v
end
return ret
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- removeDuplicates
--
-- This removes duplicate values from an array. Non-positive-integer keys are
-- ignored. The earliest value is kept, and all subsequent duplicate values are
-- removed, but otherwise the array order is unchanged.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.removeDuplicates(arr)
checkType('removeDuplicates', 1, arr, 'table')
local isNan = p.isNan
local ret, exists = {}, {}
for _, v in ipairs(arr) do
if isNan(v) then
-- NaNs can't be table keys, and they are also unique, so we don't need to check existence.
ret[#ret + 1] = v
else
if not exists[v] then
ret[#ret + 1] = v
exists[v] = true
end
end
end
return ret
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- numKeys
--
-- This takes a table and returns an array containing the numbers of any numerical
-- keys that have non-nil values, sorted in numerical order.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.numKeys(t)
checkType('numKeys', 1, t, 'table')
local isPositiveInteger = p.isPositiveInteger
local nums = {}
for k in pairs(t) do
if isPositiveInteger(k) then
nums[#nums + 1] = k
end
end
table.sort(nums)
return nums
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- affixNums
--
-- This takes a table and returns an array containing the numbers of keys with the
-- specified prefix and suffix. For example, for the table
-- {a1 = 'foo', a3 = 'bar', a6 = 'baz'} and the prefix "a", affixNums will return
-- {1, 3, 6}.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.affixNums(t, prefix, suffix)
checkType('affixNums', 1, t, 'table')
checkType('affixNums', 2, prefix, 'string', true)
checkType('affixNums', 3, suffix, 'string', true)

local function cleanPattern(s)
-- Cleans a pattern so that the magic characters ()%.[]*+-?^$ are interpreted literally.
return s:gsub('([%(%)%%%.%[%]%*%+%-%?%^%$])', '%%%1')
end

prefix = prefix or ''
suffix = suffix or ''
prefix = cleanPattern(prefix)
suffix = cleanPattern(suffix)
local pattern = '^' .. prefix .. '([1-9]%d*)' .. suffix .. '$'

local nums = {}
for k in pairs(t) do
if type(k) == 'string' then
local num = mw.ustring.match(k, pattern)
if num then
nums[#nums + 1] = tonumber(num)
end
end
end
table.sort(nums)
return nums
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- numData
--
-- Given a table with keys like {"foo1", "bar1", "foo2", "baz2"}, returns a table
-- of subtables in the format
-- {[1] = {foo = 'text', bar = 'text'}, [2] = {foo = 'text', baz = 'text'}}.
-- Keys that don't end with an integer are stored in a subtable named "other". The
-- compress option compresses the table so that it can be iterated over with
-- ipairs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.numData(t, compress)
checkType('numData', 1, t, 'table')
checkType('numData', 2, compress, 'boolean', true)
local ret = {}
for k, v in pairs(t) do
local prefix, num = mw.ustring.match(tostring(k), '^([^0-9]*)([1-9][0-9]*)$')
if num then
num = tonumber(num)
local subtable = ret[num] or {}
if prefix == '' then
-- Positional parameters match the blank string; put them at the start of the subtable instead.
prefix = 1
end
subtable[prefix] = v
ret[num] = subtable
else
local subtable = ret.other or {}
subtable[k] = v
ret.other = subtable
end
end
if compress then
local other = ret.other
ret = p.compressSparseArray(ret)
ret.other = other
end
return ret
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- compressSparseArray
--
-- This takes an array with one or more nil values, and removes the nil values
-- while preserving the order, so that the array can be safely traversed with
-- ipairs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.compressSparseArray(t)
checkType('compressSparseArray', 1, t, 'table')
local ret = {}
local nums = p.numKeys(t)
for _, num in ipairs(nums) do
ret[#ret + 1] = t[num]
end
return ret
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- sparseIpairs
--
-- This is an iterator for sparse arrays. It can be used like ipairs, but can
-- handle nil values.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.sparseIpairs(t)
checkType('sparseIpairs', 1, t, 'table')
local nums = p.numKeys(t)
local i = 0
local lim = #nums
return function ()
i = i + 1
if i <= lim then
local key = nums[i]
return key, t[key]
else
return nil, nil
end
end
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- size
--
-- This returns the size of a key/value pair table. It will also work on arrays,
-- but for arrays it is more efficient to use the # operator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.size(t)
checkType('size', 1, t, 'table')
local i = 0
for _ in pairs(t) do
i = i + 1
end
return i
end

local function defaultKeySort(item1, item2)
-- "number" < "string", so numbers will be sorted before strings.
local type1, type2 = type(item1), type(item2)
if type1 ~= type2 then
return type1 < type2
elseif type1 == 'table' or type1 == 'boolean' or type1 == 'function' then
return tostring(item1) < tostring(item2)
else
return item1 < item2
end
end
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- keysToList
--
-- Returns an array of the keys in a table, sorted using either a default
-- comparison function or a custom keySort function.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.keysToList(t, keySort, checked)
if not checked then
checkType('keysToList', 1, t, 'table')
checkTypeMulti('keysToList', 2, keySort, {'function', 'boolean', 'nil'})
end

local arr = {}
local index = 1
for k in pairs(t) do
arr[index] = k
index = index + 1
end

if keySort ~= false then
keySort = type(keySort) == 'function' and keySort or defaultKeySort
table.sort(arr, keySort)
end

return arr
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- sortedPairs
--
-- Iterates through a table, with the keys sorted using the keysToList function.
-- If there are only numerical keys, sparseIpairs is probably more efficient.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.sortedPairs(t, keySort)
checkType('sortedPairs', 1, t, 'table')
checkType('sortedPairs', 2, keySort, 'function', true)

local arr = p.keysToList(t, keySort, true)

local i = 0
return function ()
i = i + 1
local key = arr[i]
if key ~= nil then
return key, t[key]
else
return nil, nil
end
end
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- isArray
--
-- Returns true if the given value is a table and all keys are consecutive
-- integers starting at 1.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.isArray(v)
if type(v) ~= 'table' then
return false
end
local i = 0
for _ in pairs(v) do
i = i + 1
if v[i] == nil then
return false
end
end
return true
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- isArrayLike
--
-- Returns true if the given value is iterable and all keys are consecutive
-- integers starting at 1.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.isArrayLike(v)
if not pcall(pairs, v) then
return false
end
local i = 0
for _ in pairs(v) do
i = i + 1
if v[i] == nil then
return false
end
end
return true
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- invert
--
-- Transposes the keys and values in an array. For example, {"a", "b", "c"} ->
-- {a = 1, b = 2, c = 3}. Duplicates are not supported (result values refer to
-- the index of the last duplicate) and NaN values are ignored.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.invert(arr)
checkType("invert", 1, arr, "table")
local isNan = p.isNan
local map = {}
for i, v in ipairs(arr) do
if not isNan(v) then
map[v] = i
end
end

return map
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- listToSet
--
-- Creates a set from the array part of the table. Indexing the set by any of the
-- values of the array returns true. For example, {"a", "b", "c"} ->
-- {a = true, b = true, c = true}. NaN values are ignored as Lua considers them
-- never equal to any value (including other NaNs or even themselves).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.listToSet(arr)
checkType("listToSet", 1, arr, "table")
local isNan = p.isNan
local set = {}
for _, v in ipairs(arr) do
if not isNan(v) then
set[v] = true
end
end

return set
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- deepCopy
--
-- Recursive deep copy function. Preserves identities of subtables.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
local function _deepCopy(orig, includeMetatable, already_seen)
-- Stores copies of tables indexed by the original table.
already_seen = already_seen or {}

local copy = already_seen[orig]
if copy ~= nil then
return copy
end

if type(orig) == 'table' then
copy = {}
for orig_key, orig_value in pairs(orig) do
copy[_deepCopy(orig_key, includeMetatable, already_seen)] = _deepCopy(orig_value, includeMetatable, already_seen)
end
already_seen[orig] = copy

if includeMetatable then
local mt = getmetatable(orig)
if mt ~= nil then
local mt_copy = _deepCopy(mt, includeMetatable, already_seen)
setmetatable(copy, mt_copy)
already_seen[mt] = mt_copy
end
end
else -- number, string, boolean, etc
copy = orig
end
return copy
end

function p.deepCopy(orig, noMetatable, already_seen)
checkType("deepCopy", 3, already_seen, "table", true)
return _deepCopy(orig, not noMetatable, already_seen)
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- sparseConcat
--
-- Concatenates all values in the table that are indexed by a number, in order.
-- sparseConcat{a, nil, c, d} => "acd"
-- sparseConcat{nil, b, c, d} => "bcd"
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.sparseConcat(t, sep, i, j)
local arr = {}

local arr_i = 0
for _, v in p.sparseIpairs(t) do
arr_i = arr_i + 1
arr[arr_i] = v
end

return table.concat(arr, sep, i, j)
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- length
--
-- Finds the length of an array, or of a quasi-array with keys such as "data1",
-- "data2", etc., using an exponential search algorithm. It is similar to the
-- operator #, but may return a different value when there are gaps in the array
-- portion of the table. Intended to be used on data loaded with mw.loadData. For
-- other tables, use #.
-- Note: #frame.args in frame object always be set to 0, regardless of the number
-- of unnamed template parameters, so use this function for frame.args.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.length(t, prefix)
-- requiring module inline so that [[Module:Exponential search]] which is
-- only needed by this one function doesn't get millions of transclusions
local expSearch = require("Module:Exponential search")
checkType('length', 1, t, 'table')
checkType('length', 2, prefix, 'string', true)
return expSearch(function (i)
local key
if prefix then
key = prefix .. tostring(i)
else
key = i
end
return t[key] ~= nil
end) or 0
end

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- inArray
--
-- Returns true if valueToFind is a member of the array, and false otherwise.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function p.inArray(arr, valueToFind)
checkType("inArray", 1, arr, "table")
-- if valueToFind is nil, error?

for _, v in ipairs(arr) do
if v == valueToFind then
return true
end
end
return false
end

return p

Template:Indented plainlist

2022-04-07T15:34:26Z

Zoran: Created page with "<div class="plainlist {{{class|}}}" style="margin-left:{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}};text-indent:-{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}};{{{style|}}}">{{#if:{{{1|}}}| {{{1}}} </div>}}<noinclud..."

<div class="plainlist {{{class|}}}" style="margin-left:{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}};text-indent:-{{{in|{{{indent|1em}}}}}};{{{style|}}}">{{#if:{{{1|}}}|
{{{1}}}
</div>}}<noinclude></div>
{{documentation}}
</noinclude>

MediaWiki:Common.css

2022-04-07T15:24:20Z

Zoran:

/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */
@import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css2?family=Saira:ital,wght@0,100;0,200;0,300;0,400;0,500;0,600;0,700;0,800;0,900;1,100;1,200;1,300;1,400;1,500;1,600;1,700;1,800;1,900&display=swap');

* {
font-family: 'Saira', sans-serif;
}
/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */

div.container {
max-width: 100% !important;
width: 100% !important;
}

div.menu {
flex-basis: 300px !important;
flex-grow:0 !important;
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

div.main {
margin-left:100px !important;
}

div.footer {
background-color: #EEE !important;
margin: 0px !important;
padding: 3px !important;
padding-left: 145px !important;
}

nav.disable-margin, div.disable-margin {
margin: 0px !important;
}

nav.disable-padding, div.disable-padding {
padding: 0px !important;
}

nav.header {
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

div.edit-box {
flex-basis: 300px !important;
flex-grow:0 !important;
background-color: #DDD !important;
}

div.search-box {
padding-top:20px !important;
}

div.noedit-box {
flex-basis: 300px !important;
flex-grow:0 !important;
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

h1, h2 {
border-bottom: 0px !important;
}

.content h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {
margin-left:-30px !important;
}

.content {
margin-left:30px !important;
}

.fa-home::before, .n-Homepage::before, .n-mainpage-description::before, .n-mainpage::before, .pt-userpage::before, .fa-backward::before, .n-recentchanges::before, .t-recentchangeslinked::before, .fa-random::before, .n-randompage::before, .fa-question::before, .ca-nstab-help::before, .n-help-mediawiki::before, .n-help::before, .pt-anoncontribs::before, .pt-mycontris::before, .t-cite::before, .fa-sitemap::before, .t-whatlinkshere::before, .fa-cogs::before, .ca-nstab-mediawiki::before, .ca-nstab-special::before, .t-specialpages::before, .fa-info::before, .t-info::before, .fa-print::before, .t-print::before, .fa-link::before, .t-permalink::before, .fa-upload::before, .n-upload::before, .t-upload::before, .fa-comments::before, .ca-talk::before, .pt-anontalk::before, .pt-mytalk::before, .fa-history::before, .ca-history::before, .fa-trash-alt::before, .ca-delete::before, .fa-location-arrow::before, .ca-move::before, .fa-lock::before, .ca-protect::before, .ca-unprotect::before, .fa-eye-slash::before, .ca-unwatch::before, #ca-unwatch > a::before, .fa-sliders-h::before, .pt-preferences::before, .fa-eye::before, .ca-watch::before, .pt-watchlist::before, #ca-watch > a::before, .fa-sign-out-alt::before, .pt-logout::before, .fa-sign-in-alt::before, .pt-login::before {
content: none !important;
}

nav.nonflex .navbar-nav {
display: block !important;
}

nav.nonflex a {
padding-left:0px !important;
}

div#mw-editpage-minoredit {
display:none !important;
}

pre {
font-family: Courier,SFMono-Regular,Menlo,Monaco,Consolas,"Liberation Mono","Courier New",monospace;
}

div.mainpage {
display: flex;
align-items: stretch;
}

div.mainrow {
flex-grow:1;
}

.p-navbar {
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

/* Unbulleted lists */
.plainlist ol,
.plainlist ul {
line-height: inherit;
list-style: none none;
margin: 0;
}

.plainlist ol li,
.plainlist ul li {
margin-bottom: 0;
}

MediaWiki:Common.css

2022-04-07T15:19:41Z

Zoran: Fix for plainlist

/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */
@import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css2?family=Saira:ital,wght@0,100;0,200;0,300;0,400;0,500;0,600;0,700;0,800;0,900;1,100;1,200;1,300;1,400;1,500;1,600;1,700;1,800;1,900&display=swap');

* {
font-family: 'Saira', sans-serif;
}
/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */

div.container {
max-width: 100% !important;
width: 100% !important;
}

div.menu {
flex-basis: 300px !important;
flex-grow:0 !important;
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

div.main {
margin-left:100px !important;
}

div.footer {
background-color: #EEE !important;
margin: 0px !important;
padding: 3px !important;
padding-left: 145px !important;
}

nav.disable-margin, div.disable-margin {
margin: 0px !important;
}

nav.disable-padding, div.disable-padding {
padding: 0px !important;
}

nav.header {
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

div.edit-box {
flex-basis: 300px !important;
flex-grow:0 !important;
background-color: #DDD !important;
}

div.search-box {
padding-top:20px !important;
}

div.noedit-box {
flex-basis: 300px !important;
flex-grow:0 !important;
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

h1, h2 {
border-bottom: 0px !important;
}

.content h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {
margin-left:-30px !important;
}

.content {
margin-left:30px !important;
}

.fa-home::before, .n-Homepage::before, .n-mainpage-description::before, .n-mainpage::before, .pt-userpage::before, .fa-backward::before, .n-recentchanges::before, .t-recentchangeslinked::before, .fa-random::before, .n-randompage::before, .fa-question::before, .ca-nstab-help::before, .n-help-mediawiki::before, .n-help::before, .pt-anoncontribs::before, .pt-mycontris::before, .t-cite::before, .fa-sitemap::before, .t-whatlinkshere::before, .fa-cogs::before, .ca-nstab-mediawiki::before, .ca-nstab-special::before, .t-specialpages::before, .fa-info::before, .t-info::before, .fa-print::before, .t-print::before, .fa-link::before, .t-permalink::before, .fa-upload::before, .n-upload::before, .t-upload::before, .fa-comments::before, .ca-talk::before, .pt-anontalk::before, .pt-mytalk::before, .fa-history::before, .ca-history::before, .fa-trash-alt::before, .ca-delete::before, .fa-location-arrow::before, .ca-move::before, .fa-lock::before, .ca-protect::before, .ca-unprotect::before, .fa-eye-slash::before, .ca-unwatch::before, #ca-unwatch > a::before, .fa-sliders-h::before, .pt-preferences::before, .fa-eye::before, .ca-watch::before, .pt-watchlist::before, #ca-watch > a::before, .fa-sign-out-alt::before, .pt-logout::before, .fa-sign-in-alt::before, .pt-login::before {
content: none !important;
}

nav.nonflex .navbar-nav {
display: block !important;
}

nav.nonflex a {
padding-left:0px !important;
}

div#mw-editpage-minoredit {
display:none !important;
}

pre {
font-family: Courier,SFMono-Regular,Menlo,Monaco,Consolas,"Liberation Mono","Courier New",monospace;
}

div.mainpage {
display: flex;
align-items: stretch;
}

div.mainrow {
flex-grow:1;
}

.p-navbar {
background-color: #EEE !important;
}

.plainlist ul {
line-height: inherit;
list-style: none none;
margin: 0;
}
.plainlist ul li {
margin-bottom: 0;
}

Module:Citation/CS1/Suggestions

2022-04-04T14:33:47Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- Please insert new suggestions in alphabetical order -- The form is ['incorrect'] = 'correct', suggestions = { ['ASIN-TLD'] = 'asin-tld', -- old parameter name..."

-- Please insert new suggestions in alphabetical order
-- The form is ['incorrect'] = 'correct',

suggestions = {
['ASIN-TLD'] = 'asin-tld', -- old parameter name
['abruf'] = 'access-date', -- German
['abruf-verborgen'] = 'access-date', -- German
['accessmonth'] = 'access-date',
['accesso'] = 'access-date', -- Italian
['accessyear'] = 'access-date',
['acessodata'] = 'access-date', -- Brazilian Portuguese
['ad'] = 'first', -- Turkish
['address'] = 'location',
['anno'] = 'date', -- Italian
['annoaccesso'] = 'access-date', -- Italian
['annodiaccesso'] = 'access-date', -- Italian
['annooriginale'] = 'orig-date', -- Italian
['année'] = 'date', -- French
['apellido'] = 'last', -- Spanish
['apellidos'] = 'last', -- Spanish
['archiv-datum'] = 'archive-date', -- German
['archiv-url'] = 'archive-url', -- German
['archive date'] = 'archive-date',
['archive url'] = 'archive-url', -- Spanish
['archive-link'] = 'archive-url',
['artikelnr'] = 'id', -- German (as 'id=Article No. ...')
['artist'] = 'others',
['arşiv-tarihi'] = 'archive-date', -- Turkish
['arşiv-url'] = 'archive-url', -- Turkish
['arşivtarihi'] = 'archive-date', -- Turkish
['arşivurl'] = 'archive-url', -- Turkish
['auflage'] = 'edition', -- German
['auteur'] = 'author', -- French
['auther'] = 'author',
['author link'] = 'author-link', -- Polish
['authorfirst'] = 'author-first', -- old parameter name
['authorgiven'] = 'author-given', -- old parameter name
['authorlast'] = 'author-last', -- old parameter name
['authormask'] = 'author-mask', -- old parameter name
['authorsurname'] = 'author-surname', -- old parameter name
['autor'] = 'author', -- Spanish, German (singular and plural)
['autore'] = 'author', -- Italian
['autthor'] = 'author',
['ay'] = 'month', -- Turkish
['año'] = 'date', -- Spanish
['año-original'] = 'orig-date', -- Spanish
['añoacceso'] = 'access-date', -- Spanish
['añooriginal'] = 'orig-date', -- Spanish
['band'] = 'volume', -- German
['bandreihe'] = 'volume', -- German
['baskı'] = 'edition', -- Turkish
['başlık'] = 'title', -- Turkish
['began'] = 'date', -- old parameter name (cite serial only); or orig-date=
['booktitle'] = 'book-title', -- old parameter name
['ch'] = 'language', -- German (as 'language=de-CH')
['chapter_title'] = 'chapter',
['chapterurl'] = 'chapter-url', -- old parameter name
['cid'] = 'ref', -- Italian
['cilt'] = 'volume', -- Turkish
['cita'] = 'quote', -- Spanish
['citazione'] = 'quote', -- Italian
['città'] = 'location', -- Italian
['city'] = 'location', -- old parameter name (cite serial only)
['coauthor'] = 'author',
['coauthors'] = 'author',
['coautores'] = 'author', -- Spanish
['coautori'] = 'author', -- Italian
['cognome'] = 'last', -- Italian
['conferenceurl'] = 'conference-url', -- old parameter name
['consulté le'] = 'access-date', -- French
['contributionurl'] = 'contribution-url', -- old parameter name
['curatore'] = 'publisher', -- Italian
['czasopismo'] = 'journal', -- Polish
['data dostępu'] = 'access-date', -- Polish
['data'] = 'date', -- Polish, Italian
['dataaccesso'] = 'access-date', -- Italian
['dataarchivio'] = 'archive-date', -- Italian
['datum'] = 'date', -- German
['dead-url'] = 'url-status', -- old parameter name
['deadlink'] = 'url-status',
['deadurl'] = 'url-status', -- old parameter name
['dergi'] = 'work', -- Turkish
['dil'] = 'language', -- Turkish
['displayauthors'] = 'display-authors', -- old parameter name
['displayeditors'] = 'display-editors', -- old parameter name
['distributor'] = 'publisher',
['dnb'] = 'id', -- German (as 'id={{DNB-IDN|...}}')
['doi-broken'] = 'doi-broken-date', -- old parameter alias
['doi-inactive'] = 'doi-broken-date', -- invalid name found in mainspace
['doi-inactive-date'] = 'doi-broken-date', -- old parameter alias
['doi_brokendate'] = 'doi-broken-date', -- old parameter alias
['doi_inactivedate'] = 'doi-inactive-date', -- old parameter alias
['doibroken'] = 'doi-broken-date', -- invalid name found in mainspace
['doiinactive'] = 'doi-broken-date', -- invalid name found in mainspace
['e-print'] = 'eprint', -- misspelling
-- ['ed'] = 'edition', -- avoid suggestion as in English this could be short for editor or edition
-- ['editora'] = 'publisher', -- can be either editor or publisher
-- ['editore'] = 'agency', -- can be either publisher or agency
-- ['editori'] = 'editor', -- can be either editor or publisher
-- ['editorial'] = 'publisher', -- can be either publisher or work
['editoin'] = 'edition', -- misspelling
['editon'] = 'edition', -- misspelling
['editorfirst'] = 'editor-first', -- old parameter name
['editorgiven'] = 'editor-given', -- old parameter name
['editorlast'] = 'editor-last', -- old parameter name
['editorlink'] = 'editor-link', -- old parameter name
['editormask'] = 'editor-mask', -- old parameter name
['editors'] = 'editor', -- old parameter name (can be emulated using multiple singular |editor= params)
['editorsurname'] = 'editor-surname', -- old parameter name
['edizione'] = 'edition', -- Italian
['embargo'] = 'pmc-embargo-date', -- old parameter name
['ended'] = 'date', -- old parameter name (cite serial only)
['en ligne le'] = 'archive-date', -- French
['encyclopædia'] = 'encyclopedia',
['enlaceautor'] = 'author-link', -- Spanish
['enlaceroto'] = 'url-status', -- Spanish
['episodelink'] = 'episode-link', -- old parameter name
['erişimtarihi'] = 'access-date', -- Turkish
['eser'] = 'work', -- Turkish
['family'] = 'surname', -- misguess
['fecha'] = 'date', -- Spanish
['fechaacceso'] = 'access-date', -- Spanish
['fechaarchivo'] = 'archive-date', -- Spanish
['filetype'] = 'format',
['foramt'] = 'format', -- misspelling
['fore-name'] = 'given', -- misguess/misspelling
['forename'] = 'given', -- misguess
['formato'] = 'format', -- Spanish, Italian, Polish
['frist'] = 'first', -- misspelling
['fundstelle'] = 'at', -- German
['gazete'] = 'work', -- Turkish
['giornale'] = 'journal', -- Italian
['herausgeber'] = 'editor', -- German (singular and plural)
['hrsg'] = 'publisher', -- German
['hrsgreihe'] = 'editor', -- German
['idioma'] = 'language', -- Spanish
['ignore-isbn-error'] = 'isbn', -- old parameter (can be fully emulated using ((syntax)))
['ignoreisbnerror'] = 'isbn', -- old parameter alias (suggest |isbn as |ignore-isbn-error is deprecated), not a direct replacement, but can be fully emulated using ((syntax))
['imię'] = 'first', -- Polish
['in-set'] = 'inset', -- misspelling
['interviewerlink'] = 'interviewer-link', -- old parameter alias
['interviewermask'] = 'interviewer-mask', -- old parameter alias
['isbndefekt'] = 'isbn', -- German (suggest |isbn as |ignore-isbn-error is deprecated), not a direct replacement, but can be fully emulated using ((syntax))
['isbnformalfalsch'] = 'isbn', -- German (suggest |isbn as |ignore-isbn-error is deprecated), not a direct replacement, but can be fully emulated using ((syntax))
['isbnistformalfalsch'] = 'isbn', -- German (suggest |isbn as |ignore-isbn-error is deprecated), not a direct replacement, but can be fully emulated using ((syntax))
['isnb'] = 'isbn', -- misspelling
['issnformalfalsch'] = 'issn', -- German (can be fully emulated using ((syntax)))
['jahr'] = 'date', -- German
['jahrea'] = 'orig-date', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['kapitel'] = 'chapter', -- German
['langauge'] = 'language', -- misspelling
['langue'] = 'language', -- French
['last-author-amp'] = 'name-list-style', -- old parameter name (as |name-list-style=amp)
['lastauthoramp'] = 'name-list-style', -- old parameter name (as |name-list-style=amp)
['laydate'] = 'lay-date', -- old parameter name
['laysource'] = 'lay-source', -- old parameter name
['lay-summary'] = 'lay-url', -- old parameter
['laysummary'] = 'lay-url', -- old parameter
['layurl'] = 'lay-url', -- old parameter name
['lieu'] = 'location', -- French
['lingua'] = 'language', -- Italian
['lire en ligne'] = 'url', -- French
['lizenznummer'] = 'id', -- German (as 'id=License No. ...')

['loaction'] = 'location', -- misspelling
['local'] = 'location', -- Brazilian Portuguese
['locatoin'] = 'location', -- misspelling
['lugar'] = 'location', -- Spanish
['mailinglist'] = 'mailing-list', -- old parameter name
['mapurl'] = 'map-url', -- old parameter name
['mes'] = 'date', -- Spanish (not a direct replacement)
['mese'] = 'date', -- Italian (not a direct replacement)
['miejsce'] = 'location', -- Polish
['miesiąc'] = 'date', -- Polish
['mois'] = 'date', -- French
['monat'] = 'date', -- German
-- ['name'] = 'author', -- 'name' is often erroneously used for 'title' and 'work' as well, so no suggestion is better than a wrong suggestion
['name-list-format'] = 'name-list-style', -- old parameter name (as |name-list-style=amp)
['nazwisko'] = 'last', -- Polish
['nespaper'] = 'newspaper', -- misspelling
['net-work'] = 'network', -- misspelling
['newpaper'] = 'newspaper', -- misspelling
['news'] = 'newspaper',
['news-group'] = 'newsgroup', -- misspelling
['news-paper'] = 'newspaper', -- misspelling
['no-cat'] = 'no-tracking', -- old parameter
['nocat'] = 'no-tracking', -- old parameter
['nom'] = 'last', -- French
['nombre'] = 'first', -- Spanish
['nome'] = 'first', -- Italian
['nopp'] = 'no-pp', -- old parameter name
['notracking'] = 'no-tracking', -- old parameter
['numero'] = 'number', -- Italian, Spanish
['nummer'] = 'number', -- German
['nummerreihe'] = 'number', -- German
['obra'] = 'work', -- Spanish
['odpowiedzialność'] = 'agency', -- Polish
['offline'] = 'url-status', -- German (as 'url-status=dead')
['online'] = 'url', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['opera'] = 'work', -- Italian
['opublikowany'] = 'agency', -- Polish
['origdate'] = 'orig-date', -- misspelling
['originaljahr'] = 'orig-date', -- German
['originalort'] = 'publication-place', -- German
['originalsprache'] = 'language', -- German
['originaltitel'] = 'title', -- German (if 'originaltitel' is specified, any possible contents of 'title' should be put in 'trans-title')
['ort'] = 'publication-place', -- German
['ortea'] = 'publication-place', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['other'] = 'others',
['oznaczenie'] = 'agency', -- Polish
['pagees'] = 'pages', -- misspelling
['pagina'] = 'page', -- Italian
['pagina'] = 'pages', -- Italian
['pagine'] = 'pages', -- Italian
['pagine'] = 'pages', -- Italian
['passage'] = 'pages', -- French
['periodico'] = 'magazine', -- Spanish
['plublisher'] = 'publisher', -- misspelling
['pmcid'] = 'pmc',
['post-script'] = 'postscript', -- misspelling
['praca'] = 'work', -- Polish
['primero'] = 'first', -- Spanish
['prénom'] = 'first', -- French
['prénom1'] = 'first1', -- French
['ps'] = 'postscript',
['pub'] = 'publisher',
-- ['pubblicazione'] = 'magazine', -- could be any kind of work
-- ['publicación'] = 'journal', -- could be any kind of work
['publicationdate'] = 'publication-date', -- old parameter name
-- ['published'] = 'publisher', -- could be date, location, or name of publisher
['publicationplace'] = 'publication-place', -- old parameter name
['pulbication-place'] = 'publication-place', -- misspelling
['página'] = 'page', -- Spanish
['páginas'] = 'pages', -- Spanish
['périodique'] = 'publisher', -- French
['registration'] = 'url-access', -- old parameter name
['reihe'] = 'series', -- German
['retrieved'] = 'access-date',
['richiestasottoscrizione'] = 'url-access', -- Italian (as |url-access=subscription)
['rok'] = 'date', -- Polish
['sammelwerk'] = 'work', -- German
['sayfa'] = 'page', -- Turkish
['sayfalar'] = 'pages', -- Turkish
['sayı'] = 'issue', -- Turkish
['script-post'] = 'postscript', -- misspelling
['script-trans'] = 'transcript', -- misspelling
['season'] = 'date', -- old parameter name (cite serial only)
['sectionurl'] = 'section-url', -- old parameter name
['seiten'] = 'pages', -- German
['seria'] = 'series', -- Spanish, Polish
['serie'] = 'series', -- Italian
['série'] = 'series', -- French
['serieslink'] = 'series-link', -- old parameter name
['seriesno'] = 'series-number', -- old parameter name
['service'] = 'agency',
['sitioweb'] = 'website', -- Spanish
['sito'] = 'website', -- Italian
['soyadı'] = 'last', -- Turkish
['spalten'] = 'at', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['sprache'] = 'language', -- German
['stron'] = 'page', -- Polish
['strony'] = 'pages', -- Polish
['subjectlink'] = 'subject-link', -- old parameter name
['subscription'] = 'url-access', -- old parameter name (emulated as |url-access=subscription)
['sur-name'] = 'surname', -- misspelling
['suscripción'] = 'url-access', -- Spanish, Polish (as |url-access=subscription)
['tag'] = 'date', -- German
['tarih'] = 'date', -- Turkish
['template doc demo'] = 'no-tracking', -- old parameter alias
['tile'] = 'title', -- misspelling
['timecaption'] = 'time-caption', -- old parameter name
['titlelink'] = 'title-link', -- old parameter name
['tipo'] = 'type', -- Italian
['tite'] = 'title', -- misspelling
['titel'] = 'title', -- German
['titel-p'] = 'title', -- German ('postscript=none' should be added as well)
['titelerg'] = 'contribution', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['titled'] = 'title', -- Brazilian Portuguese
['titolo'] = 'title', -- Italian
['titre'] = 'title', -- French
['trans-script'] = 'transcript', -- misspelling
['trans_chapter'] = 'trans-chapter', -- old parameter alias
['trans_title'] = 'trans-title', -- old parameter alias
['transchapter'] = 'trans-chapter',
['transcripturl'] = 'transcript-url', -- old parameter name
['transscript'] = 'transcript', -- misspelling
['transscript-format'] = 'transcript-format', -- misspelling
['transscript-url'] = 'transcript-url', -- misspelling
['transscripturl'] = 'transcript-url', -- misspelling
['transtitle'] = 'trans-title',
['typ'] = 'author-mask', -- German (not a direct replacement, but the only valid argument 'typ=wl' can be emulated using 'author-mask')
['tytuł'] = 'title', -- Polish
['títle'] = 'title',
['título'] = 'title', -- Spanish
['ubicación'] = 'location', -- Spanish
['urlarchivio'] = 'archive-url', -- Italian
['urlarchivo'] = 'archive-url', -- Spanish
['urlmorto'] = 'url-status', -- Italian
['urn'] = 'id', -- German (as 'id={{URN|...}}')
['v-authors'] = 'vauthors', -- misspelling
['v-editors'] = 'veditors', -- misspelling
['verlag'] = 'publisher', -- German
['verlagea'] = 'publisher', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['vol'] = 'volume',
['volumen'] = 'volume', -- Spanish
['werk'] = 'work', -- German
['werkerg'] = 'contribution', -- German (not a direct replacement, but can be emulated)
['wkautore'] = 'author-link', -- Italian
['wolumin'] = 'volume', -- Polish
['wydanie'] = 'number', -- Polish
['wydawca'] = 'publisher', -- French
['yardımcıyazarlar'] = 'author', -- Turkish
['yayımcı'] = 'publisher', -- Turkish
['yayıncı'] = 'publisher', -- Turkish
['yazar'] = 'author', -- Turkish
['yazarbağı'] = 'author-link', -- Turkish
['yer'] = 'location', -- Turkish
['yıl'] = 'date', -- Turkish
['zaprezentowany'] = 'publisher', -- French
['zdb'] = 'id', -- German (as 'id={{ZDB|...}}')
['zitat'] = 'quote', -- German
['zugriff'] = 'access-date', -- German
['éditeur'] = 'editor', -- French
['ölüurl'] = 'url-status', -- Turkish
['übersetzer'] = 'translator', -- German (singular and plural)
}

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Here we use Lua patterns to make suggestions. The form is

['pattern'] = 'correct',

Lua patterns are not REGEX though they are similar. The escape character is '%', not '\'.
For more information about Lua patterns, see: Extension:Scribunto/Lua_reference_manual#Patterns

Patterns should probably always include the '^' and '$' anchor assertions to prevent a partial
match from incorrectly suggesting the wrong parameter name. For instance, the pattern 'a[utho]+r'
matches 'author' in the no-longer-supported parameter |author-separator= so the code suggests
'|author='; the same pattern also matches the no-longer-supported parameter |separator= (returning 'ator')
so again, the code suggests '|author='.

One capture is supported, typically the enumerator from an enumerated parameter (the '6' in |author6=, etc.)
The value from the capture replaces $1 in the 'correct' value.

]]

local patterns = {
['^ac+es+ ?d?a?t?e?$'] = 'access-date', -- misspelling
['^apellido[s]?(%d+)$'] = 'last$1', -- Spanish, enumerated
['^a[utho]+r$'] = 'author', -- misspelling
['^a[utho]+r(%d+)$'] = 'author$1', -- misspelling, enumerated
['^author link(%d+)$'] = 'author-link$1', -- Polish, enumerated
['^autor[e]?(%d+)$'] = 'author$1', -- Italian/Spanish/German, enumerated
['^authorfirst(%d+)$'] = 'author-first$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^author(%d+)first$'] = 'author-first$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^authorgiven(%d+)$'] = 'author-given$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^author(%d+)given$'] = 'author-given$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^authorlast(%d+)$'] = 'author-last$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^author(%d+)last$'] = 'author-last$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^authormask(%d+)$'] = 'author-mask$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^author(%d+)mask$'] = 'author-mask$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^authorsurname(%d+)$'] = 'author-surname$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^author(%d+)surname$'] = 'author-surname$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^cognome(%d+)$'] = 'last$1', -- Italian, enumerated
['^editorfirst(%d+)$'] = 'editor-first$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editor(%d+)first$'] = 'editor-first$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editorgiven(%d+)$'] = 'editor-given$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editor(%d+)given$'] = 'editor-given$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editorlast(%d+)$'] = 'editor-last$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editor(%d+)last$'] = 'editor-last$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editorlink(%d+)$'] = 'editor-link$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editor(%d+)link$'] = 'editor-link$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editormask(%d+)$'] = 'editor-mask$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editor(%d+)mask$'] = 'editor-mask$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editorsurname(%d+)$'] = 'editor-surname$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^editor(%d+)surname$'] = 'editor-surname$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^enlaceautore(%d+)$'] = 'author-link$1', -- Spanish, enumerated
['^first (%d+)$'] = 'first$1', -- enumerated
['^last (%d+)$'] = 'last$1', -- enumerated
['^nom[e]?(%d+)$'] = 'last$1', -- Italian/French, enumerated
['^nombre(%d+)$'] = 'first$1', -- Spanish, enumerated
['^primero(%d+)$'] = 'first$1', -- Spanish, enumerated
['^pu[blish]+ers?$'] = 'publisher', -- misspelling
['^subjectlink(%d+)$'] = 'subject-link$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^subject(%d+)link$'] = 'subject-link$1', -- old parameter name, enumerated
['^wkautore(%d+)$'] = 'author-link$1', -- Italian, enumerated
}

return {suggestions = suggestions, patterns=patterns};

Module:Citation/CS1/COinS

2022-04-04T14:06:06Z

Zoran: Created page with "----------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >-------------------------------------- local has_accept_as_written, is_set, in_array, remove_wiki_..."

--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------
]]

local has_accept_as_written, is_set, in_array, remove_wiki_link, strip_apostrophe_markup; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

local cfg; -- table of configuration tables that are defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration

--[[--------------------------< M A K E _ C O I N S _ T I T L E >----------------------------------------------

Makes a title for COinS from Title and / or ScriptTitle (or any other name-script pairs)

Apostrophe markup (bold, italics) is stripped from each value so that the COinS metadata isn't corrupted with strings
of %27%27...

]]

local function make_coins_title (title, script)
title = has_accept_as_written (title);
if is_set (title) then
title = strip_apostrophe_markup (title); -- strip any apostrophe markup
else
title = ''; -- if not set, make sure title is an empty string
end
if is_set (script) then
script = script:gsub ('^%l%l%s*:%s*', ''); -- remove language prefix if present (script value may now be empty string)
script = strip_apostrophe_markup (script); -- strip any apostrophe markup
else
script = ''; -- if not set, make sure script is an empty string
end
if is_set (title) and is_set (script) then
script = ' ' .. script; -- add a space before we concatenate
end
return title .. script; -- return the concatenation
end

--[[--------------------------< E S C A P E _ L U A _ M A G I C _ C H A R S >----------------------------------

Returns a string where all of Lua's magic characters have been escaped. This is important because functions like
string.gsub() treat their pattern and replace strings as patterns, not literal strings.
]]

local function escape_lua_magic_chars (argument)
argument = argument:gsub("%%", "%%%%"); -- replace % with %%
argument = argument:gsub("([%^%$%(%)%.%[%]%*%+%-%?])", "%%%1"); -- replace all other Lua magic pattern characters
return argument;
end

--[[--------------------------< G E T _ C O I N S _ P A G E S >------------------------------------------------

Extract page numbers from external wikilinks in any of the |page=, |pages=, or |at= parameters for use in COinS.

]]

local function get_coins_pages (pages)
local pattern;
if not is_set (pages) then return pages; end -- if no page numbers then we're done

while true do
pattern = pages:match("%[(%w*:?//[^ ]+%s+)[%w%d].*%]"); -- pattern is the opening bracket, the URL and following space(s): "[url "
if nil == pattern then break; end -- no more URLs
pattern = escape_lua_magic_chars (pattern); -- pattern is not a literal string; escape Lua's magic pattern characters
pages = pages:gsub(pattern, ""); -- remove as many instances of pattern as possible
end
pages = pages:gsub("[%[%]]", ""); -- remove the brackets
pages = pages:gsub("–", "-" ); -- replace endashes with hyphens
pages = pages:gsub("&%w+;", "-" ); -- and replace HTML entities (– etc.) with hyphens; do we need to replace numerical entities like and the like?
return pages;
end

--[=[-------------------------< C O I N S _ R E P L A C E _ M A T H _ S T R I P M A R K E R >------------------

There are three options for math markup rendering that depend on the editor's math preference settings. These
settings are at [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering]] and are
PNG images
TeX source
MathML with SVG or PNG fallback

All three are heavy with HTML and CSS which doesn't belong in the metadata.

Without this function, the metadata saved in the raw wikitext contained the rendering determined by the settings
of the last editor to save the page.

This function gets the rendered form of an equation according to the editor's preference before the page is saved. It
then searches the rendering for the text equivalent of the rendered equation and replaces the rendering with that so
that the page is saved without extraneous HTML/CSS markup and with a reasonably readable text form of the equation.

When a replacement is made, this function returns true and the value with replacement; otherwise false and the initial
value. To replace multipe equations it is necessary to call this function from within a loop.

]=]

local function coins_replace_math_stripmarker (value)
local stripmarker = cfg.stripmarkers['math'];
local rendering = value:match (stripmarker); -- is there a math stripmarker

if not rendering then -- when value doesn't have a math stripmarker, abandon this test
return false, value;
end

rendering = mw.text.unstripNoWiki (rendering); -- convert stripmarker into rendered value (or nil? ''? when math render error)

if rendering:match ('alt="[^"]+"') then -- if PNG math option
rendering = rendering:match ('alt="([^"]+)"'); -- extract just the math text
elseif rendering:match ('$%s+.+%s+%$') then -- if TeX math option; $ is legit character that is escapes as \$
rendering = rendering:match ('$%s+(.+)%s+%$') -- extract just the math text
elseif rendering:match ('<annotation[^>]+>.+</annotation>') then -- if MathML math option
rendering = rendering:match ('<annotation[^>]+>(.+)</annotation>') -- extract just the math text
else
return false, value; -- had math stripmarker but not one of the three defined forms
end

return true, value:gsub (stripmarker, rendering, 1);
end

--[[--------------------------< C O I N S _ C L E A N U P >----------------------------------------------------

Cleanup parameter values for the metadata by removing or replacing invisible characters and certain HTML entities.

2015-12-10: there is a bug in mw.text.unstripNoWiki (). It replaces math stripmarkers with the appropriate content
when it shouldn't. See https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T121085 and Wikipedia_talk:Lua#stripmarkers_and_mw.text.unstripNoWiki.28.29

TODO: move the replacement patterns and replacement values into a table in /Configuration similar to the invisible
characters table?

]]

local function coins_cleanup (value)
local replaced = true; -- default state to get the do loop running

while replaced do -- loop until all math stripmarkers replaced
replaced, value = coins_replace_math_stripmarker (value); -- replace math stripmarker with text representation of the equation
end

value = value:gsub (cfg.stripmarkers['math'], "MATH RENDER ERROR"); -- one or more couldn't be replaced; insert vague error message

value = mw.text.unstripNoWiki (value); -- replace nowiki stripmarkers with their content
value = value:gsub (''(s?)', "'%1"); -- replace {{'}} or {{'s}} with simple apostrophe or apostrophe-s
value = value:gsub (' ', ' '); -- replace   entity with plain space
value = value:gsub ('\226\128\138', ' '); -- replace hair space with plain space
if not mw.ustring.find (value, cfg.indic_script) then -- don't remove zero-width joiner characters from indic script
value = value:gsub ('&zwj;', ''); -- remove &zwj; entities
value = mw.ustring.gsub (value, '[\226\128\141\226\128\139\194\173]', ''); -- remove zero-width joiner, zero-width space, soft hyphen
end
value = value:gsub ('[\009\010\013 ]+', ' '); -- replace horizontal tab, line feed, carriage return with plain space
return value;
end

--[[--------------------------< C O I N S >--------------------------------------------------------------------

COinS metadata (see <http://ocoins.info/>) allows automated tools to parse the citation information.

]]

local function COinS(data, class)
if 'table' ~= type(data) or nil == next(data) then
return '';
end

for k, v in pairs (data) do -- spin through all of the metadata parameter values
if 'ID_list' ~= k and 'Authors' ~= k then -- except the ID_list and Author tables (author nowiki stripmarker done when Author table processed)
data[k] = coins_cleanup (v);
end
end

local ctx_ver = "Z39.88-2004";

-- treat table strictly as an array with only set values.
local OCinSoutput = setmetatable( {}, {
__newindex = function(self, key, value)
if is_set(value) then
rawset( self, #self+1, table.concat{ key, '=', mw.uri.encode( remove_wiki_link( value ) ) } );
end
end
});

if in_array (class, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx', 'ssrn', 'journal', 'news', 'magazine'}) or (in_array (class, {'conference', 'interview', 'map', 'press release', 'web'}) and is_set(data.Periodical)) or
('citation' == class and is_set(data.Periodical) and not is_set (data.Encyclopedia)) then
OCinSoutput.rft_val_fmt = "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:journal"; -- journal metadata identifier
if in_array (class, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx', 'ssrn'}) then -- set genre according to the type of citation template we are rendering
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "preprint"; -- cite arxiv, cite biorxiv, cite citeseerx, cite ssrn
elseif 'conference' == class then
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "conference"; -- cite conference (when Periodical set)
elseif 'web' == class then
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "unknown"; -- cite web (when Periodical set)
else
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "article"; -- journal and other 'periodical' articles
end
OCinSoutput["rft.jtitle"] = data.Periodical; -- journal only
OCinSoutput["rft.atitle"] = data.Title; -- 'periodical' article titles

-- these used only for periodicals
OCinSoutput["rft.ssn"] = data.Season; -- keywords: winter, spring, summer, fall
OCinSoutput["rft.quarter"] = data.Quarter; -- single digits 1->first quarter, etc.
OCinSoutput["rft.chron"] = data.Chron; -- free-form date components
OCinSoutput["rft.volume"] = data.Volume; -- does not apply to books
OCinSoutput["rft.issue"] = data.Issue;
OCinSoutput["rft.pages"] = data.Pages; -- also used in book metadata

elseif 'thesis' ~= class then -- all others except cite thesis are treated as 'book' metadata; genre distinguishes
OCinSoutput.rft_val_fmt = "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:book"; -- book metadata identifier
if 'report' == class or 'techreport' == class then -- cite report and cite techreport
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "report";
elseif 'conference' == class then -- cite conference when Periodical not set
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "conference";
OCinSoutput["rft.atitle"] = data.Chapter; -- conference paper as chapter in proceedings (book)
elseif in_array (class, {'book', 'citation', 'encyclopaedia', 'interview', 'map'}) then
if is_set (data.Chapter) then
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "bookitem";
OCinSoutput["rft.atitle"] = data.Chapter; -- book chapter, encyclopedia article, interview in a book, or map title
else
if 'map' == class or 'interview' == class then
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = 'unknown'; -- standalone map or interview
else
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = 'book'; -- book and encyclopedia
end
end
else -- {'audio-visual', 'AV-media-notes', 'DVD-notes', 'episode', 'interview', 'mailinglist', 'map', 'newsgroup', 'podcast', 'press release', 'serial', 'sign', 'speech', 'web'}
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "unknown";
end
OCinSoutput["rft.btitle"] = data.Title; -- book only
OCinSoutput["rft.place"] = data.PublicationPlace; -- book only
OCinSoutput["rft.series"] = data.Series; -- book only
OCinSoutput["rft.pages"] = data.Pages; -- book, journal
OCinSoutput["rft.edition"] = data.Edition; -- book only
OCinSoutput["rft.pub"] = data.PublisherName; -- book and dissertation

else -- cite thesis
OCinSoutput.rft_val_fmt = "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:dissertation"; -- dissertation metadata identifier
OCinSoutput["rft.title"] = data.Title; -- dissertation (also patent but that is not yet supported)
OCinSoutput["rft.degree"] = data.Degree; -- dissertation only
OCinSoutput['rft.inst'] = data.PublisherName; -- book and dissertation
end
-- NB. Not currently supported are "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:patent", "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:dc", "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:sch_svc", "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:ctx"
-- and now common parameters (as much as possible)
OCinSoutput["rft.date"] = data.Date; -- book, journal, dissertation

for k, v in pairs( data.ID_list ) do -- what to do about these? For now assume that they are common to all?
if k == 'ISBN' then v = v:gsub( "[^-0-9X]", "" ); end
local id = cfg.id_handlers[k].COinS;
if string.sub( id or "", 1, 4 ) == 'info' then -- for ids that are in the info:registry
OCinSoutput["rft_id"] = table.concat{ id, "/", v };
elseif string.sub (id or "", 1, 3 ) == 'rft' then -- for isbn, issn, eissn, etc. that have defined COinS keywords
OCinSoutput[ id ] = v;
elseif 'url' == id then -- for urls that are assembled in ~/Identifiers; |asin= and |ol=
OCinSoutput["rft_id"] = table.concat ({data.ID_list[k], "#id-name=", cfg.id_handlers[k].label});
elseif id then -- when cfg.id_handlers[k].COinS is not nil so urls created here
OCinSoutput["rft_id"] = table.concat{ cfg.id_handlers[k].prefix, v, cfg.id_handlers[k].suffix or '', "#id-name=", cfg.id_handlers[k].label }; -- others; provide a URL and indicate identifier name as #fragment (human-readable, but transparent to browsers)
end
end

local last, first;
for k, v in ipairs( data.Authors ) do
last, first = coins_cleanup (v.last), coins_cleanup (v.first or ''); -- replace any nowiki stripmarkers, non-printing or invisible characters
if k == 1 then -- for the first author name only
if is_set(last) and is_set(first) then -- set these COinS values if |first= and |last= specify the first author name
OCinSoutput["rft.aulast"] = last; -- book, journal, dissertation
OCinSoutput["rft.aufirst"] = first; -- book, journal, dissertation
elseif is_set(last) then
OCinSoutput["rft.au"] = last; -- book, journal, dissertation -- otherwise use this form for the first name
end
else -- for all other authors
if is_set(last) and is_set(first) then
OCinSoutput["rft.au"] = table.concat{ last, ", ", first }; -- book, journal, dissertation
elseif is_set(last) then
OCinSoutput["rft.au"] = last; -- book, journal, dissertation
end
-- TODO: At present we do not report "et al.". Add anything special if this condition applies?
end
end

OCinSoutput.rft_id = data.URL;
OCinSoutput.rfr_id = table.concat{ "info:sid/", mw.site.server:match( "[^/]*$" ), ":", data.RawPage };

-- TODO: Add optional extra info:
-- rfr_dat=#REVISION<version> (referrer private data)
-- ctx_id=<data.RawPage>#<ref> (identifier for the context object)
-- ctx_tim=<ts> (timestamp in format yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ssTZD or yyyy-mm-dd)
-- ctx_enc=info:ofi/enc:UTF-8 (character encoding)

OCinSoutput = setmetatable( OCinSoutput, nil );

-- sort with version string always first, and combine.
-- table.sort( OCinSoutput );
table.insert( OCinSoutput, 1, "ctx_ver=" .. ctx_ver ); -- such as "Z39.88-2004"
return table.concat(OCinSoutput, "&");
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S E L E C T E D _ M O D U L E S >--------------------------------------

Sets local cfg table and imported functions table to same (live or sandbox) as that used by the other modules.

]]

local function set_selected_modules (cfg_table_ptr, utilities_page_ptr)
cfg = cfg_table_ptr;

has_accept_as_written = utilities_page_ptr.has_accept_as_written; -- import functions from selected Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities module
is_set = utilities_page_ptr.is_set;
in_array = utilities_page_ptr.in_array;
remove_wiki_link = utilities_page_ptr.remove_wiki_link;
strip_apostrophe_markup = utilities_page_ptr.strip_apostrophe_markup;
end

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T E D F U N C T I O N S >------------------------------------------
]]

return {
make_coins_title = make_coins_title,
get_coins_pages = get_coins_pages,
COinS = COinS,
set_selected_modules = set_selected_modules,
}

Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

2022-04-04T14:05:39Z

Zoran: Created page with "local z = { error_cats_t = {}; -- for categorizing citations that contain errors error_ids_t = {}; -- list of error identifiers; used to prevent..."

local z = {
error_cats_t = {}; -- for categorizing citations that contain errors
error_ids_t = {}; -- list of error identifiers; used to prevent duplication of certain errors; local to this module
error_msgs_t = {}; -- sequence table of error messages
maint_cats_t = {}; -- for categorizing citations that aren't erroneous per se, but could use a little work
prop_cats_t = {}; -- for categorizing citations based on certain properties, language of source for instance
prop_keys_t = {}; -- for adding classes to the citation's <cite> tag
};

--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------
]]

local cfg; -- table of tables imported from selected Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Returns true if argument is set; false otherwise. Argument is 'set' when it exists (not nil) or when it is not an empty string.

]]

local function is_set (var)
return not (var == nil or var == '');
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Whether needle is in haystack

]]

local function in_array (needle, haystack)
if needle == nil then
return false;
end
for n, v in ipairs (haystack) do
if v == needle then
return n;
end
end
return false;
end

--[[--------------------------< H A S _ A C C E P T _ A S _ W R I T T E N >------------------------------------

When <str> is wholly wrapped in accept-as-written markup, return <str> without markup and true; return <str> and false else

with allow_empty = false, <str> must have at least one character inside the markup
with allow_empty = true, <str> the markup frame can be empty like (()) to distinguish an empty template parameter from the specific condition "has no applicable value" in citation-context.

After further evaluation the two cases might be merged at a later stage, but should be kept separated for now.

]]

local function has_accept_as_written (str, allow_empty)
if not is_set (str) then
return str, false;
end

local count;

if true == allow_empty then
str, count = str:gsub ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$', '%1'); -- allows (()) to be an empty set
else
str, count = str:gsub ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$', '%1');
end
return str, 0 ~= count;
end

--[[--------------------------< S U B S T I T U T E >----------------------------------------------------------

Populates numbered arguments in a message string using an argument table. <args> may be a single string or a
sequence table of multiple strings.

]]

local function substitute (msg, args)
return args and mw.message.newRawMessage (msg, args):plain() or msg;
end

--[[--------------------------< E R R O R _ C O M M E N T >----------------------------------------------------

Wraps error messages with CSS markup according to the state of hidden. <content> may be a single string or a
sequence table of multiple strings.

]]

local function error_comment (content, hidden)
return substitute (hidden and cfg.presentation['hidden-error'] or cfg.presentation['visible-error'], content);
end

--[[--------------------------< H Y P H E N _ T O _ D A S H >--------------------------------------------------

Converts a hyphen to a dash under certain conditions. The hyphen must separate
like items; unlike items are returned unmodified. These forms are modified:
letter - letter (A - B)
digit - digit (4-5)
digit separator digit - digit separator digit (4.1-4.5 or 4-1-4-5)
letterdigit - letterdigit (A1-A5) (an optional separator between letter and
digit is supported – a.1-a.5 or a-1-a-5)
digitletter - digitletter (5a - 5d) (an optional separator between letter and
digit is supported – 5.a-5.d or 5-a-5-d)

any other forms are returned unmodified.

str may be a comma- or semicolon-separated list

]]

local function hyphen_to_dash (str)
if not is_set (str) then
return str;
end

local accept; -- boolean

str = str:gsub ("(%(%(.-%)%))", function(m) return m:gsub(",", "，"):gsub(";", "；") end) -- replace commas and semicolons in accept-as-written markup with similar unicode characters so they'll be ignored during the split
str = str:gsub ('&[nm]dash;', {['–'] = '–', ['—'] = '—'}); -- replace — and – entities with their characters; semicolon mucks up the text.split
str = str:gsub ('-', '-'); -- replace HTML numeric entity with hyphen character
str = str:gsub (' ', ' '); -- replace   entity with generic keyboard space character

local out = {};
local list = mw.text.split (str, '%s*[,;]%s*'); -- split str at comma or semicolon separators if there are any

for _, item in ipairs (list) do -- for each item in the list
item, accept = has_accept_as_written (item); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of item
if not accept and mw.ustring.match (item, '^%w*[%.%-]?%w+%s*[%-–—]%s*%w*[%.%-]?%w+$') then -- if a hyphenated range or has endash or emdash separators
if item:match ('^%a+[%.%-]?%d+%s*%-%s*%a+[%.%-]?%d+$') or -- letterdigit hyphen letterdigit (optional separator between letter and digit)
item:match ('^%d+[%.%-]?%a+%s*%-%s*%d+[%.%-]?%a+$') or -- digitletter hyphen digitletter (optional separator between digit and letter)
item:match ('^%d+[%.%-]%d+%s*%-%s*%d+[%.%-]%d+$') or -- digit separator digit hyphen digit separator digit
item:match ('^%d+%s*%-%s*%d+$') or -- digit hyphen digit
item:match ('^%a+%s*%-%s*%a+$') then -- letter hyphen letter
item = item:gsub ('(%w*[%.%-]?%w+)%s*%-%s*(%w*[%.%-]?%w+)', '%1–%2'); -- replace hyphen, remove extraneous space characters
else
item = mw.ustring.gsub (item, '%s*[–—]%s*', '–'); -- for endash or emdash separated ranges, replace em with en, remove extraneous whitespace
end
end
table.insert (out, item); -- add the (possibly modified) item to the output table
end

local temp_str = ''; -- concatenate the output table into a comma separated string
temp_str, accept = has_accept_as_written (table.concat (out, ', ')); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of concatenated out
if accept then
temp_str = has_accept_as_written (str); -- when global markup removed, return original str; do it this way to suppress boolean second return value
return temp_str:gsub("，", ","):gsub("；", ";");
else
return temp_str:gsub("，", ","):gsub("；", ";"); -- else, return assembled temp_str
end
end

--[=[-------------------------< M A K E _ W I K I L I N K >----------------------------------------------------

Makes a wikilink; when both link and display text is provided, returns a wikilink in the form [[L|D]]; if only
link is provided (or link and display are the same), returns a wikilink in the form [[L]]; if neither are
provided or link is omitted, returns an empty string.

]=]

local function make_wikilink (link, display)
if not is_set (link) then return '' end

if is_set (display) and link ~= display then
return table.concat ({'[[', link, '|', display, ']]'});
else
return table.concat ({'[[', link, ']]'});
end
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ M E S S A G E >----------------------------------------------------------

Sets an error message using the ~/Configuration error_conditions{} table along with arguments supplied in the function
call, inserts the resulting message in z.error_msgs_t{} sequence table, and returns the error message.

<error_id> – key value for appropriate error handler in ~/Configuration error_conditions{} table
<arguments> – may be a single string or a sequence table of multiple strings to be subsititued into error_conditions[error_id].message
<raw> – boolean
true – causes this function to return the error message not wrapped in visible-error, hidden-error span tag;
returns error_conditions[error_id].hidden as a second return value
does not add message to z.error_msgs_t sequence table
false, nil – adds message wrapped in visible-error, hidden-error span tag to z.error_msgs_t
returns the error message wrapped in visible-error, hidden-error span tag; there is no second return value
<prefix> – string to be prepended to <message> -- TODO: remove support for these unused(?) arguments?
<suffix> – string to be appended to <message>

TODO: change z.error_cats_t and z.maint_cats_t to have the form cat_name = true? this to avoid dups without having to have an extra table

]]

local added_maint_cats = {} -- list of maintenance categories that have been added to z.maint_cats_t; TODO: figure out how to delete this table

local function set_message (error_id, arguments, raw, prefix, suffix)
local error_state = cfg.error_conditions[error_id];

prefix = prefix or '';
suffix = suffix or '';

if error_state == nil then
error (cfg.messages['undefined_error'] .. ': ' .. error_id); -- because missing error handler in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration

elseif is_set (error_state.category) then
if error_state.message then -- when error_state.message defined, this is an error message
table.insert (z.error_cats_t, error_state.category);
else
if not added_maint_cats[error_id] then
added_maint_cats[error_id] = true; -- note that we've added this category
table.insert (z.maint_cats_t, substitute (error_state.category, arguments)); -- make cat name then add to table
end
return; -- because no message, nothing more to do
end
end

local message = substitute (error_state.message, arguments);

message = table.concat (
{
message,
' (',
make_wikilink (
table.concat (
{
cfg.messages['help page link'],
'#',
error_state.anchor
}),
cfg.messages['help page label']),
')'
});

z.error_ids_t[error_id] = true;
if z.error_ids_t['err_citation_missing_title'] and -- if missing-title error already noted
in_array (error_id, {'err_bare_url_missing_title', 'err_trans_missing_title'}) then -- and this error is one of these
return '', false; -- don't bother because one flavor of missing title is sufficient
end

message = table.concat ({prefix, message, suffix});

if true == raw then
return message, error_state.hidden; -- return message not wrapped in visible-error, hidden-error span tag
end

message = error_comment (message, error_state.hidden); -- wrap message in visible-error, hidden-error span tag
table.insert (z.error_msgs_t, message); -- add it to the messages sequence table
return message; -- and done; return value generally not used but is used as a flag in various functions of ~/Identifiers
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------

This function is used by select_one() to determine if one of a list of alias parameters is in the argument list
provided by the template.

Input:
args – pointer to the arguments table from calling template
alias – one of the list of possible aliases in the aliases lists from Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration
index – for enumerated parameters, identifies which one
enumerated – true/false flag used to choose how enumerated aliases are examined
value – value associated with an alias that has previously been selected; nil if not yet selected
selected – the alias that has previously been selected; nil if not yet selected
error_list – list of aliases that are duplicates of the alias already selected

Returns:
value – value associated with alias we selected or that was previously selected or nil if an alias not yet selected
selected – the alias we selected or the alias that was previously selected or nil if an alias not yet selected

]]

local function is_alias_used (args, alias, index, enumerated, value, selected, error_list)
if enumerated then -- is this a test for an enumerated parameters?
alias = alias:gsub ('#', index); -- replace '#' with the value in index
else
alias = alias:gsub ('#', ''); -- remove '#' if it exists
end

if is_set (args[alias]) then -- alias is in the template's argument list
if value ~= nil and selected ~= alias then -- if we have already selected one of the aliases
local skip;
for _, v in ipairs (error_list) do -- spin through the error list to see if we've added this alias
if v == alias then
skip = true;
break; -- has been added so stop looking
end
end
if not skip then -- has not been added so
table.insert (error_list, alias); -- add error alias to the error list
end
else
value = args[alias]; -- not yet selected an alias, so select this one
selected = alias;
end
end
return value, selected; -- return newly selected alias, or previously selected alias
end

--[[--------------------------< A D D _ M A I N T _ C A T >------------------------------------------------------

Adds a category to z.maint_cats_t using names from the configuration file with additional text if any.
To prevent duplication, the added_maint_cats table lists the categories by key that have been added to z.maint_cats_t.

]]

local function add_maint_cat (key, arguments)
if not added_maint_cats [key] then
added_maint_cats [key] = true; -- note that we've added this category
table.insert (z.maint_cats_t, substitute (cfg.maint_cats [key], arguments)); -- make name then add to table
end
end

--[[--------------------------< A D D _ P R O P _ C A T >--------------------------------------------------------

Adds a category to z.prop_cats_t using names from the configuration file with additional text if any.

foreign_lang_source and foreign_lang_source_2 keys have a language code appended to them so that multiple languages
may be categorized but multiples of the same language are not categorized.

added_prop_cats is a table declared in page scope variables above

]]

local added_prop_cats = {}; -- list of property categories that have been added to z.prop_cats_t

local function add_prop_cat (key, arguments, key_modifier)
local key_modified = key .. ((key_modifier and key_modifier) or ''); -- modify <key> with <key_modifier> if present and not nil

if not added_prop_cats [key_modified] then
added_prop_cats [key_modified] = true; -- note that we've added this category
table.insert (z.prop_cats_t, substitute (cfg.prop_cats [key], arguments)); -- make name then add to table
table.insert (z.prop_keys_t, 'cs1-prop-' .. key); -- convert key to class for use in the citation's <cite> tag
end
end

--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ F O R _ I T A L I C S >----------------------------------------------

Protects a string that will be wrapped in wiki italic markup '' ... ''

Note: We cannot use for italics, as the expected behavior for italics specified by ''...'' in the title is that
they will be inverted (i.e. unitalicized) in the resulting references. In addition, and '' tend to interact
poorly under Mediawiki's HTML tidy.

]]

local function safe_for_italics (str)
if not is_set (str) then return str end

if str:sub (1, 1) == "'" then str = "" .. str; end
if str:sub (-1, -1) == "'" then str = str .. ""; end

return str:gsub ('\n', ' '); -- Remove newlines as they break italics.
end

--[[--------------------------< W R A P _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------------

Applies styling to various parameters. Supplied string is wrapped using a message_list configuration taking one
argument; protects italic styled parameters. Additional text taken from citation_config.presentation - the reason
this function is similar to but separate from wrap_msg().

]]

local function wrap_style (key, str)
if not is_set (str) then
return "";
elseif in_array (key, {'italic-title', 'trans-italic-title'}) then
str = safe_for_italics (str);
end

return substitute (cfg.presentation[key], {str});
end

--[[--------------------------< M A K E _ S E P _ L I S T >------------------------------------------------------------

make a separated list of items using provided separators.
<sep_list> - typically '<comma><space>'
<sep_list_pair> - typically '<space>and<space>'
<sep_list_end> - typically '<comma><space>and<space>' or '<comma><space>&<space>'

defaults to cfg.presentation['sep_list'], cfg.presentation['sep_list_pair'], and cfg.presentation['sep_list_end']
if <sep_list_end> is specified, <sep_list> and <sep_list_pair> must also be supplied

]]

local function make_sep_list (count, list_seq, sep_list, sep_list_pair, sep_list_end)
local list = '';

if not sep_list then -- set the defaults
sep_list = cfg.presentation['sep_list'];
sep_list_pair = cfg.presentation['sep_list_pair'];
sep_list_end = cfg.presentation['sep_list_end'];
end

if 2 >= count then
list = table.concat (list_seq, sep_list_pair); -- insert separator between two items; returns list_seq[1] then only one item
elseif 2 < count then
list = table.concat (list_seq, sep_list, 1, count - 1); -- concatenate all but last item with plain list separator
list = table.concat ({list, list_seq[count]}, sep_list_end); -- concatenate last item onto end of <list> with final separator
end

return list;
end

--[[--------------------------< S E L E C T _ O N E >----------------------------------------------------------

Chooses one matching parameter from a list of parameters to consider. The list of parameters to consider is just
names. For parameters that may be enumerated, the position of the numerator in the parameter name is identified
by the '#' so |author-last1= and |author1-last= are represented as 'author-last#' and 'author#-last'.

Because enumerated parameter |<param>1= is an alias of |<param>= we must test for both possibilities.

Generates an error if more than one match is present.

]]

local function select_one (args, aliases_list, error_condition, index)
local value = nil; -- the value assigned to the selected parameter
local selected = ''; -- the name of the parameter we have chosen
local error_list = {};

if index ~= nil then index = tostring(index); end

for _, alias in ipairs (aliases_list) do -- for each alias in the aliases list
if alias:match ('#') then -- if this alias can be enumerated
if '1' == index then -- when index is 1 test for enumerated and non-enumerated aliases
value, selected = is_alias_used (args, alias, index, false, value, selected, error_list); -- first test for non-enumerated alias
end
value, selected = is_alias_used (args, alias, index, true, value, selected, error_list); -- test for enumerated alias
else
value, selected = is_alias_used (args, alias, index, false, value, selected, error_list); -- test for non-enumerated alias
end
end

if #error_list > 0 and 'none' ~= error_condition then -- for cases where this code is used outside of extract_names()
for i, v in ipairs (error_list) do
error_list[i] = wrap_style ('parameter', v);
end
table.insert (error_list, wrap_style ('parameter', selected));
set_message (error_condition, {make_sep_list (#error_list, error_list)});
end

return value, selected;
end

--[=[-------------------------< R E M O V E _ W I K I _ L I N K >----------------------------------------------

Gets the display text from a wikilink like [[A|B]] or [[B]] gives B

The str:gsub() returns either A|B froma [[A|B]] or B from [[B]] or B from B (no wikilink markup).

In l(), l:gsub() removes the link and pipe (if they exist); the second :gsub() trims whitespace from the label
if str was wrapped in wikilink markup. Presumably, this is because without wikimarkup in str, there is no match
in the initial gsub, the replacement function l() doesn't get called.

]=]

local function remove_wiki_link (str)
return (str:gsub ("%[%[([^%[%]]*)%]%]", function(l)
return l:gsub ("^[^|]*|(.*)$", "%1" ):gsub ("^%s*(.-)%s*$", "%1");
end));
end

--[=[---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Determines if str is a wikilink, extracts, and returns the wikilink type, link text, and display text parts.
If str is a complex wikilink ([[L|D]]):
returns wl_type 2 and D and L from [[L|D]];
if str is a simple wikilink ([[D]])
returns wl_type 1 and D from [[D]] and L as empty string;
if not a wikilink:
returns wl_type 0, str as D, and L as empty string.

trims leading and trailing whitespace and pipes from L and D ([[L|]] and [[|D]] are accepted by MediaWiki and
treated like [[D]]; while [[|D|]] is not accepted by MediaWiki, here, we accept it and return D without the pipes).

]=]

local function is_wikilink (str)
local D, L
local wl_type = 2; -- assume that str is a complex wikilink [[L|D]]

if not str:match ('^%[%[[^%]]+%]%]$') then -- is str some sort of a wikilink (must have some sort of content)
return 0, str, ''; -- not a wikilink; return wl_type as 0, str as D, and empty string as L
end

L, D = str:match ('^%[%[([^|]+)|([^%]]+)%]%]$'); -- get L and D from [[L|D]]

if not is_set (D) then -- if no separate display
D = str:match ('^%[%[([^%]]*)|*%]%]$'); -- get D from [[D]] or [[D|]]
wl_type = 1;
end

D = mw.text.trim (D, '%s|'); -- trim white space and pipe characters
return wl_type, D, L or '';
end

--[[--------------------------< S T R I P _ A P O S T R O P H E _ M A R K U P >--------------------------------

Strip wiki italic and bold markup from argument so that it doesn't contaminate COinS metadata.
This function strips common patterns of apostrophe markup. We presume that editors who have taken the time to
markup a title have, as a result, provided valid markup. When they don't, some single apostrophes are left behind.

Returns the argument without wiki markup and a number; the number is more-or-less meaningless except as a flag
to indicate that markup was replaced; do not rely on it as an indicator of how many of any kind of markup was
removed; returns the argument and nil when no markup removed

]]

local function strip_apostrophe_markup (argument)
if not is_set (argument) then
return argument, nil; -- no argument, nothing to do
end

if nil == argument:find ( "''", 1, true ) then -- Is there at least one double apostrophe? If not, exit.
return argument, nil;
end

local flag;
while true do
if argument:find ("'''''", 1, true) then -- bold italic (5)
argument, flag = argument:gsub ("%'%'%'%'%'", ""); -- remove all instances of it
elseif argument:find ("''''", 1, true) then -- italic start and end without content (4)
argument, flag=argument:gsub ("%'%'%'%'", "");
elseif argument:find ("'''", 1, true) then -- bold (3)
argument, flag=argument:gsub ("%'%'%'", "");
elseif argument:find ("''", 1, true) then -- italic (2)
argument, flag = argument:gsub ("%'%'", "");
else
break;
end
end

return argument, flag; -- done
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S E L E C T E D _ M O D U L E S >--------------------------------------

Sets local cfg table to same (live or sandbox) as that used by the other modules.

]]

local function set_selected_modules (cfg_table_ptr)
cfg = cfg_table_ptr;

end

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T S >----------------------------------------------------------------
]]

return {
add_maint_cat = add_maint_cat, -- exported functions
add_prop_cat = add_prop_cat,
error_comment = error_comment,
has_accept_as_written = has_accept_as_written,
hyphen_to_dash = hyphen_to_dash,
in_array = in_array,
is_set = is_set,
is_wikilink = is_wikilink,
make_sep_list = make_sep_list,
make_wikilink = make_wikilink,
remove_wiki_link = remove_wiki_link,
safe_for_italics = safe_for_italics,
select_one = select_one,
set_message = set_message,
set_selected_modules = set_selected_modules,
strip_apostrophe_markup = strip_apostrophe_markup,
substitute = substitute,
wrap_style = wrap_style,

z = z, -- exported table
}

Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers

2022-04-04T14:05:13Z

Zoran: Created page with "----------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >-------------------------------------- local has_accept_as_written, is_set, in_array, set_message,..."

--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------
]]

local has_accept_as_written, is_set, in_array, set_message, select_one, -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
substitute, make_wikilink;

local z; -- table of tables defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

local cfg; -- table of configuration tables that are defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------

declare variables here that have page-wide scope that are not brought in from other modules; that are created here and used here

]]

local auto_link_urls = {}; -- holds identifier URLs for those identifiers that can auto-link |title=

--============================<< H E L P E R F U N C T I O N S >>============================================

--[[--------------------------< W I K I D A T A _ A R T I C L E _ N A M E _ G E T >----------------------------

as an aid to internationalizing identifier-label wikilinks, gets identifier article names from Wikidata.

returns :<lang code>:<article title> when <q> has an <article title> for <lang code>; nil else

for identifiers that do not have q, returns nil

for wikis that do not have mw.wikibase installed, returns nil

]]

local function wikidata_article_name_get (q)
if not is_set (q) or (q and not mw.wikibase) then -- when no q number or when a q number but mw.wikibase not installed on this wiki
return nil; -- abandon
end

local wd_article;
local this_wiki_code = cfg.this_wiki_code; -- Wikipedia subdomain; 'en' for en.wikipedia.org

wd_article = mw.wikibase.getSitelink (q, this_wiki_code .. 'wiki'); -- fetch article title from WD; nil when no title available at this wiki

if wd_article then
wd_article = table.concat ({':', this_wiki_code, ':', wd_article}); -- interwiki-style link without brackets if taken from WD; leading colon required
end

return wd_article; -- article title from WD; nil else
end

--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ L A B E L _ M A K E >------------------------------------------------

common function to create identifier link label from handler table or from Wikidata

returns the first available of
1. redirect from local wiki's handler table (if enabled)
2. Wikidata (if there is a Wikidata entry for this identifier in the local wiki's language)
3. label specified in the local wiki's handler table

]]

local function link_label_make (handler)
local wd_article;

if not (cfg.use_identifier_redirects and is_set (handler.redirect)) then -- redirect has priority so if enabled and available don't fetch from Wikidata because expensive
wd_article = wikidata_article_name_get (handler.q); -- if Wikidata has an article title for this wiki, get it;
end

return (cfg.use_identifier_redirects and is_set (handler.redirect) and handler.redirect) or wd_article or handler.link;
end

--[[--------------------------< E X T E R N A L _ L I N K _ I D >----------------------------------------------

Formats a wiki-style external link

]]

local function external_link_id (options)
local url_string = options.id;
local ext_link;
local this_wiki_code = cfg.this_wiki_code; -- Wikipedia subdomain; 'en' for en.wikipedia.org
local wd_article; -- article title from Wikidata

if options.encode == true or options.encode == nil then
url_string = mw.uri.encode (url_string, 'PATH');
end

if options.auto_link and is_set (options.access) then
auto_link_urls[options.auto_link] = table.concat ({options.prefix, url_string, options.suffix});
end

ext_link = mw.ustring.format ('[%s%s%s %s]', options.prefix, url_string, options.suffix or "", mw.text.nowiki (options.id));
if is_set (options.access) then
ext_link = substitute (cfg.presentation['ext-link-access-signal'], {cfg.presentation[options.access].class, cfg.presentation[options.access].title, ext_link}); -- add the free-to-read / paywall lock
end

return table.concat ({
make_wikilink (link_label_make (options), options.label), -- redirect, Wikidata link, or locally specified link (in that order)
options.separator or ' ',
ext_link
});
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------

Formats a wiki-style internal link

TODO: Does not currently need to support options.access, options.encode, auto-linking and COinS (as in external_link_id),
but may be needed in the future for :m:Interwiki_map custom-prefixes like :arxiv:, :bibcode:, :DOI:, :hdl:, :ISSN:,
:JSTOR:, :Openlibrary:, :PMID:, :RFC:.

]]

local function internal_link_id (options)
local id = mw.ustring.gsub (options.id, '%d', cfg.date_names.local_digits); -- translate 'local' digits to Western 0-9

return table.concat (
{
make_wikilink (link_label_make (options), options.label), -- wiki-link the identifier label
options.separator or ' ', -- add the separator
make_wikilink (
table.concat (
{
options.prefix,
id, -- translated to Western digits
options.suffix or ''
}),
substitute (cfg.presentation['bdi'], {'', mw.text.nowiki (options.id)}) -- bdi tags to prevent Latin script identifiers from being reversed at RTL language wikis
); -- nowiki because MediaWiki still has magic links for ISBN and the like; TODO: is it really required?
});
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Determines if a PMC identifier's online version is embargoed. Compares the date in |pmc-embargo-date= against
today's date. If embargo date is in the future, returns the content of |pmc-embargo-date=; otherwise, returns
an empty string because the embargo has expired or because |pmc-embargo-date= was not set in this cite.

]]

local function is_embargoed (embargo)
if is_set (embargo) then
local lang = mw.getContentLanguage();
local good1, embargo_date, todays_date;
good1, embargo_date = pcall (lang.formatDate, lang, 'U', embargo);
todays_date = lang:formatDate ('U');

if good1 then -- if embargo date is a good date
if tonumber (embargo_date) >= tonumber (todays_date) then -- is embargo date is in the future?
return embargo; -- still embargoed
else
set_message ('maint_pmc_embargo'); -- embargo has expired; add main cat
return ''; -- unset because embargo has expired
end
end
end
return ''; -- |pmc-embargo-date= not set return empty string
end

--[=[-------------------------------------------------------------

returns true if:
2019-12-11T00:00Z <= biorxiv_date < today + 2 days

The dated form of biorxiv identifier has a start date of 2019-12-11. The Unix timestamp for that date is {{#time:U|2019-12-11}} = 1576022400

biorxiv_date is the date provided in those |biorxiv= parameter values that are dated at time 00:00:00 UTC
today is the current date at time 00:00:00 UTC plus 48 hours
if today is 2015-01-01T00:00:00 then
adding 24 hours gives 2015-01-02T00:00:00 – one second more than today
adding 24 hours gives 2015-01-03T00:00:00 – one second more than tomorrow

This function does not work if it is fed month names for languages other than English. Wikimedia #time: parser
apparently doesn't understand non-English date month names. This function will always return false when the date
contains a non-English month name because good1 is false after the call to lang_object.formatDate(). To get
around that call this function with date parts and create a YYYY-MM-DD format date.

]=]

local function is_valid_biorxiv_date (y, m, d)
local biorxiv_date = table.concat ({y, m, d}, '-'); -- make ymd date
local good1, good2;
local biorxiv_ts, tomorrow_ts; -- to hold Unix timestamps representing the dates
local lang_object = mw.getContentLanguage();

good1, biorxiv_ts = pcall (lang_object.formatDate, lang_object, 'U', biorxiv_date); -- convert biorxiv_date value to Unix timestamp
good2, tomorrow_ts = pcall (lang_object.formatDate, lang_object, 'U', 'today + 2 days' ); -- today midnight + 2 days is one second more than all day tomorrow

if good1 and good2 then -- lang.formatDate() returns a timestamp in the local script which tonumber() may not understand
biorxiv_ts = tonumber (biorxiv_ts) or lang_object:parseFormattedNumber (biorxiv_ts); -- convert to numbers for the comparison;
tomorrow_ts = tonumber (tomorrow_ts) or lang_object:parseFormattedNumber (tomorrow_ts);
else
return false; -- one or both failed to convert to Unix timestamp
end

return ((1576022400 <= biorxiv_ts) and (biorxiv_ts < tomorrow_ts)) -- 2012-12-11T00:00Z <= biorxiv_date < tomorrow's date
end

--[[--------------------------< IS _ V A L I D _ I S X N >-----------------------------------------------------

ISBN-10 and ISSN validator code calculates checksum across all ISBN/ISSN digits including the check digit.
ISBN-13 is checked in isbn().

If the number is valid the result will be 0. Before calling this function, ISBN/ISSN must be checked for length
and stripped of dashes, spaces and other non-ISxN characters.

]]

local function is_valid_isxn (isxn_str, len)
local temp = 0;
isxn_str = { isxn_str:byte(1, len) }; -- make a table of byte values '0' → 0x30 .. '9' → 0x39, 'X' → 0x58
len = len + 1; -- adjust to be a loop counter
for i, v in ipairs (isxn_str) do -- loop through all of the bytes and calculate the checksum
if v == string.byte ("X" ) then -- if checkdigit is X (compares the byte value of 'X' which is 0x58)
temp = temp + 10 * (len - i); -- it represents 10 decimal
else
temp = temp + tonumber (string.char (v) )*(len-i);
end
end
return temp % 11 == 0; -- returns true if calculation result is zero
end

--[[--------------------------< IS _ V A L I D _ I S X N _ 1 3 >-----------------------------------------------

ISBN-13 and ISMN validator code calculates checksum across all 13 ISBN/ISMN digits including the check digit.
If the number is valid, the result will be 0. Before calling this function, ISBN-13/ISMN must be checked for length
and stripped of dashes, spaces and other non-ISxN-13 characters.

]]

local function is_valid_isxn_13 (isxn_str)
local temp=0;

isxn_str = { isxn_str:byte(1, 13) }; -- make a table of byte values '0' → 0x30 .. '9' → 0x39
for i, v in ipairs (isxn_str) do
temp = temp + (3 - 2*(i % 2)) * tonumber (string.char (v) ); -- multiply odd index digits by 1, even index digits by 3 and sum; includes check digit
end
return temp % 10 == 0; -- sum modulo 10 is zero when ISBN-13/ISMN is correct
end

--[[--------------------------< N O R M A L I Z E _ L C C N >--------------------------------------------------

LCCN normalization (http://www.loc.gov/marc/lccn-namespace.html#normalization)
1. Remove all blanks.
2. If there is a forward slash (/) in the string, remove it, and remove all characters to the right of the forward slash.
3. If there is a hyphen in the string:
a. Remove it.
b. Inspect the substring following (to the right of) the (removed) hyphen. Then (and assuming that steps 1 and 2 have been carried out):
1. All these characters should be digits, and there should be six or less. (not done in this function)
2. If the length of the substring is less than 6, left-fill the substring with zeroes until the length is six.

Returns a normalized LCCN for lccn() to validate. There is no error checking (step 3.b.1) performed in this function.

]]

local function normalize_lccn (lccn)
lccn = lccn:gsub ("%s", ""); -- 1. strip whitespace

if nil ~= string.find (lccn, '/') then
lccn = lccn:match ("(.-)/"); -- 2. remove forward slash and all character to the right of it
end

local prefix
local suffix
prefix, suffix = lccn:match ("(.+)%-(.+)"); -- 3.a remove hyphen by splitting the string into prefix and suffix

if nil ~= suffix then -- if there was a hyphen
suffix = string.rep("0", 6-string.len (suffix)) .. suffix; -- 3.b.2 left fill the suffix with 0s if suffix length less than 6
lccn = prefix..suffix; -- reassemble the LCCN
end

return lccn;
end

--============================<>====================================

--[[--------------------------< A R X I V >--------------------------------------------------------------------

See: http://arxiv.org/help/arxiv_identifier

format and error check arXiv identifier. There are three valid forms of the identifier:
the first form, valid only between date codes 9107 and 0703, is:
arXiv:<archive>.<class>/<date code><number><version>
where:
<archive> is a string of alpha characters - may be hyphenated; no other punctuation
<class> is a string of alpha characters - may be hyphenated; no other punctuation; not the same as |class= parameter which is not supported in this form
<date code> is four digits in the form YYMM where YY is the last two digits of the four-digit year and MM is the month number January = 01
first digit of YY for this form can only 9 and 0
<number> is a three-digit number
<version> is a 1 or more digit number preceded with a lowercase v; no spaces (undocumented)

the second form, valid from April 2007 through December 2014 is:
arXiv:<date code>.<number><version>
where:
<date code> is four digits in the form YYMM where YY is the last two digits of the four-digit year and MM is the month number January = 01
<number> is a four-digit number
<version> is a 1 or more digit number preceded with a lowercase v; no spaces

the third form, valid from January 2015 is:
arXiv:<date code>.<number><version>
where:
<date code> and <version> are as defined for 0704-1412
<number> is a five-digit number

]]

local function arxiv (options)
local id = options.id;
local class = options.Class; -- TODO: lowercase?
local handler = options.handler;
local year, month, version;
local err_msg = false; -- assume no error message
local text; -- output text

if id:match("^%a[%a%.%-]+/[90]%d[01]%d%d%d%d$") or id:match("^%a[%a%.%-]+/[90]%d[01]%d%d%d%dv%d+$") then -- test for the 9107-0703 format with or without version
year, month = id:match("^%a[%a%.%-]+/([90]%d)([01]%d)%d%d%d[v%d]*$");
year = tonumber (year);
month = tonumber (month);
if ((not (90 < year or 8 > year)) or (1 > month or 12 < month)) or -- if invalid year or invalid month
((91 == year and 7 > month) or (7 == year and 3 < month)) then -- if years ok, are starting and ending months ok?
err_msg = true; -- flag for error message
end

elseif id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%d$") or id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%dv%d+$") then -- test for the 0704-1412 with or without version
year, month = id:match("^(%d%d)([01]%d)%.%d%d%d%d[v%d]*$");
year = tonumber (year);
month = tonumber (month);
if ((7 > year) or (14 < year) or (1 > month or 12 < month)) or -- is year invalid or is month invalid? (doesn't test for future years)
((7 == year) and (4 > month)) then -- when year is 07, is month invalid (before April)?
err_msg = true; -- flag for error message
end

elseif id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%d%d$") or id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%d%dv%d+$") then -- test for the 1501- format with or without version
year, month = id:match("^(%d%d)([01]%d)%.%d%d%d%d%d[v%d]*$");
year = tonumber (year);
month = tonumber (month);
if ((15 > year) or (1 > month or 12 < month)) then -- is year invalid or is month invalid? (doesn't test for future years)
err_msg = true; -- flag for error message
end

else
err_msg = true; -- not a recognized format; flag for error message
end

if err_msg then
options.coins_list_t['ARXIV'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

local err_msg_t = {};
if err_msg then
set_message ('err_bad_arxiv');
end

text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = handler.access});

if is_set (class) then
if id:match ('^%d+') then
text = table.concat ({text, ' [[//arxiv.org/archive/', class, ' ', class, ']]'}); -- external link within square brackets, not wikilink
else
set_message ('err_class_ignored');
end
end

return text;
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Validates (sort of) and formats a bibcode ID.

Format for bibcodes is specified here: http://adsabs.harvard.edu/abs_doc/help_pages/data.html#bibcodes

But, this: 2015arXiv151206696F is apparently valid so apparently, the only things that really matter are length, 19 characters
and first four digits must be a year. This function makes these tests:
length must be 19 characters
characters in position
1–4 must be digits and must represent a year in the range of 1000 – next year
5 must be a letter
6–8 must be letter, digit, ampersand, or dot (ampersand cannot directly precede a dot; &. )
9–18 must be letter, digit, or dot
19 must be a letter or dot

]]

local function bibcode (options)
local id = options.id;
local access = options.access;
local handler = options.handler;
local err_type;
local err_msg = '';
local year;

local text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode,
access = access});

if 19 ~= id:len() then
err_type = cfg.err_msg_supl.length;
else
year = id:match ("^(%d%d%d%d)[%a][%w&%.][%w&%.][%w&%.][%w.]+[%a%.]$");
if not year then -- if nil then no pattern match
err_type = cfg.err_msg_supl.value; -- so value error
else
local next_year = tonumber (os.date ('%Y')) + 1; -- get the current year as a number and add one for next year
year = tonumber (year); -- convert year portion of bibcode to a number
if (1000 > year) or (year > next_year) then
err_type = cfg.err_msg_supl.year; -- year out of bounds
end
if id:find('&%.') then
err_type = cfg.err_msg_supl.journal; -- journal abbreviation must not have '&.' (if it does it's missing a letter)
end
end
end

if is_set (err_type) then -- if there was an error detected
set_message ('err_bad_bibcode', {err_type});
options.coins_list_t['BIBCODE'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS

end

return text;
end

--[[-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Format bioRxiv ID and do simple error checking. Before 2019-12-11, biorXiv IDs were 10.1101/ followed by exactly
6 digits. After 2019-12-11, biorXiv IDs retained the six-digit identifier but prefixed that with a yyyy.mm.dd.
date and suffixed with an optional version identifier.

The bioRxiv ID is the string of characters:
https://doi.org/10.1101/078733 -> 10.1101/078733
or a date followed by a six-digit number followed by an optional version indicator 'v' and one or more digits:
https://www.biorxiv.org/content/10.1101/2019.12.11.123456v2 -> 10.1101/2019.12.11.123456v2

see https://www.biorxiv.org/about-biorxiv

]]

local function biorxiv (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local err_msg = true; -- flag; assume that there will be an error

local patterns = {
'^10.1101/%d%d%d%d%d%d$', -- simple 6-digit identifier (before 2019-12-11)
'^10.1101/(20[1-9]%d)%.([01]%d)%.([0-3]%d)%.%d%d%d%d%d%dv%d+$', -- y.m.d. date + 6-digit identifier + version (after 2019-12-11)
'^10.1101/(20[1-9]%d)%.([01]%d)%.([0-3]%d)%.%d%d%d%d%d%d$', -- y.m.d. date + 6-digit identifier (after 2019-12-11)
}

for _, pattern in ipairs (patterns) do -- spin through the patterns looking for a match
if id:match (pattern) then
local y, m, d = id:match (pattern); -- found a match, attempt to get year, month and date from the identifier

if m then -- m is nil when id is the six-digit form
if not is_valid_biorxiv_date (y, m, d) then -- validate the encoded date; TODO: don't ignore leap-year and actual month lengths ({{#time:}} is a poor date validator)
break; -- date fail; break out early so we don't unset the error message
end
end
err_msg = nil; -- we found a match so unset the error message
break; -- and done
end
end -- err_cat remains set here when no match

if err_msg then
options.coins_list_t['BIORXIV'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
set_message ('err_bad_biorxiv'); -- and set the error message
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator,
encode = handler.encode, access = handler.access});
end

--[[--------------------------< C I T E S E E R X >------------------------------------------------------------

CiteSeerX use their own notion of "doi" (not to be confused with the identifiers resolved via doi.org).

The description of the structure of this identifier can be found at Help_talk:Citation_Style_1/Archive_26#CiteSeerX_id_structure

]]

local function citeseerx (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local matched;

local text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode,
access = handler.access});

matched = id:match ("^10%.1%.1%.[1-9]%d?%d?%d?%.[1-9]%d?%d?%d?$");
if not matched then
set_message ('err_bad_citeseerx' );
options.coins_list_t['CITESEERX'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return text;
end

--[[--------------------------< D O I >------------------------------------------------------------------------

Formats a DOI and checks for DOI errors.

DOI names contain two parts: prefix and suffix separated by a forward slash.
Prefix: directory indicator '10.' followed by a registrant code
Suffix: character string of any length chosen by the registrant

This function checks a DOI name for: prefix/suffix. If the DOI name contains spaces or endashes, or, if it ends
with a period or a comma, this function will emit a bad_doi error message.

DOI names are case-insensitive and can incorporate any printable Unicode characters so the test for spaces, endash,
and terminal punctuation may not be technically correct but it appears, that in practice these characters are rarely
if ever used in DOI names.

]]

local function doi (options)
local id = options.id;
local inactive = options.DoiBroken
local access = options.access;
local ignore_invalid = options.accept;
local handler = options.handler;
local err_flag;

local text;
if is_set (inactive) then
local inactive_year = inactive:match("%d%d%d%d") or ''; -- try to get the year portion from the inactive date
local inactive_month, good;

if is_set (inactive_year) then
if 4 < inactive:len() then -- inactive date has more than just a year (could be anything)
local lang_obj = mw.getContentLanguage(); -- get a language object for this wiki
good, inactive_month = pcall (lang_obj.formatDate, lang_obj, 'F', inactive); -- try to get the month name from the inactive date
if not good then
inactive_month = nil; -- something went wrong so make sure this is unset
end
end
else
inactive_year = nil; -- |doi-broken-date= has something but it isn't a date
end

if is_set (inactive_year) and is_set (inactive_month) then
set_message ('maint_doi_inactive_dated', {inactive_year, inactive_month, ' '});
elseif is_set (inactive_year) then
set_message ('maint_doi_inactive_dated', {inactive_year, '', ''});
else
set_message ('maint_doi_inactive');
end
inactive = " (" .. cfg.messages['inactive'] .. ' ' .. inactive .. ')';
end

local registrant = mw.ustring.match (id, '^10%.([^/]+)/[^%s–]-[^%.,]$'); -- registrant set when DOI has the proper basic form

local registrant_err_patterns = { -- these patterns are for code ranges that are not supported
'^[^1-3]%d%d%d%d%.%d%d*$', -- 5 digits with subcode (0xxxx, 40000+); accepts: 10000–39999
'^[^1-5]%d%d%d%d$', -- 5 digits without subcode (0xxxx, 60000+); accepts: 10000–59999
'^[^1-9]%d%d%d%.%d%d*$', -- 4 digits with subcode (0xxx); accepts: 1000–9999
'^[^1-9]%d%d%d$', -- 4 digits without subcode (0xxx); accepts: 1000–9999
'^%d%d%d%d%d%d+', -- 6 or more digits
'^%d%d?%d?$', -- less than 4 digits without subcode (with subcode is legitimate)
'^5555$', -- test registrant will never resolve
'[^%d%.]', -- any character that isn't a digit or a dot
}

if not ignore_invalid then
if registrant then -- when DOI has proper form
for i, pattern in ipairs (registrant_err_patterns) do -- spin through error patterns
if registrant:match (pattern) then -- to validate registrant codes
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_doi'); -- when found, mark this DOI as bad
break; -- and done
end
end
else
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_doi'); -- invalid directory or malformed
end
else
set_message ('maint_doi_ignore');
end

if err_flag then
options.coins_list_t['DOI'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = access,
auto_link = not (err_flag or is_set (inactive) or ignore_invalid) and 'doi' or nil -- do not auto-link when |doi-broken-date= has a value or when there is a DOI error or (to play it safe, after all, auto-linking is not essential) when invalid DOIs are ignored
}) .. (inactive or '');

return text;
end

--[[--------------------------< H D L >------------------------------------------------------------------------

Formats an HDL with minor error checking.

HDL names contain two parts: prefix and suffix separated by a forward slash.
Prefix: character string using any character in the UCS-2 character set except '/'
Suffix: character string of any length using any character in the UCS-2 character set chosen by the registrant

This function checks a HDL name for: prefix/suffix. If the HDL name contains spaces, endashes, or, if it ends
with a period or a comma, this function will emit a bad_hdl error message.

HDL names are case-insensitive and can incorporate any printable Unicode characters so the test for endashes and
terminal punctuation may not be technically correct but it appears, that in practice these characters are rarely
if ever used in HDLs.

Query string parameters are named here: http://www.handle.net/proxy_servlet.html. query strings are not displayed
but since '?' is an allowed character in an HDL, '?' followed by one of the query parameters is the only way we
have to detect the query string so that it isn't URL-encoded with the rest of the identifier.

]]

local function hdl (options)
local id = options.id;
local access = options.access;
local handler = options.handler;
local query_params = { -- list of known query parameters from http://www.handle.net/proxy_servlet.html
'noredirect',
'ignore_aliases',
'auth',
'cert',
'index',
'type',
'urlappend',
'locatt',
'action',
}

local hdl, suffix, param = id:match ('(.-)(%?(%a+).+)$'); -- look for query string
local found;

if hdl then -- when there are query strings, this is the handle identifier portion
for _, q in ipairs (query_params) do -- spin through the list of query parameters
if param:match ('^' .. q) then -- if the query string begins with one of the parameters
found = true; -- announce a find
break; -- and stop looking
end
end
end

if found then
id = hdl; -- found so replace id with the handle portion; this will be URL-encoded, suffix will not
else
suffix = ''; -- make sure suffix is empty string for concatenation else
end

local text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, suffix = suffix, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = access})

if nil == id:match("^[^%s–]-/[^%s–]-[^%.,]$") then -- HDL must contain a forward slash, must not contain spaces, endashes, and must not end with period or comma
set_message ('err_bad_hdl' );
options.coins_list_t['HDL'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return text;
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Determines whether an ISBN string is valid

]]

local function isbn (options)
local isbn_str = options.id;
local ignore_invalid = options.accept;
local handler = options.handler;

local function return_result (check, err_type) -- local function to handle the various returns
local ISBN = internal_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = isbn_str, separator = handler.separator});
if ignore_invalid then -- if ignoring ISBN errors
set_message ('maint_isbn_ignore'); -- add a maint category even when there is no error
else -- here when not ignoring
if not check then -- and there is an error
options.coins_list_t['ISBN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
set_message ('err_bad_isbn', err_type); -- set an error message
return ISBN; -- return id text
end
end
return ISBN; -- return id text
end

if nil ~= isbn_str:match ('[^%s-0-9X]') then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.char); -- fail if isbn_str contains anything but digits, hyphens, or the uppercase X
end

local id = isbn_str:gsub ('[%s-]', ''); -- remove hyphens and whitespace

local len = id:len();

if len ~= 10 and len ~= 13 then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.length); -- fail if incorrect length
end

if len == 10 then
if id:match ('^%d*X?$') == nil then -- fail if isbn_str has 'X' anywhere but last position
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.form);
end
if not is_valid_isxn (id, 10) then -- test isbn-10 for numerical validity
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.check); -- fail if isbn-10 is not numerically valid
end
if id:find ('^63[01]') then -- 630xxxxxxx and 631xxxxxxx are (apparently) not valid isbn group ids but are used by amazon as numeric identifiers (asin)
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.group); -- fail if isbn-10 begins with 630/1
end
return return_result (true, cfg.err_msg_supl.check); -- pass if isbn-10 is numerically valid
else
if id:match ('^%d+$') == nil then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.char); -- fail if ISBN-13 is not all digits
end
if id:match ('^97[89]%d*$') == nil then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.prefix); -- fail when ISBN-13 does not begin with 978 or 979
end
if id:match ('^9790') then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.group); -- group identifier '0' is reserved to ISMN
end
return return_result (is_valid_isxn_13 (id), cfg.err_msg_supl.check);
end
end

--[[--------------------------< A S I N >----------------------------------------------------------------------

Formats a link to Amazon. Do simple error checking: ASIN must be mix of 10 numeric or uppercase alpha
characters. If a mix, first character must be uppercase alpha; if all numeric, ASINs must be 10-digit
ISBN. If 10-digit ISBN, add a maintenance category so a bot or AWB script can replace |asin= with |isbn=.
Error message if not 10 characters, if not ISBN-10, if mixed and first character is a digit.

|asin=630....... and |asin=631....... are (apparently) not a legitimate ISBN though it checksums as one; these
do not cause this function to emit the maint_asin message

This function is positioned here because it calls isbn()

]]

local function asin (options)
local id = options.id;
local domain = options.ASINTLD;

local err_flag;

if not id:match("^[%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u]$") then
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_asin'); -- ASIN is not a mix of 10 uppercase alpha and numeric characters
else
if id:match("^%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d[%dX]$") then -- if 10-digit numeric (or 9 digits with terminal X)
if is_valid_isxn (id, 10) then -- see if ASIN value is or validates as ISBN-10
if not id:find ('^63[01]') then -- 630xxxxxxx and 631xxxxxxx are (apparently) not a valid isbn prefixes but are used by amazon as a numeric identifier
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_asin'); -- ASIN has ISBN-10 form but begins with something other than 630/1 so probably an isbn
end
elseif not is_set (err_flag) then
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_asin'); -- ASIN is not ISBN-10
end
elseif not id:match("^%u[%d%u]+$") then
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_asin'); -- asin doesn't begin with uppercase alpha
end
end
if (not is_set (domain)) or in_array (domain, {'us'}) then -- default: United States
domain = "com";
elseif in_array (domain, {'jp', 'uk'}) then -- Japan, United Kingdom
domain = "co." .. domain;
elseif in_array (domain, {'z.cn'}) then -- China
domain = "cn";
elseif in_array (domain, {'au', 'br', 'mx', 'sg', 'tr'}) then -- Australia, Brazil, Mexico, Singapore, Turkey
domain = "com." .. domain;
elseif not in_array (domain, {'ae', 'ca', 'cn', 'de', 'es', 'fr', 'in', 'it', 'nl', 'pl', 'sa', 'se', 'co.jp', 'co.uk', 'com', 'com.au', 'com.br', 'com.mx', 'com.sg', 'com.tr'}) then -- Arabic Emirates, Canada, China, Germany, Spain, France, Indonesia, Italy, Netherlands, Poland, Saudi Arabia, Sweden (as of 2021-03 Austria (.at), Liechtenstein (.li) and Switzerland (.ch) still redirect to the German site (.de) with special settings, so don't maintain local ASINs for them)
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_asin_tld'); -- unsupported asin-tld value
end
local handler = options.handler;

if not is_set (err_flag) then
options.coins_list_t['ASIN'] = handler.prefix .. domain .. "/dp/" .. id; -- asin for coins
else
options.coins_list_t['ASIN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix .. domain .. "/dp/",
id = id, encode = handler.encode, separator = handler.separator})
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Determines whether an ISMN string is valid. Similar to ISBN-13, ISMN is 13 digits beginning 979-0-... and uses the
same check digit calculations. See http://www.ismn-international.org/download/Web_ISMN_Users_Manual_2008-6.pdf
section 2, pages 9–12.

ismn value not made part of COinS metadata because we don't have a url or isn't a COinS-defined identifier (rft.xxx)
or an identifier registered at info-uri.info (info:)

]]

local function ismn (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local text;
local valid_ismn = true;
local id_copy;

id_copy = id; -- save a copy because this testing is destructive
id = id:gsub ('[%s-]', ''); -- remove hyphens and white space

if 13 ~= id:len() or id:match ("^9790%d*$" ) == nil then -- ISMN must be 13 digits and begin with 9790
valid_ismn = false;
else
valid_ismn=is_valid_isxn_13 (id); -- validate ISMN
end

-- text = internal_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect, -- use this (or external version) when there is some place to link to
-- prefix = handler.prefix, id = id_copy, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode})

text = table.concat ( -- because no place to link to yet
{
make_wikilink (link_label_make (handler), handler.label),
handler.separator,
id_copy
});

if false == valid_ismn then
options.coins_list_t['ISMN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS; not really necessary here because ismn not made part of COinS
set_message ('err_bad_ismn'); -- create an error message if the ISMN is invalid
end

return text;
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Validate and format an ISSN. This code fixes the case where an editor has included an ISSN in the citation but
has separated the two groups of four digits with a space. When that condition occurred, the resulting link looked
like this:

|issn=0819 4327 gives: [http://www.worldcat.org/issn/0819 4327 0819 4327] -- can't have spaces in an external link

This code now prevents that by inserting a hyphen at the ISSN midpoint. It also validates the ISSN for length
and makes sure that the checkdigit agrees with the calculated value. Incorrect length (8 digits), characters
other than 0-9 and X, or checkdigit / calculated value mismatch will all cause a check ISSN error message. The
ISSN is always displayed with a hyphen, even if the ISSN was given as a single group of 8 digits.

]]

local function issn (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local ignore_invalid = options.accept;

local issn_copy = id; -- save a copy of unadulterated ISSN; use this version for display if ISSN does not validate
local text;
local valid_issn = true;

id = id:gsub ('[%s-]', ''); -- remove hyphens and whitespace

if 8 ~= id:len() or nil == id:match ("^%d*X?$" ) then -- validate the ISSN: 8 digits long, containing only 0-9 or X in the last position
valid_issn = false; -- wrong length or improper character
else
valid_issn = is_valid_isxn (id, 8); -- validate ISSN
end

if true == valid_issn then
id = string.sub (id, 1, 4 ) .. "-" .. string.sub (id, 5 ); -- if valid, display correctly formatted version
else
id = issn_copy; -- if not valid, show the invalid ISSN with error message
end

text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode})

if ignore_invalid then
set_message ('maint_issn_ignore');
else
if false == valid_issn then
options.coins_list_t['ISSN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
set_message ('err_bad_issn', (options.hkey == 'EISSN') and 'e' or ''); -- create an error message if the ISSN is invalid
end
end

return text;
end

--[[--------------------------< J F M >-----------------------------------------------------------------------

A numerical identifier in the form nn.nnnn.nn

]]

local function jfm (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local id_num;

id_num = id:match ('^[Jj][Ff][Mm](.*)$'); -- identifier with jfm prefix; extract identifier

if is_set (id_num) then
set_message ('maint_jfm_format');
else -- plain number without JFM prefix
id_num = id; -- if here id does not have prefix
end

if id_num and id_num:match('^%d%d%.%d%d%d%d%.%d%d$') then
id = id_num; -- jfm matches pattern
else
set_message ('err_bad_jfm' ); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['JFM'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode});
end

--[[--------------------------< J S T O R >--------------------------------------------------------------------

Format a JSTOR with some error checking

]]

local function jstor (options)
local id = options.id;
local access = options.access;
local handler = options.handler;

if id:find ('[Jj][Ss][Tt][Oo][Rr]') or id:find ('^https?://') or id:find ('%s') then
set_message ('err_bad_jstor'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['JSTOR'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = access});
end

--[[--------------------------< L C C N >----------------------------------------------------------------------

Format LCCN link and do simple error checking. LCCN is a character string 8-12 characters long. The length of
the LCCN dictates the character type of the first 1-3 characters; the rightmost eight are always digits.
http://info-uri.info/registry/OAIHandler?verb=GetRecord&metadataPrefix=reg&identifier=info:lccn/

length = 8 then all digits
length = 9 then lccn[1] is lowercase alpha
length = 10 then lccn[1] and lccn[2] are both lowercase alpha or both digits
length = 11 then lccn[1] is lower case alpha, lccn[2] and lccn[3] are both lowercase alpha or both digits
length = 12 then lccn[1] and lccn[2] are both lowercase alpha

]]

local function lccn (options)
local lccn = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local err_flag; -- presume that LCCN is valid
local id = lccn; -- local copy of the LCCN

id = normalize_lccn (id); -- get canonical form (no whitespace, hyphens, forward slashes)
local len = id:len(); -- get the length of the LCCN

if 8 == len then
if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if LCCN has anything but digits (nil if only digits)
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- set an error message
end
elseif 9 == len then -- LCCN should be adddddddd
if nil == id:match("%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") then -- does it match our pattern?
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- set an error message
end
elseif 10 == len then -- LCCN should be aadddddddd or dddddddddd
if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if LCCN has anything but digits (nil if only digits) ...
if nil == id:match("^%l%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") then -- ... see if it matches our pattern
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- no match, set an error message
end
end
elseif 11 == len then -- LCCN should be aaadddddddd or adddddddddd
if not (id:match("^%l%l%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") or id:match("^%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d")) then -- see if it matches one of our patterns
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- no match, set an error message
end
elseif 12 == len then -- LCCN should be aadddddddddd
if not id:match("^%l%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") then -- see if it matches our pattern
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- no match, set an error message
end
else
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- wrong length, set an error message
end

if not is_set (err_flag) and nil ~= lccn:find ('%s') then
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_lccn'); -- lccn contains a space, set an error message
end

if is_set (err_flag) then
options.coins_list_t['LCCN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = lccn, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode});
end

--[[--------------------------< M R >--------------------------------------------------------------------------

A seven digit number; if not seven digits, zero-fill leading digits to make seven digits.

]]

local function mr (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local id_num;
local id_len;

id_num = id:match ('^[Mm][Rr](%d+)$'); -- identifier with mr prefix

if is_set (id_num) then
set_message ('maint_mr_format'); -- add maint cat
else -- plain number without mr prefix
id_num = id:match ('^%d+$'); -- if here id is all digits
end

id_len = id_num and id_num:len() or 0;
if (7 >= id_len) and (0 ~= id_len) then
id = string.rep ('0', 7-id_len) .. id_num; -- zero-fill leading digits
else
set_message ('err_bad_mr'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['MR'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode});
end

--[[--------------------------< O C L C >----------------------------------------------------------------------

Validate and format an OCLC ID. https://www.oclc.org/batchload/controlnumber.en.html {{dead link}}
archived at: https://web.archive.org/web/20161228233804/https://www.oclc.org/batchload/controlnumber.en.html

]]

local function oclc (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local number;

if id:match('^ocm%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d$') then -- ocm prefix and 8 digits; 001 field (12 characters)
number = id:match('ocm(%d+)'); -- get the number
elseif id:match('^ocn%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d$') then -- ocn prefix and 9 digits; 001 field (12 characters)
number = id:match('ocn(%d+)'); -- get the number
elseif id:match('^on%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d+$') then -- on prefix and 10 or more digits; 001 field (12 characters)
number = id:match('^on(%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d+)$'); -- get the number
elseif id:match('^%(OCoLC%)[1-9]%d*$') then -- (OCoLC) prefix and variable number digits; no leading zeros; 035 field
number = id:match('%(OCoLC%)([1-9]%d*)'); -- get the number
if 9 < number:len() then
number = nil; -- constrain to 1 to 9 digits; change this when OCLC issues 10-digit numbers
end
elseif id:match('^%d+$') then -- no prefix
number = id; -- get the number
if 10 < number:len() then
number = nil; -- constrain to 1 to 10 digits; change this when OCLC issues 11-digit numbers
end
end

if number then -- proper format
id = number; -- exclude prefix, if any, from external link
else
set_message ('err_bad_oclc') -- add an error message if the id is malformed
options.coins_list_t['OCLC'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode});
end

--[[--------------------------< O P E N L I B R A R Y >--------------------------------------------------------

Formats an OpenLibrary link, and checks for associated errors.

]]

local function openlibrary (options)
local id = options.id;
local access = options.access;
local handler = options.handler;
local ident, code = id:gsub('^OL', ''):match("^(%d+([AMW]))$"); -- strip optional OL prefix followed immediately by digits followed by 'A', 'M', or 'W';
local err_flag;
local prefix = { -- these are appended to the handler.prefix according to code
['A']='authors/OL',
['M']='books/OL',
['W']='works/OL',
['X']='OL' -- not a code; spoof when 'code' in id is invalid
};

if not ident then
code = 'X'; -- no code or id completely invalid
ident = id; -- copy id to ident so that we display the flawed identifier
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_ol');
end

if not is_set (err_flag) then
options.coins_list_t['OL'] = handler.prefix .. prefix[code] .. ident; -- experiment for ol coins
else
options.coins_list_t['OL'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix .. prefix[code],
id = ident, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode,
access = access});
end

--[[--------------------------< O S T I >----------------------------------------------------------------------

Format OSTI and do simple error checking. OSTIs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up. This
code checks the OSTI to see that it contains only digits and is less than test_limit specified in the configuration;
the value in test_limit will need to be updated periodically as more OSTIs are issued.

NB. 1018 is the lowest OSTI number found in the wild (so far) and resolving OK on the OSTI site

]]

local function osti (options)
local id = options.id;
local access = options.access;
local handler = options.handler;

if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if OSTI has anything but digits
set_message ('err_bad_osti'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['OSTI'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
else -- OSTI is only digits
local id_num = tonumber (id); -- convert id to a number for range testing
if 1018 > id_num or handler.id_limit < id_num then -- if OSTI is outside test limit boundaries
set_message ('err_bad_osti'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['OSTI'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = access});
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Format a PMC, do simple error checking, and check for embargoed articles.

The embargo parameter takes a date for a value. If the embargo date is in the future the PMC identifier will not
be linked to the article. If the embargo date is today or in the past, or if it is empty or omitted, then the
PMC identifier is linked to the article through the link at cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].prefix.

PMC embargo date testing is done in function is_embargoed () which is called earlier because when the citation
has |pmc=<value> but does not have a |url= then |title= is linked with the PMC link. Function is_embargoed ()
returns the embargo date if the PMC article is still embargoed, otherwise it returns an empty string.

PMCs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up. This code checks the PMC to see that it contains only digits and is less
than test_limit; the value in local variable test_limit will need to be updated periodically as more PMCs are issued.

]]

local function pmc (options)
local id = options.id;
local embargo = options.Embargo; -- TODO: lowercase?
local handler = options.handler;
local err_flag;
local id_num;
local text;

id_num = id:match ('^[Pp][Mm][Cc](%d+)$'); -- identifier with PMC prefix

if is_set (id_num) then
set_message ('maint_pmc_format');
else -- plain number without PMC prefix
id_num = id:match ('^%d+$'); -- if here id is all digits
end

if is_set (id_num) then -- id_num has a value so test it
id_num = tonumber (id_num); -- convert id_num to a number for range testing
if 1 > id_num or handler.id_limit < id_num then -- if PMC is outside test limit boundaries
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_pmc'); -- set an error message
else
id = tostring (id_num); -- make sure id is a string
end
else -- when id format incorrect
err_flag = set_message ('err_bad_pmc'); -- set an error message
end

if is_set (embargo) and is_set (is_embargoed (embargo)) then -- is PMC is still embargoed?
text = table.concat ( -- still embargoed so no external link
{
make_wikilink (link_label_make (handler), handler.label),
handler.separator,
id,
});
else
text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect, -- no embargo date or embargo has expired, ok to link to article
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = handler.access,
auto_link = not err_flag and 'pmc' or nil -- do not auto-link when PMC has error
});
end

if err_flag then
options.coins_list_t['PMC'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return text;
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Format PMID and do simple error checking. PMIDs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up. This
code checks the PMID to see that it contains only digits and is less than test_limit; the value in local variable
test_limit will need to be updated periodically as more PMIDs are issued.

]]

local function pmid (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;

if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if PMID has anything but digits
set_message ('err_bad_pmid'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['PMID'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
else -- PMID is only digits
local id_num = tonumber (id); -- convert id to a number for range testing
if 1 > id_num or handler.id_limit < id_num then -- if PMID is outside test limit boundaries
set_message ('err_bad_pmid'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['PMID'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode});
end

--[[--------------------------< R F C >------------------------------------------------------------------------

Format RFC and do simple error checking. RFCs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up. This
code checks the RFC to see that it contains only digits and is less than test_limit specified in the configuration;
the value in test_limit will need to be updated periodically as more RFCs are issued.

An index of all RFCs is here: https://tools.ietf.org/rfc/

]]

local function rfc (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;

if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if RFC has anything but digits
set_message ('err_bad_rfc'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['RFC'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
else -- RFC is only digits
local id_num = tonumber (id); -- convert id to a number for range testing
if 1 > id_num or handler.id_limit < id_num then -- if RFC is outside test limit boundaries
set_message ('err_bad_rfc'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['RFC'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = handler.access});
end

--[[--------------------------< S 2 C I D >--------------------------------------------------------------------

Format an S2CID, do simple error checking

S2CIDs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up. This code checks the S2CID to see that it is only
digits and is less than test_limit; the value in local variable test_limit will need to be updated periodically
as more S2CIDs are issued.

]]

local function s2cid (options)
local id = options.id;
local access = options.access;
local handler = options.handler;
local id_num;
local text;

id_num = id:match ('^[1-9]%d*$'); -- id must be all digits; must not begin with 0; no open access flag

if is_set (id_num) then -- id_num has a value so test it
id_num = tonumber (id_num); -- convert id_num to a number for range testing
if handler.id_limit < id_num then -- if S2CID is outside test limit boundaries
set_message ('err_bad_s2cid'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['S2CID'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end
else -- when id format incorrect
set_message ('err_bad_s2cid'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['S2CID'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = access});

return text;
end

--[[--------------------------< S B N >------------------------------------------------------------------------

9-digit form of ISBN-10; uses same check-digit validation when SBN is prefixed with an additional '0' to make 10 digits

sbn value not made part of COinS metadata because we don't have a url or isn't a COinS-defined identifier (rft.xxx)
or an identifier registered at info-uri.info (info:)

]]

local function sbn (options)
local id = options.id;
local ignore_invalid = options.accept;
local handler = options.handler;
local function return_result (check, err_type) -- local function to handle the various returns
local SBN = internal_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator});
if not ignore_invalid then -- if not ignoring SBN errors
if not check then
options.coins_list_t['SBN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS; not really necessary here because sbn not made part of COinS
set_message ('err_bad_sbn', {err_type}); -- display an error message
return SBN;
end
else
set_message ('maint_isbn_ignore'); -- add a maint category even when there is no error (ToDo: Possibly switch to separate message for SBNs only)
end
return SBN;
end

if id:match ('[^%s-0-9X]') then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.char); -- fail if SBN contains anything but digits, hyphens, or the uppercase X
end

local ident = id:gsub ('[%s-]', ''); -- remove hyphens and whitespace; they interfere with the rest of the tests

if 9 ~= ident:len() then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.length); -- fail if incorrect length
end

if ident:match ('^%d*X?$') == nil then
return return_result (false, cfg.err_msg_supl.form); -- fail if SBN has 'X' anywhere but last position
end

return return_result (is_valid_isxn ('0' .. ident, 10), cfg.err_msg_supl.check);
end

--[[--------------------------< S S R N >----------------------------------------------------------------------

Format an SSRN, do simple error checking

SSRNs are sequential numbers beginning at 100? and counting up. This code checks the SSRN to see that it is
only digits and is greater than 99 and less than test_limit; the value in local variable test_limit will need
to be updated periodically as more SSRNs are issued.

]]

local function ssrn (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;
local id_num;
local text;

id_num = id:match ('^%d+$'); -- id must be all digits

if is_set (id_num) then -- id_num has a value so test it
id_num = tonumber (id_num); -- convert id_num to a number for range testing
if 100 > id_num or handler.id_limit < id_num then -- if SSRN is outside test limit boundaries
set_message ('err_bad_ssrn'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['SSRN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end
else -- when id format incorrect
set_message ('err_bad_ssrn'); -- set an error message
options.coins_list_t['SSRN'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode, access = options.access});

return text;
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Validate and format a usenet message id. Simple error checking, looks for 'id-left@id-right' not enclosed in
'<' and/or '>' angle brackets.

]]

local function usenet_id (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;

local text = external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode})

if not id:match('^.+@.+$') or not id:match('^[^<].*[^>]$') then -- doesn't have '@' or has one or first or last character is '< or '>'
set_message ('err_bad_usenet_id') -- add an error message if the message id is invalid
options.coins_list_t['USENETID'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return text;
end

--[[--------------------------< Z B L >-----------------------------------------------------------------------

A numerical identifier in the form nnnn.nnnnn - leading zeros in the first quartet optional

format described here: http://emis.mi.sanu.ac.rs/ZMATH/zmath/en/help/search/

temporary format is apparently eight digits. Anything else is an error

]]

local function zbl (options)
local id = options.id;
local handler = options.handler;

if id:match('^%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d$') then -- is this identifier using temporary format?
set_message ('maint_zbl'); -- yes, add maint cat
elseif not id:match('^%d?%d?%d?%d%.%d%d%d%d%d$') then -- not temporary, is it normal format?
set_message ('err_bad_zbl'); -- no, set an error message
options.coins_list_t['ZBL'] = nil; -- when error, unset so not included in COinS
end

return external_link_id ({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, q = handler.q, redirect = handler.redirect,
prefix = handler.prefix, id = id, separator = handler.separator, encode = handler.encode});
end

--============================<>==========================================

--[[--------------------------< E X T R A C T _ I D S >------------------------------------------------------------

Populates ID table from arguments using configuration settings. Loops through cfg.id_handlers and searches args for
any of the parameters listed in each cfg.id_handlers['...'].parameters. If found, adds the parameter and value to
the identifier list. Emits redundant error message if more than one alias exists in args

]]

local function extract_ids (args)
local id_list = {}; -- list of identifiers found in args
for k, v in pairs (cfg.id_handlers) do -- k is uppercase identifier name as index to cfg.id_handlers; e.g. cfg.id_handlers['ISBN'], v is a table
v = select_one (args, v.parameters, 'err_redundant_parameters' ); -- v.parameters is a table of aliases for k; here we pick one from args if present
if is_set (v) then id_list[k] = v; end -- if found in args, add identifier to our list
end
return id_list;
end

--[[--------------------------< E X T R A C T _ I D _ A C C E S S _ L E V E L S >--------------------------------------

Fetches custom id access levels from arguments using configuration settings. Parameters which have a predefined access
level (e.g. arxiv) do not use this function as they are directly rendered as free without using an additional parameter.

returns a table of k/v pairs where k is same as the identifier's key in cfg.id_handlers and v is the assigned (valid) keyword

access-level values must match the case used in cfg.keywords_lists['id-access'] (lowercase unless there is some special reason for something else)

]]

local function extract_id_access_levels (args, id_list)
local id_accesses_list = {};
for k, v in pairs (cfg.id_handlers) do
local access_param = v.custom_access; -- name of identifier's access-level parameter
if is_set (access_param) then
local access_level = args[access_param]; -- get the assigned value if there is one
if is_set (access_level) then
if not in_array (access_level, cfg.keywords_lists['id-access']) then -- exact match required
set_message ('err_invalid_param_val', {access_param, access_level});
access_level = nil; -- invalid so unset
end
if not is_set (id_list[k]) then -- identifier access-level must have a matching identifier
set_message ('err_param_access_requires_param', {k:lower()}); -- parameter name is uppercase in cfg.id_handlers (k); lowercase for error message
end
id_accesses_list[k] = cfg.keywords_xlate[access_level]; -- get translated keyword
end
end
end
return id_accesses_list;
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------

render the identifiers into a sorted sequence table

<ID_list_coins_t> is a table of k/v pairs where k is same as key in cfg.id_handlers and v is the assigned value
<options_t> is a table of various k/v option pairs provided in the call to new_build_id_list();
modified by this function and passed to all identifier rendering functions
<access_levels_t> is a table of k/v pairs where k is same as key in cfg.id_handlers and v is the assigned value (if valid)

returns a sequence table of sorted (by hkey - 'handler' key) rendered identifier strings

]]

local function build_id_list (ID_list_coins_t, options_t, access_levels_t)
local ID_list_t = {};
local accept;
local func_map = { --function map points to functions associated with hkey identifier
['ARXIV'] = arxiv,
['ASIN'] = asin,
['BIBCODE'] = bibcode,
['BIORXIV'] = biorxiv,
['CITESEERX'] = citeseerx,
['DOI'] = doi,
['EISSN'] = issn,
['HDL'] = hdl,
['ISBN'] = isbn,
['ISMN'] = ismn,
['ISSN'] = issn,
['JFM'] = jfm,
['JSTOR'] = jstor,
['LCCN'] = lccn,
['MR'] = mr,
['OCLC'] = oclc,
['OL'] = openlibrary,
['OSTI'] = osti,
['PMC'] = pmc,
['PMID'] = pmid,
['RFC'] = rfc,
['S2CID'] = s2cid,
['SBN'] = sbn,
['SSRN'] = ssrn,
['USENETID'] = usenet_id,
['ZBL'] = zbl,
}

for hkey, v in pairs (ID_list_coins_t) do
v, accept = has_accept_as_written (v); -- remove accept-as-written markup if present; accept is boolean true when markup removed; false else
-- every function gets the options table with value v and accept boolean
options_t.hkey = hkey; -- ~/Configuration handler key
options_t.id = v; -- add that identifier value to the options table
options_t.accept = accept; -- add the accept boolean flag
options_t.access = access_levels_t[hkey]; -- add the access level for those that have an |<identifier-access= parameter
options_t.handler = cfg.id_handlers[hkey];
options_t.coins_list_t = ID_list_coins_t; -- pointer to ID_list_coins_t; for |asin= and |ol=; also to keep erroneous values out of the citation's metadata
options_t.coins_list_t[hkey] = v; -- id value without accept-as-written markup for metadata

if options_t.handler.access and not in_array (options_t.handler.access, cfg.keywords_lists['id-access']) then
error (cfg.messages['unknown_ID_access'] .. options_t.handler.access); -- here when handler access key set to a value not listed in list of allowed id access keywords
end

if func_map[hkey] then
local id_text = func_map[hkey] (options_t); -- call the function to get identifier text and any error message
table.insert (ID_list_t, {hkey, id_text}); -- add identifier text to the output sequence table
else
error (cfg.messages['unknown_ID_key'] .. hkey); -- here when func_map doesn't have a function for hkey
end
end

local function comp (a, b) -- used by following table.sort()
return a[1]:lower() < b[1]:lower(); -- sort by hkey
end

table.sort (ID_list_t, comp); -- sequence table of tables sort
for k, v in ipairs (ID_list_t) do -- convert sequence table of tables to simple sequence table of strings
ID_list_t[k] = v[2]; -- v[2] is the identifier rendering from the call to the various functions in func_map{}
end

return ID_list_t;
end

--[[--------------------------< O P T I O N S _ C H E C K >----------------------------------------------------

check that certain option parameters have their associated identifier parameters with values

<ID_list_coins_t> is a table of k/v pairs where k is same as key in cfg.id_handlers and v is the assigned value
<ID_support_t> is a sequence table of tables created in citation0() where each subtable has four elements:
[1] is the support parameter's assigned value; empty string if not set
[2] is a text string same as key in cfg.id_handlers
[3] is cfg.error_conditions key used to create error message
[4] is original ID support parameter name used to create error message

returns nothing; on error emits an appropriate error message

]]

local function options_check (ID_list_coins_t, ID_support_t)
for _, v in ipairs (ID_support_t) do
if is_set (v[1]) and not ID_list_coins_t[v[2]] then -- when support parameter has a value but matching identifier parameter is missing or empty
set_message (v[3], (v[4])); -- emit the appropriate error message
end
end
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------

Creates two identifier lists: a k/v table of identifiers and their values to be used locally and for use in the
COinS metadata, and a sequence table of the rendered identifier strings that will be included in the rendered
citation.

]]

local function identifier_lists_get (args_t, options_t, ID_support_t)
local ID_list_coins_t = extract_ids (args_t); -- get a table of identifiers and their values for use locally and for use in COinS
options_check (ID_list_coins_t, ID_support_t); -- ID support parameters must have matching identifier parameters
local ID_access_levels_t = extract_id_access_levels (args_t, ID_list_coins_t); -- get a table of identifier access levels
local ID_list_t = build_id_list (ID_list_coins_t, options_t, ID_access_levels_t); -- get a sequence table of rendered identifier strings

return ID_list_t, ID_list_coins_t; -- return the tables
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S E L E C T E D _ M O D U L E S >--------------------------------------

Sets local cfg table and imported functions table to same (live or sandbox) as that used by the other modules.

]]

local function set_selected_modules (cfg_table_ptr, utilities_page_ptr)
cfg = cfg_table_ptr;

has_accept_as_written = utilities_page_ptr.has_accept_as_written; -- import functions from select Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities module
is_set = utilities_page_ptr.is_set;
in_array = utilities_page_ptr.in_array;
set_message = utilities_page_ptr.set_message;
select_one = utilities_page_ptr.select_one;
substitute = utilities_page_ptr.substitute;
make_wikilink = utilities_page_ptr.make_wikilink;

z = utilities_page_ptr.z; -- table of tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
end

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T E D F U N C T I O N S >------------------------------------------
]]

return {
auto_link_urls = auto_link_urls, -- table of identifier URLs to be used when auto-linking |title=

identifier_lists_get = identifier_lists_get, -- experiment to replace individual calls to build_id_list(), extract_ids, extract_id_access_levels
is_embargoed = is_embargoed;
set_selected_modules = set_selected_modules;
}

Module:Citation/CS1/Date validation

2022-04-04T14:04:36Z

Zoran: Created page with "----------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >-------------------------------------- local add_prop_cat, is_set, in_array, set_message, substitu..."

--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------
]]

local add_prop_cat, is_set, in_array, set_message, substitute, wrap_style; -- imported functions from selected Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
local cfg; -- table of tables imported from selected Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration

--[[--------------------------< F I L E - S C O P E D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------

File-scope variables are declared here

]]

local lang_object = mw.getContentLanguage(); -- used by is_valid_accessdate(), is_valid_year(), date_name_xlate(); TODO: move to ~/Configuration?
local year_limit; -- used by is_valid_year()

--[=[-----------------------------------------------------------------

returns true if:
Wikipedia start date <= accessdate < today + 2 days

Wikipedia start date is 2001-01-15T00:00:00 UTC which is 979516800 seconds after 1970-01-01T00:00:00 UTC (the start of Unix time)
accessdate is the date provided in |access-date= at time 00:00:00 UTC
today is the current date at time 00:00:00 UTC plus 48 hours
if today is 2015-01-01T00:00:00 then
adding 24 hours gives 2015-01-02T00:00:00 – one second more than today
adding 24 hours gives 2015-01-03T00:00:00 – one second more than tomorrow

This function does not work if it is fed month names for languages other than English. Wikimedia #time: parser
apparently doesn't understand non-English date month names. This function will always return false when the date
contains a non-English month name because good1 is false after the call to lang.formatDate(). To get around that
call this function with YYYY-MM-DD format dates.

]=]

local function is_valid_accessdate (accessdate)
local good1, good2;
local access_ts, tomorrow_ts; -- to hold Unix time stamps representing the dates

good1, access_ts = pcall (lang_object.formatDate, lang_object, 'U', accessdate ); -- convert accessdate value to Unix timestamp
good2, tomorrow_ts = pcall (lang_object.formatDate, lang_object, 'U', 'today + 2 days' ); -- today midnight + 2 days is one second more than all day tomorrow

if good1 and good2 then -- lang.formatDate() returns a timestamp in the local script which which tonumber() may not understand
access_ts = tonumber (access_ts) or lang_object:parseFormattedNumber (access_ts); -- convert to numbers for the comparison;
tomorrow_ts = tonumber (tomorrow_ts) or lang_object:parseFormattedNumber (tomorrow_ts);
else
return false; -- one or both failed to convert to Unix time stamp
end

if 979516800 <= access_ts and access_ts < tomorrow_ts then -- Wikipedia start date <= accessdate < tomorrow's date
return true;
else
return false; -- accessdate out of range
end
end

--[[--------------------------< G E T _ M O N T H _ N U M B E R >----------------------------------------------

returns a number according to the month in a date: 1 for January, etc. Capitalization and spelling must be correct.
If not a valid month, returns 0

]]

local function get_month_number (month)
return cfg.date_names['local'].long[month] or cfg.date_names['local'].short[month] or -- look for local names first
cfg.date_names['en'].long[month] or cfg.date_names['en'].short[month] or -- failing that, look for English names
0; -- not a recognized month name
end

--[[--------------------------< G E T _ S E A S O N _ N U M B E R >--------------------------------------------

returns a number according to the sequence of seasons in a year: 21 for Spring, etc. Capitalization and spelling
must be correct. If not a valid season, returns 0.
21-24 = Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter, independent of “Hemisphere”

returns 0 when <param> is not |date=

Season numbering is defined by Extended Date/Time Format (EDTF) specification (https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/)
which became part of ISO 8601 in 2019. See '§Sub-year groupings'. The standard defines various divisions using
numbers 21-41. cs1|2 only supports generic seasons. EDTF does support the distinction between north and south
hemisphere seasons but cs1|2 has no way to make that distinction.

These additional divisions not currently supported:
25-28 = Spring - Northern Hemisphere, Summer- Northern Hemisphere, Autumn - Northern Hemisphere, Winter - Northern Hemisphere
29-32 = Spring – Southern Hemisphere, Summer– Southern Hemisphere, Autumn – Southern Hemisphere, Winter - Southern Hemisphere
33-36 = Quarter 1, Quarter 2, Quarter 3, Quarter 4 (3 months each)
37-39 = Quadrimester 1, Quadrimester 2, Quadrimester 3 (4 months each)
40-41 = Semestral 1, Semestral-2 (6 months each)

]]

local function get_season_number (season, param)
if 'date' ~= param then
return 0; -- season dates only supported by |date=
end
return cfg.date_names['local'].season[season] or -- look for local names first
cfg.date_names['en'].season[season] or -- failing that, look for English names
0; -- not a recognized season name
end

--[[--------------------------< G E T _ Q U A R T E R _ N U M B E R >------------------------------------------

returns a number according to the sequence of quarters in a year: 33 for first quarter, etc. Capitalization and spelling
must be correct. If not a valid quarter, returns 0.
33-36 = Quarter 1, Quarter 2, Quarter 3, Quarter 4 (3 months each)

returns 0 when <param> is not |date=

Quarter numbering is defined by Extended Date/Time Format (EDTF) specification (https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/)
which became part of ISO 8601 in 2019. See '§Sub-year groupings'. The standard defines various divisions using
numbers 21-41. cs1|2 only supports generic seasons and quarters.

These additional divisions not currently supported:
37-39 = Quadrimester 1, Quadrimester 2, Quadrimester 3 (4 months each)
40-41 = Semestral 1, Semestral-2 (6 months each)

]]

local function get_quarter_number (quarter, param)
if 'date' ~= param then
return 0; -- quarter dates only supported by |date=
end
quarter = mw.ustring.gsub (quarter, ' +', ' '); -- special case replace multiple space chars with a single space char
return cfg.date_names['local'].quarter[quarter] or -- look for local names first
cfg.date_names['en'].quarter[quarter] or -- failing that, look for English names
0; -- not a recognized quarter name
end

--[[--------------------------< G E T _ P R O P E R _ N A M E _ N U M B E R >----------------------------------

returns a non-zero number if date contains a recognized proper-name. Capitalization and spelling must be correct.

returns 0 when <param> is not |date=

]]

local function get_proper_name_number (name, param)
if 'date' ~= param then
return 0; -- proper-name dates only supported by |date=
end
return cfg.date_names['local'].named[name] or -- look for local names dates first
cfg.date_names['en'].named[name] or -- failing that, look for English names
0; -- not a recognized named date
end

--[[--------------------------< G E T _ E L E M E N T _ N U M B E R <------------------------------------------

returns true if month or season or quarter or proper name is valid (properly spelled, capitalized, abbreviated)

]]

local function get_element_number (element, param)
local num;

local funcs = {get_month_number, get_season_number, get_quarter_number, get_proper_name_number}; -- list of functions to execute in order

for _, func in ipairs (funcs) do -- spin through the function list
num = func (element, param); -- call the function and get the returned number
if 0 ~= num then -- non-zero when valid month season quarter
return num; -- return that number
end
end
return nil; -- not valid
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Function gets current year from the server and compares it to year from a citation parameter. Years more than one
year in the future are not acceptable.

Special case for |pmc-embargo-date=: years more than two years in the future are not acceptable

]]

local function is_valid_year (year, param)
if not is_set (year_limit) then
year_limit = tonumber(os.date("%Y"))+1; -- global variable so we only have to fetch it once
end

year = tonumber (year) or lang_object:parseFormattedNumber (year); -- convert to number for the comparison;

if 'pmc-embargo-date' == param then -- special case for |pmc-embargo-date=
return year and (year <= tonumber(os.date("%Y"))+2) or false; -- years more than two years in the future are not accepted
end
return year and (year <= year_limit) or false;
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Returns true if day is less than or equal to the number of days in month and year is no farther into the future
than next year; else returns false.

Assumes Julian calendar prior to year 1582 and Gregorian calendar thereafter. Accounts for Julian calendar leap
years before 1582 and Gregorian leap years after 1582. Where the two calendars overlap (1582 to approximately
1923) dates are assumed to be Gregorian.

]]

local function is_valid_date (year, month, day, param)
local days_in_month = {31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31};
local month_length;
if not is_valid_year (year, param) then -- no farther into the future than next year except |pmc-embargo-date= no more than two years in the future
return false;
end

month = tonumber (month); -- required for YYYY-MM-DD dates

if (2 == month) then -- if February
month_length = 28; -- then 28 days unless
if 1582 > tonumber(year) then -- Julian calendar
if 0 == (year%4) then -- is a leap year?
month_length = 29; -- if leap year then 29 days in February
end
else -- Gregorian calendar
if (0 == (year%4) and (0 ~= (year%100) or 0 == (year%400))) then -- is a leap year?
month_length = 29; -- if leap year then 29 days in February
end
end
else
month_length = days_in_month[month];
end

if tonumber (day) > month_length then
return false;
end
return true;
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------

Months in a range are expected to have the same style: Jan–Mar or October–December but not February–Mar or Jul–August.
This function looks in cfg.date_names{} to see if both month names are listed in the long subtable or both are
listed in the short subtable. When both have the same style (both are listed in the same table), returns true; false else

]]

local function is_valid_month_range_style (month1, month2)
if (cfg.date_names.en.long[month1] and cfg.date_names.en.long[month2]) or -- are both English names listed in the long subtable?
(cfg.date_names.en.short[month1] and cfg.date_names.en.short[month2]) or -- are both English names listed in the short subtable?
(cfg.date_names['local'].long[month1] and cfg.date_names['local'].long[month2]) or -- are both local names listed in the long subtable?
(cfg.date_names['local'].short[month1] and cfg.date_names['local'].short[month2]) then -- are both local names listed in the short subtable?
return true;
end
return false; -- names are mixed
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------

Check a pair of months or seasons to see if both are valid members of a month or season pair.

Month pairs are expected to be left to right, earliest to latest in time.

All season ranges are accepted as valid because there are publishers out there who have published a Summer–Spring YYYY issue, hence treat as ok

]]

local function is_valid_month_season_range(range_start, range_end, param)
local range_start_number = get_month_number (range_start);
local range_end_number;

if 0 == range_start_number then -- is this a month range?
range_start_number = get_season_number (range_start, param); -- not a month; is it a season? get start season number
range_end_number = get_season_number (range_end, param); -- get end season number

if (0 ~= range_start_number) and (0 ~= range_end_number) and (range_start_number ~= range_end_number) then
return true; -- any season pairing is accepted except when both are the same
end
return false; -- range_start and/or range_end is not a season
end
-- here when range_start is a month
range_end_number = get_month_number (range_end); -- get end month number
if range_start_number < range_end_number and -- range_start is a month; does range_start precede range_end?
is_valid_month_range_style (range_start, range_end) then -- do months have the same style?
return true; -- proper order and same style
end
return false; -- range_start month number is greater than or equal to range end number; or range end isn't a month
end

--[[--------------------------< M A K E _ C O I N S _ D A T E >------------------------------------------------

This function receives a table of date parts for one or two dates and an empty table reference declared in
Module:Citation/CS1. The function is called only for |date= parameters and only if the |date=<value> is
determined to be a valid date format. The question of what to do with invalid date formats is not answered here.

The date parts in the input table are converted to an ISO 8601 conforming date string:
single whole dates: yyyy-mm-dd
month and year dates: yyyy-mm
year dates: yyyy
ranges: yyyy-mm-dd/yyyy-mm-dd
yyyy-mm/yyyy-mm
yyyy/yyyy

Dates in the Julian calendar are reduced to year or year/year so that we don't have to do calendar conversion from
Julian to Proleptic Gregorian.

The input table has:
year, year2 – always present; if before 1582, ignore months and days if present
month, month2 – 0 if not provided, 1-12 for months, 21-24 for seasons; 99 Christmas
day, day2 – 0 if not provided, 1-31 for days

the output table receives:
rftdate: an ISO 8601 formatted date
rftchron: a free-form version of the date, usually without year which is in rftdate (season ranges and proper-name dates)
rftssn: one of four season keywords: winter, spring, summer, fall (lowercase)
rftquarter: one of four values: 1, 2, 3, 4

]]

local function make_COinS_date (input, tCOinS_date)
local date; -- one date or first date in a range
local date2 = ''; -- end of range date
-- start temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty detection
local year = tonumber(input.year); -- this temporary code to determine the extent of sources dated to the Julian/Gregorian
local month = tonumber(input.month); -- interstice 1 October 1582 – 1 January 1926
local day = tonumber (input.day);
if (0 ~= day) and -- day must have a value for this to be a whole date
(((1582 == year) and (10 <= month) and (12 >= month)) or -- any whole 1582 date from 1 October to 31 December or
((1926 == year) and (1 == month) and (1 == input.day)) or -- 1 January 1926 or
((1582 < year) and (1925 >= year))) then -- any date 1 January 1583 – 31 December 1925
tCOinS_date.inter_cal_cat = true; -- set category flag true
end
-- end temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty detection

if 1582 > tonumber(input.year) or 20 < tonumber(input.month) then -- Julian calendar or season so &rft.date gets year only
date = input.year;
if 0 ~= input.year2 and input.year ~= input.year2 then -- if a range, only the second year portion when not the same as range start year
date = string.format ('%.4d/%.4d', tonumber(input.year), tonumber(input.year2)) -- assemble the date range
end
if 20 < tonumber(input.month) then -- if season or proper-name date
local season = {[24] = 'winter', [21] = 'spring', [22] = 'summer', [23] = 'fall', [33] = '1', [34] = '2', [35] = '3', [36] = '4', [98] = 'Easter', [99] = 'Christmas'}; -- seasons lowercase, no autumn; proper-names use title case
if 0 == input.month2 then -- single season date
if 40 < tonumber(input.month) then
tCOinS_date.rftchron = season[input.month]; -- proper-name dates
elseif 30 < tonumber(input.month) then
tCOinS_date.rftquarter = season[input.month]; -- quarters
else
tCOinS_date.rftssn = season[input.month]; -- seasons
end
else -- season range with a second season specified
if input.year ~= input.year2 then -- season year – season year range or season year–year
tCOinS_date.rftssn = season[input.month]; -- start of range season; keep this?
if 0~= input.month2 then
tCOinS_date.rftchron = string.format ('%s %s – %s %s', season[input.month], input.year, season[input.month2], input.year2);
end
else -- season–season year range
tCOinS_date.rftssn = season[input.month]; -- start of range season; keep this?
tCOinS_date.rftchron = season[input.month] .. '–' .. season[input.month2]; -- season–season year range
end
end
end
tCOinS_date.rftdate = date;
return; -- done
end

if 0 ~= input.day then
date = string.format ('%s-%.2d-%.2d', input.year, tonumber(input.month), tonumber(input.day)); -- whole date
elseif 0 ~= input.month then
date = string.format ('%s-%.2d', input.year, tonumber(input.month)); -- year and month
else
date = string.format ('%s', input.year); -- just year
end

if 0 ~= input.year2 then
if 0 ~= input.day2 then
date2 = string.format ('/%s-%.2d-%.2d', input.year2, tonumber(input.month2), tonumber(input.day2)); -- whole date
elseif 0 ~= input.month2 then
date2 = string.format ('/%s-%.2d', input.year2, tonumber(input.month2)); -- year and month
else
date2 = string.format ('/%s', input.year2); -- just year
end
end

tCOinS_date.rftdate = date .. date2; -- date2 has the '/' separator
return;
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

this is the list of patterns for date formats that this module recognizes. Approximately the first half of these
patterns represent formats that might be reformatted into another format. Those that might be reformatted have
'indicator' letters that identify the content of the matching capture: 'd' (day), 'm' (month), 'a' (anchor year),
'y' (year); second day, month, year have a '2' suffix.

These patterns are used for both date validation and for reformatting. This table should not be moved to ~/Configuration
because changes to this table require changes to check_date() and to reformatter() and reformat_date()

]]

local patterns = {
-- year-initial numerical year-month-day
['ymd'] = {'^(%d%d%d%d)%-(%d%d)%-(%d%d)$', 'y', 'm', 'd'},
-- month-initial: month day, year
['Mdy'] = {'^(%D-) +([1-9]%d?), +((%d%d%d%d?)%a?)$', 'm', 'd', 'a', 'y'},
-- month-initial day range: month day–day, year; days are separated by endash
['Md-dy'] = {'^(%D-) +([1-9]%d?)[%-–]([1-9]%d?), +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'm', 'd', 'd2', 'a', 'y'},
-- day-initial: day month year
['dMy'] = {'^([1-9]%d?) +(%D-) +((%d%d%d%d?)%a?)$', 'd', 'm', 'a', 'y'},
-- year-initial: year month day; day: 1 or 2 two digits, leading zero allowed; not supported at en.wiki
-- ['yMd'] = {'^((%d%d%d%d?)%a?) +(%D-) +(%d%d?)$', 'a', 'y', 'm', 'd'},
-- day-range-initial: day–day month year; days are separated by endash
['d-dMy'] = {'^([1-9]%d?)[%-–]([1-9]%d?) +(%D-) +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'd', 'd2', 'm', 'a', 'y'},
-- day initial month-day-range: day month - day month year; uses spaced endash
['dM-dMy'] = {'^([1-9]%d?) +(%D-) +[%-–] +([1-9]%d?) +(%D-) +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'd', 'm', 'd2', 'm2', 'a', 'y'},
-- month initial month-day-range: month day – month day, year; uses spaced endash
['Md-Mdy'] = {'^(%D-) +([1-9]%d?) +[%-–] +(%D-) +([1-9]%d?), +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$','m', 'd', 'm2', 'd2', 'a', 'y'},
-- day initial month-day-year-range: day month year - day month year; uses spaced endash
['dMy-dMy'] = {'^([1-9]%d?) +(%D-) +(%d%d%d%d) +[%-–] +([1-9]%d?) +(%D-) +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'd', 'm', 'y', 'd2', 'm2', 'a', 'y2'},
-- month initial month-day-year-range: month day, year – month day, year; uses spaced endash
['Mdy-Mdy'] = {'^(%D-) +([1-9]%d?), +(%d%d%d%d) +[%-–] +(%D-) +([1-9]%d?), +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'm', 'd', 'y', 'm2', 'd2', 'a', 'y2'},

-- these date formats cannot be converted, per se, but month name can be rendered short or long
-- month/season year - month/season year; separated by spaced endash
['My-My'] = {'^(%D-) +(%d%d%d%d) +[%-–] +(%D-) +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'm', 'y', 'm2', 'a', 'y2'},
-- month/season range year; months separated by endash
['M-My'] = {'^(%D-)[%-–](%D-) +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'm', 'm2', 'a', 'y'},
-- month/season year or proper-name year; quarter year when First Quarter YYYY etc.
['My'] = {'^([^%d–]-) +((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$', 'm', 'a', 'y'}, -- this way because endash is a member of %D; %D- will match January–March 2019 when it shouldn't

-- these date formats cannot be converted
['Sy4-y2'] = {'^(%D-) +((%d%d)%d%d)[%-–]((%d%d)%a?)$'}, -- special case Winter/Summer year-year (YYYY-YY); year separated with unspaced endash
['Sy-y'] = {'^(%D-) +(%d%d%d%d)[%-–]((%d%d%d%d)%a?)$'}, -- special case Winter/Summer year-year; year separated with unspaced endash
['y-y'] = {'^(%d%d%d%d?)[%-–]((%d%d%d%d?)%a?)$'}, -- year range: YYY-YYY or YYY-YYYY or YYYY–YYYY; separated by unspaced endash; 100-9999
['y4-y2'] = {'^((%d%d)%d%d)[%-–]((%d%d)%a?)$'}, -- year range: YYYY–YY; separated by unspaced endash
['y'] = {'^((%d%d%d%d?)%a?)$'}, -- year; here accept either YYY or YYYY
}

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------

returns true and date value if that value has proper dmy, mdy, ymd format.

returns false and 9999 (embargoed forever) when date value is not proper format; assumes that when |pmc-embargo-date= is
set, the editor intended to embargo a PMC but |pmc-embargo-date= does not hold a single date.

]]

local function is_valid_embargo_date (v)
if v:match (patterns['ymd'][1]) or -- ymd
v:match (patterns['Mdy'][1]) or -- dmy
v:match (patterns['dMy'][1]) then -- mdy
return true, v;
end
return false, '9999'; -- if here not good date so return false and set embargo date to long time in future
end

--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ D A T E >----------------------------------------------------------

Check date format to see that it is one of the formats approved by WP:DATESNO or WP:DATERANGE. Exception: only
allowed range separator is endash. Additionally, check the date to see that it is a real date: no 31 in 30-day
months; no 29 February when not a leap year. Months, both long-form and three character abbreviations, and seasons
must be spelled correctly. Future years beyond next year are not allowed.

If the date fails the format tests, this function returns false and does not return values for anchor_year and
COinS_date. When this happens, the date parameter is (DEBUG: not?) used in the COinS metadata and the CITEREF identifier gets
its year from the year parameter if present otherwise CITEREF does not get a date value.

Inputs:
date_string - date string from date-holding parameters (date, year, publication-date, access-date, pmc-embargo-date, archive-date, lay-date)

Returns:
false if date string is not a real date; else
true, anchor_year, COinS_date
anchor_year can be used in CITEREF anchors
COinS_date is ISO 8601 format date; see make_COInS_date()

]]

local function check_date (date_string, param, tCOinS_date)
local year; -- assume that year2, months, and days are not used;
local year2 = 0; -- second year in a year range
local month = 0;
local month2 = 0; -- second month in a month range
local day = 0;
local day2 = 0; -- second day in a day range
local anchor_year;
local coins_date;

if date_string:match (patterns['ymd'][1]) then -- year-initial numerical year month day format
year, month, day = date_string:match (patterns['ymd'][1]);
if 12 < tonumber(month) or 1 > tonumber(month) or 1582 > tonumber(year) or 0 == tonumber(day) then return false; end -- month or day number not valid or not Gregorian calendar
anchor_year = year;

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Mdy'][1]) then -- month-initial: month day, year
month, day, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Mdy'][1]);
month = get_month_number (month);
if 0 == month then return false; end -- return false if month text isn't one of the twelve months

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Md-dy'][1]) then -- month-initial day range: month day–day, year; days are separated by endash
month, day, day2, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Md-dy'][1]);
if tonumber(day) >= tonumber(day2) then return false; end -- date range order is left to right: earlier to later; dates may not be the same;
month = get_month_number (month);
if 0 == month then return false; end -- return false if month text isn't one of the twelve months
month2=month; -- for metadata
year2 = year;

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['dMy'][1]) then -- day-initial: day month year
day, month, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['dMy'][1]);
month = get_month_number (month);
if 0 == month then return false; end -- return false if month text isn't one of the twelve months

--[[ NOT supported at en.wiki
elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['yMd'][1]) then -- year-initial: year month day; day: 1 or 2 two digits, leading zero allowed
anchor_year, year, month, day = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['yMd'][1]);
month = get_month_number (month);
if 0 == month then return false; end -- return false if month text isn't one of the twelve months
-- end NOT supported at en.wiki ]]

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['d-dMy'][1]) then -- day-range-initial: day–day month year; days are separated by endash
day, day2, month, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['d-dMy'][1]);
if tonumber(day) >= tonumber(day2) then return false; end -- date range order is left to right: earlier to later; dates may not be the same;
month = get_month_number (month);
if 0 == month then return false; end -- return false if month text isn't one of the twelve months
month2 = month; -- for metadata
year2 = year;

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['dM-dMy'][1]) then -- day initial month-day-range: day month - day month year; uses spaced endash
day, month, day2, month2, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['dM-dMy'][1]);
if (not is_valid_month_season_range(month, month2)) or not is_valid_year(year) then return false; end -- date range order is left to right: earlier to later;
month = get_month_number (month); -- for metadata
month2 = get_month_number (month2);
year2 = year;

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Md-Mdy'][1]) then -- month initial month-day-range: month day – month day, year; uses spaced endash
month, day, month2, day2, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Md-Mdy'][1]);
if (not is_valid_month_season_range(month, month2, param)) or not is_valid_year(year) then return false; end
month = get_month_number (month); -- for metadata
month2 = get_month_number (month2);
year2 = year;

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['dMy-dMy'][1]) then -- day initial month-day-year-range: day month year - day month year; uses spaced endash
day, month, year, day2, month2, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['dMy-dMy'][1]);
if tonumber(year2) <= tonumber(year) then return false; end -- must be sequential years, left to right, earlier to later
if not is_valid_year(year2) or not is_valid_month_range_style(month, month2) then return false; end -- year2 no more than one year in the future; months same style
month = get_month_number (month); -- for metadata
month2 = get_month_number (month2);
if 0 == month or 0 == month2 then return false; end -- both must be valid

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Mdy-Mdy'][1]) then -- month initial month-day-year-range: month day, year – month day, year; uses spaced endash
month, day, year, month2, day2, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Mdy-Mdy'][1]);
if tonumber(year2) <= tonumber(year) then return false; end -- must be sequential years, left to right, earlier to later
if not is_valid_year(year2) or not is_valid_month_range_style(month, month2) then return false; end -- year2 no more than one year in the future; months same style
month = get_month_number (month); -- for metadata
month2 = get_month_number(month2);
if 0 == month or 0 == month2 then return false; end -- both must be valid

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Sy4-y2'][1]) then -- special case Winter/Summer year-year (YYYY-YY); year separated with unspaced endash
local century;
month, year, century, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Sy4-y2'][1]);
if 'Winter' ~= month and 'Summer' ~= month then return false end; -- 'month' can only be Winter or Summer
anchor_year = year .. '–' .. anchor_year; -- assemble anchor_year from both years
year2 = century..year2; -- add the century to year2 for comparisons
if 1 ~= tonumber(year2) - tonumber(year) then return false; end -- must be sequential years, left to right, earlier to later
if not is_valid_year(year2) then return false; end -- no year farther in the future than next year
month = get_season_number(month, param);

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Sy-y'][1]) then -- special case Winter/Summer year-year; year separated with unspaced endash
month, year, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['Sy-y'][1]);
if 'Winter' ~= month and 'Summer' ~= month then return false end; -- 'month' can only be Winter or Summer
anchor_year = year .. '–' .. anchor_year; -- assemble anchor_year from both years
if 1 ~= tonumber(year2) - tonumber(year) then return false; end -- must be sequential years, left to right, earlier to later
if not is_valid_year(year2) then return false; end -- no year farther in the future than next year
month = get_season_number (month, param); -- for metadata

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['My-My'][1]) then -- month/season year - month/season year; separated by spaced endash
month, year, month2, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['My-My'][1]);
anchor_year = year .. '–' .. anchor_year; -- assemble anchor_year from both years
if tonumber(year) >= tonumber(year2) then return false; end -- left to right, earlier to later, not the same
if not is_valid_year(year2) then return false; end -- no year farther in the future than next year
if 0 ~= get_month_number(month) and 0 ~= get_month_number(month2) and is_valid_month_range_style(month, month2) then -- both must be month year, same month style
month = get_month_number(month);
month2 = get_month_number(month2);
elseif 0 ~= get_season_number(month, param) and 0 ~= get_season_number(month2, param) then -- both must be season year, not mixed
month = get_season_number(month, param);
month2 = get_season_number(month2, param);
else
return false;
end

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['M-My'][1]) then -- month/season range year; months separated by endash
month, month2, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['M-My'][1]);
if (not is_valid_month_season_range(month, month2, param)) or (not is_valid_year(year)) then return false; end
if 0 ~= get_month_number(month) then -- determined to be a valid range so just check this one to know if month or season
month = get_month_number(month);
month2 = get_month_number(month2);
if 0 == month or 0 == month2 then return false; end
else
month = get_season_number(month, param);
month2 = get_season_number(month2, param);
end
year2 = year;

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['My'][1]) then -- month/season/quarter/proper-name year
month, anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['My'][1]);
if not is_valid_year(year) then return false; end
month = get_element_number(month, param); -- get month season quarter proper-name number or nil
if not month then return false; end -- not valid whatever it is

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['y-y'][1]) then -- Year range: YYY-YYY or YYY-YYYY or YYYY–YYYY; separated by unspaced endash; 100-9999
year, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['y-y'][1]);
anchor_year = year .. '–' .. anchor_year; -- assemble anchor year from both years
if tonumber(year) >= tonumber(year2) then return false; end -- left to right, earlier to later, not the same
if not is_valid_year(year2) then return false; end -- no year farther in the future than next year

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['y4-y2'][1]) then -- Year range: YYYY–YY; separated by unspaced endash
local century;
year, century, anchor_year, year2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['y4-y2'][1]);
anchor_year = year .. '–' .. anchor_year; -- assemble anchor year from both years

if in_array (param, {'date', 'publication-date', 'year'}) then
add_prop_cat ('year-range-abbreviated');
end

if 13 > tonumber(year2) then return false; end -- don't allow 2003-05 which might be May 2003
year2 = century .. year2; -- add the century to year2 for comparisons
if tonumber(year) >= tonumber(year2) then return false; end -- left to right, earlier to later, not the same
if not is_valid_year(year2) then return false; end -- no year farther in the future than next year

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['y'][1]) then -- year; here accept either YYY or YYYY
anchor_year, year = mw.ustring.match(date_string, patterns['y'][1]);
if false == is_valid_year(year) then
return false;
end

else
return false; -- date format not one of the MOS:DATE approved formats
end

if 'access-date' == param then -- test accessdate here because we have numerical date parts
if 0 ~= year and 0 ~= month and 0 ~= day and -- all parts of a single date required
0 == year2 and 0 == month2 and 0 == day2 then -- none of these; accessdate must not be a range
if not is_valid_accessdate(year .. '-' .. month .. '-' .. day) then
return false; -- return false when accessdate out of bounds
end
else
return false; -- return false when accessdate is a range of two dates
end
end

local result=true; -- check whole dates for validity; assume true because not all dates will go through this test
if 0 ~= year and 0 ~= month and 0 ~= day and 0 == year2 and 0 == month2 and 0 == day2 then -- YMD (simple whole date)
result = is_valid_date (year, month, day, param); -- <param> for |pmc-embargo-date=

elseif 0 ~= year and 0 ~= month and 0 ~= day and 0 == year2 and 0 == month2 and 0 ~= day2 then -- YMD-d (day range)
result = is_valid_date (year, month, day);
result = result and is_valid_date (year, month, day2);

elseif 0 ~= year and 0 ~= month and 0 ~= day and 0 == year2 and 0 ~= month2 and 0 ~= day2 then -- YMD-md (day month range)
result = is_valid_date (year, month, day);
result = result and is_valid_date (year, month2, day2);

elseif 0 ~= year and 0 ~= month and 0 ~= day and 0 ~= year2 and 0 ~= month2 and 0 ~= day2 then -- YMD-ymd (day month year range)
result = is_valid_date(year, month, day);
result = result and is_valid_date(year2, month2, day2);
end

if false == result then return false; end

if nil ~= tCOinS_date then -- this table only passed into this function when testing |date= parameter values
make_COinS_date ({year = year, month = month, day = day, year2 = year2, month2 = month2, day2 = day2}, tCOinS_date); -- make an ISO 8601 date string for COinS
end

return true, anchor_year; -- format is good and date string represents a real date
end

--[[--------------------------< D A T E S >--------------------------------------------------------------------

Cycle the date-holding parameters in passed table date_parameters_list through check_date() to check compliance with MOS:DATE. For all valid dates, check_date() returns
true. The |date= parameter test is unique, it is the only date holding parameter from which values for anchor_year (used in CITEREF identifiers) and COinS_date (used in
the COinS metadata) are derived. The |date= parameter is the only date-holding parameter that is allowed to contain the no-date keywords "n.d." or "nd" (without quotes).

Unlike most error messages created in this module, only one error message is created by this function. Because all of the date holding parameters are processed serially,
parameters with errors are added to the <error_list> sequence table as the dates are tested.

]]

local function dates(date_parameters_list, tCOinS_date, error_list)
local anchor_year; -- will return as nil if the date being tested is not |date=
local COinS_date; -- will return as nil if the date being tested is not |date=
local embargo_date; -- if embargo date is a good dmy, mdy, ymd date then holds original value else reset to 9999
local good_date = false;

for k, v in pairs(date_parameters_list) do -- for each date-holding parameter in the list
if is_set(v.val) then -- if the parameter has a value
v.val = mw.ustring.gsub(v.val, '%d', cfg.date_names.local_digits); -- translate 'local' digits to Western 0-9
if v.val:match("^c%. [1-9]%d%d%d?%a?$") then -- special case for c. year or with or without CITEREF disambiguator - only |date= and |year=
local year = v.val:match("c%. ([1-9]%d%d%d?)%a?"); -- get the year portion so it can be tested
if 'date' == k then
anchor_year, COinS_date = v.val:match("((c%. [1-9]%d%d%d?)%a?)"); -- anchor year and COinS_date only from |date= parameter
good_date = is_valid_year(year);
elseif 'year' == k then
good_date = is_valid_year(year);
end
elseif 'date' == k then -- if the parameter is |date=
if v.val:match("^n%.d%.%a?$") then -- ToDo: I18N -- if |date=n.d. with or without a CITEREF disambiguator
good_date, anchor_year, COinS_date = true, v.val:match("((n%.d%.)%a?)"); -- ToDo: I18N -- "n.d."; no error when date parameter is set to no date
elseif v.val:match("^nd%a?$") then -- ToDo: I18N -- if |date=nd with or without a CITEREF disambiguator
good_date, anchor_year, COinS_date = true, v.val:match("((nd)%a?)"); -- ToDo: I18N -- "nd"; no error when date parameter is set to no date
else
good_date, anchor_year, COinS_date = check_date (v.val, k, tCOinS_date); -- go test the date
end
elseif 'year' == k then -- if the parameter is |year= it should hold only a year value
if v.val:match("^[1-9]%d%d%d?%a?$") then -- if |year = 3 or 4 digits only with or without a CITEREF disambiguator
good_date, anchor_year, COinS_date = true, v.val:match("((%d+)%a?)");
end
elseif 'pmc-embargo-date' == k then -- if the parameter is |pmc-embargo-date=
good_date = check_date (v.val, k); -- go test the date
if true == good_date then -- if the date is a valid date
good_date, embargo_date = is_valid_embargo_date (v.val); -- is |pmc-embargo-date= date a single dmy, mdy, or ymd formatted date? yes: returns embargo date; no: returns 9999
end
else -- any other date-holding parameter
good_date = check_date (v.val, k); -- go test the date
end
if false == good_date then -- assemble one error message so we don't add the tracking category multiple times
table.insert (error_list, wrap_style ('parameter', v.name)); -- make parameter name suitable for error message list
end
end
end
return anchor_year, embargo_date; -- and done
end

--[[--------------------------< Y E A R _ D A T E _ C H E C K >------------------------------------------------

Compare the value provided in |year= with the year value(s) provided in |date=. This function sets a local numeric value:
0 - year value does not match the year value in date
1 - (default) year value matches the year value in date or one of the year values when date contains two years
2 - year value matches the year value in date when date is in the form YYYY-MM-DD and year is disambiguated (|year=YYYYx)

the numeric value in <result> determines the 'output' if any from this function:
0 – adds error message to error_list sequence table
1 – adds maint cat
2 – does nothing

]]

local function year_date_check (year_string, year_origin, date_string, date_origin, error_list)
local year;
local date1;
local date2;
local result = 1; -- result of the test; assume that the test passes

year = year_string:match ('(%d%d%d%d?)');

if date_string:match ('%d%d%d%d%-%d%d%-%d%d') and year_string:match ('%d%d%d%d%a') then --special case where both date and year are required YYYY-MM-DD and YYYYx
date1 = date_string:match ('(%d%d%d%d)');
year = year_string:match ('(%d%d%d%d)');
if year ~= date1 then
result = 0; -- years don't match
else
result = 2; -- years match; but because disambiguated, don't add to maint cat
end

elseif date_string:match ("%d%d%d%d?.-%d%d%d%d?") then -- any of the standard range formats of date with two three- or four-digit years
date1, date2 = date_string:match ("(%d%d%d%d?).-(%d%d%d%d?)");
if year ~= date1 and year ~= date2 then
result = 0;
end

elseif mw.ustring.match(date_string, "%d%d%d%d[%-–]%d%d") then -- YYYY-YY date ranges
local century;
date1, century, date2 = mw.ustring.match(date_string, "((%d%d)%d%d)[%-–]+(%d%d)");
date2 = century..date2; -- convert YY to YYYY
if year ~= date1 and year ~= date2 then
result = 0;
end

elseif date_string:match ("%d%d%d%d?") then -- any of the standard formats of date with one year
date1 = date_string:match ("(%d%d%d%d?)");
if year ~= date1 then
result = 0;
end
else -- should never get here; this function called only when no other date errors
result = 0; -- no recognizable year in date
end

if 0 == result then -- year / date mismatch
table.insert (error_list, substitute (cfg.messages['mismatch'], {year_origin, date_origin})); -- add error message to error_list sequence table
elseif 1 == result then -- redundant year / date
set_message ('maint_date_year'); -- add a maint cat
end
end

--[[--------------------------< R E F O R M A T T E R >--------------------------------------------------------

reformat 'date' into new format specified by format_param if pattern_idx (the current format of 'date') can be
reformatted. Does the grunt work for reformat_dates().

The table re_formats maps pattern_idx (current format) and format_param (desired format) to a table that holds:
format string used by string.format()
identifier letters ('d', 'm', 'y', 'd2', 'm2', 'y2') that serve as indexes into a table t{} that holds captures
from mw.ustring.match() for the various date parts specified by patterns[pattern_idx][1]

Items in patterns{} have the general form:
['ymd'] = {'^(%d%d%d%d)%-(%d%d)%-(%d%d)$', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, where:
['ymd'] is pattern_idx
patterns['ymd'][1] is the match pattern with captures for mw.ustring.match()
patterns['ymd'][2] is an indicator letter identifying the content of the first capture
patterns['ymd'][3] ... the second capture etc.

when a pattern matches a date, the captures are loaded into table t{} in capture order using the idemtifier
characters as indexes into t{} For the above, a ymd date is in t{} as:
t.y = first capture (year), t.m = second capture (month), t.d = third capture (day)

To reformat, this function is called with the pattern_idx that matches the current format of the date and with
format_param set to the desired format. This function loads table t{} as described and then calls string.format()
with the format string specified by re_format[pattern_idx][format_param][1] using values taken from t{} according
to the capture identifier letters specified by patterns[pattern_idx][format_param][n] where n is 2..

]]

local re_formats = {
['ymd'] = { -- date format is ymd; reformat to:
['mdy'] = {'%s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'y'}, -- |df=mdy
['dmy'] = {'%s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'y'}, -- |df=dmy
-- ['yMd'] = {'%s %s %s', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, -- |df=yMd; not supported at en.wiki
},
['Mdy'] = { -- date format is Mdy; reformat to:
['mdy'] = {'%s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'y'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['dmy'] = {'%s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'y'}, -- |df=dmy
['ymd'] = {'%s-%s-%s', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, -- |df=ymd
-- ['yMd'] = {'%s %s %s', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, -- |df=yMd; not supported at en.wiki
},
['dMy'] = { -- date format is dMy; reformat to:
['dmy'] = {'%s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'y'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['mdy'] = {'%s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'y'}, -- |df=mdy
['ymd'] = {'%s-%s-%s', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, -- |df=ymd
-- ['yMd'] = {'%s %s %s', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, -- |df=yMd; not supported at en.wiki
},
['Md-dy'] = { -- date format is Md-dy; reformat to:
['mdy'] = {'%s %s–%s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'd2', 'y'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['dmy'] = {'%s–%s %s %s', 'd', 'd2', 'm', 'y'}, -- |df=dmy -> d-dMy
},
['d-dMy'] = { -- date format is d-d>y; reformat to:
['dmy'] = {'%s–%s %s %s', 'd', 'd2', 'm', 'y'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['mdy'] = {'%s %s–%s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'd2', 'y'}, -- |df=mdy -> Md-dy
},
['dM-dMy'] = { -- date format is dM-dMy; reformat to:
['dmy'] = {'%s %s – %s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'd2', 'm2', 'y'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['mdy'] = {'%s %s – %s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'm2', 'd2', 'y'}, -- |df=mdy -> Md-Mdy
},
['Md-Mdy'] = { -- date format is Md-Mdy; reformat to:
['mdy'] = {'%s %s – %s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'm2', 'd2', 'y'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['dmy'] = {'%s %s – %s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'd2', 'm2', 'y'}, -- |df=dmy -> dM-dMy
},
['dMy-dMy'] = { -- date format is dMy-dMy; reformat to:
['dmy'] = {'%s %s %s – %s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'y', 'd2', 'm2', 'y2'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['mdy'] = {'%s %s, %s – %s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'y', 'm2', 'd2', 'y2'}, -- |df=mdy -> Mdy-Mdy
},
['Mdy-Mdy'] = { -- date format is Mdy-Mdy; reformat to:
['mdy'] = {'%s %s, %s – %s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'y', 'm2', 'd2', 'y2'}, -- for long/short reformatting
['dmy'] = {'%s %s %s – %s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'y', 'd2', 'm2', 'y2'}, -- |df=dmy -> dMy-dMy
},
['My-My'] = { -- these for long/short reformatting
['any'] = {'%s %s – %s %s', 'm', 'y', 'm2', 'y2'}, -- dmy/mdy agnostic
},
['M-My'] = { -- these for long/short reformatting
['any'] = {'%s–%s %s', 'm', 'm2', 'y'}, -- dmy/mdy agnostic
},
['My'] = { -- these for long/short reformatting
['any'] = {'%s %s', 'm', 'y'}, -- dmy/mdy agnostic
},
-- ['yMd'] = { -- not supported at en.wiki
-- ['mdy'] = {'%s %s, %s', 'm', 'd', 'y'}, -- |df=mdy
-- ['dmy'] = {'%s %s %s', 'd', 'm', 'y'}, -- |df=dmy
-- ['ymd'] = {'%s-%s-%s', 'y', 'm', 'd'}, -- |df=ymd
-- },
}

local function reformatter (date, pattern_idx, format_param, mon_len)
if not in_array (pattern_idx, {'ymd', 'Mdy', 'Md-dy', 'dMy', 'yMd', 'd-dMy', 'dM-dMy', 'Md-Mdy', 'dMy-dMy', 'Mdy-Mdy', 'My-My', 'M-My', 'My'}) then
return; -- not in this set of date format patterns then not a reformattable date
end

if 'ymd' == format_param and in_array (pattern_idx, {'ymd', 'Md-dy', 'd-dMy', 'dM-dMy', 'Md-Mdy', 'dMy-dMy', 'Mdy-Mdy', 'My-My', 'M-My', 'My'}) then
return; -- ymd date ranges not supported at en.wiki; no point in reformatting ymd to ymd
end

if in_array (pattern_idx, {'My', 'M-My', 'My-My'}) then -- these are not dmy/mdy so can't be 'reformatted' into either
format_param = 'any'; -- so format-agnostic
end

-- yMd is not supported at en.wiki; when yMd is supported at your wiki, uncomment the next line
-- if 'yMd' == format_param and in_array (pattern_idx, {'yMd', 'Md-dy', 'd-dMy', 'dM-dMy', 'Md-Mdy', 'dMy-dMy', 'Mdy-Mdy'}) then -- these formats not convertable; yMd not supported at en.wiki
if 'yMd' == format_param then -- yMd not supported at en.wiki; when yMd is supported at your wiki, remove or comment-out this line
return; -- not a reformattable date
end

local c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7; -- these hold the captures specified in patterns[pattern_idx][1]
c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7 = mw.ustring.match (date, patterns[pattern_idx][1]); -- get the captures

local t = { -- table that holds k/v pairs of date parts from the captures and patterns[pattern_idx][2..]
[patterns[pattern_idx][2]] = c1; -- at minimum there is always one capture with a matching indicator letter
[patterns[pattern_idx][3] or 'x'] = c2; -- patterns can have a variable number of captures; each capture requires an indicator letter;
[patterns[pattern_idx][4] or 'x'] = c3; -- where there is no capture, there is no indicator letter so n in patterns[pattern_idx][n] will be nil;
[patterns[pattern_idx][5] or 'x'] = c4; -- the 'x' here spoofs an indicator letter to prevent 'table index is nil' error
[patterns[pattern_idx][6] or 'x'] = c5;
[patterns[pattern_idx][7] or 'x'] = c6;
[patterns[pattern_idx][8] or 'x'] = c7;
};

if t.a then -- if this date has an anchor year capture
t.y = t.a; -- use the anchor year capture when reassembling the date
end

if tonumber(t.m) then -- if raw month is a number (converting from ymd)
if 's' == mon_len then -- if we are to use abbreviated month names
t.m = cfg.date_names['inv_local_s'][tonumber(t.m)]; -- convert it to a month name
else
t.m = cfg.date_names['inv_local_l'][tonumber(t.m)]; -- convert it to a month name
end
t.d = t.d:gsub ('0(%d)', '%1'); -- strip leading '0' from day if present
elseif 'ymd' == format_param then -- when converting to ymd
t.y = t.y:gsub ('%a', ''); -- strip CITREF disambiguator if present; anchor year already known so process can proceed; TODO: maint message?
if 1582 > tonumber (t.y) then -- ymd format dates not allowed before 1582
return;
end
t.m = string.format ('%02d', get_month_number (t.m)); -- make sure that month and day are two digits
t.d = string.format ('%02d', t.d);
elseif mon_len then -- if mon_len is set to either 'short' or 'long'
for _, mon in ipairs ({'m', 'm2'}) do -- because there can be two month names, check both
if t[mon] then
t[mon] = get_month_number (t[mon]); -- get the month number for this month (is length agnostic)
if 0 == t[mon] then return; end -- seasons and named dates can't be converted
t[mon] = (('s' == mon_len) and cfg.date_names['inv_local_s'][t[mon]]) or cfg.date_names['inv_local_l'][t[mon]]; -- fetch month name according to length
end
end
end

local new_date = string.format (re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][1], -- format string
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][2]], -- named captures from t{}
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][3]],
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][4]],
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][5]],
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][6]],
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][7]],
t[re_formats[pattern_idx][format_param][8]]
);

return new_date;
end

--[[-------------------------< R E F O R M A T _ D A T E S >--------------------------------------------------

Reformats existing dates into the format specified by format.

format is one of several manual keywords: dmy, dmy-all, mdy, mdy-all, ymd, ymd-all. The -all version includes
access- and archive-dates; otherwise these dates are not reformatted.

This function allows automatic date formatting. In ~/Configuration, the article source is searched for one of
the {{use xxx dates}} templates. If found, xxx becomes the global date format as xxx-all. If |cs1-dates= in
{{use xxx dates}} has legitimate value then that value determines how cs1|2 dates will be rendered. Legitimate
values for |cs1-dates= are:
l - all dates are rendered with long month names
ls - publication dates use long month names; access-/archive-dates use abbreviated month names
ly - publication dates use long month names; access-/archive-dates rendered in ymd format
s - all dates are rendered with abbreviated (short) month names
sy - publication dates use abbreviated month names; access-/archive-dates rendered in ymd format
y - all dates are rendered in ymd format

the format argument for automatic date formatting will be the format specified by {{use xxx dates}} with the
value supplied by |cs1-dates so one of: xxx-l, xxx-ls, xxx-ly, xxx-s, xxx-sy, xxx-y, or simply xxx (|cs1-dates=
empty, omitted, or invalid) where xxx shall be either of dmy or mdy.

dates are extracted from date_parameters_list, reformatted (if appropriate), and then written back into the
list in the new format. Dates in date_parameters_list are presumed here to be valid (no errors). This function
returns true when a date has been reformatted, false else. Actual reformatting is done by reformatter().

]]

local function reformat_dates (date_parameters_list, format)
local all = false; -- set to false to skip access- and archive-dates
local len_p = 'l'; -- default publication date length shall be long
local len_a = 'l'; -- default access-/archive-date length shall be long
local result = false;
local new_date;

if format:match('%a+%-all') then -- manual df keyword; auto df keyword when length not specified in {{use xxx dates}};
format = format:match('(%a+)%-all'); -- extract the format
all = true; -- all dates are long format dates because this keyword doesn't specify length
elseif format:match('%a+%-[lsy][sy]?') then -- auto df keywords; internal only
all = true; -- auto df applies to all dates; use length specified by capture len_p for all dates
format, len_p, len_a = format:match('(%a+)%-([lsy])([sy]?)'); -- extract the format and length keywords
if 'y' == len_p then -- because allowed by MOS:DATEUNIFY (sort of) range dates and My dates not reformatted
format = 'ymd'; -- override {{use xxx dates}}
elseif (not is_set(len_a)) or (len_p == len_a) then -- no access-/archive-date length specified or same length as publication dates then
len_a = len_p; -- in case len_a not set
end
end -- else only publication dates and they are long

for param_name, param_val in pairs (date_parameters_list) do -- for each date-holding parameter in the list
if is_set (param_val.val) then -- if the parameter has a value
if not (not all and in_array (param_name, {'access-date', 'archive-date'})) then -- skip access- or archive-date unless format is xxx-all; yeah, ugly; TODO: find a better way
for pattern_idx, pattern in pairs (patterns) do
if mw.ustring.match (param_val.val, pattern[1]) then
if all and in_array (param_name, {'access-date', 'archive-date'}) then -- if this date is an access- or archive-date
new_date = reformatter (param_val.val, pattern_idx, (('y' == len_a) and 'ymd') or format, len_a); -- choose ymd or dmy/mdy according to len_a setting
else -- all other dates
new_date = reformatter (param_val.val, pattern_idx, format, len_p);
end

if new_date then -- set when date was reformatted
date_parameters_list[param_name].val = new_date; -- update date in date list
result = true; -- and announce that changes have been made
end
end -- if
end -- for
end -- if
end -- if
end -- for
return result; -- declare boolean result and done
end

--[[--------------------------< D A T E _ H Y P H E N _ T O _ D A S H >----------------------------------------

Loops through the list of date-holding parameters and converts any hyphen to an ndash. Not called if the cs1|2
template has any date errors.

Modifies the date_parameters_list and returns true if hyphens are replaced, else returns false.

]]

local function date_hyphen_to_dash (date_parameters_list)
local result = false;
local n;
for param_name, param_val in pairs(date_parameters_list) do -- for each date-holding parameter in the list
if is_set (param_val.val) and
not mw.ustring.match (param_val.val, patterns.ymd[1]) then -- for those that are not ymd dates (ustring because here digits may not be Western)
param_val.val, n = param_val.val:gsub ('%-', '–'); -- replace any hyphen with ndash
if 0 ~= n then
date_parameters_list[param_name].val = param_val.val; -- update the list
result = true;
end
end
end
return result; -- so we know if any hyphens were replaced
end

--[[-------------------------< D A T E _ N A M E _ X L A T E >------------------------------------------------

Attempts to translate English month names to local-language month names using names supplied by MediaWiki's
date parser function. This is simple name-for-name replacement and may not work for all languages.

if xlat_dig is true, this function will also translate Western (English) digits to the local language's digits.
This will also translate ymd dates.

]]

local function date_name_xlate (date_parameters_list, xlt_dig)
local xlate;
local mode; -- long or short month names
local modified = false;
local date;

for param_name, param_val in pairs(date_parameters_list) do -- for each date-holding parameter in the list
if is_set(param_val.val) then -- if the parameter has a value
date = param_val.val;
for month in mw.ustring.gmatch (date, '%a+') do -- iterate through all dates in the date (single date or date range)
if cfg.date_names.en.long[month] then
mode = 'F'; -- English name is long so use long local name
elseif cfg.date_names.en.short[month] then
mode = 'M'; -- English name is short so use short local name
else
mode = nil; -- not an English month name; could be local language month name or an English season name
end

if mode then -- might be a season
xlate = lang_object:formatDate(mode, '1' .. month); -- translate the month name to this local language
date = mw.ustring.gsub (date, month, xlate); -- replace the English with the translation
date_parameters_list[param_name].val = date; -- save the translated date
modified = true;
end
end

if xlt_dig then -- shall we also translate digits?
date = date:gsub ('%d', cfg.date_names.xlate_digits); -- translate digits from Western to 'local digits'
date_parameters_list[param_name].val = date; -- save the translated date
modified = true;
end
end
end

return modified;
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S E L E C T E D _ M O D U L E S >--------------------------------------

Sets local imported functions table to same (live or sandbox) as that used by the other modules.

]]

local function set_selected_modules (cfg_table_ptr, utilities_page_ptr)
add_prop_cat = utilities_page_ptr.add_prop_cat ; -- import functions from selected Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities module
is_set = utilities_page_ptr.is_set;
in_array = utilities_page_ptr.in_array;
set_message = utilities_page_ptr.set_message;
substitute = utilities_page_ptr.substitute;
wrap_style = utilities_page_ptr.wrap_style;

cfg = cfg_table_ptr; -- import tables from selected Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration
end

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T E D F U N C T I O N S >------------------------------------------
]]

return { -- return exported functions
dates = dates,
year_date_check = year_date_check,
reformat_dates = reformat_dates,
date_hyphen_to_dash = date_hyphen_to_dash,
date_name_xlate = date_name_xlate,
set_selected_modules = set_selected_modules
}

Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist

2022-04-04T14:03:47Z

Zoran: Created page with "--[[--------------------------< S U P P O R T E D P A R A M E T E R S >-------------------------------------- Because a steady-state signal conveys no useful information, w..."

--[[--------------------------< S U P P O R T E D P A R A M E T E R S >--------------------------------------

Because a steady-state signal conveys no useful information, whitelist.basic_arguments[] list items can have three values:
true - these parameters are valid and supported parameters
false - these parameters are deprecated but still supported
tracked - these parameters are valid and supported parameters tracked in an eponymous properties category
nil - these parameters are no longer supported. remove entirely

]]

local basic_arguments = {
['accessdate'] = true,
['access-date'] = true,
['agency'] = true,
['archivedate'] = true,
['archive-date'] = true,
['archive-format'] = true,
['archiveurl'] = true,
['archive-url'] = true,
['article'] = true,
['article-format'] = true,
['article-url'] = true,
['article-url-access'] = true,
['arxiv'] = true, -- cite arxiv; here because allowed in cite ... as identifier
['asin'] = true,
['ASIN'] = true,
['asin-tld'] = true,
['at'] = true,
['author'] = true,
['author-first'] = true,
['author-given'] = true,
['author-last'] = true,
['author-surname'] = true,
['authorlink'] = true,
['author-link'] = true,
['author-mask'] = true,
['authors'] = true,
['bibcode'] = true,
['bibcode-access'] = true,
['biorxiv'] = true, -- cite biorxiv; here because allowed in cite ... as identifier
['chapter'] = true,
['chapter-format'] = true,
['chapter-url'] = true,
['chapter-url-access'] = true,
['citeseerx'] = true, -- cite citeseerx; here because allowed in cite ... as identifier
['collaboration'] = true,
['contribution'] = true,
['contribution-format'] = true,
['contribution-url'] = true,
['contribution-url-access'] = true,
['contributor'] = true,
['contributor-first'] = true,
['contributor-given'] = true,
['contributor-last'] = true,
['contributor-surname'] = true,
['contributor-link'] = true,
['contributor-mask'] = true,
['date'] = true,
['department'] = true,
['df'] = true,
['dictionary'] = true,
['display-authors'] = true,
['display-contributors'] = true,
['display-editors'] = true,
['display-interviewers'] = true,
['display-subjects'] = true,
['display-translators'] = true,
['doi'] = true,
['DOI'] = true,
['doi-access'] = true,
['doi-broken-date'] = true,
['edition'] = true,
['editor'] = true,
['editor-first'] = true,
['editor-given'] = true,
['editor-last'] = true,
['editor-surname'] = true,
['editor-link'] = true,
['editor-mask'] = true,
['eissn'] = true,
['EISSN'] = true,
['encyclopaedia'] = true,
['encyclopedia'] = true,
['entry'] = true,
['entry-format'] = true,
['entry-url'] = true,
['entry-url-access'] = true,
['eprint'] = true, -- cite arxiv; here because allowed in cite ... as identifier
['first'] = true,
['format'] = true,
['given'] = true,
['hdl'] = true,
['HDL'] = true,
['hdl-access'] = true,
['host'] = true, -- unique to certain templates?
['id'] = true,
['ID'] = true,
['institution'] = true, -- constrain to cite thesis?
['interviewer'] = true,
['interviewer-first'] = true,
['interviewer-given'] = true,
['interviewer-last'] = true,
['interviewer-surname'] = true,
['interviewer-link'] = true,
['interviewer-mask'] = true,
['isbn'] = true,
['ISBN'] = true,
['ismn'] = true,
['ISMN'] = true,
['issn'] = true,
['ISSN'] = true,
['issue'] = true,
['jfm'] = true,
['JFM'] = true,
['journal'] = true,
['jstor'] = true,
['JSTOR'] = true,
['jstor-access'] = true,
['lang'] = true,
['language'] = true,
['last'] = true,
['lay-date'] = false,
['lay-format'] = false,
['lay-source'] = false,
['lay-url'] = false,
['lccn'] = true,
['LCCN'] = true,
['location'] = true,
['magazine'] = true,
['medium'] = true,
['minutes'] = true, -- constrain to cite AV media and podcast?
['mode'] = true,
['mr'] = true,
['MR'] = true,
['name-list-style'] = true,
['newspaper'] = true,
['no-pp'] = true,
['no-tracking'] = true,
['number'] = true,
['oclc'] = true,
['OCLC'] = true,
['ol'] = true,
['OL'] = true,
['ol-access'] = true,
['orig-date'] = true,
['origyear'] = true,
['orig-year'] = true,
['osti'] = true,
['OSTI'] = true,
['osti-access'] = true,
['others'] = true,
['p'] = true,
['page'] = true,
['pages'] = true,
['people'] = true,
['periodical'] = true,
['place'] = true,
['pmc'] = true,
['PMC'] = true,
['pmc-embargo-date'] = true,
['pmid'] = true,
['PMID'] = true,
['postscript'] = true,
['pp'] = true,
['publication-date'] = true,
['publication-place'] = true,
['publisher'] = true,
['quotation'] = true,
['quote'] = true,
['quote-page'] = true,
['quote-pages'] = true,
['ref'] = true,
['rfc'] = true,
['RFC'] = true,
['sbn'] = true,
['SBN'] = true,
['scale'] = true,
['script-article'] = true,
['script-chapter'] = true,
['script-contribution'] = true,
['script-entry'] = true,
['script-journal'] = true,
['script-magazine'] = true,
['script-newspaper'] = true,
['script-periodical'] = true,
['script-quote'] = true,
['script-section'] = true,
['script-title'] = true,
['script-website'] = true,
['script-work'] = true,
['section'] = true,
['section-format'] = true,
['section-url'] = true,
['section-url-access'] = true,
['series'] = true,
['ssrn'] = true, -- cite ssrn; these three here because allowed in cite ... as identifier
['SSRN'] = true,
['ssrn-access'] = true,
['subject'] = true,
['subject-link'] = true,
['subject-mask'] = true,
['surname'] = true,
['s2cid'] = true,
['S2CID'] = true,
['s2cid-access'] = true,
['template-doc-demo'] = true,
['time'] = true, -- constrain to cite av media and podcast?
['time-caption'] = true, -- constrain to cite av media and podcast?
['title'] = true,
['title-link'] = true,
['translator'] = true,
['translator-first'] = true,
['translator-given'] = true,
['translator-last'] = true,
['translator-surname'] = true,
['translator-link'] = true,
['translator-mask'] = true,
['trans-article'] = true,
['trans-chapter'] = true,
['trans-contribution'] = true,
['trans-entry'] = true,
['trans-journal'] = true,
['trans-magazine'] = true,
['trans-newspaper'] = true,
['trans-periodical'] = true,
['trans-quote'] = true,
['trans-section'] = true,
['trans-title'] = true,
['trans-website'] = true,
['trans-work'] = true,
['type'] = true,
['url'] = true,
['URL'] = true,
['url-access'] = true,
['url-status'] = true,
['vauthors'] = true,
['veditors'] = true,
['version'] = true,
['via'] = true,
['volume'] = true,
['website'] = true,
['work'] = true,
['year'] = true,
['zbl'] = true,
['ZBL'] = true,
}

local numbered_arguments = {
['author#'] = true,
['author-first#'] = true,
['author#-first'] = true,
['author-given#'] = true,
['author#-given'] = true,
['author-last#'] = true,
['author#-last'] = true,
['author-surname#'] = true,
['author#-surname'] = true,
['author-link#'] = true,
['author#-link'] = true,
['authorlink#'] = true,
['author#link'] = true,
['author-mask#'] = true,
['author#-mask'] = true,
['contributor#'] = true,
['contributor-first#'] = true,
['contributor#-first'] = true,
['contributor-given#'] = true,
['contributor#-given'] = true,
['contributor-last#'] = true,
['contributor#-last'] = true,
['contributor-surname#'] = true,
['contributor#-surname'] = true,
['contributor-link#'] = true,
['contributor#-link'] = true,
['contributor-mask#'] = true,
['contributor#-mask'] = true,
['editor#'] = true,
['editor-first#'] = true,
['editor#-first'] = true,
['editor-given#'] = true,
['editor#-given'] = true,
['editor-last#'] = true,
['editor#-last'] = true,
['editor-surname#'] = true,
['editor#-surname'] = true,
['editor-link#'] = true,
['editor#-link'] = true,
['editor-mask#'] = true,
['editor#-mask'] = true,
['first#'] = true,
['given#'] = true,
['host#'] = true,
['interviewer#'] = true,
['interviewer-first#'] = true,
['interviewer#-first'] = true,
['interviewer-given#'] = true,
['interviewer#-given'] = true,
['interviewer-last#'] = true,
['interviewer#-last'] = true,
['interviewer-surname#'] = true,
['interviewer#-surname'] = true,
['interviewer-link#'] = true,
['interviewer#-link'] = true,
['interviewer-mask#'] = true,
['interviewer#-mask'] = true,
['last#'] = true,
['subject#'] = true,
['subject-link#'] = true,
['subject#-link'] = true,
['subject-mask#'] = true,
['subject#-mask'] = true,
['surname#'] = true,
['translator#'] = true,
['translator-first#'] = true,
['translator#-first'] = true,
['translator-given#'] = true,
['translator#-given'] = true,
['translator-last#'] = true,
['translator#-last'] = true,
['translator-surname#'] = true,
['translator#-surname'] = true,
['translator-link#'] = true,
['translator#-link'] = true,
['translator-mask#'] = true,
['translator#-mask'] = true,
}

--[[----------------------------------------------

Cite arXiv, cite biorxiv, cite citeseerx, and cite ssrn are preprint templates that use the limited set of parameters
defined in the limited_basic_arguments and limited_numbered_arguments tables. Those lists are supplemented with a
template-specific list of parameters that are required by the particular template and may be exclusive to one of the
preprint templates. Some of these parameters may also be available to the general cs1|2 templates.

Same conventions for true/false/tracked/nil as above.

]]

local preprint_arguments = {
arxiv = {
['arxiv'] = true, -- cite arxiv and arxiv identifiers
['class'] = true,
['eprint'] = true, -- cite arxiv and arxiv identifiers
},
biorxiv = {
['biorxiv'] = true,
},
citeseerx = {
['citeseerx'] = true,
},
ssrn = {
['ssrn'] = true,
['SSRN'] = true,
['ssrn-access'] = true,
},
}

--[[--------------------------< L I M I T E D S U P P O R T E D P A R A M E T E R S >----------------------

cite arxiv, cite biorxiv, cite citeseerx, and cite ssrn templates are preprint templates so are allowed only a
limited subset of parameters allowed to all other cs1|2 templates. The limited subset is defined here.

Same conventions for true/false/tracked/nil as above.

]]

local limited_basic_arguments = {
['at'] = true,
['author'] = true,
['author-first'] = true,
['author-given'] = true,
['author-last'] = true,
['author-surname'] = true,
['author-link'] = true,
['authorlink'] = true,
['author-mask'] = true,
['authors'] = true,
['collaboration'] = true,
['date'] = true,
['df'] = true,
['display-authors'] = true,
['first'] = true,
['given'] = true,
['language'] = true,
['last'] = true,
['mode'] = true,
['name-list-style'] = true,
['no-tracking'] = true,
['p'] = true,
['page'] = true,
['pages'] = true,
['postscript'] = true,
['pp'] = true,
['quotation'] = true,
['quote'] = true,
['ref'] = true,
['surname'] = true,
['template-doc-demo'] = true,
['title'] = true,
['trans-title'] = true,
['vauthors'] = true,
['year'] = true,
}

local limited_numbered_arguments = {
['author#'] = true,
['author-first#'] = true,
['author#-first'] = true,
['author-given#'] = true,
['author#-given'] = true,
['author-last#'] = true,
['author#-last'] = true,
['author-surname#'] = true,
['author#-surname'] = true,
['author-link#'] = true,
['author#-link'] = true,
['authorlink#'] = true,
['author#link'] = true,
['author-mask#'] = true,
['author#-mask'] = true,
['first#'] = true,
['given#'] = true,
['last#'] = true,
['surname#'] = true,
}

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------

Some templates have unique parameters. Those templates and their unique parameters are listed here. Keys in this
table are the template's CitationClass parameter value

Same conventions for true/false/tracked/nil as above.

]]

local unique_arguments = {
['audio-visual'] = {
['transcript'] = true,
['transcript-format'] = true,
['transcript-url'] = true,
},
conference = {
['book-title'] = true,
['conference'] = true,
['conference-format'] = true,
['conference-url'] = true,
['event'] = true,
},
episode = {
['airdate'] = true,
['air-date'] = true,
['credits'] = true,
['episode-link'] = true, -- alias of |title-link=
['network'] = true,
['season'] = true,
['series-link'] = true,
['series-no'] = true,
['series-number'] = true,
['station'] = true,
['transcript'] = true,
['transcript-format'] = true,
['transcripturl'] = false,
['transcript-url'] = true,
},
mailinglist = {
['mailing-list'] = true,
},
map = {
['cartography'] = true,
['inset'] = true,
['map'] = true,
['map-format'] = true,
['map-url'] = true,
['map-url-access'] = true,
['script-map'] = true,
['sections'] = true,
['sheet'] = true,
['sheets'] = true,
['trans-map'] = true,
},
newsgroup = {
['message-id'] = true,
['newsgroup'] = true,
},
report = {
['docket'] = true,
},
serial = {
['airdate'] = true,
['air-date'] = true,
['credits'] = true,
['episode'] = true, -- cite serial only TODO: make available to cite episode?
['episode-link'] = true, -- alias of |title-link=
['network'] = true,
['series-link'] = true,
['station'] = true,
},
speech = {
['conference'] = true,
['conference-format'] = true,
['conference-url'] = true,
['event'] = true,
},
thesis = {
['degree'] = true,
['docket'] = true,
},
}

--[[--------------------------< T E M P L A T E _ L I S T _ G E T >--------------------------------------------

gets a list of the templates from table t

]]

local function template_list_get (t)
local out = {}; -- a table for output
for k, _ in pairs (t) do -- spin through the table and collect the keys
table.insert (out, k) -- add each key to the output table
end
return out; -- and done
end

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T E D T A B L E S >------------------------------------------------
]]

return {
basic_arguments = basic_arguments,
numbered_arguments = numbered_arguments,
limited_basic_arguments = limited_basic_arguments,
limited_numbered_arguments = limited_numbered_arguments,

preprint_arguments = preprint_arguments,
preprint_template_list = template_list_get (preprint_arguments), -- make a template list from preprint_arguments{} table
unique_arguments = unique_arguments,
unique_param_template_list = template_list_get (unique_arguments), -- make a template list from unique_arguments{} table
};

Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration

2022-04-04T14:02:48Z

Zoran: Created page with "--[[-------------------------------------------------------- List of namespaces that should not be included in citation err..."

--[[--------------------------------------------------------

List of namespaces that should not be included in citation error categories.
Same as setting notracking = true by default.

Note: Namespace names should use underscores instead of spaces.

]]

local uncategorized_namespaces = { 'User', 'Talk', 'User_talk', 'Wikipedia_talk',
'File_talk', 'Template_talk', 'Help_talk', 'Category_talk', 'Portal_talk',
'Book_talk', 'Draft_talk', 'Education_Program_talk', 'Module_talk', 'MediaWiki_talk' };
local uncategorized_subpages = {'/[Ss]andbox', '/[Tt]estcases', '/[^/]*[Ll]og', '/[Aa]rchive'}; -- list of Lua patterns found in page names of pages we should not categorize

--[[--------------------------< M E S S A G E S >--------------------------------------------------------------

Translation table

The following contains fixed text that may be output as part of a citation.
This is separated from the main body to aid in future translations of this
module.

]]

local messages = {
['agency'] = '$1 $2', -- $1 is sepc, $2 is agency
['archived-dead'] = 'Archived from $1 on $2',
['archived-live'] = '$1 from the original on $2',
['archived-missing'] = 'Archived from the original$1 on $2',
['archived-unfit'] = 'Archived from the original on ',
['archived'] = 'Archived',
['by'] = 'By', -- contributions to authored works: introduction, foreword, afterword
['cartography'] = 'Cartography by $1',
['editor'] = 'ed.',
['editors'] = 'eds.',
['edition'] = '($1 ed.)',
['episode'] = 'Episode $1',
['et al'] = 'et al.',
['in'] = 'In', -- edited works
['inactive'] = 'inactive',
['inset'] = '$1 inset',
['interview'] = 'Interviewed by $1',
['lay summary'] = 'Lay summary',
['mismatch'] = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> / <code class="cs1-code">|$2=</code> mismatch', -- $1 is year param name; $2 is date param name
['newsgroup'] = '[[Usenet newsgroup|Newsgroup]]: $1',
['notitle'] = 'No title', -- for |title=(()) and (in the future) |title=none
['original'] = 'the original',
['origdate'] = ' [$1]',
['published'] = ' (published $1)',
['retrieved'] = 'Retrieved $1',
['season'] = 'Season $1',
['section'] = '§ $1',
['sections'] = '§§ $1',
['series'] = '$1 $2', -- $1 is sepc, $2 is series
['seriesnum'] = 'Series $1',
['translated'] = 'Translated by $1',
['type'] = ' ($1)', -- for titletype
['written'] = 'Written at $1',

['vol'] = '$1 Vol. $2', -- $1 is sepc; bold journal style volume is in presentation{}
['vol-no'] = '$1 Vol. $2, no. $3', -- sepc, volume, issue (alternatively insert $1 after $2, but then we'd also have to change capitalization)
['issue'] = '$1 No. $2', -- $1 is sepc

['j-vol'] = '$1 $2', -- sepc, volume; bold journal volume is in presentation{}
['j-issue'] = ' ($1)',

['nopp'] = '$1 $2'; -- page(s) without prefix; $1 is sepc

['p-prefix'] = "$1 p. $2", -- $1 is sepc
['pp-prefix'] = "$1 pp. $2", -- $1 is sepc
['j-page(s)'] = ': $1', -- same for page and pages

['sheet'] = '$1 Sheet $2', -- $1 is sepc
['sheets'] = '$1 Sheets $2', -- $1 is sepc
['j-sheet'] = ': Sheet $1',
['j-sheets'] = ': Sheets $1',

['language'] = '(in $1)',
['via'] = " – via $1",
['event'] = 'Event occurs at',
['minutes'] = 'minutes in',

-- Determines the location of the help page
['help page link'] = 'Help:CS1 errors',
['help page label'] = 'help',

-- categories
['cat wikilink'] = '[[Category:$1]]', -- $1 is the category name
[':cat wikilink'] = '[[:Category:$1|link]]', -- category name as maintenance message wikilink; $1 is the category name

-- Internal errors (should only occur if configuration is bad)
['undefined_error'] = 'Called with an undefined error condition',
['unknown_ID_key'] = 'Unrecognized ID key: ', -- an ID key in id_handlers not found in ~/Identifiers func_map{}
['unknown_ID_access'] = 'Unrecognized ID access keyword: ', -- an ID access keyword in id_handlers not found in keywords_lists['id-access']{}
['unknown_argument_map'] = 'Argument map not defined for this variable',
['bare_url_no_origin'] = 'Bare URL found but origin indicator is nil or empty',

['warning_msg_e'] = 'One or more <code style="color: inherit; background: inherit; border: none; padding: inherit;">{{$1}}</code> templates have errors; messages may be hidden ([[Help:CS1_errors#Controlling_error_message_display|help]]).'; -- $1 is template link
['warning_msg_m'] = 'One or more <code style="color: inherit; background: inherit; border: none; padding: inherit;">{{$1}}</code> templates have maintenance messages; messages may be hidden ([[Help:CS1_errors#Controlling_error_message_display|help]]).'; -- $1 is template link
}

--[[--------------------------< C I T A T I O N _ C L A S S _ M A P >------------------------------------------

this table maps the value assigned to |CitationClass= in the cs1|2 templates to the canonical template name when
the value assigned to |CitationClass= is different from the canonical template name. |CitationClass= values are
used as class attributes in the <cite> tag that encloses the citation so these names may not contain spaces while
the canonical template name may. These names are used in warning_msg_e and warning_msg_m to create links to the
template's documentation when an article is displayed in preivew mode.

Most cs1|2 template |CitationClass= values at en.wiki match their canonical template names so are not listed here.

]]

local citation_class_map_t = { -- TODO: if kept, these and all other config.CitationClass 'names' require some sort of i18n
['audio-visual'] = 'AV media', -- TODO: move to ~/Configuration
['AV-media-notes'] = 'AV media notes',
['encyclopaedia'] = 'encyclopedia',
['mailinglist'] = 'mailing list',
['pressrelease'] = 'press release'
}

--[=[-------------------------< E T _ A L _ P A T T E R N S >--------------------------------------------------

This table provides Lua patterns for the phrase "et al" and variants in name text
(author, editor, etc.). The main module uses these to identify and emit the 'etal' message.

]=]

local et_al_patterns = {
"[;,]? *[\"']*%f[%a][Ee][Tt]%.? *[Aa][Ll][%.\"']*$", -- variations on the 'et al' theme
"[;,]? *[\"']*%f[%a][Ee][Tt]%.? *[Aa][Ll][Ii][AaIi][Ee]?[%.\"']*$", -- variations on the 'et alia', 'et alii' and 'et aliae' themes (false positive 'et aliie' unlikely to match)
"[;,]? *%f[%a]and [Oo]thers", -- an alternative to et al.
"%[%[ *[Ee][Tt]%.? *[Aa][Ll]%.? *%]%]", -- a wikilinked form
"%(%( *[Ee][Tt]%.? *[Aa][Ll]%.? *%)%)", -- a double-bracketed form (to counter partial removal of ((...)) syntax)
"[%(%[] *[Ee][Tt]%.? *[Aa][Ll]%.? *[%)%]]", -- a bracketed form
}

--[[--------------------------------------------------

Fixed presentation markup. Originally part of citation_config.messages it has
been moved into its own, more semantically correct place.

]]

local presentation =
{
-- .citation-comment class is specified at Help:CS1_errors#Controlling_error_message_display
['hidden-error'] = '$1',
['visible-error'] = '$1',
['hidden-maint'] = '$1',

['accessdate'] = '$1$2', -- to allow editors to hide accessdate using personal CSS

['bdi'] = '<bdi$1>$2</bdi>', -- bidirectional isolation used with |script-title= and the like

['cite'] = '<cite class="$1">$2</cite>'; -- for use when citation does not have a namelist and |ref= not set so no id="..." attribute
['cite-id'] = '<cite id="$1" class="$2">$3</cite>'; -- for use when when |ref= is set or when citation has a namelist

['format'] = ' ($1)', -- for |format=, |chapter-format=, etc.

-- various access levels, for |access=, |doi-access=, |arxiv=, ...
-- narrow no-break space   may work better than nowrap CSS. Or not? Browser support?

['ext-link-access-signal'] = '$3', -- external link with appropriate lock icon
['free'] = {class='cs1-lock-free', title='Freely accessible'}, -- classes defined in Module:Citation/CS1/styles.css
['registration'] = {class='cs1-lock-registration', title='Free registration required'},
['limited'] = {class='cs1-lock-limited', title='Free access subject to limited trial, subscription normally required'},
['subscription'] = {class='cs1-lock-subscription', title='Paid subscription required'},

['interwiki-icon'] = '$3',
['class-wikisource'] = 'cs1-ws-icon',

['italic-title'] = "''$1''",

['kern-left'] = '$1', -- spacing to use when title contains leading single or double quote mark
['kern-right'] = '$1', -- spacing to use when title contains trailing single or double quote mark

['nowrap1'] = '$1', -- for nowrapping an item: yyyy-mm-dd
['nowrap2'] = '$1 $2', -- for nowrapping portions of an item: dd mmmm yyyy (note white space)

['ocins'] = '',

['parameter'] = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>',

['ps_cs1'] = '.'; -- CS1 style postscript (terminal) character
['ps_cs2'] = ''; -- CS2 style postscript (terminal) character (empty string)

['quoted-text'] = '<q>$1</q>', -- for wrapping |quote= content
['quoted-title'] = '"$1"',

['sep_cs1'] = '.', -- CS1 element separator
['sep_cs2'] = ',', -- CS2 separator
['sep_nl'] = ';', -- CS1|2 style name-list separator between names is a semicolon
['sep_nl_and'] = ' and ', -- used as last nl sep when |name-list-style=and and list has 2 items
['sep_nl_end'] = '; and ', -- used as last nl sep when |name-list-style=and and list has 3+ names
['sep_name'] = ', ', -- CS1|2 style last/first separator is <comma><space>
['sep_nl_vanc'] = ',', -- Vancouver style name-list separator between authors is a comma
['sep_name_vanc'] = ' ', -- Vancouver style last/first separator is a space

['sep_list'] = ', ', -- used for |language= when list has 3+ items except for last sep which uses sep_list_end
['sep_list_pair'] = ' and ', -- used for |language= when list has 2 items
['sep_list_end'] = ', and ', -- used as last list sep for |language= when list has 3+ items

['trans-italic-title'] = "[''$1'']",
['trans-quoted-title'] = "[$1]", -- for |trans-title= and |trans-quote=
['vol-bold'] = '$1 $2', -- sepc, volume; for bold journal cites; for other cites ['vol'] in messages{}
}

--[[--------------------------< A L I A S E S >---------------------------------

Aliases table for commonly passed parameters.

Parameter names on the right side in the assignments in this table must have been
defined in the Whitelist before they will be recognized as valid parameter names

]]

local aliases = {
['AccessDate'] = {'access-date', 'accessdate'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Agency'] = 'agency',
['ArchiveDate'] = {'archive-date', 'archivedate'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['ArchiveFormat'] = 'archive-format',
['ArchiveURL'] = {'archive-url', 'archiveurl'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['ASINTLD'] = 'asin-tld',
['At'] = 'at', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Authors'] = {'authors', 'people', 'credits'},
['BookTitle'] = {'book-title', 'booktitle'},
['Cartography'] = 'cartography',
['Chapter'] = {'chapter', 'contribution', 'entry', 'article', 'section'},
['ChapterFormat'] = {'chapter-format', 'contribution-format', 'entry-format',
'article-format', 'section-format'};
['ChapterURL'] = {'chapter-url', 'contribution-url', 'entry-url', 'article-url', 'section-url', 'chapterurl'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['ChapterUrlAccess'] = {'chapter-url-access', 'contribution-url-access',
'entry-url-access', 'article-url-access', 'section-url-access'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Class'] = 'class', -- cite arxiv and arxiv identifier
['Collaboration'] = 'collaboration',
['Conference'] = {'conference', 'event'},
['ConferenceFormat'] = 'conference-format',
['ConferenceURL'] = 'conference-url', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Date'] = {'date', 'air-date', 'airdate'}, -- air-date and airdate for cite episode and cite serial only
['Degree'] = 'degree',
['DF'] = 'df',
['DisplayAuthors'] = {'display-authors', 'display-subjects'},
['DisplayContributors'] = 'display-contributors',
['DisplayEditors'] = 'display-editors',
['DisplayInterviewers'] = 'display-interviewers',
['DisplayTranslators'] = 'display-translators',
['Docket'] = 'docket',
['DoiBroken'] = 'doi-broken-date',
['Edition'] = 'edition',
['Embargo'] = 'pmc-embargo-date',
['Encyclopedia'] = {'encyclopedia', 'encyclopaedia', 'dictionary'}, -- cite encyclopedia only
['Episode'] = 'episode', -- cite serial only TODO: make available to cite episode?
['Format'] = 'format',
['ID'] = {'id', 'ID'},
['Inset'] = 'inset',
['Issue'] = {'issue', 'number'},
['Language'] = {'language', 'lang'},
['LayDate'] = 'lay-date',
['LayFormat'] = 'lay-format',
['LaySource'] = 'lay-source',
['LayURL'] = 'lay-url',
['MailingList'] = {'mailing-list', 'mailinglist'}, -- cite mailing list only
['Map'] = 'map', -- cite map only
['MapFormat'] = 'map-format', -- cite map only
['MapURL'] = {'map-url', 'mapurl'}, -- cite map only -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['MapUrlAccess'] = 'map-url-access', -- cite map only -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Minutes'] = 'minutes',
['Mode'] = 'mode',
['NameListStyle'] = 'name-list-style',
['Network'] = 'network',
['Newsgroup'] = 'newsgroup', -- cite newsgroup only
['NoPP'] = {'no-pp', 'nopp'},
['NoTracking'] = {'no-tracking', 'template-doc-demo'},
['Number'] = 'number', -- this case only for cite techreport
['OrigDate'] = {'orig-date', 'orig-year', 'origyear'},
['Others'] = 'others',
['Page'] = {'page', 'p'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Pages'] = {'pages', 'pp'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Periodical'] = {'journal', 'magazine', 'newspaper', 'periodical', 'website', 'work'},
['Place'] = {'place', 'location'},
['PostScript'] = 'postscript',
['PublicationDate'] = {'publication-date', 'publicationdate'},
['PublicationPlace'] = {'publication-place', 'publicationplace'},
['PublisherName'] = {'publisher', 'institution'},
['Quote'] = {'quote', 'quotation'},
['QuotePage'] = 'quote-page',
['QuotePages'] = 'quote-pages',
['Ref'] = 'ref',
['Scale'] = 'scale',
['ScriptChapter'] = {'script-chapter', 'script-contribution', 'script-entry',
'script-article', 'script-section'},
['ScriptMap'] = 'script-map',
['ScriptPeriodical'] = {'script-journal', 'script-magazine', 'script-newspaper',
'script-periodical', 'script-website', 'script-work'},
['ScriptQuote'] = 'script-quote',
['ScriptTitle'] = 'script-title', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Season'] = 'season',
['Sections'] = 'sections', -- cite map only
['Series'] = {'series', 'version'},
['SeriesLink'] = {'series-link', 'serieslink'},
['SeriesNumber'] = {'series-number', 'series-no'},
['Sheet'] = 'sheet', -- cite map only
['Sheets'] = 'sheets', -- cite map only
['Station'] = 'station',
['Time'] = 'time',
['TimeCaption'] = 'time-caption',
['Title'] = 'title', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['TitleLink'] = {'title-link', 'episode-link', 'episodelink'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['TitleNote'] = 'department',
['TitleType'] = {'type', 'medium'},
['TransChapter'] = {'trans-article', 'trans-chapter', 'trans-contribution',
'trans-entry', 'trans-section'},
['Transcript'] = 'transcript',
['TranscriptFormat'] = 'transcript-format',
['TranscriptURL'] = {'transcript-url', 'transcripturl'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['TransMap'] = 'trans-map', -- cite map only
['TransPeriodical'] = {'trans-journal', 'trans-magazine', 'trans-newspaper',
'trans-periodical', 'trans-website', 'trans-work'},
['TransQuote'] = 'trans-quote',
['TransTitle'] = 'trans-title', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['URL'] = {'url', 'URL'}, -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['UrlAccess'] = 'url-access', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['UrlStatus'] = 'url-status', -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['Vauthors'] = 'vauthors',
['Veditors'] = 'veditors',
['Via'] = 'via',
['Volume'] = 'volume',
['Year'] = 'year',

['AuthorList-First'] = {"first#", "author-first#", "author#-first", "given#",
"author-given#", "author#-given"},
['AuthorList-Last'] = {"last#", "author-last#", "author#-last", "surname#",
"author-surname#", "author#-surname", "author#", "subject#", 'host#'},
['AuthorList-Link'] = {"author-link#", "author#-link", "subject-link#",
"subject#-link", "authorlink#", "author#link"},
['AuthorList-Mask'] = {"author-mask#", "author#-mask", "subject-mask#", "subject#-mask"},

['ContributorList-First'] = {'contributor-first#', 'contributor#-first',
'contributor-given#', 'contributor#-given'},
['ContributorList-Last'] = {'contributor-last#', 'contributor#-last',
'contributor-surname#', 'contributor#-surname', 'contributor#'},
['ContributorList-Link'] = {'contributor-link#', 'contributor#-link'},
['ContributorList-Mask'] = {'contributor-mask#', 'contributor#-mask'},

['EditorList-First'] = {"editor-first#", "editor#-first", "editor-given#", "editor#-given"},
['EditorList-Last'] = {"editor-last#", "editor#-last", "editor-surname#",
"editor#-surname", "editor#"},
['EditorList-Link'] = {"editor-link#", "editor#-link"},
['EditorList-Mask'] = {"editor-mask#", "editor#-mask"},

['InterviewerList-First'] = {'interviewer-first#', 'interviewer#-first',
'interviewer-given#', 'interviewer#-given'},
['InterviewerList-Last'] = {'interviewer-last#', 'interviewer#-last',
'interviewer-surname#', 'interviewer#-surname', 'interviewer#'},
['InterviewerList-Link'] = {'interviewer-link#', 'interviewer#-link'},
['InterviewerList-Mask'] = {'interviewer-mask#', 'interviewer#-mask'},

['TranslatorList-First'] = {'translator-first#', 'translator#-first',
'translator-given#', 'translator#-given'},
['TranslatorList-Last'] = {'translator-last#', 'translator#-last',
'translator-surname#', 'translator#-surname', 'translator#'},
['TranslatorList-Link'] = {'translator-link#', 'translator#-link'},
['TranslatorList-Mask'] = {'translator-mask#', 'translator#-mask'},
}

--[[-----------------------------------------------------

builds a table of parameter names that the extraneous terminal punctuation check should not check.

]]

local punct_meta_params = { -- table of aliases[] keys (meta parameters); each key has a table of parameter names for a value
'BookTitle', 'Chapter', 'ScriptChapter', 'ScriptTitle', 'Title', 'TransChapter', 'Transcript', 'TransMap', 'TransTitle', -- title-holding parameters
'AuthorList-Mask', 'ContributorList-Mask', 'EditorList-Mask', 'InterviewerList-Mask', 'TranslatorList-Mask', -- name-list mask may have name separators
'PostScript', 'Quote', 'ScriptQuote', 'TransQuote', 'Ref', -- miscellaneous
'ArchiveURL', 'ChapterURL', 'ConferenceURL', 'LayURL', 'MapURL', 'TranscriptURL', 'URL', -- URL-holding parameters
}

local url_meta_params = { -- table of aliases[] keys (meta parameters); each key has a table of parameter names for a value
'ArchiveURL', 'ChapterURL', 'ConferenceURL', 'ID', 'LayURL', 'MapURL', 'TranscriptURL', 'URL', -- parameters allowed to hold urls
'Page', 'Pages', 'At', 'QuotePage', 'QuotePages', -- insource locators allowed to hold urls
}

local function build_skip_table (skip_t, meta_params)
for _, meta_param in ipairs (meta_params) do -- for each meta parameter key
local params = aliases[meta_param]; -- get the parameter or the table of parameters associated with the meta parameter name
if 'string' == type (params) then
skip_t[params] = 1; -- just a single parameter
else
for _, param in ipairs (params) do -- get the parameter name
skip_t[param] = 1; -- add the parameter name to the skip table
local count;
param, count = param:gsub ('#', ''); -- remove enumerator marker from enumerated parameters
if 0 ~= count then -- if removed
skip_t[param] = 1; -- add param name without enumerator marker
end
end
end
end
return skip_t;
end

local punct_skip = {};
local url_skip = {};

--[[-----------< S P E C I A L C A S E T R A N S L A T I O N S >------------

This table is primarily here to support internationalization. Translations in
this table are used, for example, when an error message, category name, etc.,
is extracted from the English alias key. There may be other cases where
this translation table may be useful.

]]
local is_Latn = 'A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143';
local special_case_translation = {
['AuthorList'] = 'authors list', -- used to assemble maintenance category names
['ContributorList'] = 'contributors list', -- translation of these names plus translation of the base mainenance category names in maint_cats{} table below
['EditorList'] = 'editors list', -- must match the names of the actual categories
['InterviewerList'] = 'interviewers list', -- this group or translations used by name_has_ed_markup() and name_has_mult_names()
['TranslatorList'] = 'translators list',

-- Lua patterns to match pseudo-titles used by InternetArchiveBot and others as placeholder for unknown |title= value
['archived_copy'] = { -- used with CS1 maint: Archive[d] copy as title
['en'] = '^archived?%s+copy$', -- for English; translators: keep this because templates imported from en.wiki
['local'] = nil, -- translators: replace ['local'] = nil with lowercase translation only when bots or tools create generic titles in your language
},

-- Lua patterns to match generic titles; usually created by bots or reference filling tools
-- translators: replace ['local'] = nil with lowercase translation only when bots or tools create generic titles in your language
['generic_titles'] = {
-- generic titles and patterns in this table should be lowercase only
-- leave ['local'] nil except when there is a matching generic title in your language
-- boolean 'true' for plain-text searches; 'false' for pattern searches
{['en'] = {'^wayback%s+machine$', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'are you a robot', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'hugedomains.com', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'^[%(%[{<]?no +title[>}%]%)]?$', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'page not found', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'subscribe to read', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'^[%(%[{<]?unknown[>}%]%)]?$', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'website is for sale', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'^404', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'internet archive wayback machine', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'log into facebook', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'login • instagram', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'redirecting...', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'usurped title', true}, ['local'] = nil}, -- added by a GreenC bot
{['en'] = {'webcite query result', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'wikiwix\'s cache', true}, ['local'] = nil},
},

['generic_names'] = {
-- generic names and patterns in this table should be lowercase only
-- leave ['local'] nil except when there is a matching generic name in your language
-- boolean 'true' for plain-text searches; 'false' for pattern searches
{['en'] = {'about us', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f[%a][Aa]dvisor%f[%A]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f[%a][Aa]uthor%f[%A]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'collaborator', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'contributor', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'contact us', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'directory', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f[%(%[][%(%[]%s*eds?%.?%s*[%)%]]?$', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'[,%.%s]%f[e]eds?%.?$', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'^eds?[%.,;]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'^[%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f[%a][Ee]dited%f[%A]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f[%a][Ee]ditors?%f[%A]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f[%a]]Ee]mail%f[%A]', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'facebook', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'google', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'home page', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'instagram', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'interviewer', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'linkedIn', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'pinterest', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'policy', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'privacy', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'translator', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'tumblr', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'twitter', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'site name', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'statement', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'submitted', true}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'super.?user', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'%f['..is_Latn..'][Uu]ser%f[^'..is_Latn..']', false}, ['local'] = nil},
{['en'] = {'verfasser', true}, ['local'] = nil},
}
}

--[[--------------------------< D A T E _ N A M E S >----------------------------------------------------------

This table of tables lists local language date names and fallback English date names.
The code in Date_validation will look first in the local table for valid date names.
If date names are not found in the local table, the code will look in the English table.

Because citations can be copied to the local wiki from en.wiki, the English is
required when the date-name translation function date_name_xlate() is used.

In these tables, season numbering is defined by
Extended Date/Time Format (EDTF) Specification (https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/)
which became part of ISO 8601 in 2019. See '§Sub-year groupings'. The standard
defines various divisions using numbers 21-41. CS1|2 only supports generic seasons.
EDTF does support the distinction between north and south hemisphere seasons
but CS1|2 has no way to make that distinction.

33-36 = Quarter 1, Quarter 2, Quarter 3, Quarter 4 (3 months each)

The standard does not address 'named' dates so, for the purposes of CS1|2,
Easter and Christmas are defined here as 98 and 99, which should be out of the
ISO 8601 (EDTF) range of uses for a while.

]]

local date_names = {
['en'] = { -- English
['long'] = {['January'] = 1, ['February'] = 2, ['March'] = 3, ['April'] = 4, ['May'] = 5, ['June'] = 6, ['July'] = 7, ['August'] = 8, ['September'] = 9, ['October'] = 10, ['November'] = 11, ['December'] = 12},
['short'] = {['Jan'] = 1, ['Feb'] = 2, ['Mar'] = 3, ['Apr'] = 4, ['May'] = 5, ['Jun'] = 6, ['Jul'] = 7, ['Aug'] = 8, ['Sep'] = 9, ['Oct'] = 10, ['Nov'] = 11, ['Dec'] = 12},
['quarter'] = {['First Quarter'] = 33, ['Second Quarter'] = 34, ['Third Quarter'] = 35, ['Fourth Quarter'] = 36},
['season'] = {['Winter'] = 24, ['Spring'] = 21, ['Summer'] = 22, ['Fall'] = 23, ['Autumn'] = 23},
['named'] = {['Easter'] = 98, ['Christmas'] = 99},
},
['local'] = { -- replace these English date names with the local language equivalents
['long'] = {['January'] = 1, ['February'] = 2, ['March'] = 3, ['April'] = 4, ['May'] = 5, ['June'] = 6, ['July'] = 7, ['August'] = 8, ['September'] = 9, ['October'] = 10, ['November'] = 11, ['December'] = 12},
['short'] = {['Jan'] = 1, ['Feb'] = 2, ['Mar'] = 3, ['Apr'] = 4, ['May'] = 5, ['Jun'] = 6, ['Jul'] = 7, ['Aug'] = 8, ['Sep'] = 9, ['Oct'] = 10, ['Nov'] = 11, ['Dec'] = 12},
['quarter'] = {['First Quarter'] = 33, ['Second Quarter'] = 34, ['Third Quarter'] = 35, ['Fourth Quarter'] = 36},
['season'] = {['Winter'] = 24, ['Spring'] = 21, ['Summer'] = 22, ['Fall'] = 23, ['Autumn'] = 23},
['named'] = {['Easter'] = 98, ['Christmas'] = 99},
},
['inv_local_l'] = {}, -- used in date reformatting; copy of date_names['local'].long where k/v are inverted: [1]='<local name>' etc.
['inv_local_s'] = {}, -- used in date reformatting; copy of date_names['local'].short where k/v are inverted: [1]='<local name>' etc.
['local_digits'] = {['0'] = '0', ['1'] = '1', ['2'] = '2', ['3'] = '3', ['4'] = '4', ['5'] = '5', ['6'] = '6', ['7'] = '7', ['8'] = '8', ['9'] = '9'}, -- used to convert local language digits to Western 0-9
['xlate_digits'] = {},
}

for name, i in pairs (date_names['local'].long) do -- this table is ['name'] = i
date_names['inv_local_l'][i] = name; -- invert to get [i] = 'name' for conversions from ymd
end

for name, i in pairs (date_names['local'].short) do -- this table is ['name'] = i
date_names['inv_local_s'][i] = name; -- invert to get [i] = 'name' for conversions from ymd
end

for ld, ed in pairs (date_names.local_digits) do -- make a digit translation table for simple date translation from en to local language using local_digits table
date_names.xlate_digits [ed] = ld; -- en digit becomes index with local digit as the value
end

local df_template_patterns = { -- table of redirects to {{Use dmy dates}} and {{Use mdy dates}}
'{{ *[Uu]se +(dmy) +dates *[|}]', -- 1159k -- sorted by approximate transclusion count
'{{ *[Uu]se +(mdy) +dates *[|}]', -- 212k
'{{ *[Uu]se +(MDY) +dates *[|}]', -- 788
'{{ *[Uu]se +(DMY) +dates *[|}]', -- 343
'{{ *([Mm]dy) *[|}]', -- 176
'{{ *[Uu]se *(dmy) *[|}]', -- 156 + 18
'{{ *[Uu]se *(mdy) *[|}]', -- 149 + 11
'{{ *([Dd]my) *[|}]', -- 56
'{{ *[Uu]se +(MDY) *[|}]', -- 5
'{{ *([Dd]MY) *[|}]', -- 3
'{{ *[Uu]se(mdy)dates *[|}]', -- 1
'{{ *[Uu]se +(DMY) *[|}]', -- 0
'{{ *([Mm]DY) *[|}]', -- 0
}

local function get_date_format ()
local content = mw.title.getCurrentTitle():getContent() or ''; -- get the content of the article or ''; new pages edited w/ve do not have 'content' until saved; ve does not preview; phab:T221625
for _, pattern in ipairs (df_template_patterns) do -- loop through the patterns looking for {{Use dmy dates}} or {{Use mdy dates}} or any of their redirects
local start, _, match = content:find(pattern); -- match is the three letters indicating desired date format
if match then
content = content:match ('%b{}', start); -- get the whole template
if content:match ('| *cs1%-dates *= *[lsy][sy]?') then -- look for |cs1-dates=publication date length access-/archive-date length
return match:lower() .. '-' .. content:match ('| *cs1%-dates *= *([lsy][sy]?)');
else
return match:lower() .. '-all'; -- no |cs1-dates= k/v pair; return value appropriate for use in |df=
end
end
end
end

local global_df;

--[[-----------------< V O L U M E , I S S U E , P A G E S >------------------

These tables hold cite class values (from the template invocation) and identify those templates that support
|volume=, |issue=, and |page(s)= parameters. Cite conference and cite map require further qualification which
is handled in the main module.

]]

local templates_using_volume = {'citation', 'audio-visual', 'book', 'conference', 'encyclopaedia', 'interview', 'journal', 'magazine', 'map', 'news', 'report', 'techreport', 'thesis'}
local templates_using_issue = {'citation', 'conference', 'episode', 'interview', 'journal', 'magazine', 'map', 'news', 'podcast'}
local templates_not_using_page = {'audio-visual', 'episode', 'mailinglist', 'newsgroup', 'podcast', 'serial', 'sign', 'speech'}

--[[

Patterns for finding extra text in |volume=, |issue=, |page=, |pages=

]]

local vol_iss_pg_patterns = {
good_ppattern = '^P[^%.PpGg]', -- OK to begin with uppercase P: P7 (page 7 of section P), but not p123 (page 123); TODO: this allows 'Pages' which it should not
bad_ppatterns = { -- patterns for |page= and |pages=
'^[Pp][PpGg]?%.?[ %d]',
'^[Pp][Pp]?%. ', -- from {{p.}} and {{pp.}} templates
'^[Pp]ages?',
'^[Pp]gs.?',
},
vpatterns = { -- patterns for |volume=
'^volumes?',
'^vols?[%.:=]?'
},
ipatterns = { -- patterns for |issue=
'^issues?',
'^iss[%.:=]?',
'^numbers?',
'^nos?%A', -- don't match 'november' or 'nostradamus'
'^nr[%.:=]?',
'^n[%.:= ]' -- might be a valid issue without separator (space char is sep char here)
}
}

--[[--------------------------< K E Y W O R D S >-------------------------------

These tables hold keywords for those parameters that have defined sets of acceptable keywords.

]]

--[[-------------------< K E Y W O R D S T A B L E >--------------------------

this is a list of keywords; each key in the list is associated with a table of
synonymous keywords possibly from different languages.

for I18N: add local-language keywords to value table; do not change the key.
For example, adding the German keyword 'ja':
['affirmative'] = {'yes', 'true', 'y', 'ja'},

Because CS1|2 templates from en.wiki articles are often copied to other local wikis,
it is recommended that the English keywords remain in these tables.

]]

local keywords = {
['amp'] = {'&', 'amp', 'ampersand'}, -- |name-list-style=
['and'] = {'and', 'serial'}, -- |name-list-style=
['affirmative'] = {'yes', 'true', 'y'}, -- |no-tracking=, |no-pp= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['afterword'] = {'afterword'}, -- |contribution=
['bot: unknown'] = {'bot: unknown'}, -- |url-status= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['cs1'] = {'cs1'}, -- |mode=
['cs2'] = {'cs2'}, -- |mode=
['dead'] = {'dead', 'deviated'}, -- |url-status= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['dmy'] = {'dmy'}, -- |df=
['dmy-all'] = {'dmy-all'}, -- |df=
['foreword'] = {'foreword'}, -- |contribution=
['free'] = {'free'}, -- |<id>-access= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['harv'] = {'harv'}, -- |ref=; this no longer supported; is_valid_parameter_value() called with <invert> = true
['introduction'] = {'introduction'}, -- |contribution=
['limited'] = {'limited'}, -- |url-access= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['live'] = {'live'}, -- |url-status= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['mdy'] = {'mdy'}, -- |df=
['mdy-all'] = {'mdy-all'}, -- |df=
['none'] = {'none'}, -- |postscript=, |ref=, |title=, |type= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['off'] = {'off'}, -- |title= (potentially also: |title-link=, |postscript=, |ref=, |type=)
['preface'] = {'preface'}, -- |contribution=
['registration'] = {'registration'}, -- |url-access= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['subscription'] = {'subscription'}, -- |url-access= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['unfit'] = {'unfit'}, -- |url-status= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['usurped'] = {'usurped'}, -- |url-status= -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
['vanc'] = {'vanc'}, -- |name-list-style=
['ymd'] = {'ymd'}, -- |df=
['ymd-all'] = {'ymd-all'}, -- |df=
-- ['yMd'] = {'yMd'}, -- |df=; not supported at en.wiki
-- ['yMd-all'] = {'yMd-all'}, -- |df=; not supported at en.wiki
}

--[[------------------------< X L A T E _ K E Y W O R D S >---------------------

this function builds a list, keywords_xlate{}, of the keywords found in keywords{} where the values from keywords{}
become the keys in keywords_xlate{} and the keys from keywords{} become the values in keywords_xlate{}:
['affirmative'] = {'yes', 'true', 'y'}, -- in keywords{}
becomes
['yes'] = 'affirmative', -- in keywords_xlate{}
['true'] = 'affirmative',
['y'] = 'affirmative',

the purpose of this function is to act as a translator between a non-English keyword and its English equivalent
that may be used in other modules of this suite

]]

local function xlate_keywords ()
local out_table = {}; -- output goes here
for k, keywords_t in pairs (keywords) do -- spin through the keywords table
for _, keyword in ipairs (keywords_t) do -- for each keyword
out_table[keyword] = k; -- create an entry in the output table where keyword is the key
end
end

return out_table;
end

local keywords_xlate = xlate_keywords (); -- the list of translated keywords

--[[----------------< M A K E _ K E Y W O R D S _ L I S T >---------------------

this function assembles, for parameter-value validation, the list of keywords appropriate to that parameter.

keywords_lists{}, is a table of tables from keywords{}

]]

local function make_keywords_list (keywords_lists)
local out_table = {}; -- output goes here

for _, keyword_list in ipairs (keywords_lists) do -- spin through keywords_lists{} and get a table of keywords
for _, keyword in ipairs (keyword_list) do -- spin through keyword_list{} and add each keyword, ...
table.insert (out_table, keyword); -- ... as plain text, to the output list
end
end
return out_table;
end

--[[----------------< K E Y W O R D S _ L I S T S >-----------------------------

this is a list of lists of valid keywords for the various parameters in [key].
Generally the keys in this table are the canonical en.wiki parameter names though
some are contrived because of use in multiple differently named parameters:
['yes_true_y'], ['id-access'].

The function make_keywords_list() extracts the individual keywords from the
appropriate list in keywords{}.

The lists in this table are used to validate the keyword assignment for the
parameters named in this table's keys.

]]

local keywords_lists = {
['yes_true_y'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.affirmative}),
['contribution'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.afterword, keywords.foreword, keywords.introduction, keywords.preface}),
['df'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.dmy, keywords['dmy-all'], keywords.mdy, keywords['mdy-all'], keywords.ymd, keywords['ymd-all']}),
-- ['df'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.dmy, keywords['dmy-all'], keywords.mdy, keywords['mdy-all'], keywords.ymd, keywords['ymd-all'], keywords.yMd, keywords['yMd-all']}), -- not supported at en.wiki
['mode'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.cs1, keywords.cs2}),
['name-list-style'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.amp, keywords['and'], keywords.vanc}),
['ref'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.harv}), -- inverted check; |ref=harv no longer supported
['url-access'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.subscription, keywords.limited, keywords.registration}),
['url-status'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.dead, keywords.live, keywords.unfit, keywords.usurped, keywords['bot: unknown']}),
['id-access'] = make_keywords_list ({keywords.free}),
}

--[[---------------------< S T R I P M A R K E R S >----------------------------

Common pattern definition location for stripmarkers so that we don't have to go
hunting for them if (when) MediaWiki changes their form.

]]

local stripmarkers = {
['any'] = '\127[^\127]*UNIQ%-%-(%a+)%-[%a%d]+%-QINU[^\127]*\127', -- capture returns name of stripmarker
['math'] = '\127[^\127]*UNIQ%-%-math%-[%a%d]+%-QINU[^\127]*\127' -- math stripmarkers used in coins_cleanup() and coins_replace_math_stripmarker()
}

--[[---------------------------------

This table holds non-printing or invisible characters indexed either by name or
by Unicode group. Values are decimal representations of UTF-8 codes. The table
is organized as a table of tables because the Lua pairs keyword returns table
data in an arbitrary order. Here, we want to process the table from top to bottom
because the entries at the top of the table are also found in the ranges specified
by the entries at the bottom of the table.

Also here is a pattern that recognizes stripmarkers that begin and end with the
delete characters. The nowiki stripmarker is not an error but some others are
because the parameter values that include them become part of the template's
metadata before stripmarker replacement.

]]

local invisible_defs = {
del = '\127', -- used to distinguish between stripmarker and del char
zwj = '\226\128\141', -- used with capture because zwj may be allowed
}

local invisible_chars = {
{'replacement', '\239\191\189'}, -- U+FFFD, EF BF BD
{'zero width joiner', '('.. invisible_defs.zwj .. ')'}, -- U+200D, E2 80 8D; capture because zwj may be allowed
{'zero width space', '\226\128\139'}, -- U+200B, E2 80 8B
{'hair space', '\226\128\138'}, -- U+200A, E2 80 8A
{'soft hyphen', '\194\173'}, -- U+00AD, C2 AD
{'horizontal tab', '\009'}, -- U+0009 (HT), 09
{'line feed', '\010'}, -- U+000A (LF), 0A
{'no-break space', '\194\160'}, -- U+00A0 (NBSP), C2 A0
{'carriage return', '\013'}, -- U+000D (CR), 0D
{'stripmarker', stripmarkers.any}, -- stripmarker; may or may not be an error; capture returns the stripmaker type
{'delete', '('.. invisible_defs.del .. ')'}, -- U+007F (DEL), 7F; must be done after stripmarker test; capture to distinguish isolated del chars not part of stripmarker
{'C0 control', '[\000-\008\011\012\014-\031]'}, -- U+0000–U+001F (NULL–US), 00–1F (except HT, LF, CR (09, 0A, 0D))
{'C1 control', '[\194\128-\194\159]'}, -- U+0080–U+009F (XXX–APC), C2 80 – C2 9F
-- {'Specials', '[\239\191\185-\239\191\191]'}, -- U+FFF9-U+FFFF, EF BF B9 – EF BF BF
-- {'Private use area', '[\238\128\128-\239\163\191]'}, -- U+E000–U+F8FF, EE 80 80 – EF A3 BF
-- {'Supplementary Private Use Area-A', '[\243\176\128\128-\243\191\191\189]'}, -- U+F0000–U+FFFFD, F3 B0 80 80 – F3 BF BF BD
-- {'Supplementary Private Use Area-B', '[\244\128\128\128-\244\143\191\189]'}, -- U+100000–U+10FFFD, F4 80 80 80 – F4 8F BF BD
}

--[[

Indic script makes use of zero width joiner as a character modifier so zwj
characters must be left in. This pattern covers all of the unicode characters
for these languages:
Devanagari 0900–097F – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0900.pdf
Devanagari extended A8E0–A8FF – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/UA8E0.pdf
Bengali 0980–09FF – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0980.pdf
Gurmukhi 0A00–0A7F – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0A00.pdf
Gujarati 0A80–0AFF – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0A80.pdf
Oriya 0B00–0B7F – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0B00.pdf
Tamil 0B80–0BFF – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0B80.pdf
Telugu 0C00–0C7F – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0C00.pdf
Kannada 0C80–0CFF – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0C80.pdf
Malayalam 0D00–0D7F – https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0D00.pdf
plus the not-necessarily Indic scripts for Sinhala and Burmese:
Sinhala 0D80-0DFF - https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0D80.pdf
Myanmar 1000-109F - https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/U1000.pdf
Myanmar extended A AA60-AA7F - https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/UAA60.pdf
Myanmar extended B A9E0-A9FF - https://unicode.org/charts/PDF/UA9E0.pdf
the pattern is used by has_invisible_chars() and coins_cleanup()

]]

local indic_script = '[\224\164\128-\224\181\191\224\163\160-\224\183\191\225\128\128-\225\130\159\234\167\160-\234\167\191\234\169\160-\234\169\191]';

-- list of emoji that use zwj character (U+200D) to combine with another emoji
local emoji = { -- indexes are decimal forms of the hex values in U+xxxx
[127752] = true, -- U+1F308 🌈 rainbow
[127806] = true, -- U+1F33E 🌾 ear of rice
[127859] = true, -- U+1F373 🍳 cooking
[127891] = true, -- U+1F393 🎓 graduation cap
[127908] = true, -- U+1F3A4 🎤 microphone
[127912] = true, -- U+1F3A8 🎨 artist palette
[127979] = true, -- U+1F3EB 🏫 school
[127981] = true, -- U+1F3ED 🏭 factory
[128102] = true, -- U+1F466 👦 boy
[128103] = true, -- U+1F467 👧 girl
[128104] = true, -- U+1F468 👨 man
[128105] = true, -- U+1F469 👩 woman
[128139] = true, -- U+1F48B 💋 kiss mark
[128187] = true, -- U+1F4BB 💻 personal computer
[128188] = true, -- U+1F4BC 💼 brief case
[128295] = true, -- U+1F527 🔧 wrench
[128300] = true, -- U+1F52C 🔬 microscope
[128488] = true, -- U+1F5E8 🗨 left speech bubble
[128640] = true, -- U+1F680 🚀 rocket
[128658] = true, -- U+1F692 🚒 fire engine
[129309] = true, -- U+1F91D 🤝 handshake
[129455] = true, -- U+1F9AF 🦯 probing cane
[129456] = true, -- U+1F9B0 🦰 emoji component red hair
[129457] = true, -- U+1F9B1 🦱 emoji component curly hair
[129458] = true, -- U+1F9B2 🦲 emoji component bald
[129459] = true, -- U+1F9B3 🦳 emoji component white hair
[129466] = true, -- U+1F9BA 🦺 safety vest
[129468] = true, -- U+1F9BC 🦼 motorized wheelchair
[129469] = true, -- U+1F9BD 🦽 manual wheelchair
[129489] = true, -- U+1F9D1 🧑 adult
[9760] = true, -- U+2620 ☠ skull and crossbones
[9792] = true, -- U+2640 ♀ female sign
[9794] = true, -- U+2642 ♂ male sign
[9877] = true, -- U+2695 ⚕ staff of aesculapius
[9878] = true, -- U+2696 ⚖ scales
[9992] = true, -- U+2708 ✈ airplane
[10084] = true, -- U+2764 ❤ heavy black heart
}

--[[----------------------< L A N G U A G E S U P P O R T >-------------------

These tables and constants support various language-specific functionality.

]]

local this_wiki_code = mw.getContentLanguage():getCode(); -- get this wiki's language code
if string.match (mw.site.server, 'wikidata') then
this_wiki_code = mw.getCurrentFrame():preprocess('{{int:lang}}'); -- on Wikidata so use interface language setting instead
end

local mw_languages_by_tag_t = mw.language.fetchLanguageNames (this_wiki_code, 'all'); -- get a table of language tag/name pairs known to Wikimedia; used for interwiki tests
local mw_languages_by_name_t = {};
for k, v in pairs (mw_languages_by_tag_t) do -- build a 'reversed' table name/tag language pairs know to MediaWiki; used for |language=
v = mw.ustring.lower (v); -- lowercase for tag fetch; get name's proper case from mw_languages_by_tag_t[<tag>]
if mw_languages_by_name_t[v] then -- when name already in the table
if 2 == #k or 3 == #k then -- if tag does not have subtags
mw_languages_by_name_t[v] = k; -- prefer the shortest tag for this name
end
else -- here when name not in the table
mw_languages_by_name_t[v] = k; -- so add name and matching tag
end
end

local inter_wiki_map = {}; -- map of interwiki prefixes that are language-code prefixes
for k, v in pairs (mw.site.interwikiMap ('local')) do -- spin through the base interwiki map (limited to local)
if mw_languages_by_tag_t[v["prefix"]] then -- if the prefix matches a known language tag
inter_wiki_map[v["prefix"]] = true; -- add it to our local map
end
end

--[[--------------------< S C R I P T _ L A N G _ C O D E S >-------------------

This table is used to hold ISO 639-1 two-character and ISO 639-3 three-character
language codes that apply only to |script-title= and |script-chapter=

]]

local script_lang_codes = {
'ab', 'am', 'ar', 'be', 'bg', 'bn', 'bo', 'bs', 'dv', 'dz', 'el', 'fa', 'gu',
'he', 'hi', 'hy', 'ja', 'ka', 'kk', 'km', 'kn', 'ko', 'ku', 'ky', 'lo', 'mk',
'ml', 'mn', 'mr', 'my', 'ne', 'or', 'ota', 'ps', 'ru', 'sd', 'si', 'sr', 'syc',
'ta', 'te', 'tg', 'th', 'ti', 'ug', 'uk', 'ur', 'uz', 'yi', 'yue', 'zh'
};

--[[---------------< L A N G U A G E R E M A P P I N G >----------------------

These tables hold language information that is different (correct) from MediaWiki's definitions

For each ['code'] = 'language name' in lang_code_remap{} there must be a matching ['language name'] = {'language name', 'code'} in lang_name_remap{}

lang_code_remap{}:
key is always lowercase ISO 639-1, -2, -3 language code or a valid lowercase IETF language tag
value is properly spelled and capitalized language name associated with key
only one language name per key;
key/value pair must have matching entry in lang_name_remap{}

lang_name_remap{}:
key is always lowercase language name
value is a table the holds correctly spelled and capitalized language name [1] and associated code [2] (code must match a code key in lang_code_remap{})
may have multiple keys referring to a common preferred name and code; For example:
['kolsch'] and ['kölsch'] both refer to 'Kölsch' and 'ksh'

]]

local lang_code_remap = { -- used for |language= and |script-title= / |script-chapter=
['als'] = 'Tosk Albanian', -- MediaWiki returns Alemannisch
['bh'] = 'Bihari', -- MediaWiki uses 'bh' as a subdomain name for Bhojpuri Wikipedia: bh.wikipedia.org
['bla'] = 'Blackfoot', -- MediaWiki/IANA/ISO 639: Siksika; use en.wiki preferred name
['bn'] = 'Bengali', -- MediaWiki returns Bangla
['ca-valencia'] = 'Valencian', -- IETF variant of Catalan
['ilo'] = 'Ilocano', -- MediaWiki/IANA/ISO 639: Iloko; use en.wiki preferred name
['ksh'] = 'Kölsch', -- MediaWiki: Colognian; use IANA/ISO 639 preferred name
['ksh-x-colog'] = 'Colognian', -- override MediaWiki ksh; no IANA/ISO 639 code for Colognian; IETF private code created at Module:Lang/data
['mis-x-ripuar'] = 'Ripuarian', -- override MediaWiki ksh; no IANA/ISO 639 code for Ripuarian; IETF private code created at Module:Lang/data
['nan-tw'] = 'Taiwanese Hokkien', -- make room for MediaWiki/IANA/ISO 639 nan: Min Nan Chinese and support en.wiki preferred name
}

local lang_name_remap = { -- used for |language=
['alemannisch'] = {'Swiss German', 'gsw'}, -- not an ISO or IANA language name; MediaWiki uses 'als' as a subdomain name for Alemannic Wikipedia: als.wikipedia.org
['bangla'] = {'Bengali', 'bn'}, -- MediaWiki returns Bangla (the endonym) but we want Bengali (the exonym); here we remap
['bengali'] = {'Bengali', 'bn'}, -- MediaWiki doesn't use exonym so here we provide correct language name and 639-1 code
['bhojpuri'] = {'Bhojpuri', 'bho'}, -- MediaWiki uses 'bh' as a subdomain name for Bhojpuri Wikipedia: bh.wikipedia.org
['bihari'] = {'Bihari', 'bh'}, -- MediaWiki replaces 'Bihari' with 'Bhojpuri' so 'Bihari' cannot be found
['blackfoot'] = {'Blackfoot', 'bla'}, -- MediaWiki/IANA/ISO 639: Siksika; use en.wiki preferred name
['colognian'] = {'Colognian', 'ksh-x-colog'}, -- MediaWiki preferred name for ksh
['ilocano'] = {'Ilocano', 'ilo'}, -- MediaWiki/IANA/ISO 639: Iloko; use en.wiki preferred name
['kolsch'] = {'Kölsch', 'ksh'}, -- use IANA/ISO 639 preferred name (use non-diacritical o instead of umlaut ö)
['kölsch'] = {'Kölsch', 'ksh'}, -- use IANA/ISO 639 preferred name
['ripuarian'] = {'Ripuarian', 'mis-x-ripuar'}, -- group of dialects; no code in MediaWiki or in IANA/ISO 639
['taiwanese hokkien'] = {'Taiwanese Hokkien', 'nan-TW'}, -- make room for MediaWiki/IANA/ISO 639 nan: Min Nan Chinese
['tosk albanian'] = {'Tosk Albanian', 'als'}, -- MediaWiki replaces 'Tosk Albanian' with 'Alemannisch' so 'Tosk Albanian' cannot be found
['valencian'] = {'Valencian', 'ca'}, -- variant of Catalan; categorizes as Catalan
}

--[[-------------------------------

Properties categories. These are used for investigating qualities of citations.

]]

local prop_cats = {
['foreign-lang-source'] = 'CS1 $1-language sources ($2)', -- |language= categories; $1 is foreign-language name, $2 is ISO639-1 code
['foreign-lang-source-2'] = 'CS1 foreign language sources (ISO 639-2)|$1', -- |language= category; a cat for ISO639-2 languages; $1 is the ISO 639-2 code used as a sort key
['jul-greg-uncertainty'] = 'CS1: Julian–Gregorian uncertainty', -- probably temporary cat to identify scope of template with dates 1 October 1582 – 1 January 1926
['local-lang-source'] = 'CS1 $1-language sources ($2)', -- |language= categories; $1 is local-language name, $2 is ISO639-1 code; not emitted when local_lang_cat_enable is false
['location-test'] = 'CS1 location test',
['long-vol'] = 'CS1: long volume value', -- probably temporary cat to identify scope of |volume= values longer than 4 charachters
['script'] = 'CS1 uses $1-language script ($2)', -- |script-title=xx: has matching category; $1 is language name, $2 is ISO639-1 code
['tracked-param'] = 'CS1 tracked parameter: $1', -- $1 is base (enumerators removed) parameter name
['year-range-abbreviated'] = 'CS1: abbreviated year range', -- probably temporary cat to identify scope of |date=, |year= values using YYYY–YY form
}

--[[-------------------< T I T L E _ T Y P E S >--------------------------------

Here we map a template's CitationClass to TitleType (default values for |type= parameter)

]]

local title_types = {
['AV-media-notes'] = 'Media notes',
['interview'] = 'Interview',
['mailinglist'] = 'Mailing list',
['map'] = 'Map',
['podcast'] = 'Podcast',
['pressrelease'] = 'Press release',
['report'] = 'Report',
['speech'] = 'Speech',
['techreport'] = 'Technical report',
['thesis'] = 'Thesis',
}

--[[===================<< E R R O R M E S S A G I N G >>======================
]]

--[[----------< E R R O R M E S S A G E S U P P L I M E N T S >-------------

I18N for those messages that are supplemented with additional specific text that
describes the reason for the error

TODO: merge this with special_case_translations{}?
]]

local err_msg_supl = {
['char'] = 'invalid character', -- |isbn=, |sbn=
['check'] = 'checksum', -- |isbn=, |sbn=
['flag'] = 'flag', -- |archive-url=
['form'] = 'invalid form', -- |isbn=, |sbn=
['group'] = 'invalid group id', -- |isbn=
['initials'] = 'initials', -- Vancouver
['invalid language code'] = 'invalid language code', -- |script-<param>=
['journal'] = 'journal', -- |bibcode=
['length'] = 'length', -- |isbn=, |bibcode=, |sbn=
['liveweb'] = 'liveweb', -- |archive-url=
['missing comma'] = 'missing comma', -- Vancouver
['missing prefix'] = 'missing prefix', -- |script-<param>=
['missing title part'] = 'missing title part', -- |script-<param>=
['name'] = 'name', -- Vancouver
['non-Latin char'] = 'non-Latin character', -- Vancouver
['path'] = 'path', -- |archive-url=
['prefix'] = 'invalid prefix', -- |isbn=
['punctuation'] = 'punctuation', -- Vancouver
['save'] = 'save command', -- |archive-url=
['suffix'] = 'suffix', -- Vancouver
['timestamp'] = 'timestamp', -- |archive-url=
['unknown language code'] = 'unknown language code', -- |script-<param>=
['value'] = 'value', -- |bibcode=
['year'] = 'year', -- |bibcode=
}

--[[--------------< E R R O R _ C O N D I T I O N S >---------------------------

Error condition table. This table has two sections: errors at the top, maintenance
at the bottom. Maint 'messaging' does not have a 'message' (message=nil)

The following contains a list of IDs for various error conditions defined in the
code. For each ID, we specify a text message to display, an error category to
include, and whether the error message should be wrapped as a hidden comment.

Anchor changes require identical changes to matching anchor in Help:CS1 errors

TODO: rename error_conditions{} to something more generic; create separate error
and maint tables inside that?

]]

local error_conditions = {
err_accessdate_missing_url = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|access-date=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|url=</code>',
anchor = 'accessdate_missing_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: access-date without URL',
hidden = false
},
err_apostrophe_markup = {
message = 'Italic or bold markup not allowed in: <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'apostrophe_markup',
category = 'CS1 errors: markup',
hidden = false
},
err_archive_missing_date = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|archive-url=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|archive-date=</code>',
anchor = 'archive_missing_date',
category = 'CS1 errors: archive-url',
hidden = false
},
err_archive_missing_url = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|archive-url=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|url=</code>',
anchor = 'archive_missing_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: archive-url',
hidden = false
},
err_archive_url = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|archive-url=</code> is malformed: $1', -- $1 is error message detail
anchor = 'archive_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: archive-url',
hidden = false
},
err_arxiv_missing = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|arxiv=</code> required',
anchor = 'arxiv_missing',
category = 'CS1 errors: arXiv', -- same as bad arxiv
hidden = false
},
err_asintld_missing_asin = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|asin=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'asintld_missing_asin',
category = 'CS1 errors: ASIN TLD',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_arxiv = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|arxiv=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_arxiv',
category = 'CS1 errors: arXiv',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_asin = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|asin=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_asin',
category ='CS1 errors: ASIN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_asin_tld = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|asin-tld=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_asin_tld',
category ='CS1 errors: ASIN TLD',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_bibcode = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|bibcode=</code> $1', -- $1 is error message detail
anchor = 'bad_bibcode',
category = 'CS1 errors: bibcode',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_biorxiv = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|biorxiv=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_biorxiv',
category = 'CS1 errors: bioRxiv',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_citeseerx = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|citeseerx=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_citeseerx',
category = 'CS1 errors: citeseerx',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_date = {
message = 'Check date values in: $1', -- $1 is a parameter name list
anchor = 'bad_date',
category = 'CS1 errors: dates',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_doi = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|doi=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_doi',
category = 'CS1 errors: DOI',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_hdl = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|hdl=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_hdl',
category = 'CS1 errors: HDL',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_isbn = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|isbn=</code> value: $1', -- $1 is error message detail
anchor = 'bad_isbn',
category = 'CS1 errors: ISBN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_ismn = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|ismn=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_ismn',
category = 'CS1 errors: ISMN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_issn = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|$1issn=</code> value', -- $1 is 'e' or '' for eissn or issn
anchor = 'bad_issn',
category = 'CS1 errors: ISSN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_jfm = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|jfm=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_jfm',
category = 'CS1 errors: JFM',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_jstor = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|jstor=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_jstor',
category = 'CS1 errors: JSTOR',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_lccn = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|lccn=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_lccn',
category = 'CS1 errors: LCCN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_mr = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|mr=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_mr',
category = 'CS1 errors: MR',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_oclc = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|oclc=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_oclc',
category = 'CS1 errors: OCLC',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_ol = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|ol=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_ol',
category = 'CS1 errors: OL',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_osti = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|osti=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_osti',
category = 'CS1 errors: OSTI',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_paramlink = { -- for |title-link=, |author/editor/translator-link=, |series-link=, |episode-link=
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> value', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'bad_paramlink',
category = 'CS1 errors: parameter link',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_pmc = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|pmc=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_pmc',
category = 'CS1 errors: PMC',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_pmid = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|pmid=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_pmid',
category = 'CS1 errors: PMID',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_rfc = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|rfc=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_rfc',
category = 'CS1 errors: RFC',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_s2cid = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|s2cid=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_s2cid',
category = 'CS1 errors: S2CID',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_sbn = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|sbn=</code> value: $1', -- $1 is error message detail
anchor = 'bad_sbn',
category = 'CS1 errors: SBN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_ssrn = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|ssrn=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_ssrn',
category = 'CS1 errors: SSRN',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_url = {
message = 'Check $1 value', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'bad_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: URL',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_usenet_id = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|message-id=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_message_id',
category = 'CS1 errors: message-id',
hidden = false
},
err_bad_zbl = {
message = 'Check <code class="cs1-code">|zbl=</code> value',
anchor = 'bad_zbl',
category = 'CS1 errors: Zbl',
hidden = false
},
err_bare_url_missing_title = {
message = '$1 missing title', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'bare_url_missing_title',
category = 'CS1 errors: bare URL',
hidden = false
},
err_biorxiv_missing = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|biorxiv=</code> required',
anchor = 'biorxiv_missing',
category = 'CS1 errors: bioRxiv', -- same as bad bioRxiv
hidden = false
},
err_chapter_ignored = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> ignored', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'chapter_ignored',
category = 'CS1 errors: chapter ignored',
hidden = false
},
err_citation_missing_title = {
message = 'Missing or empty <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'citation_missing_title',
category = 'CS1 errors: missing title',
hidden = false
},
err_citeseerx_missing = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|citeseerx=</code> required',
anchor = 'citeseerx_missing',
category = 'CS1 errors: citeseerx', -- same as bad citeseerx
hidden = false
},
err_cite_web_url = { -- this error applies to cite web and to cite podcast
message = 'Missing or empty <code class="cs1-code">|url=</code>',
anchor = 'cite_web_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: requires URL',
hidden = false
},
err_class_ignored = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|class=</code> ignored',
anchor = 'class_ignored',
category = 'CS1 errors: class',
hidden = false
},
err_contributor_ignored = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|contributor=</code> ignored',
anchor = 'contributor_ignored',
category = 'CS1 errors: contributor',
hidden = false
},
err_contributor_missing_required_param = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|contributor=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'contributor_missing_required_param',
category = 'CS1 errors: contributor',
hidden = false
},
err_deprecated_params = {
message = 'Cite uses deprecated parameter <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'deprecated_params',
category = 'CS1 errors: deprecated parameters',
hidden = false
},
err_disp_name = {
message = 'Invalid <code class="cs1-code">|$1=$2</code>', -- $1 is parameter name; $2 is the assigned value
anchor = 'disp_name',
category = 'CS1 errors: display-names',
hidden = false,
},
err_doibroken_missing_doi = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|doi=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'doibroken_missing_doi',
category = 'CS1 errors: DOI',
hidden = false
},
err_embargo_missing_pmc = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|pmc=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'embargo_missing_pmc',
category = 'CS1 errors: PMC embargo',
hidden = false
},
err_empty_citation = {
message = 'Empty citation',
anchor = 'empty_citation',
category = 'CS1 errors: empty citation',
hidden = false
},
err_etal = {
message = 'Explicit use of et al. in: <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'explicit_et_al',
category = 'CS1 errors: explicit use of et al.',
hidden = false
},
err_extra_text_edition = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|edition=</code> has extra text',
anchor = 'extra_text_edition',
category = 'CS1 errors: extra text: edition',
hidden = false,
},
err_extra_text_issue = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> has extra text', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'extra_text_issue',
category = 'CS1 errors: extra text: issue',
hidden = false,
},
err_extra_text_pages = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> has extra text', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'extra_text_pages',
category = 'CS1 errors: extra text: pages',
hidden = false,
},
err_extra_text_volume = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> has extra text', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'extra_text_volume',
category = 'CS1 errors: extra text: volume',
hidden = true,
},
err_first_missing_last = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> missing <code class="cs1-code">|$2=</code>', -- $1 is first alias, $2 is matching last alias
anchor = 'first_missing_last',
category = 'CS1 errors: missing name', -- author, contributor, editor, interviewer, translator
hidden = false
},
err_format_missing_url = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|$2=</code>', -- $1 is format parameter $2 is url parameter
anchor = 'format_missing_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: format without URL',
hidden = false
},
err_generic_name = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> has generic name', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'generic_name',
category = 'CS1 errors: generic name',
hidden = false,
},
err_generic_title = {
message = 'Cite uses generic title',
anchor = 'generic_title',
category = 'CS1 errors: generic title',
hidden = false,
},
err_invalid_param_val = {
message = 'Invalid <code class="cs1-code">|$1=$2</code>', -- $1 is parameter name $2 is parameter value
anchor = 'invalid_param_val',
category = 'CS1 errors: invalid parameter value',
hidden = false
},
err_invisible_char = {
message = '$1 in $2 at position $3', -- $1 is invisible char $2 is parameter name $3 is position number
anchor = 'invisible_char',
category = 'CS1 errors: invisible characters',
hidden = false
},
err_missing_name = {
message = 'Missing <code class="cs1-code">|$1$2=</code>', -- $1 is modified NameList; $2 is enumerator
anchor = 'missing_name',
category = 'CS1 errors: missing name', -- author, contributor, editor, interviewer, translator
hidden = false
},
err_missing_periodical = {
message = 'Cite $1 requires <code class="cs1-code">|$2=</code>', -- $1 is cs1 template name; $2 is canonical periodical parameter name for cite $1
anchor = 'missing_periodical',
category = 'CS1 errors: missing periodical',
hidden = true
},
err_missing_pipe = {
message = 'Missing pipe in: <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'missing_pipe',
category = 'CS1 errors: missing pipe',
hidden = false
},
err_param_access_requires_param = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|$1-access=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'param_access_requires_param',
category = 'CS1 errors: param-access',
hidden = false
},
err_param_has_ext_link = {
message = 'External link in <code class="cs1-code">$1</code>', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'param_has_ext_link',
category = 'CS1 errors: external links',
hidden = false
},
err_parameter_ignored = {
message = 'Unknown parameter <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> ignored', -- $1 is parameter name
anchor = 'parameter_ignored',
category = 'CS1 errors: unsupported parameter',
hidden = false
},
err_parameter_ignored_suggest = {
message = 'Unknown parameter <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> ignored (<code class="cs1-code">|$2=</code> suggested)', -- $1 is unknown parameter $2 is suggested parameter name
anchor = 'parameter_ignored_suggest',
category = 'CS1 errors: unsupported parameter',
hidden = false
},
err_redundant_parameters = {
message = 'More than one of $1 specified', -- $1 is error message detail
anchor = 'redundant_parameters',
category = 'CS1 errors: redundant parameter',
hidden = false
},
err_script_parameter = {
message = 'Invalid <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code>: $2', -- $1 is parameter name $2 is script language code or error detail
anchor = 'script_parameter',
category = 'CS1 errors: script parameters',
hidden = false
},
err_ssrn_missing = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|ssrn=</code> required',
anchor = 'ssrn_missing',
category = 'CS1 errors: SSRN', -- same as bad arxiv
hidden = false
},
err_text_ignored = {
message = 'Text "$1" ignored', -- $1 is ignored text
anchor = 'text_ignored',
category = 'CS1 errors: unrecognized parameter',
hidden = false
},
err_trans_missing_title = {
message = '<code class="cs1-code">|trans-$1=</code> requires <code class="cs1-code">|$1=</code> or <code class="cs1-code">|script-$1=</code>', -- $1 is base parameter name
anchor = 'trans_missing_title',
category = 'CS1 errors: translated title',
hidden = false
},
err_param_unknown_empty = {
message = 'Cite has empty unknown parameter$1: $2', -- $1 is 's' or empty space; $2 is emty unknown param list
anchor = 'param_unknown_empty',
category = 'CS1 errors: empty unknown parameters',
hidden = false
},
err_vancouver = {
message = 'Vancouver style error: $1 in name $2', -- $1 is error detail, $2 is the nth name
anchor = 'vancouver',
category = 'CS1 errors: Vancouver style',
hidden = false
},
err_wikilink_in_url = {
message = 'URL–wikilink conflict', -- uses ndash
anchor = 'wikilink_in_url',
category = 'CS1 errors: URL–wikilink conflict', -- uses ndash
hidden = false
},

--[[--------------------------< M A I N T >-------------------------------------

maint messages do not have a message (message = nil); otherwise the structure
is the same as error messages

]]

maint_archived_copy = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'archived_copy',
category = 'CS1 maint: archived copy as title',
hidden = true,
},
maint_authors = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'authors',
category = 'CS1 maint: uses authors parameter',
hidden = true,
},
maint_bot_unknown = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'bot:_unknown',
category = 'CS1 maint: bot: original URL status unknown',
hidden = true,
},
maint_date_auto_xlated = { -- date auto-translation not supported by en.wiki
message = nil,
anchor = 'date_auto_xlated',
category = 'CS1 maint: date auto-translated',
hidden = true,
},
maint_date_format = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'date_format',
category = 'CS1 maint: date format',
hidden = true,
},
maint_date_year = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'date_year',
category = 'CS1 maint: date and year',
hidden = true,
},
maint_doi_ignore = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'doi_ignore',
category = 'CS1 maint: ignored DOI errors',
hidden = true,
},
maint_doi_inactive = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'doi_inactive',
category = 'CS1 maint: DOI inactive',
hidden = true,
},
maint_doi_inactive_dated = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'doi_inactive_dated',
category = 'CS1 maint: DOI inactive as of $2$3$1', -- $1 is year, $2 is month-name or empty string, $3 is space or empty string
hidden = true,
},
maint_extra_punct = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'extra_punct',
category = 'CS1 maint: extra punctuation',
hidden = true,
},
maint_isbn_ignore = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'ignore_isbn_err',
category = 'CS1 maint: ignored ISBN errors',
hidden = true,
},
maint_issn_ignore = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'ignore_issn',
category = 'CS1 maint: ignored ISSN errors',
hidden = true,
},
maint_jfm_format = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'jfm_format',
category = 'CS1 maint: JFM format',
hidden = true,
},
maint_location = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'location',
category = 'CS1 maint: location',
hidden = true,
},
maint_mr_format = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'mr_format',
category = 'CS1 maint: MR format',
hidden = true,
},
maint_mult_names = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'mult_names',
category = 'CS1 maint: multiple names: $1', -- $1 is '<name>s list'; gets value from special_case_translation table
hidden = true,
},
maint_numeric_names = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'numeric_names',
category = 'CS1 maint: numeric names: $1', -- $1 is '<name>s list'; gets value from special_case_translation table
hidden = true,
},
maint_others = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'others',
category = 'CS1 maint: others',
hidden = true,
},
maint_others_avm = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'others_avm',
category = 'CS1 maint: others in cite AV media (notes)',
hidden = true,
},
maint_pmc_embargo = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'embargo',
category = 'CS1 maint: PMC embargo expired',
hidden = true,
},
maint_pmc_format = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'pmc_format',
category = 'CS1 maint: PMC format',
hidden = true,
},
maint_postscript = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'postscript',
category = 'CS1 maint: postscript',
hidden = true,
},
maint_ref_duplicates_default = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'ref_default',
category = 'CS1 maint: ref duplicates default',
hidden = true,
},
maint_unfit = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'unfit',
category = 'CS1 maint: unfit URL',
hidden = true,
},
maint_unknown_lang = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'unknown_lang',
category = 'CS1 maint: unrecognized language',
hidden = true,
},
maint_untitled = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'untitled',
category = 'CS1 maint: untitled periodical',
hidden = true,
},
maint_url_status = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'url_status',
category = 'CS1 maint: url-status',
hidden = true,
},
maint_zbl = {
message = nil,
anchor = 'zbl',
category = 'CS1 maint: Zbl',
hidden = true,
},
}

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following contains a list of values for various defined identifiers. For each
identifier we specify a variety of information necessary to properly render the
identifier in the citation.

parameters: a list of parameter aliases for this identifier; first in the list is the canonical form
link: Wikipedia article name
redirect: a local redirect to a local Wikipedia article name; at en.wiki, 'ISBN (identifier)' is a redirect to 'International Standard Book Number'
q: Wikidata q number for the identifier
label: the label preceeding the identifier; label is linked to a Wikipedia article (in this order):
redirect from id_handlers['<id>'].redirect when use_identifier_redirects is true
Wikidata-supplied article name for the local wiki from id_handlers['<id>'].q
local article name from id_handlers['<id>'].link
prefix: the first part of a URL that will be concatenated with a second part which usually contains the identifier
suffix: optional third part to be added after the identifier
encode: true if URI should be percent-encoded; otherwise false
COinS: identifier link or keyword for use in COinS:
for identifiers registered at info-uri.info use: info:.... where '...' is the appropriate identifier label
for identifiers that have COinS keywords, use the keyword: rft.isbn, rft.issn, rft.eissn
for |asin= and |ol=, which require assembly, use the keyword: url
for others make a URL using the value in prefix/suffix and #label, use the keyword: pre (not checked; any text other than 'info', 'rft', or 'url' works here)
set to nil to leave the identifier out of the COinS
separator: character or text between label and the identifier in the rendered citation
id_limit: for those identifiers with established limits, this property holds the upper limit
access: use this parameter to set the access level for all instances of this identifier.
the value must be a valid access level for an identifier (see ['id-access'] in this file).
custom_access: to enable custom access level for an identifier, set this parameter
to the parameter that should control it (normally 'id-access')

]]

local id_handlers = {
['ARXIV'] = {
parameters = {'arxiv', 'eprint'},
link = 'arXiv',
redirect = 'arXiv (identifier)',
q = 'Q118398',
label = 'arXiv',
prefix = '//arxiv.org/abs/', -- protocol-relative tested 2013-09-04
encode = false,
COinS = 'info:arxiv',
separator = ':',
access = 'free', -- free to read
},
['ASIN'] = {
parameters = { 'asin', 'ASIN' },
link = 'Amazon Standard Identification Number',
redirect = 'ASIN (identifier)',
q = 'Q1753278',
label = 'ASIN',
prefix = '//www.amazon.',
COinS = 'url',
separator = ' ',
encode = false;
},
['BIBCODE'] = {
parameters = {'bibcode'},
link = 'Bibcode',
redirect = 'Bibcode (identifier)',
q = 'Q25754',
label = 'Bibcode',
prefix = 'https://ui.adsabs.harvard.edu/abs/',
encode = false,
COinS = 'info:bibcode',
separator = ':',
custom_access = 'bibcode-access',
},
['BIORXIV'] = {
parameters = {'biorxiv'},
link = 'bioRxiv',
redirect = 'bioRxiv (identifier)',
q = 'Q19835482',
label = 'bioRxiv',
prefix = '//doi.org/',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
access = 'free', -- free to read
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
},
['CITESEERX'] = {
parameters = {'citeseerx'},
link = 'CiteSeerX',
redirect = 'CiteSeerX (identifier)',
q = 'Q2715061',
label = 'CiteSeerX',
prefix = '//citeseerx.ist.psu.edu/viewdoc/summary?doi=',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
access = 'free', -- free to read
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
},
['DOI'] = { -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
parameters = { 'doi', 'DOI'},
link = 'Digital object identifier',
redirect = 'doi (identifier)',
q = 'Q25670',
label = 'doi',
prefix = '//doi.org/',
COinS = 'info:doi',
separator = ':',
encode = true,
custom_access = 'doi-access',
},
['EISSN'] = {
parameters = {'eissn', 'EISSN'},
link = 'International Standard Serial Number#Electronic ISSN',
redirect = 'eISSN (identifier)',
q = 'Q46339674',
label = 'eISSN',
prefix = '//www.worldcat.org/issn/',
COinS = 'rft.eissn',
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
},
['HDL'] = {
parameters = { 'hdl', 'HDL' },
link = 'Handle System',
redirect = 'hdl (identifier)',
q = 'Q3126718',
label = 'hdl',
prefix = '//hdl.handle.net/',
COinS = 'info:hdl',
separator = ':',
encode = true,
custom_access = 'hdl-access',
},
['ISBN'] = { -- Used by InternetArchiveBot
parameters = {'isbn', 'ISBN'},
link = 'International Standard Book Number',
redirect = 'ISBN (identifier)',
q = 'Q33057',
label = 'ISBN',
prefix = 'Special:BookSources/',
COinS = 'rft.isbn',
separator = ' ',
},
['ISMN'] = {
parameters = {'ismn', 'ISMN'},
link = 'International Standard Music Number',
redirect = 'ISMN (identifier)',
q = 'Q1666938',
label = 'ISMN',
prefix = '', -- not currently used;
COinS = nil, -- nil because we can't use pre or rft or info:
separator = ' ',
},
['ISSN'] = {
parameters = {'issn', 'ISSN'},
link = 'International Standard Serial Number',
redirect = 'ISSN (identifier)',
q = 'Q131276',
label = 'ISSN',
prefix = '//www.worldcat.org/issn/',
COinS = 'rft.issn',
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
},
['JFM'] = {
parameters = {'jfm', 'JFM'},
link = 'Jahrbuch über die Fortschritte der Mathematik',
redirect = 'JFM (identifier)',
q = '',
label = 'JFM',
prefix = '//zbmath.org/?format=complete&q=an:',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
},
['JSTOR'] = {
parameters = {'jstor', 'JSTOR'},
link = 'JSTOR',
redirect = 'JSTOR (identifier)',
q = 'Q1420342',
label = 'JSTOR',
prefix = '//www.jstor.org/stable/', -- protocol-relative tested 2013-09-04
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
custom_access = 'jstor-access',
},
['LCCN'] = {
parameters = {'lccn', 'LCCN'},
link = 'Library of Congress Control Number',
redirect = 'LCCN (identifier)',
q = 'Q620946',
label = 'LCCN',
prefix = '//lccn.loc.gov/', -- protocol-relative tested 2015-12-28
COinS = 'info:lccn',
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
},
['MR'] = {
parameters = {'mr', 'MR'},
link = 'Mathematical Reviews',
redirect = 'MR (identifier)',
q = 'Q211172',
label = 'MR',
prefix = '//www.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=', -- protocol-relative tested 2013-09-04
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
},
['OCLC'] = {
parameters = {'oclc', 'OCLC'},
link = 'OCLC',
redirect = 'OCLC (identifier)',
q = 'Q190593',
label = 'OCLC',
prefix = '//www.worldcat.org/oclc/',
COinS = 'info:oclcnum',
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 9999999999, -- 10-digits
},
['OL'] = {
parameters = { 'ol', 'OL' },
link = 'Open Library',
redirect = 'OL (identifier)',
q = 'Q1201876',
label = 'OL',
prefix = '//openlibrary.org/',
COinS = 'url',
separator = ' ',
encode = true,
custom_access = 'ol-access',
},
['OSTI'] = {
parameters = {'osti', 'OSTI'},
link = 'Office of Scientific and Technical Information',
redirect = 'OSTI (identifier)',
q = 'Q2015776',
label = 'OSTI',
prefix = '//www.osti.gov/biblio/', -- protocol-relative tested 2018-09-12
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 23000000,
custom_access = 'osti-access',
},
['PMC'] = {
parameters = {'pmc', 'PMC'},
link = 'PubMed Central',
redirect = 'PMC (identifier)',
q = 'Q229883',
label = 'PMC',
prefix = '//www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC',
suffix = '',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 9100000,
access = 'free', -- free to read
},
['PMID'] = {
parameters = {'pmid', 'PMID'},
link = 'PubMed Identifier',
redirect = 'PMID (identifier)',
q = 'Q2082879',
label = 'PMID',
prefix = '//pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/',
COinS = 'info:pmid',
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 35400000,
},
['RFC'] = {
parameters = {'rfc', 'RFC'},
link = 'Request for Comments',
redirect = 'RFC (identifier)',
q = 'Q212971',
label = 'RFC',
prefix = '//tools.ietf.org/html/rfc',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 9300,
access = 'free', -- free to read
},
['SBN'] = {
parameters = {'sbn', 'SBN'},
link = 'Standard Book Number', -- redirect to International_Standard_Book_Number#History
redirect = 'SBN (identifier)',
label = 'SBN',
prefix = 'Special:BookSources/0-', -- prefix has leading zero necessary to make 9-digit sbn a 10-digit isbn
COinS = nil, -- nil because we can't use pre or rft or info:
separator = ' ',
},
['SSRN'] = {
parameters = {'ssrn', 'SSRN'},
link = 'Social Science Research Network',
redirect = 'SSRN (identifier)',
q = 'Q7550801',
label = 'SSRN',
prefix = '//ssrn.com/abstract=', -- protocol-relative tested 2013-09-04
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 4100000,
custom_access = 'ssrn-access',
},
['S2CID'] = {
parameters = {'s2cid', 'S2CID'},
link = 'Semantic Scholar',
redirect = 'S2CID (identifier)',
q = 'Q22908627',
label = 'S2CID',
prefix = 'https://api.semanticscholar.org/CorpusID:',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = false,
separator = ' ',
id_limit = 250000000,
custom_access = 's2cid-access',
},
['USENETID'] = {
parameters = {'message-id'},
link = 'Usenet',
redirect = 'Usenet (identifier)',
q = 'Q193162',
label = 'Usenet:',
prefix = 'news:',
encode = false,
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
separator = ' ',
},
['ZBL'] = {
parameters = {'zbl', 'ZBL' },
link = 'Zentralblatt MATH',
redirect = 'Zbl (identifier)',
q = 'Q190269',
label = 'Zbl',
prefix = '//zbmath.org/?format=complete&q=an:',
COinS = 'pre', -- use prefix value
encode = true,
separator = ' ',
},
}

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T S >---------------------------------
]]

return {
use_identifier_redirects = true, -- when true use redirect name for identifier label links; always true at en.wiki
local_lang_cat_enable = false; -- when true categorizes pages where |language=<local wiki's language>; always false at en.wiki
date_name_auto_xlate_enable = false; -- when true translates English month-names to the local-wiki's language month names; always false at en.wiki
date_digit_auto_xlate_enable = false; -- when true translates Western date digit to the local-wiki's language digits (date_names['local_digits']); always false at en.wiki

global_df = get_date_format (), -- tables and variables created when this module is loaded
punct_skip = build_skip_table (punct_skip, punct_meta_params),
url_skip = build_skip_table (url_skip, url_meta_params),

aliases = aliases,
special_case_translation = special_case_translation,
date_names = date_names,
err_msg_supl = err_msg_supl,
error_conditions = error_conditions,
editor_markup_patterns = editor_markup_patterns,
et_al_patterns = et_al_patterns,
id_handlers = id_handlers,
keywords_lists = keywords_lists,
keywords_xlate = keywords_xlate,
stripmarkers=stripmarkers,
invisible_chars = invisible_chars,
invisible_defs = invisible_defs,
indic_script = indic_script,
emoji = emoji,
local_lang_cat_enable = local_lang_cat_enable,
maint_cats = maint_cats,
messages = messages,
presentation = presentation,
prop_cats = prop_cats,
script_lang_codes = script_lang_codes,
lang_code_remap = lang_code_remap,
lang_name_remap = lang_name_remap,
this_wiki_code = this_wiki_code,
title_types = title_types,
uncategorized_namespaces = uncategorized_namespaces,
uncategorized_subpages = uncategorized_subpages,
templates_using_volume = templates_using_volume,
templates_using_issue = templates_using_issue,
templates_not_using_page = templates_not_using_page,
vol_iss_pg_patterns = vol_iss_pg_patterns,

inter_wiki_map = inter_wiki_map,
mw_languages_by_tag_t = mw_languages_by_tag_t,
mw_languages_by_name_t = mw_languages_by_name_t,
citation_class_map_t = citation_class_map_t,
}

Module:Citation/CS1

2022-04-04T14:01:57Z

Zoran: Created page with "require ('Module:No globals'); --[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >-------------------------------------- each of these counts against t..."

require ('Module:No globals');

--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------

each of these counts against the Lua upvalue limit

]]

local validation; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation

local utilities; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
local z ={}; -- table of tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

local identifiers; -- functions and tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers
local metadata; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/COinS
local cfg = {}; -- table of configuration tables that are defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration
local whitelist = {}; -- table of tables listing valid template parameter names; defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist

--[[---------------------------------

declare variables here that have page-wide scope that are not brought in from
other modules; that are created here and used here

]]

local added_deprecated_cat; -- Boolean flag so that the category is added only once
local added_vanc_errs; -- Boolean flag so we only emit one Vancouver error / category
local added_generic_name_errs; -- Boolean flag so we only emit one generic name error / category and stop testing names once an error is encountered
local Frame; -- holds the module's frame table
local is_preview_mode; -- true when article is in preview mode; false when using 'Preview page with this template' (previewing the module)
local is_sandbox; -- true when using sandbox modules to render citation

--[[--------------------------< F I R S T _ S E T >------------------------------------------------------------

Locates and returns the first set value in a table of values where the order established in the table,
left-to-right (or top-to-bottom), is the order in which the values are evaluated. Returns nil if none are set.

This version replaces the original 'for _, val in pairs do' and a similar version that used ipairs. With the pairs
version the order of evaluation could not be guaranteed. With the ipairs version, a nil value would terminate
the for-loop before it reached the actual end of the list.

]]

local function first_set (list, count)
local i = 1;
while i <= count do -- loop through all items in list
if utilities.is_set( list[i] ) then
return list[i]; -- return the first set list member
end
i = i + 1; -- point to next
end
end

--[[--------------------------< A D D _ V A N C _ E R R O R >----------------------------------------------------

Adds a single Vancouver system error message to the template's output regardless of how many error actually exist.
To prevent duplication, added_vanc_errs is nil until an error message is emitted.

added_vanc_errs is a Boolean declared in page scope variables above

]]

local function add_vanc_error (source, position)
if added_vanc_errs then return end

added_vanc_errs = true; -- note that we've added this category
utilities.set_message ('err_vancouver', {source, position});
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

does this thing that purports to be a URI scheme seem to be a valid scheme? The scheme is checked to see if it
is in agreement with http://tools.ietf.org/html/std66#section-3.1 which says:
Scheme names consist of a sequence of characters beginning with a
letter and followed by any combination of letters, digits, plus
("+"), period ("."), or hyphen ("-").

returns true if it does, else false

]]

local function is_scheme (scheme)
return scheme and scheme:match ('^%a[%a%d%+%.%-]*:'); -- true if scheme is set and matches the pattern
end

--[=[---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Does this thing that purports to be a domain name seem to be a valid domain name?

Syntax defined here: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1034#section-3.5
BNF defined here: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4234
Single character names are generally reserved; see https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-dnsind-iana-dns-01#page-15;
see also [[Single-letter second-level domain]]
list of TLDs: https://www.iana.org/domains/root/db

RFC 952 (modified by RFC 1123) requires the first and last character of a hostname to be a letter or a digit. Between
the first and last characters the name may use letters, digits, and the hyphen.

Also allowed are IPv4 addresses. IPv6 not supported

domain is expected to be stripped of any path so that the last character in the last character of the TLD. tld
is two or more alpha characters. Any preceding '//' (from splitting a URL with a scheme) will be stripped
here. Perhaps not necessary but retained in case it is necessary for IPv4 dot decimal.

There are several tests:
the first character of the whole domain name including subdomains must be a letter or a digit
internationalized domain name (ASCII characters with .xn-- ASCII Compatible Encoding (ACE) prefix xn-- in the TLD) see https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3490
single-letter/digit second-level domains in the .org, .cash, and .today TLDs
q, x, and z SL domains in the .com TLD
i and q SL domains in the .net TLD
single-letter SL domains in the ccTLDs (where the ccTLD is two letters)
two-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters)
three-plus-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters)
IPv4 dot-decimal address format; TLD not allowed

returns true if domain appears to be a proper name and TLD or IPv4 address, else false

]=]

local function is_domain_name (domain)
if not domain then
return false; -- if not set, abandon
end

domain = domain:gsub ('^//', ''); -- strip '//' from domain name if present; done here so we only have to do it once

if not domain:match ('^[%w]') then -- first character must be letter or digit
return false;
end

if domain:match ('^%a+:') then -- hack to detect things that look like s:Page:Title where Page: is namespace at Wikisource
return false;
end

local patterns = { -- patterns that look like URLs
'%f[%w][%w][%w%-]+[%w]%.%a%a+$', -- three or more character hostname.hostname or hostname.tld
'%f[%w][%w][%w%-]+[%w]%.xn%-%-[%w]+$', -- internationalized domain name with ACE prefix
'%f[%a][qxz]%.com$', -- assigned one character .com hostname (x.com times out 2015-12-10)
'%f[%a][iq]%.net$', -- assigned one character .net hostname (q.net registered but not active 2015-12-10)
'%f[%w][%w]%.%a%a$', -- one character hostname and ccTLD (2 chars)
'%f[%w][%w][%w]%.%a%a+$', -- two character hostname and TLD
'^%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?', -- IPv4 address
}

for _, pattern in ipairs (patterns) do -- loop through the patterns list
if domain:match (pattern) then
return true; -- if a match then we think that this thing that purports to be a URL is a URL
end
end

for _, d in ipairs ({'cash', 'company', 'today', 'org'}) do -- look for single letter second level domain names for these top level domains
if domain:match ('%f[%w][%w]%.' .. d) then
return true
end
end
return false; -- no matches, we don't know what this thing is
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

returns true if the scheme and domain parts of a URL appear to be a valid URL; else false.

This function is the last step in the validation process. This function is separate because there are cases that
are not covered by split_url(), for example is_parameter_ext_wikilink() which is looking for bracketted external
wikilinks.

]]

local function is_url (scheme, domain)
if utilities.is_set (scheme) then -- if scheme is set check it and domain
return is_scheme (scheme) and is_domain_name (domain);
else
return is_domain_name (domain); -- scheme not set when URL is protocol-relative
end
end

--[[--------------------------< S P L I T _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------

Split a URL into a scheme, authority indicator, and domain.

First remove Fully Qualified Domain Name terminator (a dot following TLD) (if any) and any path(/), query(?) or fragment(#).

If protocol-relative URL, return nil scheme and domain else return nil for both scheme and domain.

When not protocol-relative, get scheme, authority indicator, and domain. If there is an authority indicator (one
or more '/' characters immediately following the scheme's colon), make sure that there are only 2.

Any URL that does not have news: scheme must have authority indicator (//). TODO: are there other common schemes
like news: that don't use authority indicator?

Strip off any port and path;

]]

local function split_url (url_str)
local scheme, authority, domain;

url_str = url_str:gsub ('([%a%d])%.?[/%?#].*$', '%1'); -- strip FQDN terminator and path(/), query(?), fragment (#) (the capture prevents false replacement of '//')

if url_str:match ('^//%S*') then -- if there is what appears to be a protocol-relative URL
domain = url_str:match ('^//(%S*)')
elseif url_str:match ('%S-:/*%S+') then -- if there is what appears to be a scheme, optional authority indicator, and domain name
scheme, authority, domain = url_str:match ('(%S-:)(/*)(%S+)'); -- extract the scheme, authority indicator, and domain portions
if utilities.is_set (authority) then
authority = authority:gsub ('//', '', 1); -- replace place 1 pair of '/' with nothing;
if utilities.is_set(authority) then -- if anything left (1 or 3+ '/' where authority should be) then
return scheme; -- return scheme only making domain nil which will cause an error message
end
else
if not scheme:match ('^news:') then -- except for news:..., MediaWiki won't link URLs that do not have authority indicator; TODO: a better way to do this test?
return scheme; -- return scheme only making domain nil which will cause an error message
end
end
domain = domain:gsub ('(%a):%d+', '%1'); -- strip port number if present
end

return scheme, domain;
end

--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ P A R A M _ O K >---------------------------------------------------

checks the content of |title-link=, |series-link=, |author-link=, etc. for properly formatted content: no wikilinks, no URLs

Link parameters are to hold the title of a Wikipedia article, so none of the WP:TITLESPECIALCHARACTERS are allowed:
# < > [ ] | { } _
except the underscore which is used as a space in wiki URLs and # which is used for section links

returns false when the value contains any of these characters.

When there are no illegal characters, this function returns TRUE if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid URL (the
|<param>-link= parameter is ok); else false when value appears to be a valid URL (the |<param>-link= parameter is NOT ok).

]]

local function link_param_ok (value)
local scheme, domain;
if value:find ('[<>%[%]|{}]') then -- if any prohibited characters
return false;
end

scheme, domain = split_url (value); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from URL;
return not is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid URL
end

--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ T I T L E _ O K >---------------------------------------------------

Use link_param_ok() to validate |<param>-link= value and its matching |<title>= value.

|<title>= may be wiki-linked but not when |<param>-link= has a value. This function emits an error message when
that condition exists

check <link> for inter-language interwiki-link prefix. prefix must be a MediaWiki-recognized language
code and must begin with a colon.

]]

local function link_title_ok (link, lorig, title, torig)
local orig;
if utilities.is_set (link) then -- don't bother if <param>-link doesn't have a value
if not link_param_ok (link) then -- check |<param>-link= markup
orig = lorig; -- identify the failing link parameter
elseif title:find ('%[%[') then -- check |title= for wikilink markup
orig = torig; -- identify the failing |title= parameter
elseif link:match ('^%a+:') then -- if the link is what looks like an interwiki
local prefix = link:match ('^(%a+):'):lower(); -- get the interwiki prefix

if cfg.inter_wiki_map[prefix] then -- if prefix is in the map, must have preceding colon
orig = lorig; -- flag as error
end
end
end

if utilities.is_set (orig) then
link = ''; -- unset
utilities.set_message ('err_bad_paramlink', orig); -- URL or wikilink in |title= with |title-link=;
end

return link; -- link if ok, empty string else
end

--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------

Determines whether a URL string appears to be valid.

First we test for space characters. If any are found, return false. Then split the URL into scheme and domain
portions, or for protocol-relative (//example.com) URLs, just the domain. Use is_url() to validate the two
portions of the URL. If both are valid, or for protocol-relative if domain is valid, return true, else false.

Because it is different from a standard URL, and because this module used external_link() to make external links
that work for standard and news: links, we validate newsgroup names here. The specification for a newsgroup name
is at https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5536#section-3.1.4

]]

local function check_url( url_str )
if nil == url_str:match ("^%S+$") then -- if there are any spaces in |url=value it can't be a proper URL
return false;
end
local scheme, domain;

scheme, domain = split_url (url_str); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from URL;

if 'news:' == scheme then -- special case for newsgroups
return domain:match('^[%a%d%+%-_]+%.[%a%d%+%-_%.]*[%a%d%+%-_]$');
end

return is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value appears to be a valid URL
end

--[=[-----------------------------------------------------

Return true if a parameter value has a string that begins and ends with square brackets [ and ] and the first
non-space characters following the opening bracket appear to be a URL. The test will also find external wikilinks
that use protocol-relative URLs. Also finds bare URLs.

The frontier pattern prevents a match on interwiki-links which are similar to scheme:path URLs. The tests that
find bracketed URLs are required because the parameters that call this test (currently |title=, |chapter=, |work=,
and |publisher=) may have wikilinks and there are articles or redirects like '//Hus' so, while uncommon, |title=[[//Hus]]
is possible as might be [[en://Hus]].

]=]

local function is_parameter_ext_wikilink (value)
local scheme, domain;

if value:match ('%f[%[]%[%a%S*:%S+.*%]') then -- if ext. wikilink with scheme and domain: [xxxx://yyyyy.zzz]
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('%f[%[]%[(%a%S*:%S+).*%]'));
elseif value:match ('%f[%[]%[//%S+.*%]') then -- if protocol-relative ext. wikilink: [//yyyyy.zzz]
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('%f[%[]%[(//%S+).*%]'));
elseif value:match ('%a%S*:%S+') then -- if bare URL with scheme; may have leading or trailing plain text
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('(%a%S*:%S+)'));
elseif value:match ('//%S+') then -- if protocol-relative bare URL: //yyyyy.zzz; may have leading or trailing plain text
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('(//%S+)')); -- what is left should be the domain
else
return false; -- didn't find anything that is obviously a URL
end

return is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value appears to be a valid URL
end

--[[-------------------------< C H E C K _ F O R _ U R L >-----------------------------------------------------

loop through a list of parameters and their values. Look at the value and if it has an external link, emit an error message.

]]

local function check_for_url (parameter_list, error_list)
for k, v in pairs (parameter_list) do -- for each parameter in the list
if is_parameter_ext_wikilink (v) then -- look at the value; if there is a URL add an error message
table.insert (error_list, utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', k));
end
end
end

--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ F O R _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------

Escape sequences for content that will be used for URL descriptions

]]

local function safe_for_url( str )
if str:match( "%[%[.-%]%]" ) ~= nil then
utilities.set_message ('err_wikilink_in_url', {});
end

return str:gsub( '[%[%]\n]', {
['['] = '[',
[']'] = ']',
['\n'] = ' ' } );
end

--[[--------------------------< E X T E R N A L _ L I N K >----------------------------------------------------

Format an external link with error checking

]]

local function external_link (URL, label, source, access)
local err_msg = '';
local domain;
local path;
local base_url;

if not utilities.is_set (label) then
label = URL;
if utilities.is_set (source) then
utilities.set_message ('err_bare_url_missing_title', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', source)});
else
error (cfg.messages["bare_url_no_origin"]);
end
end
if not check_url (URL) then
utilities.set_message ('err_bad_url', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', source)});
end

domain, path = URL:match ('^([/%.%-%+:%a%d]+)([/%?#].*)$'); -- split the URL into scheme plus domain and path
if path then -- if there is a path portion
path = path:gsub ('[%[%]]', {['['] = '%5b', [']'] = '%5d'}); -- replace '[' and ']' with their percent-encoded values
URL = table.concat ({domain, path}); -- and reassemble
end

base_url = table.concat ({ "[", URL, " ", safe_for_url (label), "]" }); -- assemble a wiki-markup URL

if utilities.is_set (access) then -- access level (subscription, registration, limited)
base_url = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['ext-link-access-signal'], {cfg.presentation[access].class, cfg.presentation[access].title, base_url}); -- add the appropriate icon
end

return base_url;
end

--[[--------------------------< D E P R E C A T E D _ P A R A M E T E R >--------------------------------------

Categorize and emit an error message when the citation contains one or more deprecated parameters. The function includes the
offending parameter name to the error message. Only one error message is emitted regardless of the number of deprecated
parameters in the citation.

added_deprecated_cat is a Boolean declared in page scope variables above

]]

local function deprecated_parameter(name)
if not added_deprecated_cat then
added_deprecated_cat = true; -- note that we've added this category
utilities.set_message ('err_deprecated_params', {name}); -- add error message
end
end

--[=[-------------------------< K E R N _ Q U O T E S >--------------------------------------------------------

Apply kerning to open the space between the quote mark provided by the module and a leading or trailing quote
mark contained in a |title= or |chapter= parameter's value.

This function will positive kern either single or double quotes:
"'Unkerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks'"
" 'Kerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks' " (in real life the kerning isn't as wide as this example)
Double single quotes (italic or bold wiki-markup) are not kerned.

Replaces Unicode quote marks in plain text or in the label portion of a [[L|D]] style wikilink with typewriter
quote marks regardless of the need for kerning. Unicode quote marks are not replaced in simple [[D]] wikilinks.

Call this function for chapter titles, for website titles, etc.; not for book titles.

]=]

local function kern_quotes (str)
local cap = '';
local wl_type, label, link;

wl_type, label, link = utilities.is_wikilink (str); -- wl_type is: 0, no wl (text in label variable); 1, [[D]]; 2, [[L|D]]

if 1 == wl_type then -- [[D]] simple wikilink with or without quote marks
if mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[[\"“”\'‘’].+[\"“”\'‘’]%]%]') then -- leading and trailing quote marks
str = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-left'], str);
str = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-right'], str);
elseif mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[[\"“”\'‘’].+%]%]') then -- leading quote marks
str = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-left'], str);
elseif mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[.+[\"“”\'‘’]%]%]') then -- trailing quote marks
str = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-right'], str);
end

else -- plain text or [[L|D]]; text in label variable
label = mw.ustring.gsub (label, '[“”]', '\"'); -- replace “” (U+201C & U+201D) with " (typewriter double quote mark)
label = mw.ustring.gsub (label, '[‘’]', '\''); -- replace ‘’ (U+2018 & U+2019) with ' (typewriter single quote mark)

cap = mw.ustring.match (label, "^([\"\'][^\'].+)"); -- match leading double or single quote but not doubled single quotes (italic markup)
if utilities.is_set (cap) then
label = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-left'], cap);
end

cap = mw.ustring.match (label, "^(.+[^\'][\"\'])$") -- match trailing double or single quote but not doubled single quotes (italic markup)
if utilities.is_set (cap) then
label = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-right'], cap);
end

if 2 == wl_type then
str = utilities.make_wikilink (link, label); -- reassemble the wikilink
else
str = label;
end
end
return str;
end

--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ S C R I P T _ V A L U E >----------------------------------------

|script-title= holds title parameters that are not written in Latin-based scripts: Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew, etc. These scripts should
not be italicized and may be written right-to-left. The value supplied by |script-title= is concatenated onto Title after Title has been wrapped
in italic markup.

Regardless of language, all values provided by |script-title= are wrapped in <bdi>...</bdi> tags to isolate RTL languages from the English left to right.

|script-title= provides a unique feature. The value in |script-title= may be prefixed with a two-character ISO 639-1 language code and a colon:
|script-title=ja:*** *** (where * represents a Japanese character)
Spaces between the two-character code and the colon and the colon and the first script character are allowed:
|script-title=ja : *** ***
|script-title=ja: *** ***
|script-title=ja :*** ***
Spaces preceding the prefix are allowed: |script-title = ja:*** ***

The prefix is checked for validity. If it is a valid ISO 639-1 language code, the lang attribute (lang="ja") is added to the <bdi> tag so that browsers can
know the language the tag contains. This may help the browser render the script more correctly. If the prefix is invalid, the lang attribute
is not added. At this time there is no error message for this condition.

Supports |script-title=, |script-chapter=, |script-<periodical>=

]]

local function format_script_value (script_value, script_param)
local lang=''; -- initialize to empty string
local name;
if script_value:match('^%l%l%l?%s*:') then -- if first 3 or 4 non-space characters are script language prefix
lang = script_value:match('^(%l%l%l?)%s*:%s*%S.*'); -- get the language prefix or nil if there is no script
if not utilities.is_set (lang) then
utilities.set_message ('err_script_parameter', {script_param, 'missing title part'}); -- prefix without 'title'; add error message
return ''; -- script_value was just the prefix so return empty string
end
-- if we get this far we have prefix and script
name = cfg.lang_code_remap[lang] or mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang, cfg.this_wiki_code ); -- get language name so that we can use it to categorize
if utilities.is_set (name) then -- is prefix a proper ISO 639-1 language code?
script_value = script_value:gsub ('^%l+%s*:%s*', ''); -- strip prefix from script
-- is prefix one of these language codes?
if utilities.in_array (lang, cfg.script_lang_codes) then
utilities.add_prop_cat ('script', {name, lang})
else
utilities.set_message ('err_script_parameter', {script_param, 'unknown language code'}); -- unknown script-language; add error message
end
lang = ' lang="' .. lang .. '" '; -- convert prefix into a lang attribute
else
utilities.set_message ('err_script_parameter', {script_param, 'invalid language code'}); -- invalid language code; add error message
lang = ''; -- invalid so set lang to empty string
end
else
utilities.set_message ('err_script_parameter', {script_param, 'missing prefix'}); -- no language code prefix; add error message
end
script_value = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['bdi'], {lang, script_value}); -- isolate in case script is RTL

return script_value;
end

--[[--------------------------< S C R I P T _ C O N C A T E N A T E >------------------------------------------

Initially for |title= and |script-title=, this function concatenates those two parameter values after the script
value has been wrapped in <bdi> tags.

]]

local function script_concatenate (title, script, script_param)
if utilities.is_set (script) then
script = format_script_value (script, script_param); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; returns empty string on error
if utilities.is_set (script) then
title = title .. ' ' .. script; -- concatenate title and script title
end
end
return title;
end

--[[--------------------------< W R A P _ M S G >--------------------------------------------------------------

Applies additional message text to various parameter values. Supplied string is wrapped using a message_list
configuration taking one argument. Supports lower case text for {{citation}} templates. Additional text taken
from citation_config.messages - the reason this function is similar to but separate from wrap_style().

]]

local function wrap_msg (key, str, lower)
if not utilities.is_set ( str ) then
return "";
end
if true == lower then
local msg;
msg = cfg.messages[key]:lower(); -- set the message to lower case before
return utilities.substitute ( msg, str ); -- including template text
else
return utilities.substitute ( cfg.messages[key], str );
end
end

--[[----------------< W I K I S O U R C E _ U R L _ M A K E >-------------------

Makes a Wikisource URL from Wikisource interwiki-link. Returns the URL and appropriate
label; nil else.

str is the value assigned to |chapter= (or aliases) or |title= or |title-link=

]]

local function wikisource_url_make (str)
local wl_type, D, L;
local ws_url, ws_label;
local wikisource_prefix = table.concat ({'https://', cfg.this_wiki_code, '.wikisource.org/wiki/'});

wl_type, D, L = utilities.is_wikilink (str); -- wl_type is 0 (not a wikilink), 1 (simple wikilink), 2 (complex wikilink)

if 0 == wl_type then -- not a wikilink; might be from |title-link=
str = D:match ('^[Ww]ikisource:(.+)') or D:match ('^[Ss]:(.+)'); -- article title from interwiki link with long-form or short-form namespace
if utilities.is_set (str) then
ws_url = table.concat ({ -- build a Wikisource URL
wikisource_prefix, -- prefix
str, -- article title
});
ws_label = str; -- label for the URL
end
elseif 1 == wl_type then -- simple wikilink: [[Wikisource:ws article]]
str = D:match ('^[Ww]ikisource:(.+)') or D:match ('^[Ss]:(.+)'); -- article title from interwiki link with long-form or short-form namespace
if utilities.is_set (str) then
ws_url = table.concat ({ -- build a Wikisource URL
wikisource_prefix, -- prefix
str, -- article title
});
ws_label = str; -- label for the URL
end
elseif 2 == wl_type then -- non-so-simple wikilink: [[Wikisource:ws article|displayed text]] ([[L|D]])
str = L:match ('^[Ww]ikisource:(.+)') or L:match ('^[Ss]:(.+)'); -- article title from interwiki link with long-form or short-form namespace
if utilities.is_set (str) then
ws_label = D; -- get ws article name from display portion of interwiki link
ws_url = table.concat ({ -- build a Wikisource URL
wikisource_prefix, -- prefix
str, -- article title without namespace from link portion of wikilink
});
end
end

if ws_url then
ws_url = mw.uri.encode (ws_url, 'WIKI'); -- make a usable URL
ws_url = ws_url:gsub ('%%23', '#'); -- undo percent-encoding of fragment marker
end

return ws_url, ws_label, L or D; -- return proper URL or nil and a label or nil
end

--[[----------------< F O R M A T _ P E R I O D I C A L >-----------------------

Format the three periodical parameters: |script-<periodical>=, |<periodical>=,
and |trans-<periodical>= into a single Periodical meta-parameter.

]]

local function format_periodical (script_periodical, script_periodical_source, periodical, trans_periodical)

if not utilities.is_set (periodical) then
periodical = ''; -- to be safe for concatenation
else
periodical = utilities.wrap_style ('italic-title', periodical); -- style
end

periodical = script_concatenate (periodical, script_periodical, script_periodical_source); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; must be done after title is wrapped

if utilities.is_set (trans_periodical) then
trans_periodical = utilities.wrap_style ('trans-italic-title', trans_periodical);
if utilities.is_set (periodical) then
periodical = periodical .. ' ' .. trans_periodical;
else -- here when trans-periodical without periodical or script-periodical
periodical = trans_periodical;
utilities.set_message ('err_trans_missing_title', {'periodical'});
end
end

return periodical;
end

--[[------------------< F O R M A T _ C H A P T E R _ T I T L E >---------------

Format the four chapter parameters: |script-chapter=, |chapter=, |trans-chapter=,
and |chapter-url= into a single chapter meta- parameter (chapter_url_source used
for error messages).

]]

local function format_chapter_title (script_chapter, script_chapter_source, chapter, chapter_source, trans_chapter, trans_chapter_source, chapter_url, chapter_url_source, no_quotes, access)
local ws_url, ws_label, L = wikisource_url_make (chapter); -- make a wikisource URL and label from a wikisource interwiki link
if ws_url then
ws_label = ws_label:gsub ('_', ' '); -- replace underscore separators with space characters
chapter = ws_label;
end

if not utilities.is_set (chapter) then
chapter = ''; -- to be safe for concatenation
else
if false == no_quotes then
chapter = kern_quotes (chapter); -- if necessary, separate chapter title's leading and trailing quote marks from module provided quote marks
chapter = utilities.wrap_style ('quoted-title', chapter);
end
end

chapter = script_concatenate (chapter, script_chapter, script_chapter_source); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; must be done after title is wrapped

if utilities.is_set (chapter_url) then
chapter = external_link (chapter_url, chapter, chapter_url_source, access); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate
elseif ws_url then
chapter = external_link (ws_url, chapter .. ' ', 'ws link in chapter'); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate; space char to move icon away from chap text; TODO: better way to do this?
chapter = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['interwiki-icon'], {cfg.presentation['class-wikisource'], L, chapter});
end

if utilities.is_set (trans_chapter) then
trans_chapter = utilities.wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', trans_chapter);
if utilities.is_set (chapter) then
chapter = chapter .. ' ' .. trans_chapter;
else -- here when trans_chapter without chapter or script-chapter
chapter = trans_chapter;
chapter_source = trans_chapter_source:match ('trans%-?(.+)'); -- when no chapter, get matching name from trans-<param>
utilities.set_message ('err_trans_missing_title', {chapter_source});
end
end

return chapter;
end

--[[----------------< H A S _ I N V I S I B L E _ C H A R S >-------------------

This function searches a parameter's value for non-printable or invisible characters.
The search stops at the first match.

This function will detect the visible replacement character when it is part of the Wikisource.

Detects but ignores nowiki and math stripmarkers. Also detects other named stripmarkers
(gallery, math, pre, ref) and identifies them with a slightly different error message.
See also coins_cleanup().

Output of this function is an error message that identifies the character or the
Unicode group, or the stripmarker that was detected along with its position (or,
for multi-byte characters, the position of its first byte) in the parameter value.

]]

local function has_invisible_chars (param, v)
local position = ''; -- position of invisible char or starting position of stripmarker
local capture; -- used by stripmarker detection to hold name of the stripmarker
local stripmarker; -- boolean set true when a stripmarker is found

capture = string.match (v, '[%w%p ]*'); -- test for values that are simple ASCII text and bypass other tests if true
if capture == v then -- if same there are no Unicode characters
return;
end

for _, invisible_char in ipairs (cfg.invisible_chars) do
local char_name = invisible_char[1]; -- the character or group name
local pattern = invisible_char[2]; -- the pattern used to find it
position, _, capture = mw.ustring.find (v, pattern); -- see if the parameter value contains characters that match the pattern

if position and (cfg.invisible_defs.zwj == capture) then -- if we found a zero-width joiner character
if mw.ustring.find (v, cfg.indic_script) then -- it's ok if one of the Indic scripts
position = nil; -- unset position
elseif cfg.emoji[mw.ustring.codepoint (v, position+1)] then -- is zwj followed by a character listed in emoji{}?
position = nil; -- unset position
end
end

if position then
if 'nowiki' == capture or 'math' == capture or -- nowiki and math stripmarkers (not an error condition)
('templatestyles' == capture and utilities.in_array (param, {'id', 'quote'})) then -- templatestyles stripmarker allowed in these parameters
stripmarker = true; -- set a flag
elseif true == stripmarker and cfg.invisible_defs.del == capture then -- because stripmakers begin and end with the delete char, assume that we've found one end of a stripmarker
position = nil; -- unset
else
local err_msg;
if capture and not (cfg.invisible_defs.del == capture or cfg.invisible_defs.zwj == capture) then
err_msg = capture .. ' ' .. char_name;
else
err_msg = char_name .. ' ' .. 'character';
end

utilities.set_message ('err_invisible_char', {err_msg, utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', param), position}); -- add error message
return; -- and done with this parameter
end
end
end
end

--[[-------------------< A R G U M E N T _ W R A P P E R >----------------------

Argument wrapper. This function provides support for argument mapping defined
in the configuration file so that multiple names can be transparently aliased to
single internal variable.

]]

local function argument_wrapper ( args )
local origin = {};

return setmetatable({
ORIGIN = function ( self, k )
local dummy = self[k]; -- force the variable to be loaded.
return origin[k];
end
},
{
__index = function ( tbl, k )
if origin[k] ~= nil then
return nil;
end

local args, list, v = args, cfg.aliases[k];

if type( list ) == 'table' then
v, origin[k] = utilities.select_one ( args, list, 'err_redundant_parameters' );
if origin[k] == nil then
origin[k] = ''; -- Empty string, not nil
end
elseif list ~= nil then
v, origin[k] = args[list], list;
else
-- maybe let through instead of raising an error?
-- v, origin[k] = args[k], k;
error( cfg.messages['unknown_argument_map'] .. ': ' .. k);
end

-- Empty strings, not nil;
if v == nil then
v = '';
origin[k] = '';
end

tbl = rawset( tbl, k, v );
return v;
end,
});
end

--[[--------------------------< N O W R A P _ D A T E >-------------------------

When date is YYYY-MM-DD format wrap in nowrap span: YYYY-MM-DD.
When date is DD MMMM YYYY or is MMMM DD, YYYY then wrap in nowrap span:
DD MMMM YYYY or MMMM DD, YYYY

DOES NOT yet support MMMM YYYY or any of the date ranges.

]]

local function nowrap_date (date)
local cap = '';
local cap2 = '';

if date:match("^%d%d%d%d%-%d%d%-%d%d$") then
date = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['nowrap1'], date);

elseif date:match("^%a+%s*%d%d?,%s+%d%d%d%d$") or date:match ("^%d%d?%s*%a+%s+%d%d%d%d$") then
cap, cap2 = string.match (date, "^(.*)%s+(%d%d%d%d)$");
date = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['nowrap2'], {cap, cap2});
end

return date;
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ T I T L E T Y P E >---------------------

This function sets default title types (equivalent to the citation including
|type=<default value>) for those templates that have defaults. Also handles the
special case where it is desirable to omit the title type from the rendered citation
(|type=none).

]]

local function set_titletype (cite_class, title_type)
if utilities.is_set (title_type) then
if 'none' == cfg.keywords_xlate[title_type] then
title_type = ''; -- if |type=none then type parameter not displayed
end
return title_type; -- if |type= has been set to any other value use that value
end

return cfg.title_types [cite_class] or ''; -- set template's default title type; else empty string for concatenation
end

--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ J O I N >-----------------------------

Joins a sequence of strings together while checking for duplicate separation characters.

]]

local function safe_join( tbl, duplicate_char )
local f = {}; -- create a function table appropriate to type of 'duplicate character'
if 1 == #duplicate_char then -- for single byte ASCII characters use the string library functions
f.gsub = string.gsub
f.match = string.match
f.sub = string.sub
else -- for multi-byte characters use the ustring library functions
f.gsub = mw.ustring.gsub
f.match = mw.ustring.match
f.sub = mw.ustring.sub
end

local str = ''; -- the output string
local comp = ''; -- what does 'comp' mean?
local end_chr = '';
local trim;
for _, value in ipairs( tbl ) do
if value == nil then value = ''; end

if str == '' then -- if output string is empty
str = value; -- assign value to it (first time through the loop)
elseif value ~= '' then
if value:sub(1, 1) == '<' then -- special case of values enclosed in spans and other markup.
comp = value:gsub( "%b<>", "" ); -- remove HTML markup (string -> string)
else
comp = value;
end
-- typically duplicate_char is sepc
if f.sub(comp, 1, 1) == duplicate_char then -- is first character same as duplicate_char? why test first character?
-- Because individual string segments often (always?) begin with terminal punct for the
-- preceding segment: 'First element' .. 'sepc next element' .. etc.?
trim = false;
end_chr = f.sub(str, -1, -1); -- get the last character of the output string
-- str = str .. "<HERE(enchr=" .. end_chr .. ")" -- debug stuff?
if end_chr == duplicate_char then -- if same as separator
str = f.sub(str, 1, -2); -- remove it
elseif end_chr == "'" then -- if it might be wiki-markup
if f.sub(str, -3, -1) == duplicate_char .. "''" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc''
str = f.sub(str, 1, -4) .. "''"; -- remove them and add back ''
elseif f.sub(str, -5, -1) == duplicate_char .. "]]''" then -- if last five chars of str are sepc]]''
trim = true; -- why? why do this and next differently from previous?
elseif f.sub(str, -4, -1) == duplicate_char .. "]''" then -- if last four chars of str are sepc]''
trim = true; -- same question
end
elseif end_chr == "]" then -- if it might be wiki-markup
if f.sub(str, -3, -1) == duplicate_char .. "]]" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc]] wikilink
trim = true;
elseif f.sub(str, -3, -1) == duplicate_char .. '"]' then -- if last three chars of str are sepc"] quoted external link
trim = true;
elseif f.sub(str, -2, -1) == duplicate_char .. "]" then -- if last two chars of str are sepc] external link
trim = true;
elseif f.sub(str, -4, -1) == duplicate_char .. "'']" then -- normal case when |url=something & |title=Title.
trim = true;
end
elseif end_chr == " " then -- if last char of output string is a space
if f.sub(str, -2, -1) == duplicate_char .. " " then -- if last two chars of str are <sepc><space>
str = f.sub(str, 1, -3); -- remove them both
end
end

if trim then
if value ~= comp then -- value does not equal comp when value contains HTML markup
local dup2 = duplicate_char;
if f.match(dup2, "%A" ) then dup2 = "%" .. dup2; end -- if duplicate_char not a letter then escape it

value = f.gsub(value, "(%b<>)" .. dup2, "%1", 1 ) -- remove duplicate_char if it follows HTML markup
else
value = f.sub(value, 2, -1 ); -- remove duplicate_char when it is first character
end
end
end
str = str .. value; -- add it to the output string
end
end
return str;
end

--[[-------------------------------------------------------

returns true if suffix is properly formed Jr, Sr, or ordinal in the range 1–9.
Puncutation not allowed.

]]

local function is_suffix (suffix)
if utilities.in_array (suffix, {'Jr', 'Sr', 'Jnr', 'Snr', '1st', '2nd', '3rd'}) or suffix:match ('^%dth$') then
return true;
end
return false;
end

--[[---------------------------------------

For Vancouver style, author/editor names are supposed to be rendered in Latin
(read ASCII) characters. When a name uses characters that contain diacritical
marks, those characters are to be converted to the corresponding Latin
character. When a name is written using a non-Latin alphabet or logogram, that
name is to be transliterated into Latin characters. The module doesn't do this
so editors may/must.

This test allows |first= and |last= names to contain any of the letters defined
in the four Unicode Latin character sets
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0000.pdf C0 Controls and Basic Latin] 0041–005A, 0061–007A
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0080.pdf C1 Controls and Latin-1 Supplement] 00C0–00D6, 00D8–00F6, 00F8–00FF
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0100.pdf Latin Extended-A] 0100–017F
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0180.pdf Latin Extended-B] 0180–01BF, 01C4–024F

|lastn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, and apostrophes.
(http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/)
|firstn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, apostrophes, and periods

This original test:
if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za-zÀ-ÖØ-öø-ƿǄ-ɏ%-%s%']*$")
or nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za-zÀ-ÖØ-öø-ƿǄ-ɏ%-%s%'%.]+[2-6%a]*$") then
was written outside of the code editor and pasted here because the code editor
gets confused between character insertion point and cursor position. The test has
been rewritten to use decimal character escape sequence for the individual bytes
of the Unicode characters so that it is not necessary to use an external editor
to maintain this code.

\195\128-\195\150 – À-Ö (U+00C0–U+00D6 – C0 controls)
\195\152-\195\182 – Ø-ö (U+00D8-U+00F6 – C0 controls)
\195\184-\198\191 – ø-ƿ (U+00F8-U+01BF – C0 controls, Latin extended A & B)
\199\132-\201\143 – Ǆ-ɏ (U+01C4-U+024F – Latin extended B)

]]

local function is_good_vanc_name (last, first, suffix, position)
if not suffix then
if first:find ('[,%s]') then -- when there is a space or comma, might be first name/initials + generational suffix
first = first:match ('(.-)[,%s]+'); -- get name/initials
suffix = first:match ('[,%s]+(.+)$'); -- get generational suffix
end
end
if utilities.is_set (suffix) then
if not is_suffix (suffix) then
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl.suffix, position);
return false; -- not a name with an appropriate suffix
end
end
if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143%-%s%']*$") or
nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143%-%s%'%.]*$") then
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl['non-Latin char'], position);
return false; -- not a string of Latin characters; Vancouver requires Romanization
end;
return true;
end

--[[--------------------------< R E D U C E _ T O _ I N I T I A L S >------------------------------------------

Attempts to convert names to initials in support of |name-list-style=vanc.

Names in |firstn= may be separated by spaces or hyphens, or for initials, a period.
See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35062/.

Vancouver style requires family rank designations (Jr, II, III, etc.) to be rendered
as Jr, 2nd, 3rd, etc. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35085/.
This code only accepts and understands generational suffix in the Vancouver format
because Roman numerals look like, and can be mistaken for, initials.

This function uses ustring functions because firstname initials may be any of the
Unicode Latin characters accepted by is_good_vanc_name ().

]]

local function reduce_to_initials(first, position)
local name, suffix = mw.ustring.match(first, "^(%u+) ([%dJS][%drndth]+)$");

if not name then -- if not initials and a suffix
name = mw.ustring.match(first, "^(%u+)$"); -- is it just initials?
end

if name then -- if first is initials with or without suffix
if 3 > mw.ustring.len (name) then -- if one or two initials
if suffix then -- if there is a suffix
if is_suffix (suffix) then -- is it legitimate?
return first; -- one or two initials and a valid suffix so nothing to do
else
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl.suffix, position); -- one or two initials with invalid suffix so error message
return first; -- and return first unmolested
end
else
return first; -- one or two initials without suffix; nothing to do
end
end
end -- if here then name has 3 or more uppercase letters so treat them as a word

local initials, names = {}, {}; -- tables to hold name parts and initials
local i = 1; -- counter for number of initials

names = mw.text.split (first, '[%s,]+'); -- split into a table of names and possible suffix

while names[i] do -- loop through the table
if 1 < i and names[i]:match ('[%dJS][%drndth]+%.?$') then -- if not the first name, and looks like a suffix (may have trailing dot)
names[i] = names[i]:gsub ('%.', ''); -- remove terminal dot if present
if is_suffix (names[i]) then -- if a legitimate suffix
table.insert (initials, ' ' .. names[i]); -- add a separator space, insert at end of initials table
break; -- and done because suffix must fall at the end of a name
end -- no error message if not a suffix; possibly because of Romanization
end
if 3 > i then
table.insert (initials, mw.ustring.sub(names[i], 1, 1)); -- insert the initial at end of initials table
end
i = i + 1; -- bump the counter
end

return table.concat(initials) -- Vancouver format does not include spaces.
end

--[[--------------------------< L I S T _ P E O P L E >--------------------------

Formats a list of people (authors, contributors, editors, interviewers, translators)

names in the list will be linked when
|<name>-link= has a value
|<name>-mask- does NOT have a value; masked names are presumed to have been
rendered previously so should have been linked there

when |<name>-mask=0, the associated name is not rendered

]]

local function list_people (control, people, etal)
local sep;
local namesep;
local format = control.format;
local maximum = control.maximum;
local name_list = {};

if 'vanc' == format then -- Vancouver-like name styling?
sep = cfg.presentation['sep_nl_vanc']; -- name-list separator between names is a comma
namesep = cfg.presentation['sep_name_vanc']; -- last/first separator is a space
else
sep = cfg.presentation['sep_nl']; -- name-list separator between names is a semicolon
namesep = cfg.presentation['sep_name']; -- last/first separator is <comma><space>
end

if sep:sub (-1, -1) ~= " " then sep = sep .. " " end
if utilities.is_set (maximum) and maximum < 1 then return "", 0; end -- returned 0 is for EditorCount; not used for other names

for i, person in ipairs (people) do
if utilities.is_set (person.last) then
local mask = person.mask;
local one;
local sep_one = sep;

if utilities.is_set (maximum) and i > maximum then
etal = true;
break;
end

if mask then
local n = tonumber (mask); -- convert to a number if it can be converted; nil else
if n then
one = 0 ~= n and string.rep("—", n) or nil; -- make a string of (n > 0) mdashes, nil else, to replace name
person.link = nil; -- don't create link to name if name is replaces with mdash string or has been set nil
else
one = mask; -- replace name with mask text (must include name-list separator)
sep_one = " "; -- modify name-list separator
end
else
one = person.last; -- get surname
local first = person.first -- get given name
if utilities.is_set (first) then
if ("vanc" == format) then -- if Vancouver format
one = one:gsub ('%.', ''); -- remove periods from surnames (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/)
if not person.corporate and is_good_vanc_name (one, first, nil, i) then -- and name is all Latin characters; corporate authors not tested
first = reduce_to_initials (first, i); -- attempt to convert first name(s) to initials
end
end
one = one .. namesep .. first;
end
end
if utilities.is_set (person.link) then
one = utilities.make_wikilink (person.link, one); -- link author/editor
end
if one then -- if <one> has a value (name, mdash replacement, or mask text replacement)
table.insert (name_list, one); -- add it to the list of names
table.insert (name_list, sep_one); -- add the proper name-list separator
end
end
end

local count = #name_list / 2; -- (number of names + number of separators) divided by 2
if 0 < count then
if 1 < count and not etal then
if 'amp' == format then
name_list[#name_list-2] = " & "; -- replace last separator with ampersand text
elseif 'and' == format then
if 2 == count then
name_list[#name_list-2] = cfg.presentation.sep_nl_and; -- replace last separator with 'and' text
else
name_list[#name_list-2] = cfg.presentation.sep_nl_end; -- replace last separator with '(sep) and' text
end
end
end
name_list[#name_list] = nil; -- erase the last separator
end

local result = table.concat (name_list); -- construct list
if etal and utilities.is_set (result) then -- etal may be set by |display-authors=etal but we might not have a last-first list
result = result .. sep .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- we've got a last-first list and etal so add et al.
end

return result, count; -- return name-list string and count of number of names (count used for editor names only)
end

--[[--------------------< M A K E _ C I T E R E F _ I D >-----------------------

Generates a CITEREF anchor ID if we have at least one name or a date. Otherwise
returns an empty string.

namelist is one of the contributor-, author-, or editor-name lists chosen in that
order. year is Year or anchor_year.

]]

local function make_citeref_id (namelist, year)
local names={}; -- a table for the one to four names and year
for i,v in ipairs (namelist) do -- loop through the list and take up to the first four last names
names[i] = v.last
if i == 4 then break end -- if four then done
end
table.insert (names, year); -- add the year at the end
local id = table.concat(names); -- concatenate names and year for CITEREF id
if utilities.is_set (id) then -- if concatenation is not an empty string
return "CITEREF" .. id; -- add the CITEREF portion
else
return ''; -- return an empty string; no reason to include CITEREF id in this citation
end
end

--[[--------------------------< C I T E _ C L A S S _A T T R I B U T E _M A K E >------------------------------

construct <cite> tag class attribute for this citation.

<cite_class> – config.CitationClass from calling template
<mode> – value from |mode= parameter

]]

local function cite_class_attribute_make (cite_class, mode)
local class_t = {};
table.insert (class_t, 'citation'); -- required for blue highlight
if 'citation' ~= cite_class then
table.insert (class_t, cite_class); -- identify this template for user css
table.insert (class_t, utilities.is_set (mode) and mode or 'cs1'); -- identify the citation style for user css or javascript
else
table.insert (class_t, utilities.is_set (mode) and mode or 'cs2'); -- identify the citation style for user css or javascript
end
for _, prop_key in ipairs (z.prop_keys_t) do
table.insert (class_t, prop_key); -- identify various properties for user css or javascript
end

return table.concat (class_t, ' '); -- make a big string and done
end

--[[---------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ E T A L >--------------------------

Evaluates the content of name parameters (author, editor, etc.) for variations on
the theme of et al. If found, the et al. is removed, a flag is set to true and
the function returns the modified name and the flag.

This function never sets the flag to false but returns its previous state because
it may have been set by previous passes through this function or by the associated
|display-<names>=etal parameter

]]

local function name_has_etal (name, etal, nocat, param)

if utilities.is_set (name) then -- name can be nil in which case just return
local patterns = cfg.et_al_patterns; -- get patterns from configuration

for _, pattern in ipairs (patterns) do -- loop through all of the patterns
if name:match (pattern) then -- if this 'et al' pattern is found in name
name = name:gsub (pattern, ''); -- remove the offending text
etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-<names>=etal)
if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors=
utilities.set_message ('err_etal', {param}); -- and set an error if not added
end
end
end
end

return name, etal;
end

--[[---------------------< N A M E _ I S _ N U M E R I C >----------------------

Add maint cat when name parameter value does not contain letters. Does not catch
mixed alphanumeric names so |last=A. Green (1922-1987) does not get caught in the
current version of this test but |first=(1888) is caught.

returns nothing

]]

local function name_is_numeric (name, list_name)
if utilities.is_set (name) then
if mw.ustring.match (name, '^[%A]+$') then -- when name does not contain any letters
utilities.set_message ('maint_numeric_names', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); -- add a maint cat for this template
end
end
end

--[[-----------------< N A M E _ H A S _ M U L T _ N A M E S >------------------

Evaluates the content of last/surname (authors etc.) parameters for multiple names.
Multiple names are indicated if there is more than one comma or any "unescaped"
semicolons. Escaped semicolons are ones used as part of selected HTML entities.
If the condition is met, the function adds the multiple name maintenance category.

returns nothing

]]

local function name_has_mult_names (name, list_name)
local _, commas, semicolons, nbsps;
if utilities.is_set (name) then
_, commas = name:gsub (',', ''); -- count the number of commas
_, semicolons = name:gsub (';', ''); -- count the number of semicolons
-- nbsps probably should be its own separate count rather than merged in
-- some way with semicolons because Lua patterns do not support the
-- grouping operator that regex does, which means there is no way to add
-- more entities to escape except by adding more counts with the new
-- entities
_, nbsps = name:gsub (' ',''); -- count nbsps

-- There is exactly 1 semicolon per   entity, so subtract nbsps
-- from semicolons to 'escape' them. If additional entities are added,
-- they also can be subtracted.
if 1 < commas or 0 < (semicolons - nbsps) then
utilities.set_message ('maint_mult_names', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); -- add a maint message
end
end
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Compares values assigned to various parameter according to the string provided as <item> in the function call:
'generic_names': |last=, |first=, |editor-last=, etc value against list of known generic name patterns
'generic_titles': |title=
Returns true when pattern matches; nil else

The k/v pairs in cfg.special_case_translation[item] each contain two tables, one for English and one for another
'local' language.Each of those tables contain another table that holds the string or pattern (whole or fragment)
in index [1]. index [2] is a Boolean that tells string.find() or mw.ustring.find() to do plain-text search (true)
or a pattern search (false). The intent of all this complexity is to make these searches as fast as possible so
that we don't run out of processing time on very large articles.

]]

local function is_generic (item, value)
local test_val;

for _, generic_value in ipairs (cfg.special_case_translation[item]) do -- spin through the list of known generic value fragments
test_val = generic_value['en'][2] and value:lower() or value; -- when set to 'true', plaintext search using lowercase value

if test_val:find (generic_value['en'][1], 1, generic_value['en'][2]) then
return true; -- found English generic value so done

elseif generic_value['local'] then -- to keep work load down, generic_<value>['local'] should be nil except when there is a local version of the generic value
test_val = generic_value['local'][2] and mw.ustring.lower(value) or value; -- when set to 'true', plaintext search using lowercase value

if mw.ustring.find (test_val, generic_value['local'][1], 1, generic_value['local'][2]) then -- mw.ustring() because might not be Latin script
return true; -- found local generic value so done
end
end
end
end

--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ I S _ G E N E R I C >------------------------------------------------

calls is_generic() to determine if <name> is a 'generic name' listed in cfg.generic_names; <name_alias> is the
parameter name used in error messaging

]]

local function name_is_generic (name, name_alias)
if not added_generic_name_errs and is_generic ('generic_names', name) then
utilities.set_message ('err_generic_name', name_alias); -- set an error message
added_generic_name_errs = true;
end
end

--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ C H E C K S >--------------------------------------------------------

This function calls various name checking functions used to validate the content of the various name-holding parameters.

]]

local function name_checks (last, first, list_name, last_alias, first_alias)
local accept_name;

if utilities.is_set (last) then
last, accept_name = utilities.has_accept_as_written (last); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of <last>

if not accept_name then -- <last> not wrapped in accept-as-written markup
name_has_mult_names (last, list_name); -- check for multiple names in the parameter (last only)
name_is_numeric (last, list_name); -- check for names that are composed of digits and punctuation
name_is_generic (last, last_alias); -- check for names found in the generic names list
end
end

if utilities.is_set (first) then
first, accept_name = utilities.has_accept_as_written (first); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of <first>

if not accept_name then -- <first> not wrapped in accept-as-written markup
name_is_numeric (first, list_name); -- check for names that are composed of digits and punctuation
name_is_generic (first, first_alias); -- check for names found in the generic names list
end
local wl_type, D = utilities.is_wikilink (first);
if 0 ~= wl_type then
first = D;
utilities.set_message ('err_bad_paramlink', first_alias);
end
end

return last, first; -- done
end

--[[----------------------< E X T R A C T _ N A M E S >-------------------------

Gets name list from the input arguments

Searches through args in sequential order to find |lastn= and |firstn= parameters
(or their aliases), and their matching link and mask parameters. Stops searching
when both |lastn= and |firstn= are not found in args after two sequential attempts:
found |last1=, |last2=, and |last3= but doesn't find |last4= and |last5= then the
search is done.

This function emits an error message when there is a |firstn= without a matching
|lastn=. When there are 'holes' in the list of last names, |last1= and |last3=
are present but |last2= is missing, an error message is emitted. |lastn= is not
required to have a matching |firstn=.

When an author or editor parameter contains some form of 'et al.', the 'et al.'
is stripped from the parameter and a flag (etal) returned that will cause list_people()
to add the static 'et al.' text from Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration. This keeps
'et al.' out of the template's metadata. When this occurs, an error is emitted.

]]

local function extract_names(args, list_name)
local names = {}; -- table of names
local last; -- individual name components
local first;
local link;
local mask;
local i = 1; -- loop counter/indexer
local n = 1; -- output table indexer
local count = 0; -- used to count the number of times we haven't found a |last= (or alias for authors, |editor-last or alias for editors)
local etal = false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. in an author parameter

local last_alias, first_alias, link_alias; -- selected parameter aliases used in error messaging
while true do
last, last_alias = utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'err_redundant_parameters', i ); -- search through args for name components beginning at 1
first, first_alias = utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'err_redundant_parameters', i );
link, link_alias = utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'err_redundant_parameters', i );
mask = utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'err_redundant_parameters', i );

last, etal = name_has_etal (last, etal, false, last_alias); -- find and remove variations on et al.
first, etal = name_has_etal (first, etal, false, first_alias); -- find and remove variations on et al.
last, first = name_checks (last, first, list_name, last_alias, first_alias); -- multiple names, extraneous annotation, etc. checks

if first and not last then -- if there is a firstn without a matching lastn
local alias = first_alias:find ('given', 1, true) and 'given' or 'first'; -- get first or given form of the alias
utilities.set_message ('err_first_missing_last', {
first_alias, -- param name of alias missing its mate
first_alias:gsub (alias, {['first'] = 'last', ['given'] = 'surname'}), -- make param name appropriate to the alias form
}); -- add this error message
elseif not first and not last then -- if both firstn and lastn aren't found, are we done?
count = count + 1; -- number of times we haven't found last and first
if 2 <= count then -- two missing names and we give up
break; -- normal exit or there is a two-name hole in the list; can't tell which
end
else -- we have last with or without a first
local result;
link = link_title_ok (link, link_alias, last, last_alias); -- check for improper wiki-markup

if first then
link = link_title_ok (link, link_alias, first, first_alias); -- check for improper wiki-markup
end

names[n] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate = false}; -- add this name to our names list (corporate for |vauthors= only)
n = n + 1; -- point to next location in the names table
if 1 == count then -- if the previous name was missing
utilities.set_message ('err_missing_name', {list_name:match ("(%w+)List"):lower(), i - 1}); -- add this error message
end
count = 0; -- reset the counter, we're looking for two consecutive missing names
end
i = i + 1; -- point to next args location
end

return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names and the etal flag
end

--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ T A G _ G E T >------------------------------------------------------

attempt to decode |language=<lang_param> and return language name and matching tag; nil else.

This function looks for:
<lang_param> as a tag in cfg.lang_code_remap{}
<lang_param> as a name in cfg.lang_name_remap{}

<lang_param> as a name in cfg.mw_languages_by_name_t
<lang_param> as a tag in cfg.mw_languages_by_tag_t
when those fail, presume that <lang_param> is an IETF-like tag that MediaWiki does not recognize. Strip all
script, region, variant, whatever subtags from <lang_param> to leave just a two or three character language tag
and look for the new <lang_param> in cfg.mw_languages_by_tag_t{}

on success, return name and matching tag; on failure return nil

]]

local function name_tag_get (lang_param)
local lang_param_lc = mw.ustring.lower (lang_param); -- use lowercase as an index into the various tables
local name;
local tag;

name = cfg.lang_code_remap[lang_param_lc]; -- assume <lang_param_lc> is a tag; attempt to get remapped language name
if name then -- when <name>, <lang_param> is a tag for a remapped language name
return name, lang_param; -- so return <name> from remap and <lang_param>
end

tag = lang_param_lc:match ('^(%a%a%a?)%-.*'); -- still assuming that <lang_param_lc> is a tag; strip script, region, variant subtags
name = cfg.lang_code_remap[tag]; -- attempt to get remapped language name with language subtag only
if name then -- when <name>, <tag> is a tag for a remapped language name
return name, tag; -- so return <name> from remap and <tag>
end

if cfg.lang_name_remap[lang_param_lc] then -- not a tag, assume <lang_param_lc> is a name; attempt to get remapped language tag
return cfg.lang_name_remap[lang_param_lc][1], cfg.lang_name_remap[lang_param_lc][2]; -- for this <lang_param_lc>, return a (possibly) new name and appropriate tag
end

tag = cfg.mw_languages_by_name_t[lang_param_lc]; -- assume that <lang_param_lc> is a language name; attempt to get its matching tag

if tag then
return cfg.mw_languages_by_tag_t[tag], tag; -- <lang_param_lc> is a name so return the name from the table and <tag>
end

name = cfg.mw_languages_by_tag_t[lang_param_lc]; -- assume that <lang_param_lc> is a tag; attempt to get its matching language name

if name then
return name, lang_param; -- <lang_param_lc> is a tag so return <name> and the tag
end

tag = lang_param_lc:match ('^(%a%a%a?)%-.*'); -- is <lang_param_lc> an IETF-like tag that MediaWiki doesn't recognize? <tag> gets the language subtag; nil else

if tag then
name = cfg.mw_languages_by_tag_t[tag]; -- attempt to get a language name using the shortened <tag>
if name then
return name, tag; -- <lang_param_lc> is an unrecognized IETF-like tag so return <name> and language subtag
end
end
end

--[[-------------------< L A N G U A G E _ P A R A M E T E R >------------------

Gets language name from a provided two- or three-character ISO 639 code. If a code
is recognized by MediaWiki, use the returned name; if not, then use the value that
was provided with the language parameter.

When |language= contains a recognized language (either code or name), the page is
assigned to the category for that code: Category:Norwegian-language sources (no).
For valid three-character code languages, the page is assigned to the single category
for '639-2' codes: Category:CS1 ISO 639-2 language sources.

Languages that are the same as the local wiki are not categorized. MediaWiki does
not recognize three-character equivalents of two-character codes: code 'ar' is
recognized but code 'ara' is not.

This function supports multiple languages in the form |language=nb, French, th
where the language names or codes are separated from each other by commas with
optional space characters.

]]

local function language_parameter (lang)
local tag; -- some form of IETF-like language tag; language subtag with optional region, sript, vatiant, etc subtags
local lang_subtag; -- ve populates |language= with mostly unecessary region subtags the MediaWiki does not recognize; this is the base language subtag
local name; -- the language name
local language_list = {}; -- table of language names to be rendered
local names_t = {}; -- table made from the value assigned to |language=

local this_wiki_name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName (cfg.this_wiki_code, cfg.this_wiki_code); -- get this wiki's language name

names_t = mw.text.split (lang, '%s*,%s*'); -- names should be a comma separated list

for _, lang in ipairs (names_t) do -- reuse lang here because we don't yet know if lang is a language name or a language tag
name, tag = name_tag_get (lang); -- attempt to get name/tag pair for <lang>

if utilities.is_set (tag) then
lang_subtag = tag:lower():gsub ('^(%a%a%a?)%-.*', '%1'); -- for categorization, strip any IETF-like tags from language tag

if cfg.this_wiki_code ~= lang_subtag then -- when the language is not the same as this wiki's language
if 2 == lang_subtag:len() then -- and is a two-character tag
utilities.add_prop_cat ('foreign-lang-source', {name, lang_subtag}, lang_subtag); -- categorize it; tag appended to allow for multiple language categorization
else -- or is a recognized language (but has a three-character tag)
utilities.add_prop_cat ('foreign-lang-source-2', {lang_subtag}, lang_subtag); -- categorize it differently TODO: support multiple three-character tag categories per cs1|2 template?
end
elseif cfg.local_lang_cat_enable then -- when the language and this wiki's language are the same and categorization is enabled
utilities.add_prop_cat ('local-lang-source', {name, lang_subtag}); -- categorize it
end
else
name = lang; -- return whatever <lang> has so that we show something
utilities.set_message ('maint_unknown_lang'); -- add maint category if not already added
end

table.insert (language_list, name);
name = ''; -- so we can reuse it
end

name = utilities.make_sep_list (#language_list, language_list);
if (1 == #language_list) and (lang_subtag == cfg.this_wiki_code) then -- when only one language, find lang name in this wiki lang name; for |language=en-us, 'English' in 'American English'
return ''; -- if one language and that language is this wiki's return an empty string (no annotation)
end
return (" " .. wrap_msg ('language', name)); -- otherwise wrap with '(in ...)'
--[[ TODO: should only return blank or name rather than full list
so we can clean up the bunched parenthetical elements Language, Type, Format
]]
end

--[[-----------------------< S E T _ C S _ S T Y L E >--------------------------

Gets the default CS style configuration for the given mode.
Returns default separator and either postscript as passed in or the default.
In CS1, the default postscript and separator are '.'.
In CS2, the default postscript is the empty string and the default separator is ','.

]]

local function set_cs_style (postscript, mode)
if utilities.is_set(postscript) then
-- emit a maintenance message if user postscript is the default cs1 postscript
-- we catch the opposite case for cs2 in set_style
if mode == 'cs1' and postscript == cfg.presentation['ps_' .. mode] then
utilities.set_message ('maint_postscript');
end
else
postscript = cfg.presentation['ps_' .. mode];
end
return cfg.presentation['sep_' .. mode], postscript;
end

--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S T Y L E >-----------------------------

Sets the separator and postscript styles. Checks the |mode= first and the
#invoke CitationClass second. Removes the postscript if postscript == none.

]]

local function set_style (mode, postscript, cite_class)
local sep;
if 'cs2' == mode then
sep, postscript = set_cs_style (postscript, 'cs2');
elseif 'cs1' == mode then
sep, postscript = set_cs_style (postscript, 'cs1');
elseif 'citation' == cite_class then
sep, postscript = set_cs_style (postscript, 'cs2');
else
sep, postscript = set_cs_style (postscript, 'cs1');
end

if cfg.keywords_xlate[postscript:lower()] == 'none' then
-- emit a maintenance message if user postscript is the default cs2 postscript
-- we catch the opposite case for cs1 in set_cs_style
if 'cs2' == mode or 'citation' == cite_class then
utilities.set_message ('maint_postscript');
end
postscript = '';
end

return sep, postscript
end

--[=[------------------------------------------------------------

Determines if a URL has the file extension that is one of the PDF file extensions
used by [[MediaWiki:Common.css]] when applying the PDF icon to external links.

returns true if file extension is one of the recognized extensions, else false

]=]

local function is_pdf (url)
return url:match ('%.pdf$') or url:match ('%.PDF$') or
url:match ('%.pdf[%?#]') or url:match ('%.PDF[%?#]') or
url:match ('%.PDF&#035') or url:match ('%.pdf&#035');
end

--[[--------------------------< S T Y L E _ F O R M A T >-----------------------

Applies CSS style to |format=, |chapter-format=, etc. Also emits an error message
if the format parameter does not have a matching URL parameter. If the format parameter
is not set and the URL contains a file extension that is recognized as a PDF document
by MediaWiki's commons.css, this code will set the format parameter to (PDF) with
the appropriate styling.

]]

local function style_format (format, url, fmt_param, url_param)
if utilities.is_set (format) then
format = utilities.wrap_style ('format', format); -- add leading space, parentheses, resize
if not utilities.is_set (url) then
utilities.set_message ('err_format_missing_url', {fmt_param, url_param}); -- add an error message
end
elseif is_pdf (url) then -- format is not set so if URL is a PDF file then
format = utilities.wrap_style ('format', 'PDF'); -- set format to PDF
else
format = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
end
return format;
end

--[[---------------------< G E T _ D I S P L A Y _ N A M E S >------------------

Returns a number that defines the number of names displayed for author and editor
name lists and a Boolean flag to indicate when et al. should be appended to the name list.

When the value assigned to |display-xxxxors= is a number greater than or equal to zero,
return the number and the previous state of the 'etal' flag (false by default
but may have been set to true if the name list contains some variant of the text 'et al.').

When the value assigned to |display-xxxxors= is the keyword 'etal', return a number
that is one greater than the number of authors in the list and set the 'etal' flag true.
This will cause the list_people() to display all of the names in the name list followed by 'et al.'

In all other cases, returns nil and the previous state of the 'etal' flag.

inputs:
max: A['DisplayAuthors'] or A['DisplayEditors']; a number or some flavor of etal
count: #a or #e
list_name: 'authors' or 'editors'
etal: author_etal or editor_etal

]]

local function get_display_names (max, count, list_name, etal, param)
if utilities.is_set (max) then
if 'etal' == max:lower():gsub("[ '%.]", '') then -- the :gsub() portion makes 'etal' from a variety of 'et al.' spellings and stylings
max = count + 1; -- number of authors + 1 so display all author name plus et al.
etal = true; -- overrides value set by extract_names()
elseif max:match ('^%d+$') then -- if is a string of numbers
max = tonumber (max); -- make it a number
if max >= count then -- if |display-xxxxors= value greater than or equal to number of authors/editors
utilities.set_message ('err_disp_name', {param, max}); -- add error message
max = nil;
end
else -- not a valid keyword or number
utilities.set_message ('err_disp_name', {param, max}); -- add error message
max = nil; -- unset; as if |display-xxxxors= had not been set
end
end

return max, etal;
end

--[[----------< E X T R A _ T E X T _ I N _ P A G E _ C H E C K >---------------

Adds error if |page=, |pages=, |quote-page=, |quote-pages= has what appears to be
some form of p. or pp. abbreviation in the first characters of the parameter content.

check page for extraneous p, p., pp, pp., pg, pg. at start of parameter value:
good pattern: '^P[^%.P%l]' matches when page begins PX or P# but not Px
where x and X are letters and # is a digit
bad pattern: '^[Pp][PpGg]' matches when page begins pp, pP, Pp, PP, pg, pG, Pg, PG

]]

local function extra_text_in_page_check (val, name)
if not val:match (cfg.vol_iss_pg_patterns.good_ppattern) then
for _, pattern in ipairs (cfg.vol_iss_pg_patterns.bad_ppatterns) do -- spin through the selected sequence table of patterns
if val:match (pattern) then -- when a match, error so
utilities.set_message ('err_extra_text_pages', name); -- add error message
return; -- and done
end
end
end
end

--[[--------------------------< E X T R A _ T E X T _ I N _ V O L _ I S S _ C H E C K >------------------------

Adds error if |volume= or |issue= has what appears to be some form of redundant 'type' indicator.

For |volume=:
'V.', or 'Vol.' (with or without the dot) abbreviations or 'Volume' in the first characters of the parameter
content (all case insensitive). 'V' and 'v' (without the dot) are presumed to be roman numerals so
are allowed.

For |issue=:
'No.', 'I.', 'Iss.' (with or without the dot) abbreviations, or 'Issue' in the first characters of the
parameter content (all case insensitive).

Single character values ('v', 'i', 'n') allowed when not followed by separator character ('.', ':', '=', or
whitespace character) – param values are trimmed of whitespace by MediaWiki before delivered to the module.

<val> is |volume= or |issue= parameter value
<name> is |volume= or |issue= parameter name for error message
<selector> is 'v' for |volume=, 'i' for |issue=

sets error message on failure; returns nothing

]]

local function extra_text_in_vol_iss_check (val, name, selector)
if not utilities.is_set (val) then
return;
end

local patterns = 'v' == selector and cfg.vol_iss_pg_patterns.vpatterns or cfg.vol_iss_pg_patterns.ipatterns;

local handler = 'v' == selector and 'err_extra_text_volume' or 'err_extra_text_issue';
val = val:lower(); -- force parameter value to lower case
for _, pattern in ipairs (patterns) do -- spin through the selected sequence table of patterns
if val:match (pattern) then -- when a match, error so
utilities.set_message (handler, name); -- add error message
return; -- and done
end
end
end

--[=[-------------------------< G E T _ V _ N A M E _ T A B L E >----------------------------------------------

split apart a |vauthors= or |veditors= parameter. This function allows for corporate names, wrapped in doubled
parentheses to also have commas; in the old version of the code, the doubled parentheses were included in the
rendered citation and in the metadata. Individual author names may be wikilinked

|vauthors=Jones AB, [[E. B. White|White EB]], ((Black, Brown, and Co.))

]=]

local function get_v_name_table (vparam, output_table, output_link_table)
local name_table = mw.text.split(vparam, "%s*,%s*"); -- names are separated by commas
local wl_type, label, link; -- wl_type not used here; just a placeholder

local i = 1;

while name_table[i] do
if name_table[i]:match ('^%(%(.*[^%)][^%)]$') then -- first segment of corporate with one or more commas; this segment has the opening doubled parentheses
local name = name_table[i];
i = i + 1; -- bump indexer to next segment
while name_table[i] do
name = name .. ', ' .. name_table[i]; -- concatenate with previous segments
if name_table[i]:match ('^.*%)%)$') then -- if this table member has the closing doubled parentheses
break; -- and done reassembling so
end
i = i + 1; -- bump indexer
end
table.insert (output_table, name); -- and add corporate name to the output table
table.insert (output_link_table, ''); -- no wikilink
else
wl_type, label, link = utilities.is_wikilink (name_table[i]); -- wl_type is: 0, no wl (text in label variable); 1, [[D]]; 2, [[L|D]]
table.insert (output_table, label); -- add this name
if 1 == wl_type then
table.insert (output_link_table, label); -- simple wikilink [[D]]
else
table.insert (output_link_table, link); -- no wikilink or [[L|D]]; add this link if there is one, else empty string
end
end
i = i + 1;
end
return output_table;
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------------

This function extracts author / editor names from |vauthors= or |veditors= and finds matching |xxxxor-maskn= and
|xxxxor-linkn= in args. It then returns a table of assembled names just as extract_names() does.

Author / editor names in |vauthors= or |veditors= must be in Vancouver system style. Corporate or institutional names
may sometimes be required and because such names will often fail the is_good_vanc_name() and other format compliance
tests, are wrapped in doubled parentheses ((corporate name)) to suppress the format tests.

Supports generational suffixes Jr, 2nd, 3rd, 4th–6th.

This function sets the Vancouver error when a required comma is missing and when there is a space between an author's initials.

]]

local function parse_vauthors_veditors (args, vparam, list_name)
local names = {}; -- table of names assembled from |vauthors=, |author-maskn=, |author-linkn=
local v_name_table = {};
local v_link_table = {}; -- when name is wikilinked, targets go in this table
local etal = false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. vauthors parameter
local last, first, link, mask, suffix;
local corporate = false;

vparam, etal = name_has_etal (vparam, etal, true); -- find and remove variations on et al. do not categorize (do it here because et al. might have a period)
v_name_table = get_v_name_table (vparam, v_name_table, v_link_table); -- names are separated by commas

for i, v_name in ipairs(v_name_table) do
first = ''; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor
local accept_name;
v_name, accept_name = utilities.has_accept_as_written (v_name); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of <v_name>

if accept_name then
last = v_name;
corporate = true; -- flag used in list_people()
elseif string.find(v_name, "%s") then
if v_name:find('[;%.]') then -- look for commonly occurring punctuation characters;
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl.punctuation, i);
end
local lastfirstTable = {}
lastfirstTable = mw.text.split(v_name, "%s+")
first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- removes and returns value of last element in table which should be initials or generational suffix

if not mw.ustring.match (first, '^%u+$') then -- mw.ustring here so that later we will catch non-Latin characters
suffix = first; -- not initials so assume that whatever we got is a generational suffix
first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- get what should be the initials from the table
end
last = table.concat(lastfirstTable, ' ') -- returns a string that is the concatenation of all other names that are not initials and generational suffix
if not utilities.is_set (last) then
first = ''; -- unset
last = v_name; -- last empty because something wrong with first
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl.name, i);
end
if mw.ustring.match (last, '%a+%s+%u+%s+%a+') then
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl['missing comma'], i); -- matches last II last; the case when a comma is missing
end
if mw.ustring.match (v_name, ' %u %u$') then -- this test is in the wrong place TODO: move or replace with a more appropriate test
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl.initials, i); -- matches a space between two initials
end
else
last = v_name; -- last name or single corporate name? Doesn't support multiword corporate names? do we need this?
end

if utilities.is_set (first) then
if not mw.ustring.match (first, "^%u?%u$") then -- first shall contain one or two upper-case letters, nothing else
add_vanc_error (cfg.err_msg_supl.initials, i); -- too many initials; mixed case initials (which may be ok Romanization); hyphenated initials
end
is_good_vanc_name (last, first, suffix, i); -- check first and last before restoring the suffix which may have a non-Latin digit
if utilities.is_set (suffix) then
first = first .. ' ' .. suffix; -- if there was a suffix concatenate with the initials
suffix = ''; -- unset so we don't add this suffix to all subsequent names
end
else
if not corporate then
is_good_vanc_name (last, '', nil, i);
end
end

link = utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'err_redundant_parameters', i ) or v_link_table[i];
mask = utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'err_redundant_parameters', i );
names[i] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate = corporate}; -- add this assembled name to our names list
end
return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names
end

--[[--------------------------< S E L E C T _ A U T H O R _ E D I T O R _ S O U R C E >------------------------

Select one of |authors=, |authorn= / |lastn / firstn=, or |vauthors= as the source of the author name list or
select one of |editorn= / editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= or |veditors= as the source of the editor name list.

Only one of these appropriate three will be used. The hierarchy is: |authorn= (and aliases) highest and |authors= lowest;
|editorn= (and aliases) highest and |veditors= lowest (support for |editors= withdrawn)

When looking for |authorn= / |editorn= parameters, test |xxxxor1= and |xxxxor2= (and all of their aliases); stops after the second
test which mimicks the test used in extract_names() when looking for a hole in the author name list. There may be a better
way to do this, I just haven't discovered what that way is.

Emits an error message when more than one xxxxor name source is provided.

In this function, vxxxxors = vauthors or veditors; xxxxors = authors as appropriate.

]]

local function select_author_editor_source (vxxxxors, xxxxors, args, list_name)
local lastfirst = false;
if utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 1 ) or -- do this twice in case we have a |first1= without a |last1=; this ...
utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'none', 1 ) or -- ... also catches the case where |first= is used with |vauthors=
utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 2 ) or
utilities.select_one ( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'none', 2 ) then
lastfirst = true;
end

if (utilities.is_set (vxxxxors) and true == lastfirst) or -- these are the three error conditions
(utilities.is_set (vxxxxors) and utilities.is_set (xxxxors)) or
(true == lastfirst and utilities.is_set (xxxxors)) then
local err_name;
if 'AuthorList' == list_name then -- figure out which name should be used in error message
err_name = 'author';
else
err_name = 'editor';
end
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', err_name .. '-name-list parameters'); -- add error message
end

if true == lastfirst then return 1 end; -- return a number indicating which author name source to use
if utilities.is_set (vxxxxors) then return 2 end;
if utilities.is_set (xxxxors) then return 3 end;
return 1; -- no authors so return 1; this allows missing author name test to run in case there is a first without last
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------

This function is used to validate a parameter's assigned value for those parameters that have only a limited number
of allowable values (yes, y, true, live, dead, etc.). When the parameter value has not been assigned a value (missing
or empty in the source template) the function returns the value specified by ret_val. If the parameter value is one
of the list of allowed values returns the translated value; else, emits an error message and returns the value
specified by ret_val.

TODO: explain <invert>

]]

local function is_valid_parameter_value (value, name, possible, ret_val, invert)
if not utilities.is_set (value) then
return ret_val; -- an empty parameter is ok
end

if (not invert and utilities.in_array (value, possible)) then -- normal; <value> is in <possible> table
return cfg.keywords_xlate[value]; -- return translation of parameter keyword
elseif invert and not utilities.in_array (value, possible) then -- invert; <value> is not in <possible> table
return value; -- return <value> as it is
else
utilities.set_message ('err_invalid_param_val', {name, value}); -- not an allowed value so add error message
return ret_val;
end
end

--[[--------------------------< T E R M I N A T E _ N A M E _ L I S T >----------------------------------------

This function terminates a name list (author, contributor, editor) with a separator character (sepc) and a space
when the last character is not a sepc character or when the last three characters are not sepc followed by two
closing square brackets (close of a wikilink). When either of these is true, the name_list is terminated with a
single space character.

]]

local function terminate_name_list (name_list, sepc)
if (string.sub (name_list, -3, -1) == sepc .. '. ') then -- if already properly terminated
return name_list; -- just return the name list
elseif (string.sub (name_list, -1, -1) == sepc) or (string.sub (name_list, -3, -1) == sepc .. ']]') then -- if last name in list ends with sepc char
return name_list .. " "; -- don't add another
else
return name_list .. sepc .. ' '; -- otherwise terminate the name list
end
end

--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ V O L U M E _ I S S U E >----------------------------------------

returns the concatenation of the formatted volume and issue parameters as a single string; or formatted volume
or formatted issue, or an empty string if neither are set.

]]

local function format_volume_issue (volume, issue, cite_class, origin, sepc, lower)
if not utilities.is_set (volume) and not utilities.is_set (issue) then
return '';
end

-- same condition as in format_pages_sheets()
local is_journal = 'journal' == cite_class or (utilities.in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map', 'interview'}) and 'journal' == origin);

local is_numeric_vol = volume and (volume:match ('^[MDCLXVI]+$') or volume:match ('^%d+$')); -- is only uppercase roman numerals or only digits?
local is_long_vol = volume and (4 < mw.ustring.len(volume)); -- is |volume= value longer than 4 characters?

if volume and (not is_numeric_vol and is_long_vol) then -- when not all digits or Roman numerals, is |volume= longer than 4 characters?
utilities.add_prop_cat ('long-vol'); -- yes, add properties cat
end

if is_journal then -- journal-style formatting
local vol = '';

if utilities.is_set (volume) then
if is_numeric_vol then -- |volume= value all digits or all uppercase Roman numerals?
vol = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['vol-bold'], {sepc, volume}); -- render in bold face
elseif is_long_vol then -- not all digits or Roman numerals; longer than 4 characters?
vol = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['j-vol'], {sepc, utilities.hyphen_to_dash (volume)}); -- not bold
else -- four or fewer characters
vol = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['vol-bold'], {sepc, utilities.hyphen_to_dash (volume)}); -- bold
end
end
if utilities.is_set (issue) then
return vol .. utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['j-issue'], issue);
end
return vol;
end

if 'podcast' == cite_class and utilities.is_set (issue) then
return wrap_msg ('issue', {sepc, issue}, lower);
end

-- all other types of citation
if utilities.is_set (volume) and utilities.is_set (issue) then
return wrap_msg ('vol-no', {sepc, utilities.hyphen_to_dash (volume), issue}, lower);
elseif utilities.is_set (volume) then
return wrap_msg ('vol', {sepc, utilities.hyphen_to_dash (volume)}, lower);
else
return wrap_msg ('issue', {sepc, issue}, lower);
end
end

--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ P A G E S _ S H E E T S >-----------------------------------------

adds static text to one of |page(s)= or |sheet(s)= values and returns it with all of the others set to empty strings.
The return order is:
page, pages, sheet, sheets

Singular has priority over plural when both are provided.

]]

local function format_pages_sheets (page, pages, sheet, sheets, cite_class, origin, sepc, nopp, lower)
if 'map' == cite_class then -- only cite map supports sheet(s) as in-source locators
if utilities.is_set (sheet) then
if 'journal' == origin then
return '', '', wrap_msg ('j-sheet', sheet, lower), '';
else
return '', '', wrap_msg ('sheet', {sepc, sheet}, lower), '';
end
elseif utilities.is_set (sheets) then
if 'journal' == origin then
return '', '', '', wrap_msg ('j-sheets', sheets, lower);
else
return '', '', '', wrap_msg ('sheets', {sepc, sheets}, lower);
end
end
end

local is_journal = 'journal' == cite_class or (utilities.in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map', 'interview'}) and 'journal' == origin);

if utilities.is_set (page) then
if is_journal then
return utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], page), '', '', '';
elseif not nopp then
return utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, page}), '', '', '';
else
return utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, page}), '', '', '';
end
elseif utilities.is_set (pages) then
if is_journal then
return utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], pages), '', '', '';
elseif tonumber(pages) ~= nil and not nopp then -- if pages is only digits, assume a single page number
return '', utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
elseif not nopp then
return '', utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['pp-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
else
return '', utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
end
end

return '', '', '', ''; -- return empty strings
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------

returns one of the in-source locators: page, pages, or at.

If any of these are interwiki links to Wikisource, returns the label portion of the interwiki-link as plain text
for use in COinS. This COinS thing is done because here we convert an interwiki-link to an external link and
add an icon span around that; get_coins_pages() doesn't know about the span. TODO: should it?

TODO: add support for sheet and sheets?; streamline;

TODO: make it so that this function returns only one of the three as the single in-source (the return value assigned
to a new name)?

]]

local function insource_loc_get (page, page_orig, pages, pages_orig, at)
local ws_url, ws_label, coins_pages, L; -- for Wikisource interwiki-links; TODO: this corrupts page metadata (span remains in place after cleanup; fix there?)

if utilities.is_set (page) then
if utilities.is_set (pages) or utilities.is_set (at) then
pages = ''; -- unset the others
at = '';
end
extra_text_in_page_check (page, page_orig); -- emit error message when |page= value begins with what looks like p., pp., etc.

ws_url, ws_label, L = wikisource_url_make (page); -- make ws URL from |page= interwiki link; link portion L becomes tooltip label
if ws_url then
page = external_link (ws_url, ws_label .. ' ', 'ws link in page'); -- space char after label to move icon away from in-source text; TODO: a better way to do this?
page = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['interwiki-icon'], {cfg.presentation['class-wikisource'], L, page});
coins_pages = ws_label;
end
elseif utilities.is_set (pages) then
if utilities.is_set (at) then
at = ''; -- unset
end
extra_text_in_page_check (pages, pages_orig); -- emit error message when |page= value begins with what looks like p., pp., etc.

ws_url, ws_label, L = wikisource_url_make (pages); -- make ws URL from |pages= interwiki link; link portion L becomes tooltip label
if ws_url then
pages = external_link (ws_url, ws_label .. ' ', 'ws link in pages'); -- space char after label to move icon away from in-source text; TODO: a better way to do this?
pages = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['interwiki-icon'], {cfg.presentation['class-wikisource'], L, pages});
coins_pages = ws_label;
end
elseif utilities.is_set (at) then
ws_url, ws_label, L = wikisource_url_make (at); -- make ws URL from |at= interwiki link; link portion L becomes tooltip label
if ws_url then
at = external_link (ws_url, ws_label .. ' ', 'ws link in at'); -- space char after label to move icon away from in-source text; TODO: a better way to do this?
at = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['interwiki-icon'], {cfg.presentation['class-wikisource'], L, at});
coins_pages = ws_label;
end
end

return page, pages, at, coins_pages;
end

--[[--------------------------------------------------------------

add error message when |archive-url= value is same as |url= or chapter-url= (or alias...) value

]]

local function is_unique_archive_url (archive, url, c_url, source, date)
if utilities.is_set (archive) then
if archive == url or archive == c_url then
utilities.set_message ('err_bad_url', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', source)}); -- add error message
return '', ''; -- unset |archive-url= and |archive-date= because same as |url= or |chapter-url=
end
end

return archive, date;
end

--[=[-------------------------< A R C H I V E _ U R L _ C H E C K >--------------------------------------------

Check archive.org URLs to make sure they at least look like they are pointing at valid archives and not to the
save snapshot URL or to calendar pages. When the archive URL is 'https://web.archive.org/save/' (or http://...)
archive.org saves a snapshot of the target page in the URL. That is something that Wikipedia should not allow
unwitting readers to do.

When the archive.org URL does not have a complete timestamp, archive.org chooses a snapshot according to its own
algorithm or provides a calendar 'search' result. [[WP:ELNO]] discourages links to search results.

This function looks at the value assigned to |archive-url= and returns empty strings for |archive-url= and
|archive-date= and an error message when:
|archive-url= holds an archive.org save command URL
|archive-url= is an archive.org URL that does not have a complete timestamp (YYYYMMDDhhmmss 14 digits) in the
correct place
otherwise returns |archive-url= and |archive-date=

There are two mostly compatible archive.org URLs:
//web.archive.org/<timestamp>... -- the old form
//web.archive.org/web/<timestamp>... -- the new form

The old form does not support or map to the new form when it contains a display flag. There are four identified flags
('id_', 'js_', 'cs_', 'im_') but since archive.org ignores others following the same form (two letters and an underscore)
we don't check for these specific flags but we do check the form.

This function supports a preview mode. When the article is rendered in preview mode, this function may return a modified
archive URL:
for save command errors, return undated wildcard (/*/)
for timestamp errors when the timestamp has a wildcard, return the URL unmodified
for timestamp errors when the timestamp does not have a wildcard, return with timestamp limited to six digits plus wildcard (/yyyymm*/)

]=]

local function archive_url_check (url, date)
local err_msg = ''; -- start with the error message empty
local path, timestamp, flag; -- portions of the archive.org URL

if (not url:match('//web%.archive%.org/')) and (not url:match('//liveweb%.archive%.org/')) then -- also deprecated liveweb Wayback machine URL
return url, date; -- not an archive.org archive, return ArchiveURL and ArchiveDate
end

if url:match('//web%.archive%.org/save/') then -- if a save command URL, we don't want to allow saving of the target page
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.save;
url = url:gsub ('(//web%.archive%.org)/save/', '%1/*/', 1); -- for preview mode: modify ArchiveURL
elseif url:match('//liveweb%.archive%.org/') then
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.liveweb;
else
path, timestamp, flag = url:match('//web%.archive%.org/([^%d]*)(%d+)([^/]*)/'); -- split out some of the URL parts for evaluation
if not path then -- malformed in some way; pattern did not match
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.timestamp;
elseif 14 ~= timestamp:len() then -- path and flag optional, must have 14-digit timestamp here
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.timestamp;
if '*' ~= flag then
local replacement = timestamp:match ('^%d%d%d%d%d%d') or timestamp:match ('^%d%d%d%d'); -- get the first 6 (YYYYMM) or first 4 digits (YYYY)
if replacement then -- nil if there aren't at least 4 digits (year)
replacement = replacement .. string.rep ('0', 14 - replacement:len()); -- year or yearmo (4 or 6 digits) zero-fill to make 14-digit timestamp
url=url:gsub ('(//web%.archive%.org/[^%d]*)%d[^/]*', '%1' .. replacement .. '*', 1) -- for preview, modify ts to 14 digits plus splat for calendar display
end
end
elseif utilities.is_set (path) and 'web/' ~= path then -- older archive URLs do not have the extra 'web/' path element
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.path;
elseif utilities.is_set (flag) and not utilities.is_set (path) then -- flag not allowed with the old form URL (without the 'web/' path element)
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.flag;
elseif utilities.is_set (flag) and not flag:match ('%a%a_') then -- flag if present must be two alpha characters and underscore (requires 'web/' path element)
err_msg = cfg.err_msg_supl.flag;
else
return url, date; -- return ArchiveURL and ArchiveDate
end
end
-- if here, something not right so
utilities.set_message ('err_archive_url', {err_msg}); -- add error message and

if is_preview_mode then
return url, date; -- preview mode so return ArchiveURL and ArchiveDate
else
return '', ''; -- return empty strings for ArchiveURL and ArchiveDate
end
end

--[[----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

check |place=, |publication-place=, |location= to see if these params include digits. This function added because
many editors misuse location to specify the in-source location (|page(s)= and |at= are supposed to do that)

returns the original parameter value without modification; added maint cat when parameter value contains digits

]]

local function place_check (param_val)
if not utilities.is_set (param_val) then -- parameter empty or omitted
return param_val; -- return that empty state
end

if mw.ustring.find (param_val, '%d') then -- not empty, are there digits in the parameter value
utilities.set_message ('maint_location'); -- yep, add maint cat
end

return param_val; -- and done
end

--[[------------------------------------------------------------------------

compares |title= to 'Archived copy' (placeholder added by bots that can't find proper title); if matches, return true; nil else

]]

local function is_archived_copy (title)
title = mw.ustring.lower(title); -- switch title to lower case
if title:find (cfg.special_case_translation.archived_copy.en) then -- if title is 'Archived copy'
return true;
elseif cfg.special_case_translation.archived_copy['local'] then
if mw.ustring.find (title, cfg.special_case_translation.archived_copy['local']) then -- mw.ustring() because might not be Latin script
return true;
end
end
end

--[[--------------------------< C I T A T I O N 0 >------------------------------------------------------------

This is the main function doing the majority of the citation formatting.

]]

local function citation0( config, args )
--[[
Load Input Parameters
The argument_wrapper facilitates the mapping of multiple aliases to single internal variable.
]]
local A = argument_wrapper ( args );
local i

-- Pick out the relevant fields from the arguments. Different citation templates
-- define different field names for the same underlying things.

local author_etal;
local a = {}; -- authors list from |lastn= / |firstn= pairs or |vauthors=
local Authors;
local NameListStyle = is_valid_parameter_value (A['NameListStyle'], A:ORIGIN('NameListStyle'), cfg.keywords_lists['name-list-style'], '');
local Collaboration = A['Collaboration'];

do -- to limit scope of selected
local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Vauthors'], A['Authors'], args, 'AuthorList');
if 1 == selected then
a, author_etal = extract_names (args, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |authorn= / |lastn= / |firstn=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn=
elseif 2 == selected then
NameListStyle = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-style= might be
a, author_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.vauthors, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |vauthors=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn=
elseif 3 == selected then
Authors = A['Authors']; -- use content of |authors=
if 'authors' == A:ORIGIN('Authors') then -- but add a maint cat if the parameter is |authors=
utilities.set_message ('maint_authors'); -- because use of this parameter is discouraged; what to do about the aliases is a TODO:
end
end
if utilities.is_set (Collaboration) then
author_etal = true; -- so that |display-authors=etal not required
end
end

local editor_etal;
local e = {}; -- editors list from |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= pairs or |veditors=

do -- to limit scope of selected
local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Veditors'], nil, args, 'EditorList'); -- support for |editors= withdrawn
if 1 == selected then
e, editor_etal = extract_names (args, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |editorn= / |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn=
elseif 2 == selected then
NameListStyle = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-style= might be
e, editor_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.veditors, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |veditors=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn=
end
end

local Chapter = A['Chapter']; -- done here so that we have access to |contribution= from |chapter= aliases
local Chapter_origin = A:ORIGIN ('Chapter');
local Contribution; -- because contribution is required for contributor(s)
if 'contribution' == Chapter_origin then
Contribution = Chapter; -- get the name of the contribution
end
local c = {}; -- contributors list from |contributor-lastn= / contributor-firstn= pairs

if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {"book", "citation"}) and not utilities.is_set (A['Periodical']) then -- |contributor= and |contribution= only supported in book cites
c = extract_names (args, 'ContributorList'); -- fetch contributor list from |contributorn= / |contributor-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=

if 0 < #c then
if not utilities.is_set (Contribution) then -- |contributor= requires |contribution=
utilities.set_message ('err_contributor_missing_required_param', 'contribution'); -- add missing contribution error message
c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later
end
if 0 == #a then -- |contributor= requires |author=
utilities.set_message ('err_contributor_missing_required_param', 'author'); -- add missing author error message
c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later
end
end
else -- if not a book cite
if utilities.select_one (args, cfg.aliases['ContributorList-Last'], 'err_redundant_parameters', 1 ) then -- are there contributor name list parameters?
utilities.set_message ('err_contributor_ignored'); -- add contributor ignored error message
end
Contribution = nil; -- unset
end

local Title = A['Title'];
local TitleLink = A['TitleLink'];

local auto_select = ''; -- default is auto
local accept_link;
TitleLink, accept_link = utilities.has_accept_as_written (TitleLink, true); -- test for accept-this-as-written markup
if (not accept_link) and utilities.in_array (TitleLink, {'none', 'pmc', 'doi'}) then -- check for special keywords
auto_select = TitleLink; -- remember selection for later
TitleLink = ''; -- treat as if |title-link= would have been empty
end

TitleLink = link_title_ok (TitleLink, A:ORIGIN ('TitleLink'), Title, 'title'); -- check for wiki-markup in |title-link= or wiki-markup in |title= when |title-link= is set

local Section = ''; -- {{cite map}} only; preset to empty string for concatenation if not used
if 'map' == config.CitationClass and 'section' == Chapter_origin then
Section = A['Chapter']; -- get |section= from |chapter= alias list; |chapter= and the other aliases not supported in {{cite map}}
Chapter = ''; -- unset for now; will be reset later from |map= if present
end

local Periodical = A['Periodical'];
local Periodical_origin = '';
if utilities.is_set (Periodical) then
Periodical_origin = A:ORIGIN('Periodical'); -- get the name of the periodical parameter
local i;
Periodical, i = utilities.strip_apostrophe_markup (Periodical); -- strip apostrophe markup so that metadata isn't contaminated
if i then -- non-zero when markup was stripped so emit an error message
utilities.set_message ('err_apostrophe_markup', {Periodical_origin});
end
end

if 'mailinglist' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for {{cite mailing list}}
if utilities.is_set (Periodical) and utilities.is_set (A ['MailingList']) then -- both set emit an error TODO: make a function for this and similar?
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', Periodical_origin) .. ' and ' .. utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'mailinglist')});
end

Periodical = A ['MailingList']; -- error or no, set Periodical to |mailinglist= value because this template is {{cite mailing list}}
Periodical_origin = A:ORIGIN('MailingList');
end

local ScriptPeriodical = A['ScriptPeriodical'];

-- web and news not tested for now because of
-- Wikipedia:Administrators%27_noticeboard#Is_there_a_semi-automated_tool_that_could_fix_these_annoying_"Cite_Web"_errors?
if not (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical)) then -- 'periodical' templates require periodical parameter
-- local p = {['journal'] = 'journal', ['magazine'] = 'magazine', ['news'] = 'newspaper', ['web'] = 'website'}; -- for error message
local p = {['journal'] = 'journal', ['magazine'] = 'magazine'}; -- for error message
if p[config.CitationClass] then
utilities.set_message ('err_missing_periodical', {config.CitationClass, p[config.CitationClass]});
end
end

local Volume;
local ScriptPeriodical_origin = A:ORIGIN('ScriptPeriodical');
if 'citation' == config.CitationClass then
if utilities.is_set (Periodical) then
if not utilities.in_array (Periodical_origin, {'website', 'mailinglist'}) then -- {{citation}} does not render volume for these 'periodicals' --TODO: move 'array' to ~/Configuration
Volume = A['Volume']; -- but does for all other 'periodicals'
end
elseif utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical) then
if 'script-website' ~= ScriptPeriodical_origin then -- {{citation}} does not render volume for |script-website=
Volume = A['Volume']; -- but does for all other 'periodicals'
end
else
Volume = A['Volume']; -- and does for non-'periodical' cites
end
elseif utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_volume) then -- render |volume= for cs1 according to the configuration settings
Volume = A['Volume'];
end
extra_text_in_vol_iss_check (Volume, A:ORIGIN ('Volume'), 'v');

local Issue;
if 'citation' == config.CitationClass then
if utilities.is_set (Periodical) and utilities.in_array (Periodical_origin, {'journal', 'magazine', 'newspaper', 'periodical', 'work'}) or -- {{citation}} renders issue for these 'periodicals'--TODO: move 'array' to ~/Configuration
utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical) and utilities.in_array (ScriptPeriodical_origin, {'script-journal', 'script-magazine', 'script-newspaper', 'script-periodical', 'script-work'}) then -- and these 'script-periodicals'
Issue = utilities.hyphen_to_dash (A['Issue']);
end
elseif utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_issue) then -- conference & map books do not support issue; {{citation}} listed here because included in settings table
if not (utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {'conference', 'map', 'citation'}) and not (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical))) then
Issue = utilities.hyphen_to_dash (A['Issue']);
end
end
extra_text_in_vol_iss_check (Issue, A:ORIGIN ('Issue'), 'i');

local Page;
local Pages;
local At;
if not utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_not_using_page) then
Page = A['Page'];
Pages = utilities.hyphen_to_dash (A['Pages']);
At = A['At'];
end

local Edition = A['Edition'];
local PublicationPlace = place_check (A['PublicationPlace'], A:ORIGIN('PublicationPlace'));
local Place = place_check (A['Place'], A:ORIGIN('Place'));

local PublisherName = A['PublisherName'];
local PublisherName_origin = A:ORIGIN('PublisherName');
if utilities.is_set (PublisherName) then
local i = 0;
PublisherName, i = utilities.strip_apostrophe_markup (PublisherName); -- strip apostrophe markup so that metadata isn't contaminated; publisher is never italicized
if i then -- non-zero when markup was stripped so emit an error message
utilities.set_message ('err_apostrophe_markup', {PublisherName_origin});
end
end

local Newsgroup = A['Newsgroup']; -- TODO: strip apostrophe markup?
local Newsgroup_origin = A:ORIGIN('Newsgroup');

if 'newsgroup' == config.CitationClass then
if utilities.is_set (PublisherName) then -- general use parameter |publisher= not allowed in cite newsgroup
utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored', {PublisherName_origin});
end

PublisherName = nil; -- ensure that this parameter is unset for the time being; will be used again after COinS
end

local URL = A['URL']; -- TODO: better way to do this for URL, ChapterURL, and MapURL?
local UrlAccess = is_valid_parameter_value (A['UrlAccess'], A:ORIGIN('UrlAccess'), cfg.keywords_lists['url-access'], nil);

if not utilities.is_set (URL) and utilities.is_set (UrlAccess) then
UrlAccess = nil;
utilities.set_message ('err_param_access_requires_param', 'url');
end

local ChapterURL = A['ChapterURL'];
local ChapterUrlAccess = is_valid_parameter_value (A['ChapterUrlAccess'], A:ORIGIN('ChapterUrlAccess'), cfg.keywords_lists['url-access'], nil);
if not utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) and utilities.is_set (ChapterUrlAccess) then
ChapterUrlAccess = nil;
utilities.set_message ('err_param_access_requires_param', {A:ORIGIN('ChapterUrlAccess'):gsub ('%-access', '')});
end

local MapUrlAccess = is_valid_parameter_value (A['MapUrlAccess'], A:ORIGIN('MapUrlAccess'), cfg.keywords_lists['url-access'], nil);
if not utilities.is_set (A['MapURL']) and utilities.is_set (MapUrlAccess) then
MapUrlAccess = nil;
utilities.set_message ('err_param_access_requires_param', {'map-url'});
end

local this_page = mw.title.getCurrentTitle(); -- also used for COinS and for language
local no_tracking_cats = is_valid_parameter_value (A['NoTracking'], A:ORIGIN('NoTracking'), cfg.keywords_lists['yes_true_y'], nil);

-- check this page to see if it is in one of the namespaces that cs1 is not supposed to add to the error categories
if not utilities.is_set (no_tracking_cats) then -- ignore if we are already not going to categorize this page
if utilities.in_array (this_page.nsText, cfg.uncategorized_namespaces) then
no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats
end
for _, v in ipairs (cfg.uncategorized_subpages) do -- cycle through page name patterns
if this_page.text:match (v) then -- test page name against each pattern
no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats
break; -- bail out if one is found
end
end
end
-- check for extra |page=, |pages= or |at= parameters. (also sheet and sheets while we're at it)
utilities.select_one (args, {'page', 'p', 'pp', 'pages', 'at', 'sheet', 'sheets'}, 'err_redundant_parameters'); -- this is a dummy call simply to get the error message and category

local coins_pages;

Page, Pages, At, coins_pages = insource_loc_get (Page, A:ORIGIN('Page'), Pages, A:ORIGIN('Pages'), At);

local NoPP = is_valid_parameter_value (A['NoPP'], A:ORIGIN('NoPP'), cfg.keywords_lists['yes_true_y'], nil);

if utilities.is_set (PublicationPlace) and utilities.is_set (Place) then -- both |publication-place= and |place= (|location=) allowed if different
utilities.add_prop_cat ('location-test'); -- add property cat to evaluate how often PublicationPlace and Place are used together
if PublicationPlace == Place then
Place = ''; -- unset; don't need both if they are the same
end
elseif not utilities.is_set (PublicationPlace) and utilities.is_set (Place) then -- when only |place= (|location=) is set ...
PublicationPlace = Place; -- promote |place= (|location=) to |publication-place
end

if PublicationPlace == Place then Place = ''; end -- don't need both if they are the same

local URL_origin = A:ORIGIN('URL'); -- get name of parameter that holds URL
local ChapterURL_origin = A:ORIGIN('ChapterURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ChapterURL
local ScriptChapter = A['ScriptChapter'];
local ScriptChapter_origin = A:ORIGIN ('ScriptChapter');
local Format = A['Format'];
local ChapterFormat = A['ChapterFormat'];
local TransChapter = A['TransChapter'];
local TransChapter_origin = A:ORIGIN ('TransChapter');
local TransTitle = A['TransTitle'];
local ScriptTitle = A['ScriptTitle'];

--[[
Parameter remapping for cite encyclopedia:
When the citation has these parameters:
|encyclopedia= and |title= then map |title= to |article= and |encyclopedia= to |title=
|encyclopedia= and |article= then map |encyclopedia= to |title=

|trans-title= maps to |trans-chapter= when |title= is re-mapped
|url= maps to |chapter-url= when |title= is remapped

All other combinations of |encyclopedia=, |title=, and |article= are not modified

]]

local Encyclopedia = A['Encyclopedia']; -- used as a flag by this module and by ~/COinS

if utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia) then -- emit error message when Encyclopedia set but template is other than {{cite encyclopedia}} or {{citation}}
if 'encyclopaedia' ~= config.CitationClass and 'citation' ~= config.CitationClass then
utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored', {A:ORIGIN ('Encyclopedia')});
Encyclopedia = nil; -- unset because not supported by this template
end
end

if ('encyclopaedia' == config.CitationClass) or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
if utilities.is_set (Periodical) and utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia) then -- when both set emit an error TODO: make a function for this and similar?
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', A:ORIGIN ('Encyclopedia')) .. ' and ' .. utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', Periodical_origin)});
end

if utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia) then
Periodical = Encyclopedia; -- error or no, set Periodical to Encyclopedia; allow periodical without encyclopedia
Periodical_origin = A:ORIGIN ('Encyclopedia');
end

if utilities.is_set (Periodical) then -- Periodical is set when |encyclopedia= is set
if utilities.is_set (Title) or utilities.is_set (ScriptTitle) then
if not utilities.is_set (Chapter) then
Chapter = Title; -- |encyclopedia= and |title= are set so map |title= to |article= and |encyclopedia= to |title=
ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle;
ScriptChapter_origin = A:ORIGIN('ScriptTitle')
TransChapter = TransTitle;
ChapterURL = URL;
ChapterURL_origin = URL_origin;

ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;

if not utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) and utilities.is_set (TitleLink) then
Chapter = utilities.make_wikilink (TitleLink, Chapter);
end
Title = Periodical;
ChapterFormat = Format;
Periodical = ''; -- redundant so unset
TransTitle = '';
URL = '';
Format = '';
TitleLink = '';
ScriptTitle = '';
end
elseif utilities.is_set (Chapter) or utilities.is_set (ScriptChapter) then -- |title= not set
Title = Periodical; -- |encyclopedia= set and |article= set so map |encyclopedia= to |title=
Periodical = ''; -- redundant so unset
end
end
end

-- special case for cite techreport.
local ID = A['ID'];
if (config.CitationClass == "techreport") then -- special case for cite techreport
if utilities.is_set (A['Number']) then -- cite techreport uses 'number', which other citations alias to 'issue'
if not utilities.is_set (ID) then -- can we use ID for the "number"?
ID = A['Number']; -- yes, use it
else -- ID has a value so emit error message
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'id') .. ' and ' .. utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'number')});
end
end
end

-- Account for the oddity that is {{cite conference}}, before generation of COinS data.
local ChapterLink -- = A['ChapterLink']; -- deprecated as a parameter but still used internally by cite episode
local Conference = A['Conference'];
local BookTitle = A['BookTitle'];
local TransTitle_origin = A:ORIGIN ('TransTitle');
if 'conference' == config.CitationClass then
if utilities.is_set (BookTitle) then
Chapter = Title;
Chapter_origin = 'title';
-- ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- |chapter-link= is deprecated
ChapterURL = URL;
ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;
ChapterURL_origin = URL_origin;
URL_origin = '';
ChapterFormat = Format;
TransChapter = TransTitle;
TransChapter_origin = TransTitle_origin;
Title = BookTitle;
Format = '';
-- TitleLink = '';
TransTitle = '';
URL = '';
end
elseif 'speech' ~= config.CitationClass then
Conference = ''; -- not cite conference or cite speech so make sure this is empty string
end

-- CS1/2 mode
local Mode = is_valid_parameter_value (A['Mode'], A:ORIGIN('Mode'), cfg.keywords_lists['mode'], '');
-- separator character and postscript
local sepc, PostScript = set_style (Mode:lower(), A['PostScript'], config.CitationClass);
-- controls capitalization of certain static text
local use_lowercase = ( sepc == ',' );

-- cite map oddities
local Cartography = "";
local Scale = "";
local Sheet = A['Sheet'] or '';
local Sheets = A['Sheets'] or '';
if config.CitationClass == "map" then
if utilities.is_set (Chapter) then --TODO: make a function for this and similar?
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'map') .. ' and ' .. utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', Chapter_origin)}); -- add error message
end
Chapter = A['Map'];
Chapter_origin = A:ORIGIN('Map');
ChapterURL = A['MapURL'];
ChapterURL_origin = A:ORIGIN('MapURL');
TransChapter = A['TransMap'];
ScriptChapter = A['ScriptMap']
ScriptChapter_origin = A:ORIGIN('ScriptMap')

ChapterUrlAccess = MapUrlAccess;
ChapterFormat = A['MapFormat'];

Cartography = A['Cartography'];
if utilities.is_set ( Cartography ) then
Cartography = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('cartography', Cartography, use_lowercase);
end
Scale = A['Scale'];
if utilities.is_set ( Scale ) then
Scale = sepc .. " " .. Scale;
end
end

-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite episode}} and {{cite serial}}, before generation of COinS data.
local Series = A['Series'];
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass or 'serial' == config.CitationClass then
local SeriesLink = A['SeriesLink'];

SeriesLink = link_title_ok (SeriesLink, A:ORIGIN ('SeriesLink'), Series, 'series'); -- check for wiki-markup in |series-link= or wiki-markup in |series= when |series-link= is set

local Network = A['Network'];
local Station = A['Station'];
local s, n = {}, {};
-- do common parameters first
if utilities.is_set (Network) then table.insert(n, Network); end
if utilities.is_set (Station) then table.insert(n, Station); end
ID = table.concat(n, sepc .. ' ');

if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- handle the oddities that are strictly {{cite episode}}
local Season = A['Season'];
local SeriesNumber = A['SeriesNumber'];

if utilities.is_set (Season) and utilities.is_set (SeriesNumber) then -- these are mutually exclusive so if both are set TODO: make a function for this and similar?
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'season') .. ' and ' .. utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'seriesno')}); -- add error message
SeriesNumber = ''; -- unset; prefer |season= over |seriesno=
end
-- assemble a table of parts concatenated later into Series
if utilities.is_set (Season) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('season', Season, use_lowercase)); end
if utilities.is_set (SeriesNumber) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('seriesnum', SeriesNumber, use_lowercase)); end
if utilities.is_set (Issue) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('episode', Issue, use_lowercase)); end
Issue = ''; -- unset because this is not a unique parameter

Chapter = Title; -- promote title parameters to chapter
ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle;
ScriptChapter_origin = A:ORIGIN('ScriptTitle');
ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- alias |episode-link=
TransChapter = TransTitle;
ChapterURL = URL;
ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;
ChapterURL_origin = URL_origin;

Title = Series; -- promote series to title
TitleLink = SeriesLink;
Series = table.concat(s, sepc .. ' '); -- this is concatenation of season, seriesno, episode number

if utilities.is_set (ChapterLink) and not utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) then -- link but not URL
Chapter = utilities.make_wikilink (ChapterLink, Chapter);
elseif utilities.is_set (ChapterLink) and utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if both are set, URL links episode;
Series = utilities.make_wikilink (ChapterLink, Series);
end
URL = ''; -- unset
TransTitle = '';
ScriptTitle = '';

else -- now oddities that are cite serial
Issue = ''; -- unset because this parameter no longer supported by the citation/core version of cite serial
Chapter = A['Episode']; -- TODO: make |episode= available to cite episode someday?
if utilities.is_set (Series) and utilities.is_set (SeriesLink) then
Series = utilities.make_wikilink (SeriesLink, Series);
end
Series = utilities.wrap_style ('italic-title', Series); -- series is italicized
end
end
-- end of {{cite episode}} stuff

-- handle type parameter for those CS1 citations that have default values
local TitleType = A['TitleType'];
local Degree = A['Degree'];
if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {'AV-media-notes', 'interview', 'mailinglist', 'map', 'podcast', 'pressrelease', 'report', 'speech', 'techreport', 'thesis'}) then
TitleType = set_titletype (config.CitationClass, TitleType);
if utilities.is_set (Degree) and "Thesis" == TitleType then -- special case for cite thesis
TitleType = Degree .. ' ' .. cfg.title_types ['thesis']:lower();
end
end

if utilities.is_set (TitleType) then -- if type parameter is specified
TitleType = utilities.substitute ( cfg.messages['type'], TitleType); -- display it in parentheses
-- TODO: Hack on TitleType to fix bunched parentheses problem
end

-- legacy: promote PublicationDate to Date if neither Date nor Year are set.
local Date = A['Date'];
local Date_origin; -- to hold the name of parameter promoted to Date; required for date error messaging
local PublicationDate = A['PublicationDate'];
local Year = A['Year'];

if not utilities.is_set (Date) then
Date = Year; -- promote Year to Date
Year = nil; -- make nil so Year as empty string isn't used for CITEREF
if not utilities.is_set (Date) and utilities.is_set (PublicationDate) then -- use PublicationDate when |date= and |year= are not set
Date = PublicationDate; -- promote PublicationDate to Date
PublicationDate = ''; -- unset, no longer needed
Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('PublicationDate'); -- save the name of the promoted parameter
else
Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('Year'); -- save the name of the promoted parameter
end
else
Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('Date'); -- not a promotion; name required for error messaging
end

if PublicationDate == Date then PublicationDate = ''; end -- if PublicationDate is same as Date, don't display in rendered citation

--[[
Go test all of the date-holding parameters for valid MOS:DATE format and make sure that dates are real dates. This must be done before we do COinS because here is where
we get the date used in the metadata.

Date validation supporting code is in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation
]]

local DF = is_valid_parameter_value (A['DF'], A:ORIGIN('DF'), cfg.keywords_lists['df'], '');
if not utilities.is_set (DF) then
DF = cfg.global_df; -- local |df= if present overrides global df set by {{use xxx date}} template
end

local ArchiveURL;
local ArchiveDate;
local ArchiveFormat = A['ArchiveFormat'];

ArchiveURL, ArchiveDate = archive_url_check (A['ArchiveURL'], A['ArchiveDate'])
ArchiveFormat = style_format (ArchiveFormat, ArchiveURL, 'archive-format', 'archive-url');

ArchiveURL, ArchiveDate = is_unique_archive_url (ArchiveURL, URL, ChapterURL, A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL'), ArchiveDate); -- add error message when URL or ChapterURL == ArchiveURL

local AccessDate = A['AccessDate'];
local LayDate = A['LayDate'];
local COinS_date = {}; -- holds date info extracted from |date= for the COinS metadata by Module:Date verification
local DoiBroken = A['DoiBroken'];
local Embargo = A['Embargo'];
local anchor_year; -- used in the CITEREF identifier
do -- create defined block to contain local variables error_message, date_parameters_list, mismatch
local error_message = '';
-- AirDate has been promoted to Date so not necessary to check it
local date_parameters_list = {
['access-date'] = {val = AccessDate, name = A:ORIGIN ('AccessDate')},
['archive-date'] = {val = ArchiveDate, name = A:ORIGIN ('ArchiveDate')},
['date'] = {val = Date, name = Date_origin},
['doi-broken-date'] = {val = DoiBroken, name = A:ORIGIN ('DoiBroken')},
['pmc-embargo-date'] = {val = Embargo, name = A:ORIGIN ('Embargo')},
['lay-date'] = {val = LayDate, name = A:ORIGIN ('LayDate')},
['publication-date'] = {val = PublicationDate, name = A:ORIGIN ('PublicationDate')},
['year'] = {val = Year, name = A:ORIGIN ('Year')},
};

local error_list = {};
anchor_year, Embargo = validation.dates(date_parameters_list, COinS_date, error_list);

-- start temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty categorization
if COinS_date.inter_cal_cat then
utilities.add_prop_cat ('jul-greg-uncertainty');
end
-- end temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty categorization

if utilities.is_set (Year) and utilities.is_set (Date) then -- both |date= and |year= not normally needed;
validation.year_date_check (Year, A:ORIGIN ('Year'), Date, A:ORIGIN ('Date'), error_list);
end

if 0 == #error_list then -- error free dates only; 0 when error_list is empty
local modified = false; -- flag

if utilities.is_set (DF) then -- if we need to reformat dates
modified = validation.reformat_dates (date_parameters_list, DF); -- reformat to DF format, use long month names if appropriate
end

if true == validation.date_hyphen_to_dash (date_parameters_list) then -- convert hyphens to dashes where appropriate
modified = true;
utilities.set_message ('maint_date_format'); -- hyphens were converted so add maint category
end

-- for those wikis that can and want to have English date names translated to the local language; not supported at en.wiki
if cfg.date_name_auto_xlate_enable and validation.date_name_xlate (date_parameters_list, cfg.date_digit_auto_xlate_enable ) then
utilities.set_message ('maint_date_auto_xlated'); -- add maint cat
modified = true;
end

if modified then -- if the date_parameters_list values were modified
AccessDate = date_parameters_list['access-date'].val; -- overwrite date holding parameters with modified values
ArchiveDate = date_parameters_list['archive-date'].val;
Date = date_parameters_list['date'].val;
DoiBroken = date_parameters_list['doi-broken-date'].val;
LayDate = date_parameters_list['lay-date'].val;
PublicationDate = date_parameters_list['publication-date'].val;
end
else
utilities.set_message ('err_bad_date', {utilities.make_sep_list (#error_list, error_list)}); -- add this error message
end
end -- end of do

local ID_list = {}; -- sequence table of rendered identifiers
local ID_list_coins = {}; -- table of identifiers and their values from args; key is same as cfg.id_handlers's key
local Class = A['Class']; -- arxiv class identifier

local ID_support = {
{A['ASINTLD'], 'ASIN', 'err_asintld_missing_asin', A:ORIGIN ('ASINTLD')},
{DoiBroken, 'DOI', 'err_doibroken_missing_doi', A:ORIGIN ('DoiBroken')},
{Embargo, 'PMC', 'err_embargo_missing_pmc', A:ORIGIN ('Embargo')},
}

ID_list, ID_list_coins = identifiers.identifier_lists_get (args, {DoiBroken = DoiBroken, ASINTLD = A['ASINTLD'], Embargo = Embargo, Class = Class}, ID_support);

-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite arxiv}}, {{cite biorxiv}}, {{cite citeseerx}}, {{cite ssrn}}, before generation of COinS data.
if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, whitelist.preprint_template_list) then
if not utilities.is_set (ID_list_coins[config.CitationClass:upper()]) then -- |arxiv= or |eprint= required for cite arxiv; |biorxiv= & |citeseerx= required for their templates
utilities.set_message ('err_' .. config.CitationClass .. '_missing'); -- add error message
end

Periodical = ({['arxiv'] = 'arXiv', ['biorxiv'] = 'bioRxiv', ['citeseerx'] = 'CiteSeerX', ['ssrn'] = 'Social Science Research Network'})[config.CitationClass];
end

-- Link the title of the work if no |url= was provided, but we have a |pmc= or a |doi= with |doi-access=free

if config.CitationClass == "journal" and not utilities.is_set (URL) and not utilities.is_set (TitleLink) and not utilities.in_array (cfg.keywords_xlate[Title], {'off', 'none'}) then -- TODO: remove 'none' once existing citations have been switched to 'off', so 'none' can be used as token for "no title" instead
if 'none' ~= cfg.keywords_xlate[auto_select] then -- if auto-linking not disabled
if identifiers.auto_link_urls[auto_select] then -- manual selection
URL = identifiers.auto_link_urls[auto_select]; -- set URL to be the same as identifier's external link
URL_origin = cfg.id_handlers[auto_select:upper()].parameters[1]; -- set URL_origin to parameter name for use in error message if citation is missing a |title=
elseif identifiers.auto_link_urls['pmc'] then -- auto-select PMC
URL = identifiers.auto_link_urls['pmc']; -- set URL to be the same as the PMC external link if not embargoed
URL_origin = cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].parameters[1]; -- set URL_origin to parameter name for use in error message if citation is missing a |title=
elseif identifiers.auto_link_urls['doi'] then -- auto-select DOI
URL = identifiers.auto_link_urls['doi'];
URL_origin = cfg.id_handlers['DOI'].parameters[1];
end
end

if utilities.is_set (URL) and utilities.is_set (AccessDate) then -- access date requires |url=; identifier-created URL is not |url=
utilities.set_message ('err_accessdate_missing_url'); -- add an error message
AccessDate = ''; -- unset
end
end

-- At this point fields may be nil if they weren't specified in the template use. We can use that fact.
-- Test if citation has no title
if not utilities.is_set (Title) and not utilities.is_set (TransTitle) and not utilities.is_set (ScriptTitle) then -- has special case for cite episode
utilities.set_message ('err_citation_missing_title', {'episode' == config.CitationClass and 'series' or 'title'});
end

if utilities.in_array (cfg.keywords_xlate[Title], {'off', 'none'}) and
utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {'journal', 'citation'}) and
(utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical)) and
('journal' == Periodical_origin or 'script-journal' == ScriptPeriodical_origin) then -- special case for journal cites
Title = ''; -- set title to empty string
utilities.set_message ('maint_untitled'); -- add maint cat
end

-- COinS metadata (see <http://ocoins.info/>) for automated parsing of citation information.
-- handle the oddity that is cite encyclopedia and {{citation |encyclopedia=something}}. Here we presume that
-- when Periodical, Title, and Chapter are all set, then Periodical is the book (encyclopedia) title, Title
-- is the article title, and Chapter is a section within the article. So, we remap

local coins_chapter = Chapter; -- default assuming that remapping not required
local coins_title = Title; -- et tu
if 'encyclopaedia' == config.CitationClass or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
if utilities.is_set (Chapter) and utilities.is_set (Title) and utilities.is_set (Periodical) then -- if all are used then
coins_chapter = Title; -- remap
coins_title = Periodical;
end
end
local coins_author = a; -- default for coins rft.au
if 0 < #c then -- but if contributor list
coins_author = c; -- use that instead
end

local QuotePage = A['QuotePage'];
local QuotePages = utilities.hyphen_to_dash (A['QuotePages']);

-- this is the function call to COinS()
local OCinSoutput = metadata.COinS({
['Periodical'] = utilities.strip_apostrophe_markup (Periodical), -- no markup in the metadata
['Encyclopedia'] = Encyclopedia, -- just a flag; content ignored by ~/COinS
['Chapter'] = metadata.make_coins_title (coins_chapter, ScriptChapter), -- Chapter and ScriptChapter stripped of bold / italic / accept-as-written markup
['Degree'] = Degree; -- cite thesis only
['Title'] = metadata.make_coins_title (coins_title, ScriptTitle), -- Title and ScriptTitle stripped of bold / italic / accept-as-written markup
['PublicationPlace'] = PublicationPlace,
['Date'] = COinS_date.rftdate, -- COinS_date has correctly formatted date if Date is valid;
['Season'] = COinS_date.rftssn,
['Quarter'] = COinS_date.rftquarter,
['Chron'] = COinS_date.rftchron or (not COinS_date.rftdate and Date) or '', -- chron but if not set and invalid date format use Date; keep this last bit?
['Series'] = Series,
['Volume'] = Volume,
['Issue'] = Issue,
['Pages'] = coins_pages or metadata.get_coins_pages (first_set ({Sheet, Sheets, Page, Pages, At, QuotePage, QuotePages}, 7)), -- pages stripped of external links
['Edition'] = Edition,
['PublisherName'] = PublisherName or Newsgroup, -- any apostrophe markup already removed from PublisherName
['URL'] = first_set ({ChapterURL, URL}, 2),
['Authors'] = coins_author,
['ID_list'] = ID_list_coins,
['RawPage'] = this_page.prefixedText,
}, config.CitationClass);

-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite arxiv}}, {{cite biorxiv}}, {{cite citeseerx}}, and {{cite ssrn}} AFTER generation of COinS data.
if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, whitelist.preprint_template_list) then -- we have set rft.jtitle in COinS to arXiv, bioRxiv, CiteSeerX, or ssrn now unset so it isn't displayed
Periodical = ''; -- periodical not allowed in these templates; if article has been published, use cite journal
end

-- special case for cite newsgroup. Do this after COinS because we are modifying Publishername to include some static text
if 'newsgroup' == config.CitationClass and utilities.is_set (Newsgroup) then
PublisherName = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['newsgroup'], external_link( 'news:' .. Newsgroup, Newsgroup, Newsgroup_origin, nil ));
end

local Editors;
local EditorCount; -- used only for choosing {ed.) or (eds.) annotation at end of editor name-list
local Contributors; -- assembled contributors name list
local contributor_etal;
local Translators; -- assembled translators name list
local translator_etal;
local t = {}; -- translators list from |translator-lastn= / translator-firstn= pairs
t = extract_names (args, 'TranslatorList'); -- fetch translator list from |translatorn= / |translator-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=
local Interviewers;
local interviewers_list = {};
interviewers_list = extract_names (args, 'InterviewerList'); -- process preferred interviewers parameters
local interviewer_etal;

-- Now perform various field substitutions.
-- We also add leading spaces and surrounding markup and punctuation to the
-- various parts of the citation, but only when they are non-nil.
do
local last_first_list;
local control = {
format = NameListStyle, -- empty string or 'vanc'
maximum = nil, -- as if display-authors or display-editors not set
mode = Mode
};

do -- do editor name list first because the now unsupported coauthors used to modify control table
control.maximum , editor_etal = get_display_names (A['DisplayEditors'], #e, 'editors', editor_etal, A:ORIGIN ('DisplayEditors'));
Editors, EditorCount = list_people (control, e, editor_etal);

if 1 == EditorCount and (true == editor_etal or 1 < #e) then -- only one editor displayed but includes etal then
EditorCount = 2; -- spoof to display (eds.) annotation
end
end
do -- now do interviewers
control.maximum, interviewer_etal = get_display_names (A['DisplayInterviewers'], #interviewers_list, 'interviewers', interviewer_etal, A:ORIGIN ('DisplayInterviewers'));
Interviewers = list_people (control, interviewers_list, interviewer_etal);
end
do -- now do translators
control.maximum, translator_etal = get_display_names (A['DisplayTranslators'], #t, 'translators', translator_etal, A:ORIGIN ('DisplayTranslators'));
Translators = list_people (control, t, translator_etal);
end
do -- now do contributors
control.maximum, contributor_etal = get_display_names (A['DisplayContributors'], #c, 'contributors', contributor_etal, A:ORIGIN ('DisplayContributors'));
Contributors = list_people (control, c, contributor_etal);
end
do -- now do authors
control.maximum, author_etal = get_display_names (A['DisplayAuthors'], #a, 'authors', author_etal, A:ORIGIN ('DisplayAuthors'));

last_first_list = list_people (control, a, author_etal);

if utilities.is_set (Authors) then
Authors, author_etal = name_has_etal (Authors, author_etal, false, 'authors'); -- find and remove variations on et al.
if author_etal then
Authors = Authors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to authors parameter
end
else
Authors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string
end
end -- end of do

if utilities.is_set (Authors) and utilities.is_set (Collaboration) then
Authors = Authors .. ' (' .. Collaboration .. ')'; -- add collaboration after et al.
end

end

local ConferenceFormat = A['ConferenceFormat'];
local ConferenceURL = A['ConferenceURL'];
ConferenceFormat = style_format (ConferenceFormat, ConferenceURL, 'conference-format', 'conference-url');
Format = style_format (Format, URL, 'format', 'url');

-- special case for chapter format so no error message or cat when chapter not supported
if not (utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx', 'ssrn'}) or
('citation' == config.CitationClass and (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical)) and not utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia))) then
ChapterFormat = style_format (ChapterFormat, ChapterURL, 'chapter-format', 'chapter-url');
end

if not utilities.is_set (URL) then
if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {"web", "podcast", "mailinglist"}) or -- |url= required for cite web, cite podcast, and cite mailinglist
('citation' == config.CitationClass and ('website' == Periodical_origin or 'script-website' == ScriptPeriodical_origin)) then -- and required for {{citation}} with |website= or |script-website=
utilities.set_message ('err_cite_web_url');
end

-- do we have |accessdate= without either |url= or |chapter-url=?
if utilities.is_set (AccessDate) and not utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) then -- ChapterURL may be set when URL is not set;
utilities.set_message ('err_accessdate_missing_url');
AccessDate = '';
end
end

local UrlStatus = is_valid_parameter_value (A['UrlStatus'], A:ORIGIN('UrlStatus'), cfg.keywords_lists['url-status'], '');
local OriginalURL
local OriginalURL_origin
local OriginalFormat
local OriginalAccess;
UrlStatus = UrlStatus:lower(); -- used later when assembling archived text
if utilities.is_set ( ArchiveURL ) then
if utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if chapter-url= is set apply archive url to it
OriginalURL = ChapterURL; -- save copy of source chapter's url for archive text
OriginalURL_origin = ChapterURL_origin; -- name of |chapter-url= parameter for error messages
OriginalFormat = ChapterFormat; -- and original |chapter-format=

if 'live' ~= UrlStatus then
ChapterURL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's URL
ChapterURL_origin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of |archive-url= parameter for error messages
ChapterFormat = ArchiveFormat or ''; -- swap in archive's format
ChapterUrlAccess = nil; -- restricted access levels do not make sense for archived URLs
end
elseif utilities.is_set (URL) then
OriginalURL = URL; -- save copy of original source URL
OriginalURL_origin = URL_origin; -- name of URL parameter for error messages
OriginalFormat = Format; -- and original |format=
OriginalAccess = UrlAccess;

if 'live' ~= UrlStatus then -- if URL set then |archive-url= applies to it
URL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's URL
URL_origin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive URL parameter for error messages
Format = ArchiveFormat or ''; -- swap in archive's format
UrlAccess = nil; -- restricted access levels do not make sense for archived URLs
end
end
elseif utilities.is_set (UrlStatus) then -- if |url-status= is set when |archive-url= is not set
utilities.set_message ('maint_url_status'); -- add maint cat
end

if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx', 'ssrn'}) or -- if any of the 'periodical' cites except encyclopedia
('citation' == config.CitationClass and (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical)) and not utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
local chap_param;
if utilities.is_set (Chapter) then -- get a parameter name from one of these chapter related meta-parameters
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('Chapter')
elseif utilities.is_set (TransChapter) then
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('TransChapter')
elseif utilities.is_set (ChapterURL) then
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterURL')
elseif utilities.is_set (ScriptChapter) then
chap_param = ScriptChapter_origin;
else utilities.is_set (ChapterFormat)
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterFormat')
end

if utilities.is_set (chap_param) then -- if we found one
utilities.set_message ('err_chapter_ignored', {chap_param}); -- add error message
Chapter = ''; -- and set them to empty string to be safe with concatenation
TransChapter = '';
ChapterURL = '';
ScriptChapter = '';
ChapterFormat = '';
end
else -- otherwise, format chapter / article title
local no_quotes = false; -- default assume that we will be quoting the chapter parameter value
if utilities.is_set (Contribution) and 0 < #c then -- if this is a contribution with contributor(s)
if utilities.in_array (Contribution:lower(), cfg.keywords_lists.contribution) then -- and a generic contribution title
no_quotes = true; -- then render it unquoted
end
end

Chapter = format_chapter_title (ScriptChapter, ScriptChapter_origin, Chapter, Chapter_origin, TransChapter, TransChapter_origin, ChapterURL, ChapterURL_origin, no_quotes, ChapterUrlAccess); -- Contribution is also in Chapter
if utilities.is_set (Chapter) then
Chapter = Chapter .. ChapterFormat ;
if 'map' == config.CitationClass and utilities.is_set (TitleType) then
Chapter = Chapter .. ' ' .. TitleType; -- map annotation here; not after title
end
Chapter = Chapter .. sepc .. ' ';
elseif utilities.is_set (ChapterFormat) then -- |chapter= not set but |chapter-format= is so ...
Chapter = ChapterFormat .. sepc .. ' '; -- ... ChapterFormat has error message, we want to see it
end
end

-- Format main title
local plain_title = false;
local accept_title;
Title, accept_title = utilities.has_accept_as_written (Title, true); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of <Title>
if accept_title and ('' == Title) then -- only support forced empty for now "(())"
Title = cfg.messages['notitle']; -- replace by predefined "No title" message
-- TODO: utilities.set_message ( 'err_redundant_parameters', ...); -- issue proper error message instead of muting
ScriptTitle = ''; -- just mute for now
TransTitle = ''; -- just mute for now
plain_title = true; -- suppress text decoration for descriptive title
utilities.set_message ('maint_untitled'); -- add maint cat
end

if not accept_title then -- <Title> not wrapped in accept-as-written markup
if '...' == Title:sub (-3) then -- if ellipsis is the last three characters of |title=
Title = Title:gsub ('(%.%.%.)%.+$', '%1'); -- limit the number of dots to three
elseif not mw.ustring.find (Title, '%.%s*%a%.$') and -- end of title is not a 'dot-(optional space-)letter-dot' initialism ...
not mw.ustring.find (Title, '%s+%a%.$') then -- ...and not a 'space-letter-dot' initial (''Allium canadense'' L.)
Title = mw.ustring.gsub(Title, '%' .. sepc .. '$', ''); -- remove any trailing separator character; sepc and ms.ustring() here for languages that use multibyte separator characters
end

if utilities.is_set (ArchiveURL) and is_archived_copy (Title) then
utilities.set_message ('maint_archived_copy'); -- add maintenance category before we modify the content of Title
end

if is_generic ('generic_titles', Title) then
utilities.set_message ('err_generic_title'); -- set an error message
end
end

if (not plain_title) and (utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'mailinglist', 'interview', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx', 'ssrn'}) or
('citation' == config.CitationClass and (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical)) and not utilities.is_set (Encyclopedia)) or
('map' == config.CitationClass and (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical)))) then -- special case for cite map when the map is in a periodical treat as an article
Title = kern_quotes (Title); -- if necessary, separate title's leading and trailing quote marks from module provided quote marks
Title = utilities.wrap_style ('quoted-title', Title);
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle, 'script-title'); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; must be done after title is wrapped
TransTitle = utilities.wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle );
elseif plain_title or ('report' == config.CitationClass) then -- no styling for cite report and descriptive titles (otherwise same as above)
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle, 'script-title'); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; must be done after title is wrapped
TransTitle = utilities.wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle ); -- for cite report, use this form for trans-title
else
Title = utilities.wrap_style ('italic-title', Title);
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle, 'script-title'); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; must be done after title is wrapped
TransTitle = utilities.wrap_style ('trans-italic-title', TransTitle);
end

if utilities.is_set (TransTitle) then
if utilities.is_set (Title) then
TransTitle = " " .. TransTitle;
else
utilities.set_message ('err_trans_missing_title', {'title'});
end
end

if utilities.is_set (Title) then -- TODO: is this the right place to be making Wikisource URLs?
if utilities.is_set (TitleLink) and utilities.is_set (URL) then
utilities.set_message ('err_wikilink_in_url'); -- set an error message because we can't have both
TitleLink = ''; -- unset
end

if not utilities.is_set (TitleLink) and utilities.is_set (URL) then
Title = external_link (URL, Title, URL_origin, UrlAccess) .. TransTitle .. Format;
URL = ''; -- unset these because no longer needed
Format = "";
elseif utilities.is_set (TitleLink) and not utilities.is_set (URL) then
local ws_url;
ws_url = wikisource_url_make (TitleLink); -- ignore ws_label return; not used here
if ws_url then
Title = external_link (ws_url, Title .. ' ', 'ws link in title-link'); -- space char after Title to move icon away from italic text; TODO: a better way to do this?
Title = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['interwiki-icon'], {cfg.presentation['class-wikisource'], TitleLink, Title});
Title = Title .. TransTitle;
else
Title = utilities.make_wikilink (TitleLink, Title) .. TransTitle;
end
else
local ws_url, ws_label, L; -- Title has italic or quote markup by the time we get here which causes is_wikilink() to return 0 (not a wikilink)
ws_url, ws_label, L = wikisource_url_make (Title:gsub('^[\'"]*(.-)[\'"]*$', '%1')); -- make ws URL from |title= interwiki link (strip italic or quote markup); link portion L becomes tooltip label
if ws_url then
Title = Title:gsub ('%b[]', ws_label); -- replace interwiki link with ws_label to retain markup
Title = external_link (ws_url, Title .. ' ', 'ws link in title'); -- space char after Title to move icon away from italic text; TODO: a better way to do this?
Title = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['interwiki-icon'], {cfg.presentation['class-wikisource'], L, Title});
Title = Title .. TransTitle;
else
Title = Title .. TransTitle;
end
end
else
Title = TransTitle;
end

if utilities.is_set (Place) then
Place = " " .. wrap_msg ('written', Place, use_lowercase) .. sepc .. " ";
end

local ConferenceURL_origin = A:ORIGIN('ConferenceURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ConferenceURL
if utilities.is_set (Conference) then
if utilities.is_set (ConferenceURL) then
Conference = external_link( ConferenceURL, Conference, ConferenceURL_origin, nil );
end
Conference = sepc .. " " .. Conference .. ConferenceFormat;
elseif utilities.is_set (ConferenceURL) then
Conference = sepc .. " " .. external_link( ConferenceURL, nil, ConferenceURL_origin, nil );
end

local Position = '';
if not utilities.is_set (Position) then
local Minutes = A['Minutes'];
local Time = A['Time'];

if utilities.is_set (Minutes) then
if utilities.is_set (Time) then --TODO: make a function for this and similar?
utilities.set_message ('err_redundant_parameters', {utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'minutes') .. ' and ' .. utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', 'time')});
end
Position = " " .. Minutes .. " " .. cfg.messages['minutes'];
else
if utilities.is_set (Time) then
local TimeCaption = A['TimeCaption']
if not utilities.is_set (TimeCaption) then
TimeCaption = cfg.messages['event'];
if sepc ~= '.' then
TimeCaption = TimeCaption:lower();
end
end
Position = " " .. TimeCaption .. " " .. Time;
end
end
else
Position = " " .. Position;
At = '';
end

Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets = format_pages_sheets (Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, NoPP, use_lowercase);

At = utilities.is_set (At) and (sepc .. " " .. At) or "";
Position = utilities.is_set (Position) and (sepc .. " " .. Position) or "";
if config.CitationClass == 'map' then
local Sections = A['Sections']; -- Section (singular) is an alias of Chapter so set earlier
local Inset = A['Inset'];

if utilities.is_set ( Inset ) then
Inset = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('inset', Inset, use_lowercase);
end

if utilities.is_set ( Sections ) then
Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('sections', Sections, use_lowercase);
elseif utilities.is_set ( Section ) then
Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('section', Section, use_lowercase);
end
At = At .. Inset .. Section;
end

local Others = A['Others'];
if utilities.is_set (Others) and 0 == #a and 0 == #e then -- add maint cat when |others= has value and used without |author=, |editor=
if config.CitationClass == "AV-media-notes"
or config.CitationClass == "audio-visual" then -- special maint for AV/M which has a lot of 'false' positives right now
utilities.set_message ('maint_others_avm')
else
utilities.set_message ('maint_others');
end
end
Others = utilities.is_set (Others) and (sepc .. " " .. Others) or "";

if utilities.is_set (Translators) then
Others = safe_join ({sepc .. ' ', wrap_msg ('translated', Translators, use_lowercase), Others}, sepc);
end
if utilities.is_set (Interviewers) then
Others = safe_join ({sepc .. ' ', wrap_msg ('interview', Interviewers, use_lowercase), Others}, sepc);
end

local TitleNote = A['TitleNote'];
TitleNote = utilities.is_set (TitleNote) and (sepc .. " " .. TitleNote) or "";
if utilities.is_set (Edition) then
if Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]d%n?%.?$') or Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]dition$') then -- Ed, ed, Ed., ed., Edn, edn, Edn., edn.
utilities.set_message ('err_extra_text_edition'); -- add error message
end
Edition = " " .. wrap_msg ('edition', Edition);
else
Edition = '';
end

Series = utilities.is_set (Series) and wrap_msg ('series', {sepc, Series}) or ""; -- not the same as SeriesNum
local Agency = A['Agency'];
Agency = utilities.is_set (Agency) and wrap_msg ('agency', {sepc, Agency}) or "";
Volume = format_volume_issue (Volume, Issue, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, use_lowercase);

if utilities.is_set (AccessDate) then
local retrv_text = " " .. cfg.messages['retrieved']

AccessDate = nowrap_date (AccessDate); -- wrap in nowrap span if date in appropriate format
if (sepc ~= ".") then retrv_text = retrv_text:lower() end -- if mode is cs2, lower case
AccessDate = utilities.substitute (retrv_text, AccessDate); -- add retrieved text

AccessDate = utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['accessdate'], {sepc, AccessDate}); -- allow editors to hide accessdates
end

if utilities.is_set (ID) then ID = sepc .. " " .. ID; end

local Docket = A['Docket'];
if "thesis" == config.CitationClass and utilities.is_set (Docket) then
ID = sepc .. " Docket " .. Docket .. ID;
end
if "report" == config.CitationClass and utilities.is_set (Docket) then -- for cite report when |docket= is set
ID = sepc .. ' ' .. Docket; -- overwrite ID even if |id= is set
end

if utilities.is_set (URL) then
URL = " " .. external_link( URL, nil, URL_origin, UrlAccess );
end

local Quote = A['Quote'];
local TransQuote = A['TransQuote'];
local ScriptQuote = A['ScriptQuote'];
if utilities.is_set (Quote) or utilities.is_set (TransQuote) or utilities.is_set (ScriptQuote) then

if utilities.is_set (Quote) then
if Quote:sub(1, 1) == '"' and Quote:sub(-1, -1) == '"' then -- if first and last characters of quote are quote marks
Quote = Quote:sub(2, -2); -- strip them off
end
end

Quote = utilities.wrap_style ('quoted-text', Quote ); -- wrap in <q>...</q> tags

if utilities.is_set (ScriptQuote) then
Quote = script_concatenate (Quote, ScriptQuote, 'script-quote'); -- <bdi> tags, lang attribute, categorization, etc.; must be done after quote is wrapped
end

if utilities.is_set (TransQuote) then
if TransQuote:sub(1, 1) == '"' and TransQuote:sub(-1, -1) == '"' then -- if first and last characters of |trans-quote are quote marks
TransQuote = TransQuote:sub(2, -2); -- strip them off
end
Quote = Quote .. " " .. utilities.wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransQuote );
end

if utilities.is_set (QuotePage) or utilities.is_set (QuotePages) then -- add page prefix
local quote_prefix = '';
if utilities.is_set (QuotePage) then
extra_text_in_page_check (QuotePage, 'quote-page'); -- add to maint cat if |quote-page= value begins with what looks like p., pp., etc.
if not NoPP then
quote_prefix = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, QuotePage}), '', '', '';
else
quote_prefix = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, QuotePage}), '', '', '';
end
elseif utilities.is_set (QuotePages) then
extra_text_in_page_check (QuotePages, 'quote-pages'); -- add to maint cat if |quote-pages= value begins with what looks like p., pp., etc.
if tonumber(QuotePages) ~= nil and not NoPP then -- if only digits, assume single page
quote_prefix = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, QuotePages}), '', '';
elseif not NoPP then
quote_prefix = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['pp-prefix'], {sepc, QuotePages}), '', '';
else
quote_prefix = utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, QuotePages}), '', '';
end
end

Quote = quote_prefix .. ": " .. Quote;
else
Quote = sepc .. " " .. Quote;
end

PostScript = ""; -- cs1|2 does not supply terminal punctuation when |quote= is set
end

-- We check length of PostScript here because it will have been nuked by
-- the quote parameters. We'd otherwise emit a message even if there wasn't
-- a displayed postscript.
-- TODO: Should the max size (1) be configurable?
-- TODO: Should we check a specific pattern?
if utilities.is_set(PostScript) and mw.ustring.len(PostScript) > 1 then
utilities.set_message ('maint_postscript')
end

local Archived;
if utilities.is_set (ArchiveURL) then
local arch_text;
if not utilities.is_set (ArchiveDate) then
utilities.set_message ('err_archive_missing_date');
ArchiveDate = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
end
if "live" == UrlStatus then
arch_text = cfg.messages['archived'];
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
if utilities.is_set (ArchiveDate) then
Archived = sepc .. ' ' .. utilities.substitute ( cfg.messages['archived-live'],
{external_link( ArchiveURL, arch_text, A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL'), nil) .. ArchiveFormat, ArchiveDate } );
else
Archived = '';
end
if not utilities.is_set (OriginalURL) then
utilities.set_message ('err_archive_missing_url');
Archived = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
end
elseif utilities.is_set (OriginalURL) then -- UrlStatus is empty, 'dead', 'unfit', 'usurped', 'bot: unknown'
if utilities.in_array (UrlStatus, {'unfit', 'usurped', 'bot: unknown'}) then
arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-unfit'];
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
Archived = sepc .. ' ' .. arch_text .. ArchiveDate; -- format already styled
if 'bot: unknown' == UrlStatus then
utilities.set_message ('maint_bot_unknown'); -- and add a category if not already added
else
utilities.set_message ('maint_unfit'); -- and add a category if not already added
end
else -- UrlStatus is empty, 'dead'
arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-dead'];
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
if utilities.is_set (ArchiveDate) then
Archived = sepc .. " " .. utilities.substitute ( arch_text,
{ external_link( OriginalURL, cfg.messages['original'], OriginalURL_origin, OriginalAccess ) .. OriginalFormat, ArchiveDate } ); -- format already styled
else
Archived = ''; -- unset for concatenation
end
end
else -- OriginalUrl not set
arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-missing'];
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
utilities.set_message ('err_archive_missing_url');
Archived = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
end
elseif utilities.is_set (ArchiveFormat) then
Archived = ArchiveFormat; -- if set and ArchiveURL not set ArchiveFormat has error message
else
Archived = '';
end

local Lay = '';
local LaySource = A['LaySource'];
local LayURL = A['LayURL'];
local LayFormat = A['LayFormat'];
LayFormat = style_format (LayFormat, LayURL, 'lay-format', 'lay-url');
if utilities.is_set (LayURL) then
if utilities.is_set (LayDate) then LayDate = " (" .. LayDate .. ")" end
if utilities.is_set (LaySource) then
LaySource = " – ''" .. utilities.safe_for_italics (LaySource) .. "''";
else
LaySource = "";
end
if sepc == '.' then
Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary'], A:ORIGIN('LayURL'), nil ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate
else
Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary']:lower(), A:ORIGIN('LayURL'), nil ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate
end
elseif utilities.is_set (LayFormat) then -- Test if |lay-format= is given without giving a |lay-url=
Lay = sepc .. LayFormat; -- if set and LayURL not set, then LayFormat has error message
end

local TranscriptURL = A['TranscriptURL']
local TranscriptFormat = A['TranscriptFormat'];
TranscriptFormat = style_format (TranscriptFormat, TranscriptURL, 'transcript-format', 'transcripturl');
local Transcript = A['Transcript'];
local TranscriptURL_origin = A:ORIGIN('TranscriptURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds TranscriptURL
if utilities.is_set (Transcript) then
if utilities.is_set (TranscriptURL) then
Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, Transcript, TranscriptURL_origin, nil );
end
Transcript = sepc .. ' ' .. Transcript .. TranscriptFormat;
elseif utilities.is_set (TranscriptURL) then
Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, nil, TranscriptURL_origin, nil );
end

local Publisher;
if utilities.is_set (PublicationDate) then
PublicationDate = wrap_msg ('published', PublicationDate);
end
if utilities.is_set (PublisherName) then
if utilities.is_set (PublicationPlace) then
Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. ": " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate;
else
Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate;
end
elseif utilities.is_set (PublicationPlace) then
Publisher= sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. PublicationDate;
else
Publisher = PublicationDate;
end

local TransPeriodical = A['TransPeriodical'];
local TransPeriodical_origin = A:ORIGIN ('TransPeriodical');
-- Several of the above rely upon detecting this as nil, so do it last.
if (utilities.is_set (Periodical) or utilities.is_set (ScriptPeriodical) or utilities.is_set (TransPeriodical)) then
if utilities.is_set (Title) or utilities.is_set (TitleNote) then
Periodical = sepc .. " " .. format_periodical (ScriptPeriodical, ScriptPeriodical_origin, Periodical, TransPeriodical, TransPeriodical_origin);
else
Periodical = format_periodical (ScriptPeriodical, ScriptPeriodical_origin, Periodical, TransPeriodical, TransPeriodical_origin);
end
end

local Language = A['Language'];
if utilities.is_set (Language) then
Language = language_parameter (Language); -- format, categories, name from ISO639-1, etc.
else
Language=''; -- language not specified so make sure this is an empty string;
--[[ TODO: need to extract the wrap_msg from language_parameter
so that we can solve parentheses bunching problem with Format/Language/TitleType
]]
end

--[[
Handle the oddity that is cite speech. This code overrides whatever may be the value assigned to TitleNote (through |department=) and forces it to be " (Speech)" so that
the annotation directly follows the |title= parameter value in the citation rather than the |event= parameter value (if provided).
]]
if "speech" == config.CitationClass then -- cite speech only
TitleNote = TitleType; -- move TitleType to TitleNote so that it renders ahead of |event=
TitleType = ''; -- and unset

if utilities.is_set (Periodical) then -- if Periodical, perhaps because of an included |website= or |journal= parameter
if utilities.is_set (Conference) then -- and if |event= is set
Conference = Conference .. sepc .. " "; -- then add appropriate punctuation to the end of the Conference variable before rendering
end
end
end

-- Piece all bits together at last. Here, all should be non-nil.
-- We build things this way because it is more efficient in LUA
-- not to keep reassigning to the same string variable over and over.

local tcommon;
local tcommon2; -- used for book cite when |contributor= is set

if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {"journal", "citation"}) and utilities.is_set (Periodical) then
if utilities.is_set (Others) then Others = safe_join ({Others, sepc .. " "}, sepc) end -- add terminal punctuation & space; check for dup sepc; TODO why do we need to do this here?
tcommon = safe_join( {Others, Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Edition, Publisher, Agency, Volume}, sepc );
elseif utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {"book", "citation"}) and not utilities.is_set (Periodical) then -- special cases for book cites
if utilities.is_set (Contributors) then -- when we are citing foreword, preface, introduction, etc.
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote}, sepc ); -- author and other stuff will come after this and before tcommon2
tcommon2 = safe_join( {Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
else
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
end

elseif 'map' == config.CitationClass then -- special cases for cite map
if utilities.is_set (Chapter) then -- map in a book; TitleType is part of Chapter
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc );
elseif utilities.is_set (Periodical) then -- map in a periodical
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Periodical, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc );
else -- a sheet or stand-alone map
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher}, sepc );
end

elseif 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, TitleType, Series, Language, Edition, Publisher}, sepc );

else -- all other CS1 templates
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language,
Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
end

if #ID_list > 0 then
ID_list = safe_join( { sepc .. " ", table.concat( ID_list, sepc .. " " ), ID }, sepc );
else
ID_list = ID;
end

local Via = A['Via'];
Via = utilities.is_set (Via) and wrap_msg ('via', Via) or '';
local idcommon;
if 'audio-visual' == config.CitationClass or 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite AV media & cite episode position transcript
idcommon = safe_join( { ID_list, URL, Archived, Transcript, AccessDate, Via, Lay, Quote }, sepc );
else
idcommon = safe_join( { ID_list, URL, Archived, AccessDate, Via, Lay, Quote }, sepc );
end

local text;
local pgtext = Position .. Sheet .. Sheets .. Page .. Pages .. At;

local OrigDate = A['OrigDate'];
OrigDate = utilities.is_set (OrigDate) and wrap_msg ('origdate', OrigDate) or '';
if utilities.is_set (Date) then
if utilities.is_set (Authors) or utilities.is_set (Editors) then -- date follows authors or editors when authors not set
Date = " (" .. Date .. ")" .. OrigDate .. sepc .. " "; -- in parentheses
else -- neither of authors and editors set
if (string.sub(tcommon, -1, -1) == sepc) then -- if the last character of tcommon is sepc
Date = " " .. Date .. OrigDate; -- Date does not begin with sepc
else
Date = sepc .. " " .. Date .. OrigDate; -- Date begins with sepc
end
end
end
if utilities.is_set (Authors) then
if (not utilities.is_set (Date)) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Authors termination
Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- when no date, terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
end
if utilities.is_set (Editors) then
local in_text = " ";
local post_text = "";
if utilities.is_set (Chapter) and 0 == #c then
in_text = in_text .. cfg.messages['in'] .. " "
if (sepc ~= '.') then
in_text = in_text:lower() -- lowercase for cs2
end
end
if EditorCount <= 1 then
post_text = " (" .. cfg.messages['editor'] .. ")"; -- be consistent with no-author, no-date case
else
post_text = " (" .. cfg.messages['editors'] .. ")";
end
Editors = terminate_name_list (in_text .. Editors .. post_text, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
end
if utilities.is_set (Contributors) then -- book cite and we're citing the intro, preface, etc.
local by_text = sepc .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['by'] .. ' ';
if (sepc ~= '.') then by_text = by_text:lower() end -- lowercase for cs2
Authors = by_text .. Authors; -- author follows title so tweak it here
if utilities.is_set (Editors) and utilities.is_set (Date) then -- when Editors make sure that Authors gets terminated
Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
end
if (not utilities.is_set (Date)) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Contributors termination
Contributors = terminate_name_list (Contributors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
end
text = safe_join( {Contributors, Date, Chapter, tcommon, Authors, Place, Editors, tcommon2, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc );
else
text = safe_join( {Authors, Date, Chapter, Place, Editors, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc );
end
elseif utilities.is_set (Editors) then
if utilities.is_set (Date) then
if EditorCount <= 1 then
Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editor'];
else
Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editors'];
end
else
if EditorCount <= 1 then
Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editor'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " "
else
Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editors'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " "
end
end
text = safe_join( {Editors, Date, Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc );
else
if utilities.in_array (config.CitationClass, {"journal", "citation"}) and utilities.is_set (Periodical) then
text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, Date, idcommon}, sepc );
else
text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, Date, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc );
end
end

if utilities.is_set (PostScript) and PostScript ~= sepc then
text = safe_join( {text, sepc}, sepc ); -- Deals with italics, spaces, etc.
text = text:sub(1, -sepc:len() - 1);
end

text = safe_join( {text, PostScript}, sepc );

-- Now enclose the whole thing in a <cite> element
local options_t = {};
options_t.class = cite_class_attribute_make (config.CitationClass, Mode);

local Ref = is_valid_parameter_value (A['Ref'], A:ORIGIN('Ref'), cfg.keywords_lists['ref'], nil, true); -- nil when |ref=harv; A['Ref'] else

if 'none' ~= cfg.keywords_xlate[(Ref and Ref:lower()) or ''] then
local namelist_t = {}; -- holds selected contributor, author, editor name list
local year = first_set ({Year, anchor_year}, 2); -- Year first for legacy citations and for YMD dates that require disambiguation

if #c > 0 then -- if there is a contributor list
namelist_t = c; -- select it
elseif #a > 0 then -- or an author list
namelist_t = a;
elseif #e > 0 then -- or an editor list
namelist_t = e;
end
local citeref_id;
if #namelist_t > 0 then -- if there are names in namelist_t
citeref_id = make_citeref_id (namelist_t, year); -- go make the CITEREF anchor
if mw.uri.anchorEncode (citeref_id) == ((Ref and mw.uri.anchorEncode (Ref)) or '') then -- Ref may already be encoded (by {{sfnref}}) so citeref_id must be encoded before comparison
utilities.set_message ('maint_ref_duplicates_default');
end
else
citeref_id = ''; -- unset
end
options_t.id = Ref or citeref_id;
end

if string.len (text:gsub('%b<>', '')) <= 2 then -- remove html and html-like tags; then get length of what remains;
z.error_cats_t = {}; -- blank the categories list
z.error_msgs_t = {}; -- blank the error messages list
OCinSoutput = nil; -- blank the metadata string
text = ''; -- blank the the citation
utilities.set_message ('err_empty_citation'); -- set empty citation message and category
end

local render_t = {}; -- here we collect the final bits for concatenation into the rendered citation

if utilities.is_set (options_t.id) then -- here we wrap the rendered citation in <cite ...>...</cite> tags
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['cite-id'], {mw.uri.anchorEncode(options_t.id), mw.text.nowiki(options_t.class), text})); -- when |ref= is set or when there is a namelist
else
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['cite'], {mw.text.nowiki(options_t.class), text})); -- when |ref=none or when namelist_t empty and |ref= is missing or is empty
end

if OCinSoutput then -- blanked when citation is 'empty' so don't bother to add boilerplate metadata span
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['ocins'], OCinSoutput)); -- format and append metadata to the citation
end

local template_name = ('citation' == config.CitationClass) and 'citation' or 'cite ' .. (cfg.citation_class_map_t[config.CitationClass] or config.CitationClass);
local template_link = '[[Template:' .. template_name .. '|' .. template_name .. ']]'; -- TODO: if kept, these require some sort of i18n
local msg_prefix = '<code class="cs1-code">{{' .. template_link .. '}}</code>: ';

if 0 ~= #z.error_msgs_t then
mw.addWarning (utilities.substitute (cfg.messages.warning_msg_e, template_link));

table.insert (render_t, ' '); -- insert a space between citation and its error messages
table.sort (z.error_msgs_t); -- sort the error messages list; sorting includes wrapping and <code> tags; hidden-error sorts ahead of visible-error

local hidden = true; -- presume that the only error messages emited by this template are hidden
for _, v in ipairs (z.error_msgs_t) do -- spin through the list of error messages
if v:find ('cs1-visible-error', 1, true) then -- look for the visible error class name
hidden = false; -- found one; so don't hide the error message prefix
break; -- and done because no need to look further
end
end

z.error_msgs_t[1] = table.concat ({utilities.error_comment (msg_prefix, hidden), z.error_msgs_t[1]}); -- add error message prefix to first error message to prevent extraneous punctuation
table.insert (render_t, table.concat (z.error_msgs_t, '; ')); -- make a big string of error messages and add it to the rendering
end

if 0 ~= #z.maint_cats_t then
mw.addWarning (utilities.substitute (cfg.messages.warning_msg_m, template_link));

table.sort (z.maint_cats_t); -- sort the maintenance messages list

local maint_msgs_t = {}; -- here we collect all of the maint messages

if 0 == #z.error_msgs_t then -- if no error messages
table.insert (maint_msgs_t, msg_prefix); -- insert message prefix in maint message livery
end

for _, v in ipairs( z.maint_cats_t ) do -- append maintenance categories
table.insert (maint_msgs_t, -- assemble new maint message and add it to the maint_msgs_t table
table.concat ({v, ' (', utilities.substitute (cfg.messages[':cat wikilink'], v), ')'})
);
end
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.presentation['hidden-maint'], table.concat (maint_msgs_t, ' '))); -- wrap the group of maint messages with proper presentation and save
end

if not no_tracking_cats then
for _, v in ipairs (z.error_cats_t) do -- append error categories
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['cat wikilink'], v));
end
for _, v in ipairs (z.maint_cats_t) do -- append maintenance categories
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['cat wikilink'], v));
end
for _, v in ipairs (z.prop_cats_t) do -- append properties categories
table.insert (render_t, utilities.substitute (cfg.messages['cat wikilink'], v));
end
end

return table.concat (render_t); -- make a big string and done
end

--[[--------------------------< V A L I D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------------

Looks for a parameter's name in one of several whitelists.

Parameters in the whitelist can have three values:
true - active, supported parameters
false - deprecated, supported parameters
nil - unsupported parameters

]]

local function validate (name, cite_class, empty)
local name = tostring (name);
local enum_name; -- for enumerated parameters, is name with enumerator replaced with '#'
local state;
local function state_test (state, name) -- local function to do testing of state values
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
if false == state then
if empty then return nil; end -- empty deprecated parameters are treated as unknowns
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
return true;
end
if 'tracked' == state then
local base_name = name:gsub ('%d', ''); -- strip enumerators from parameter names that have them to get the base name
utilities.add_prop_cat ('tracked-param', {base_name}, base_name); -- add a properties category; <base_name> modifies <key>
return true;
end
return nil;
end

if name:find ('#') then -- # is a cs1|2 reserved character so parameters with # not permitted
return nil;
end

if utilities.in_array (cite_class, whitelist.preprint_template_list ) then -- limited parameter sets allowed for these templates
state = whitelist.limited_basic_arguments[name];
if true == state_test (state, name) then return true; end

state = whitelist.preprint_arguments[cite_class][name]; -- look in the parameter-list for the template identified by cite_class
if true == state_test (state, name) then return true; end

-- limited enumerated parameters list
enum_name = name:gsub("%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#) (mw.ustring because non-Western 'local' digits)
state = whitelist.limited_numbered_arguments[enum_name];
if true == state_test (state, name) then return true; end

return false; -- not supported because not found or name is set to nil
end -- end limited parameter-set templates

if utilities.in_array (cite_class, whitelist.unique_param_template_list) then -- experiment for template-specific parameters for templates that accept parameters from the basic argument list
state = whitelist.unique_arguments[cite_class][name]; -- look in the template-specific parameter-lists for the template identified by cite_class
if true == state_test (state, name) then return true; end
end -- if here, fall into general validation

state = whitelist.basic_arguments[name]; -- all other templates; all normal parameters allowed
if true == state_test (state, name) then return true; end

-- all enumerated parameters allowed
enum_name = name:gsub("%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#) (mw.ustring because non-Western 'local' digits)
state = whitelist.numbered_arguments[enum_name];
if true == state_test (state, name) then return true; end

return false; -- not supported because not found or name is set to nil
end

--[=[-----------------------------------------------------------------------

check <value> for inter-language interwiki-link markup. <prefix> must be a MediaWiki-recognized language
code. when these values have the form (without leading colon):
[[<prefix>:link|label]] return label as plain-text
[[<prefix>:link]] return <prefix>:link as plain-text

return value as is else

]=]

local function inter_wiki_check (parameter, value)
local prefix = value:match ('%[%[(%a+):'); -- get an interwiki prefix if one exists
local _;

if prefix and cfg.inter_wiki_map[prefix:lower()] then -- if prefix is in the map, needs preceding colon so
utilities.set_message ('err_bad_paramlink', parameter); -- emit an error message
_, value, _ = utilities.is_wikilink (value); -- extract label portion from wikilink
end
return value;
end

--[[--------------------------< M I S S I N G _ P I P E _ C H E C K >------------------------------------------

Look at the contents of a parameter. If the content has a string of characters and digits followed by an equal
sign, compare the alphanumeric string to the list of cs1|2 parameters. If found, then the string is possibly a
parameter that is missing its pipe. There are two tests made:
{{cite ... |title=Title access-date=2016-03-17}} -- the first parameter has a value and whitespace separates that value from the missing pipe parameter name
{{cite ... |title=access-date=2016-03-17}} -- the first parameter has no value (whitespace after the first = is trimmed by MediaWiki)
cs1|2 shares some parameter names with XML/HTML attributes: class=, title=, etc. To prevent false positives XML/HTML
tags are removed before the search.

If a missing pipe is detected, this function adds the missing pipe maintenance category.

]]

local function missing_pipe_check (parameter, value)
local capture;
value = value:gsub ('%b<>', ''); -- remove XML/HTML tags because attributes: class=, title=, etc.

capture = value:match ('%s+(%a[%w%-]+)%s*=') or value:match ('^(%a[%w%-]+)%s*='); -- find and categorize parameters with possible missing pipes
if capture and validate (capture) then -- if the capture is a valid parameter name
utilities.set_message ('err_missing_pipe', parameter);
end
end

--[[--------------------------< H A S _ E X T R A N E O U S _ P U N C T >--------------------------------------

look for extraneous terminal punctuation in most parameter values; parameters listed in skip table are not checked

]]

local function has_extraneous_punc (param, value)
if 'number' == type (param) then
return;
end

param = param:gsub ('%d+', '#'); -- enumerated name-list mask params allow terminal punct; normalize
if cfg.punct_skip[param] then
return; -- parameter name found in the skip table so done
end

if value:match ('[,;:]$') then
utilities.set_message ('maint_extra_punct'); -- has extraneous punctuation; add maint cat
end
if value:match ('^=') then -- sometimes an extraneous '=' character appears ...
utilities.set_message ('maint_extra_punct'); -- has extraneous punctuation; add maint cat
end
end

--[[--------------------------< H A S _ E X T R A N E O U S _ U R L >------------------------------------------

look for extraneous url parameter values; parameters listed in skip table are not checked

]]

local function has_extraneous_url (url_param_t)
local url_error_t = {};

check_for_url (url_param_t, url_error_t); -- extraneous url check
if 0 ~= #url_error_t then -- non-zero when there are errors
table.sort (url_error_t);
utilities.set_message ('err_param_has_ext_link', {utilities.make_sep_list (#url_error_t, url_error_t)}); -- add this error message
end
end

--[[--------------------------< C I T A T I O N >--------------------------------------------------------------

This is used by templates such as {{cite book}} to create the actual citation text.

]]

local function citation(frame)
Frame = frame; -- save a copy in case we need to display an error message in preview mode
is_sandbox = nil ~= string.find (frame:getTitle(), 'sandbox', 1, true);
local pframe = frame:getParent()
local styles;

if is_sandbox then -- did the {{#invoke:}} use sandbox version?
cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration/sandbox'); -- load sandbox versions of support modules
whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist/sandbox');
utilities = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities/sandbox');
validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation/sandbox');
identifiers = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers/sandbox');
metadata = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/COinS/sandbox');
styles = 'Module:Citation/CS1/sandbox/styles.css';

else -- otherwise
cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration'); -- load live versions of support modules
whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist');
utilities = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities');
validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation');
identifiers = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers');
metadata = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/COinS');
styles = 'Module:Citation/CS1/styles.css';
end

utilities.set_selected_modules (cfg); -- so that functions in Utilities can see the selected cfg tables
identifiers.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in Identifiers can see the selected cfg tables and selected Utilities module
validation.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in Date validataion can see selected cfg tables and the selected Utilities module
metadata.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in COinS can see the selected cfg tables and selected Utilities module

z = utilities.z; -- table of error and category tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

is_preview_mode = not utilities.is_set (frame:preprocess ('{{REVISIONID}}'));

local args = {}; -- table where we store all of the template's arguments
local suggestions = {}; -- table where we store suggestions if we need to loadData them
local error_text; -- used as a flag

local config = {}; -- table to store parameters from the module {{#invoke:}}
for k, v in pairs( frame.args ) do -- get parameters from the {{#invoke}} frame
config[k] = v;
-- args[k] = v; -- crude debug support that allows us to render a citation from module {{#invoke:}}; skips parameter validation; TODO: keep?
end

local capture; -- the single supported capture when matching unknown parameters using patterns
local empty_unknowns = {}; -- sequence table to hold empty unknown params for error message listing
for k, v in pairs( pframe.args ) do -- get parameters from the parent (template) frame
v = mw.ustring.gsub (v, '^%s*(.-)%s*$', '%1'); -- trim leading/trailing whitespace; when v is only whitespace, becomes empty string
if v ~= '' then
if ('string' == type (k)) then
k = mw.ustring.gsub (k, '%d', cfg.date_names.local_digits); -- for enumerated parameters, translate 'local' digits to Western 0-9
end
if not validate( k, config.CitationClass ) then
if type (k) ~= 'string' then -- exclude empty numbered parameters
if v:match("%S+") ~= nil then
error_text = utilities.set_message ('err_text_ignored', {v});
end
elseif validate (k:lower(), config.CitationClass) then
error_text = utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, k:lower()}); -- suggest the lowercase version of the parameter
else
if nil == suggestions.suggestions then -- if this table is nil then we need to load it
if is_sandbox then -- did the {{#invoke:}} use sandbox version?
suggestions = mw.loadData( 'Module:Citation/CS1/Suggestions/sandbox' ); -- use the sandbox version
else
suggestions = mw.loadData( 'Module:Citation/CS1/Suggestions' ); -- use the live version
end
end
for pattern, param in pairs (suggestions.patterns) do -- loop through the patterns to see if we can suggest a proper parameter
capture = k:match (pattern); -- the whole match if no capture in pattern else the capture if a match
if capture then -- if the pattern matches
param = utilities.substitute (param, capture); -- add the capture to the suggested parameter (typically the enumerator)
if validate (param, config.CitationClass) then -- validate the suggestion to make sure that the suggestion is supported by this template (necessary for limited parameter lists)
error_text = utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, param}); -- set the suggestion error message
else
error_text = utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored', {k}); -- suggested param not supported by this template
v = ''; -- unset
end
end
end
if not utilities.is_set (error_text) then -- couldn't match with a pattern, is there an explicit suggestion?
if (suggestions.suggestions[ k:lower() ] ~= nil) and validate (suggestions.suggestions[ k:lower() ], config.CitationClass) then
utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, suggestions.suggestions[ k:lower() ]});
else
utilities.set_message ('err_parameter_ignored', {k});
v = ''; -- unset value assigned to unrecognized parameters (this for the limited parameter lists)
end
end
end
end

args[k] = v; -- save this parameter and its value

elseif not utilities.is_set (v) then -- for empty parameters
if not validate (k, config.CitationClass, true) then -- is this empty parameter a valid parameter
k = ('' == k) and '(empty string)' or k; -- when k is empty string (or was space(s) trimmed to empty string), replace with descriptive text
table.insert (empty_unknowns, utilities.wrap_style ('parameter', k)); -- format for error message and add to the list
end
-- crude debug support that allows us to render a citation from module {{#invoke:}} TODO: keep?
-- elseif args[k] ~= nil or (k == 'postscript') then -- when args[k] has a value from {{#invoke}} frame (we don't normally do that)
-- args[k] = v; -- overwrite args[k] with empty string from pframe.args[k] (template frame); v is empty string here
end -- not sure about the postscript bit; that gets handled in parameter validation; historical artifact?
end

if 0 ~= #empty_unknowns then -- create empty unknown error message
utilities.set_message ('err_param_unknown_empty', {
1 == #empty_unknowns and '' or 's',
utilities.make_sep_list (#empty_unknowns, empty_unknowns)
});
end

local url_param_t = {};

for k, v in pairs( args ) do
if 'string' == type (k) then -- don't evaluate positional parameters
has_invisible_chars (k, v); -- look for invisible characters
end
has_extraneous_punc (k, v); -- look for extraneous terminal punctuation in parameter values
missing_pipe_check (k, v); -- do we think that there is a parameter that is missing a pipe?
args[k] = inter_wiki_check (k, v); -- when language interwiki-linked parameter missing leading colon replace with wiki-link label

if 'string' == type (k) and not cfg.url_skip[k] then -- when parameter k is not positional and not in url skip table
url_param_t[k] = v; -- make a parameter/value list for extraneous url check
end
end

has_extraneous_url (url_param_t); -- look for url in parameter values where a url does not belong

return table.concat ({
frame:extensionTag ('templatestyles', '', {src=styles}),
citation0( config, args)
});
end

--[[--------------------------< E X P O R T E D F U N C T I O N S >------------------------------------------
]]

return {citation = citation};

Template:Citation

2022-04-04T14:00:54Z

Zoran: Created page with "<includeonly>{{#invoke:citation/CS1|citation |CitationClass=citation }}</includeonly><noinclude> {{Documentation}} </noinclude>"

<includeonly>{{#invoke:citation/CS1|citation
|CitationClass=citation
}}</includeonly><noinclude>
{{Documentation}}
</noinclude>

Template:TOC limit/styles.css

2022-03-30T18:44:01Z

Zoran: Zoran changed the content model of the page Template:TOC limit/styles.css from "wikitext" to "Sanitized CSS": Styling related page

/* {{pp-template}}
Allow limiting of which header levels are shown in a TOC;
<div class="toclimit-3">, for instance, will limit to
showing ==headings== and ===headings=== but no further
(as long as there are no =headings= on the page, which
there shouldn't be according to the MoS). */
.toclimit-2 .toclevel-1 ul,
.toclimit-3 .toclevel-2 ul,
.toclimit-4 .toclevel-3 ul,
.toclimit-5 .toclevel-4 ul,
.toclimit-6 .toclevel-5 ul,
.toclimit-7 .toclevel-6 ul {
display: none;
}

Module:Documentation/config

2022-03-30T18:41:49Z

Zoran: Created page with "---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -- -- Configuration for Module:Documentation..."

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
-- Configuration for Module:Documentation
--
-- Here you can set the values of the parameters and messages used in Module:Documentation to
-- localise it to your wiki and your language. Unless specified otherwise, values given here
-- should be string values.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local cfg = {} -- Do not edit this line.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Protection template configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['protection-reason-edit']
-- The protection reason for edit-protected templates to pass to
-- [[Module:Protection banner]].
cfg['protection-reason-edit'] = 'template'

--[[
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Sandbox notice configuration
--
-- On sandbox pages the module can display a template notifying users that the current page is a
-- sandbox, and the location of test cases pages, etc. The module decides whether the page is a
-- sandbox or not based on the value of cfg['sandbox-subpage']. The following settings configure the
-- messages that the notices contains.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--]]

-- cfg['sandbox-notice-image']
-- The image displayed in the sandbox notice.
cfg['sandbox-notice-image'] = '[[File:Sandbox.svg|50px|alt=|link=]]'

--[[
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-template']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-module']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-other']
-- The page type of the sandbox page. The message that is displayed depends on the current subject
-- namespace. This message is used in either cfg['sandbox-notice-blurb'] or
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-diff-blurb'].
--]]
cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-template'] = '[[Wikipedia:Template test cases|template sandbox]] page'
cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-module'] = '[[Wikipedia:Template test cases|module sandbox]] page'
cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-other'] = 'sandbox page'

--[[
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-blurb']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-diff-blurb']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-diff-display']
-- Either cfg['sandbox-notice-blurb'] or cfg['sandbox-notice-diff-blurb'] is the opening sentence
-- of the sandbox notice. The latter has a diff link, but the former does not. $1 is the page
-- type, which is either cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-template'],
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-module'] or cfg['sandbox-notice-pagetype-other'] depending what
-- namespace we are in. $2 is a link to the main template page, and $3 is a diff link between
-- the sandbox and the main template. The display value of the diff link is set by
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-compare-link-display'].
--]]
cfg['sandbox-notice-blurb'] = 'This is the $1 for $2.'
cfg['sandbox-notice-diff-blurb'] = 'This is the $1 for $2 ($3).'
cfg['sandbox-notice-compare-link-display'] = 'diff'

--[[
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-blurb']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-link-display']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-run-blurb']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-run-link-display']
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-blurb'] is a sentence notifying the user that there is a test cases page
-- corresponding to this sandbox that they can edit. $1 is a link to the test cases page.
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-link-display'] is the display value for that link.
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-run-blurb'] is a sentence notifying the user that there is a test cases page
-- corresponding to this sandbox that they can edit, along with a link to run it. $1 is a link to the test
-- cases page, and $2 is a link to the page to run it.
-- cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-run-link-display'] is the display value for the link to run the test
-- cases.
--]]
cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-blurb'] = 'See also the companion subpage for $1.'
cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-link-display'] = 'test cases'
cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-run-blurb'] = 'See also the companion subpage for $1 ($2).'
cfg['sandbox-notice-testcases-run-link-display'] = 'run'

-- cfg['sandbox-category']
-- A category to add to all template sandboxes.
cfg['sandbox-category'] = 'Template sandboxes'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Start box configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['documentation-icon-wikitext']
-- The wikitext for the icon shown at the top of the template.
cfg['documentation-icon-wikitext'] = '[[File:Test Template Info-Icon - Version (2).svg|50px|link=|alt=]]'

-- cfg['template-namespace-heading']
-- The heading shown in the template namespace.
cfg['template-namespace-heading'] = 'Template documentation'

-- cfg['module-namespace-heading']
-- The heading shown in the module namespace.
cfg['module-namespace-heading'] = 'Module documentation'

-- cfg['file-namespace-heading']
-- The heading shown in the file namespace.
cfg['file-namespace-heading'] = 'Summary'

-- cfg['other-namespaces-heading']
-- The heading shown in other namespaces.
cfg['other-namespaces-heading'] = 'Documentation'

-- cfg['view-link-display']
-- The text to display for "view" links.
cfg['view-link-display'] = 'view'

-- cfg['edit-link-display']
-- The text to display for "edit" links.
cfg['edit-link-display'] = 'edit'

-- cfg['history-link-display']
-- The text to display for "history" links.
cfg['history-link-display'] = 'history'

-- cfg['purge-link-display']
-- The text to display for "purge" links.
cfg['purge-link-display'] = 'purge'

-- cfg['create-link-display']
-- The text to display for "create" links.
cfg['create-link-display'] = 'create'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Link box (end box) configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['transcluded-from-blurb']
-- Notice displayed when the docs are transcluded from another page. $1 is a wikilink to that page.
cfg['transcluded-from-blurb'] = 'The above [[Wikipedia:Template documentation|documentation]] is [[Help:Transclusion|transcluded]] from $1.'

--[[
-- cfg['create-module-doc-blurb']
-- Notice displayed in the module namespace when the documentation subpage does not exist.
-- $1 is a link to create the documentation page with the preload cfg['module-preload'] and the
-- display cfg['create-link-display'].
--]]
cfg['create-module-doc-blurb'] = 'You might want to $1 a documentation page for this [[Wikipedia:Lua|Scribunto module]].'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Experiment blurb configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--[[
-- cfg['experiment-blurb-template']
-- cfg['experiment-blurb-module']
-- The experiment blurb is the text inviting editors to experiment in sandbox and test cases pages.
-- It is only shown in the template and module namespaces. With the default English settings, it
-- might look like this:
--
-- Editors can experiment in this template's sandbox (edit | diff) and testcases (edit) pages.
--
-- In this example, "sandbox", "edit", "diff", "testcases", and "edit" would all be links.
--
-- There are two versions, cfg['experiment-blurb-template'] and cfg['experiment-blurb-module'], depending
-- on what namespace we are in.
--
-- Parameters:
--
-- $1 is a link to the sandbox page. If the sandbox exists, it is in the following format:
--
-- cfg['sandbox-link-display'] (cfg['sandbox-edit-link-display'] | cfg['compare-link-display'])
--
-- If the sandbox doesn't exist, it is in the format:
--
-- cfg['sandbox-link-display'] (cfg['sandbox-create-link-display'] | cfg['mirror-link-display'])
--
-- The link for cfg['sandbox-create-link-display'] link preloads the page with cfg['template-sandbox-preload']
-- or cfg['module-sandbox-preload'], depending on the current namespace. The link for cfg['mirror-link-display']
-- loads a default edit summary of cfg['mirror-edit-summary'].
--
-- $2 is a link to the test cases page. If the test cases page exists, it is in the following format:
--
-- cfg['testcases-link-display'] (cfg['testcases-edit-link-display'] | cfg['testcases-run-link-display'])
--
-- If the test cases page doesn't exist, it is in the format:
--
-- cfg['testcases-link-display'] (cfg['testcases-create-link-display'])
--
-- If the test cases page doesn't exist, the link for cfg['testcases-create-link-display'] preloads the
-- page with cfg['template-testcases-preload'] or cfg['module-testcases-preload'], depending on the current
-- namespace.
--]]
cfg['experiment-blurb-template'] = "Editors can experiment in this template's $1 and $2 pages."
cfg['experiment-blurb-module'] = "Editors can experiment in this module's $1 and $2 pages."

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Sandbox link configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['sandbox-subpage']
-- The name of the template subpage typically used for sandboxes.
cfg['sandbox-subpage'] = 'sandbox'

-- cfg['template-sandbox-preload']
-- Preload file for template sandbox pages.
cfg['template-sandbox-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/preload-sandbox'

-- cfg['module-sandbox-preload']
-- Preload file for Lua module sandbox pages.
cfg['module-sandbox-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-sandbox'

-- cfg['sandbox-link-display']
-- The text to display for "sandbox" links.
cfg['sandbox-link-display'] = 'sandbox'

-- cfg['sandbox-edit-link-display']
-- The text to display for sandbox "edit" links.
cfg['sandbox-edit-link-display'] = 'edit'

-- cfg['sandbox-create-link-display']
-- The text to display for sandbox "create" links.
cfg['sandbox-create-link-display'] = 'create'

-- cfg['compare-link-display']
-- The text to display for "compare" links.
cfg['compare-link-display'] = 'diff'

-- cfg['mirror-edit-summary']
-- The default edit summary to use when a user clicks the "mirror" link. $1 is a wikilink to the
-- template page.
cfg['mirror-edit-summary'] = 'Create sandbox version of $1'

-- cfg['mirror-link-display']
-- The text to display for "mirror" links.
cfg['mirror-link-display'] = 'mirror'

-- cfg['mirror-link-preload']
-- The page to preload when a user clicks the "mirror" link.
cfg['mirror-link-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/mirror'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Test cases link configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['testcases-subpage']
-- The name of the template subpage typically used for test cases.
cfg['testcases-subpage'] = 'testcases'

-- cfg['template-testcases-preload']
-- Preload file for template test cases pages.
cfg['template-testcases-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/preload-testcases'

-- cfg['module-testcases-preload']
-- Preload file for Lua module test cases pages.
cfg['module-testcases-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-testcases'

-- cfg['testcases-link-display']
-- The text to display for "testcases" links.
cfg['testcases-link-display'] = 'testcases'

-- cfg['testcases-edit-link-display']
-- The text to display for test cases "edit" links.
cfg['testcases-edit-link-display'] = 'edit'

-- cfg['testcases-run-link-display']
-- The text to display for test cases "run" links.
cfg['testcases-run-link-display'] = 'run'

-- cfg['testcases-create-link-display']
-- The text to display for test cases "create" links.
cfg['testcases-create-link-display'] = 'create'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Add categories blurb configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--[[
-- cfg['add-categories-blurb']
-- Text to direct users to add categories to the /doc subpage. Not used if the "content" or
-- "docname fed" arguments are set, as then it is not clear where to add the categories. $1 is a
-- link to the /doc subpage with a display value of cfg['doc-link-display'].
--]]
cfg['add-categories-blurb'] = 'Add categories to the $1 subpage.'

-- cfg['doc-link-display']
-- The text to display when linking to the /doc subpage.
cfg['doc-link-display'] = '/doc'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Subpages link configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--[[
-- cfg['subpages-blurb']
-- The "Subpages of this template" blurb. $1 is a link to the main template's subpages with a
-- display value of cfg['subpages-link-display']. In the English version this blurb is simply
-- the link followed by a period, and the link display provides the actual text.
--]]
cfg['subpages-blurb'] = '$1.'

--[[
-- cfg['subpages-link-display']
-- The text to display for the "subpages of this page" link. $1 is cfg['template-pagetype'],
-- cfg['module-pagetype'] or cfg['default-pagetype'], depending on whether the current page is in
-- the template namespace, the module namespace, or another namespace.
--]]
cfg['subpages-link-display'] = 'Subpages of this $1'

-- cfg['template-pagetype']
-- The pagetype to display for template pages.
cfg['template-pagetype'] = 'template'

-- cfg['module-pagetype']
-- The pagetype to display for Lua module pages.
cfg['module-pagetype'] = 'module'

-- cfg['default-pagetype']
-- The pagetype to display for pages other than templates or Lua modules.
cfg['default-pagetype'] = 'page'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Doc link configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['doc-subpage']
-- The name of the subpage typically used for documentation pages.
cfg['doc-subpage'] = 'doc'

-- cfg['docpage-preload']
-- Preload file for template documentation pages in all namespaces.
cfg['docpage-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/preload'

-- cfg['module-preload']
-- Preload file for Lua module documentation pages.
cfg['module-preload'] = 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-doc'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- HTML and CSS configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['templatestyles']
-- The name of the TemplateStyles page where CSS is kept.
-- Sandbox CSS will be at Module:Documentation/sandbox/styles.css when needed.
cfg['templatestyles'] = 'Module:Documentation/styles.css'

-- cfg['container']
-- Class which can be used to set flex or grid CSS on the
-- two child divs documentation and documentation-metadata
cfg['container'] = 'documentation-container'

-- cfg['main-div-classes']
-- Classes added to the main HTML "div" tag.
cfg['main-div-classes'] = 'documentation'

-- cfg['main-div-heading-class']
-- Class for the main heading for templates and modules and assoc. talk spaces
cfg['main-div-heading-class'] = 'documentation-heading'

-- cfg['start-box-class']
-- Class for the start box
cfg['start-box-class'] = 'documentation-startbox'

-- cfg['start-box-link-classes']
-- Classes used for the [view][edit][history] or [create] links in the start box.
-- mw-editsection-like is per [[Wikipedia:Village pump (technical)/Archive 117]]
cfg['start-box-link-classes'] = 'mw-editsection-like plainlinks'

-- cfg['end-box-class']
-- Class for the end box.
cfg['end-box-class'] = 'documentation-metadata'

-- cfg['end-box-plainlinks']
-- Plainlinks
cfg['end-box-plainlinks'] = 'plainlinks'

-- cfg['toolbar-class']
-- Class added for toolbar links.
cfg['toolbar-class'] = 'documentation-toolbar'

-- cfg['clear']
-- Just used to clear things.
cfg['clear'] = 'documentation-clear'

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Tracking category configuration
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- cfg['display-strange-usage-category']
-- Set to true to enable output of cfg['strange-usage-category'] if the module is used on a /doc subpage
-- or a /testcases subpage. This should be a boolean value (either true or false).
cfg['display-strange-usage-category'] = true

-- cfg['strange-usage-category']
-- Category to output if cfg['display-strange-usage-category'] is set to true and the module is used on a
-- /doc subpage or a /testcases subpage.
cfg['strange-usage-category'] = 'Wikipedia pages with strange ((documentation)) usage'

--[[
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- End configuration
--
-- Don't edit anything below this line.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--]]

return cfg

Module:Documentation

2022-03-30T18:41:01Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module implements {{documentation}}. -- Get required modules. local getArgs = require('Module:Arguments').getArgs -- Get the config table. local cfg = mw.loadData('M..."

-- This module implements {{documentation}}.

-- Get required modules.
local getArgs = require('Module:Arguments').getArgs

-- Get the config table.
local cfg = mw.loadData('Module:Documentation/config')

local p = {}

-- Often-used functions.
local ugsub = mw.ustring.gsub

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Helper functions
--
-- These are defined as local functions, but are made available in the p
-- table for testing purposes.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

local function message(cfgKey, valArray, expectType)
--[[
-- Gets a message from the cfg table and formats it if appropriate.
-- The function raises an error if the value from the cfg table is not
-- of the type expectType. The default type for expectType is 'string'.
-- If the table valArray is present, strings such as $1, $2 etc. in the
-- message are substituted with values from the table keys [1], [2] etc.
-- For example, if the message "foo-message" had the value 'Foo $2 bar $1.',
-- message('foo-message', {'baz', 'qux'}) would return "Foo qux bar baz."
--]]
local msg = cfg[cfgKey]
expectType = expectType or 'string'
if type(msg) ~= expectType then
error('message: type error in message cfg.' .. cfgKey .. ' (' .. expectType .. ' expected, got ' .. type(msg) .. ')', 2)
end
if not valArray then
return msg
end

local function getMessageVal(match)
match = tonumber(match)
return valArray[match] or error('message: no value found for key $' .. match .. ' in message cfg.' .. cfgKey, 4)
end

return ugsub(msg, '$([1-9][0-9]*)', getMessageVal)
end

p.message = message

local function makeWikilink(page, display)
if display then
return mw.ustring.format('[[%s|%s]]', page, display)
else
return mw.ustring.format('[[%s]]', page)
end
end

p.makeWikilink = makeWikilink

local function makeCategoryLink(cat, sort)
local catns = mw.site.namespaces[14].name
return makeWikilink(catns .. ':' .. cat, sort)
end

p.makeCategoryLink = makeCategoryLink

local function makeUrlLink(url, display)
return mw.ustring.format('[%s %s]', url, display)
end

p.makeUrlLink = makeUrlLink

local function makeToolbar(...)
local ret = {}
local lim = select('#', ...)
if lim < 1 then
return nil
end
for i = 1, lim do
ret[#ret + 1] = select(i, ...)
end
-- 'documentation-toolbar'
return '('
.. table.concat(ret, ' | ') .. ')'
end

p.makeToolbar = makeToolbar

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Argument processing
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

local function makeInvokeFunc(funcName)
return function (frame)
local args = getArgs(frame, {
valueFunc = function (key, value)
if type(value) == 'string' then
value = value:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$') -- Remove whitespace.
if key == 'heading' or value ~= '' then
return value
else
return nil
end
else
return value
end
end
})
return p[funcName](args)
end
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Entry points
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

function p.nonexistent(frame)
if mw.title.getCurrentTitle().subpageText == 'testcases' then
return frame:expandTemplate{title = 'module test cases notice'}
else
return p.main(frame)
end
end

p.main = makeInvokeFunc('_main')

function p._main(args)
--[[
-- This function defines logic flow for the module.
-- @args - table of arguments passed by the user
--]]
local env = p.getEnvironment(args)
local root = mw.html.create()
root
:wikitext(p._getModuleWikitext(args, env))
:wikitext(p.protectionTemplate(env))
:wikitext(p.sandboxNotice(args, env))
:tag('div')
-- 'documentation-container'
:addClass(message('container'))
:attr('role', 'complementary')
:attr('aria-labelledby', args.heading ~= '' and 'documentation-heading' or nil)
:attr('aria-label', args.heading == '' and 'Documentation' or nil)
:newline()
:tag('div')
-- 'documentation'
:addClass(message('main-div-classes'))
:newline()
:wikitext(p._startBox(args, env))
:wikitext(p._content(args, env))
:tag('div')
-- 'documentation-clear'
:addClass(message('clear'))
:done()
:newline()
:done()
:wikitext(p._endBox(args, env))
:done()
:wikitext(p.addTrackingCategories(env))
-- 'Module:Documentation/styles.css'
return mw.getCurrentFrame():extensionTag (
'templatestyles', '', {src=cfg['templatestyles']
}) .. tostring(root)
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Environment settings
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

function p.getEnvironment(args)
--[[
-- Returns a table with information about the environment, including title
-- objects and other namespace- or path-related data.
-- @args - table of arguments passed by the user
--
-- Title objects include:
-- env.title - the page we are making documentation for (usually the current title)
-- env.templateTitle - the template (or module, file, etc.)
-- env.docTitle - the /doc subpage.
-- env.sandboxTitle - the /sandbox subpage.
-- env.testcasesTitle - the /testcases subpage.
--
-- Data includes:
-- env.protectionLevels - the protection levels table of the title object.
-- env.subjectSpace - the number of the title's subject namespace.
-- env.docSpace - the number of the namespace the title puts its documentation in.
-- env.docpageBase - the text of the base page of the /doc, /sandbox and /testcases pages, with namespace.
-- env.compareUrl - URL of the Special:ComparePages page comparing the sandbox with the template.
--
-- All table lookups are passed through pcall so that errors are caught. If an error occurs, the value
-- returned will be nil.
--]]

local env, envFuncs = {}, {}

-- Set up the metatable. If triggered we call the corresponding function in the envFuncs table. The value
-- returned by that function is memoized in the env table so that we don't call any of the functions
-- more than once. (Nils won't be memoized.)
setmetatable(env, {
__index = function (t, key)
local envFunc = envFuncs[key]
if envFunc then
local success, val = pcall(envFunc)
if success then
env[key] = val -- Memoise the value.
return val
end
end
return nil
end
})

function envFuncs.title()
-- The title object for the current page, or a test page passed with args.page.
local title
local titleArg = args.page
if titleArg then
title = mw.title.new(titleArg)
else
title = mw.title.getCurrentTitle()
end
return title
end

function envFuncs.templateTitle()
--[[
-- The template (or module, etc.) title object.
-- Messages:
-- 'sandbox-subpage' --> 'sandbox'
-- 'testcases-subpage' --> 'testcases'
--]]
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
local title = env.title
local subpage = title.subpageText
if subpage == message('sandbox-subpage') or subpage == message('testcases-subpage') then
return mw.title.makeTitle(subjectSpace, title.baseText)
else
return mw.title.makeTitle(subjectSpace, title.text)
end
end

function envFuncs.docTitle()
--[[
-- Title object of the /doc subpage.
-- Messages:
-- 'doc-subpage' --> 'doc'
--]]
local title = env.title
local docname = args[1] -- User-specified doc page.
local docpage
if docname then
docpage = docname
else
docpage = env.docpageBase .. '/' .. message('doc-subpage')
end
return mw.title.new(docpage)
end

function envFuncs.sandboxTitle()
--[[
-- Title object for the /sandbox subpage.
-- Messages:
-- 'sandbox-subpage' --> 'sandbox'
--]]
return mw.title.new(env.docpageBase .. '/' .. message('sandbox-subpage'))
end

function envFuncs.testcasesTitle()
--[[
-- Title object for the /testcases subpage.
-- Messages:
-- 'testcases-subpage' --> 'testcases'
--]]
return mw.title.new(env.docpageBase .. '/' .. message('testcases-subpage'))
end

function envFuncs.protectionLevels()
-- The protection levels table of the title object.
return env.title.protectionLevels
end

function envFuncs.subjectSpace()
-- The subject namespace number.
return mw.site.namespaces[env.title.namespace].subject.id
end

function envFuncs.docSpace()
-- The documentation namespace number. For most namespaces this is the
-- same as the subject namespace. However, pages in the Article, File,
-- MediaWiki or Category namespaces must have their /doc, /sandbox and
-- /testcases pages in talk space.
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
if subjectSpace == 0 or subjectSpace == 6 or subjectSpace == 8 or subjectSpace == 14 then
return subjectSpace + 1
else
return subjectSpace
end
end

function envFuncs.docpageBase()
-- The base page of the /doc, /sandbox, and /testcases subpages.
-- For some namespaces this is the talk page, rather than the template page.
local templateTitle = env.templateTitle
local docSpace = env.docSpace
local docSpaceText = mw.site.namespaces[docSpace].name
-- Assemble the link. docSpace is never the main namespace, so we can hardcode the colon.
return docSpaceText .. ':' .. templateTitle.text
end

function envFuncs.compareUrl()
-- Diff link between the sandbox and the main template using [[Special:ComparePages]].
local templateTitle = env.templateTitle
local sandboxTitle = env.sandboxTitle
if templateTitle.exists and sandboxTitle.exists then
local compareUrl = mw.uri.fullUrl(
'Special:ComparePages',
{ page1 = templateTitle.prefixedText, page2 = sandboxTitle.prefixedText}
)
return tostring(compareUrl)
else
return nil
end
end

return env
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Auxiliary templates
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

p.getModuleWikitext = makeInvokeFunc('_getModuleWikitext')

function p._getModuleWikitext(args, env)
local currentTitle = mw.title.getCurrentTitle()
if currentTitle.contentModel ~= 'Scribunto' then return end
pcall(require, currentTitle.prefixedText) -- if it fails, we don't care
local moduleWikitext = package.loaded["Module:Module wikitext"]
if moduleWikitext then
return moduleWikitext.main()
end
end

function p.sandboxNotice(args, env)
--[=[
-- Generates a sandbox notice for display above sandbox pages.
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
--
-- Messages:
-- 'sandbox-notice-image' --> '[[Image:Sandbox.svg|50px|alt=|link=]]'
-- 'sandbox-notice-blurb' --> 'This is the $1 for $2.'
-- 'sandbox-notice-diff-blurb' --> 'This is the $1 for $2 ($3).'
-- 'sandbox-notice-pagetype-template' --> '[[Wikipedia:Template test cases|template sandbox]] page'
-- 'sandbox-notice-pagetype-module' --> '[[Wikipedia:Template test cases|module sandbox]] page'
-- 'sandbox-notice-pagetype-other' --> 'sandbox page'
-- 'sandbox-notice-compare-link-display' --> 'diff'
-- 'sandbox-notice-testcases-blurb' --> 'See also the companion subpage for $1.'
-- 'sandbox-notice-testcases-link-display' --> 'test cases'
-- 'sandbox-category' --> 'Template sandboxes'
--]=]
local title = env.title
local sandboxTitle = env.sandboxTitle
local templateTitle = env.templateTitle
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
if not (subjectSpace and title and sandboxTitle and templateTitle
and mw.title.equals(title, sandboxTitle)) then
return nil
end
-- Build the table of arguments to pass to {{ombox}}. We need just two fields, "image" and "text".
local omargs = {}
omargs.image = message('sandbox-notice-image')
-- Get the text. We start with the opening blurb, which is something like
-- "This is the template sandbox for [[Template:Foo]] (diff)."
local text = ''
local pagetype
if subjectSpace == 10 then
pagetype = message('sandbox-notice-pagetype-template')
elseif subjectSpace == 828 then
pagetype = message('sandbox-notice-pagetype-module')
else
pagetype = message('sandbox-notice-pagetype-other')
end
local templateLink = makeWikilink(templateTitle.prefixedText)
local compareUrl = env.compareUrl
if compareUrl then
local compareDisplay = message('sandbox-notice-compare-link-display')
local compareLink = makeUrlLink(compareUrl, compareDisplay)
text = text .. message('sandbox-notice-diff-blurb', {pagetype, templateLink, compareLink})
else
text = text .. message('sandbox-notice-blurb', {pagetype, templateLink})
end
-- Get the test cases page blurb if the page exists. This is something like
-- "See also the companion subpage for [[Template:Foo/testcases|test cases]]."
local testcasesTitle = env.testcasesTitle
if testcasesTitle and testcasesTitle.exists then
if testcasesTitle.contentModel == "Scribunto" then
local testcasesLinkDisplay = message('sandbox-notice-testcases-link-display')
local testcasesRunLinkDisplay = message('sandbox-notice-testcases-run-link-display')
local testcasesLink = makeWikilink(testcasesTitle.prefixedText, testcasesLinkDisplay)
local testcasesRunLink = makeWikilink(testcasesTitle.talkPageTitle.prefixedText, testcasesRunLinkDisplay)
text = text .. ' ' .. message('sandbox-notice-testcases-run-blurb', {testcasesLink, testcasesRunLink})
else
local testcasesLinkDisplay = message('sandbox-notice-testcases-link-display')
local testcasesLink = makeWikilink(testcasesTitle.prefixedText, testcasesLinkDisplay)
text = text .. ' ' .. message('sandbox-notice-testcases-blurb', {testcasesLink})
end
end
-- Add the sandbox to the sandbox category.
omargs.text = text .. makeCategoryLink(message('sandbox-category'))

-- 'documentation-clear'
return '<div class="' .. message('clear') .. '"></div>'
.. require('Module:Message box').main('ombox', omargs)
end

function p.protectionTemplate(env)
-- Generates the padlock icon in the top right.
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
-- Messages:
-- 'protection-template' --> 'pp-template'
-- 'protection-template-args' --> {docusage = 'yes'}
local protectionLevels = env.protectionLevels
if not protectionLevels then
return nil
end
local editProt = protectionLevels.edit and protectionLevels.edit[1]
local moveProt = protectionLevels.move and protectionLevels.move[1]
if editProt then
-- The page is edit-protected.
return require('Module:Protection banner')._main{
message('protection-reason-edit'), small = true
}
elseif moveProt and moveProt ~= 'autoconfirmed' then
-- The page is move-protected but not edit-protected. Exclude move
-- protection with the level "autoconfirmed", as this is equivalent to
-- no move protection at all.
return require('Module:Protection banner')._main{
action = 'move', small = true
}
else
return nil
end
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Start box
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

p.startBox = makeInvokeFunc('_startBox')

function p._startBox(args, env)
--[[
-- This function generates the start box.
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
--
-- The actual work is done by p.makeStartBoxLinksData and p.renderStartBoxLinks which make
-- the [view] [edit] [history] [purge] links, and by p.makeStartBoxData and p.renderStartBox
-- which generate the box HTML.
--]]
env = env or p.getEnvironment(args)
local links
local content = args.content
if not content or args[1] then
-- No need to include the links if the documentation is on the template page itself.
local linksData = p.makeStartBoxLinksData(args, env)
if linksData then
links = p.renderStartBoxLinks(linksData)
end
end
-- Generate the start box html.
local data = p.makeStartBoxData(args, env, links)
if data then
return p.renderStartBox(data)
else
-- User specified no heading.
return nil
end
end

function p.makeStartBoxLinksData(args, env)
--[[
-- Does initial processing of data to make the [view] [edit] [history] [purge] links.
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
--
-- Messages:
-- 'view-link-display' --> 'view'
-- 'edit-link-display' --> 'edit'
-- 'history-link-display' --> 'history'
-- 'purge-link-display' --> 'purge'
-- 'module-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-doc'
-- 'docpage-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload'
-- 'create-link-display' --> 'create'
--]]
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
local title = env.title
local docTitle = env.docTitle
if not title or not docTitle then
return nil
end
if docTitle.isRedirect then
docTitle = docTitle.redirectTarget
end

local data = {}
data.title = title
data.docTitle = docTitle
-- View, display, edit, and purge links if /doc exists.
data.viewLinkDisplay = message('view-link-display')
data.editLinkDisplay = message('edit-link-display')
data.historyLinkDisplay = message('history-link-display')
data.purgeLinkDisplay = message('purge-link-display')
-- Create link if /doc doesn't exist.
local preload = args.preload
if not preload then
if subjectSpace == 828 then -- Module namespace
preload = message('module-preload')
else
preload = message('docpage-preload')
end
end
data.preload = preload
data.createLinkDisplay = message('create-link-display')
return data
end

function p.renderStartBoxLinks(data)
--[[
-- Generates the [view][edit][history][purge] or [create][purge] links from the data table.
-- @data - a table of data generated by p.makeStartBoxLinksData
--]]

local function escapeBrackets(s)
-- Escapes square brackets with HTML entities.
s = s:gsub('%[', '[') -- Replace square brackets with HTML entities.
s = s:gsub('%]', ']')
return s
end

local ret
local docTitle = data.docTitle
local title = data.title
local purgeLink = makeUrlLink(title:fullUrl{action = 'purge'}, data.purgeLinkDisplay)
if docTitle.exists then
local viewLink = makeWikilink(docTitle.prefixedText, data.viewLinkDisplay)
local editLink = makeUrlLink(docTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit'}, data.editLinkDisplay)
local historyLink = makeUrlLink(docTitle:fullUrl{action = 'history'}, data.historyLinkDisplay)
ret = '[%s] [%s] [%s] [%s]'
ret = escapeBrackets(ret)
ret = mw.ustring.format(ret, viewLink, editLink, historyLink, purgeLink)
else
local createLink = makeUrlLink(docTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit', preload = data.preload}, data.createLinkDisplay)
ret = '[%s] [%s]'
ret = escapeBrackets(ret)
ret = mw.ustring.format(ret, createLink, purgeLink)
end
return ret
end

function p.makeStartBoxData(args, env, links)
--[=[
-- Does initial processing of data to pass to the start-box render function, p.renderStartBox.
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
-- @links - a string containing the [view][edit][history][purge] links - could be nil if there's an error.
--
-- Messages:
-- 'documentation-icon-wikitext' --> '[[File:Test Template Info-Icon - Version (2).svg|50px|link=|alt=]]'
-- 'template-namespace-heading' --> 'Template documentation'
-- 'module-namespace-heading' --> 'Module documentation'
-- 'file-namespace-heading' --> 'Summary'
-- 'other-namespaces-heading' --> 'Documentation'
-- 'testcases-create-link-display' --> 'create'
--]=]
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
if not subjectSpace then
-- Default to an "other namespaces" namespace, so that we get at least some output
-- if an error occurs.
subjectSpace = 2
end
local data = {}

-- Heading
local heading = args.heading -- Blank values are not removed.
if heading == '' then
-- Don't display the start box if the heading arg is defined but blank.
return nil
end
if heading then
data.heading = heading
elseif subjectSpace == 10 then -- Template namespace
data.heading = message('documentation-icon-wikitext') .. ' ' .. message('template-namespace-heading')
elseif subjectSpace == 828 then -- Module namespace
data.heading = message('documentation-icon-wikitext') .. ' ' .. message('module-namespace-heading')
elseif subjectSpace == 6 then -- File namespace
data.heading = message('file-namespace-heading')
else
data.heading = message('other-namespaces-heading')
end

-- Heading CSS
local headingStyle = args['heading-style']
if headingStyle then
data.headingStyleText = headingStyle
else
-- 'documentation-heading'
data.headingClass = message('main-div-heading-class')
end

-- Data for the [view][edit][history][purge] or [create] links.
if links then
-- 'mw-editsection-like plainlinks'
data.linksClass = message('start-box-link-classes')
data.links = links
end

return data
end

function p.renderStartBox(data)
-- Renders the start box html.
-- @data - a table of data generated by p.makeStartBoxData.
local sbox = mw.html.create('div')
sbox
-- 'documentation-startbox'
:addClass(message('start-box-class'))
:newline()
:tag('span')
:addClass(data.headingClass)
:attr('id', 'documentation-heading')
:cssText(data.headingStyleText)
:wikitext(data.heading)
local links = data.links
if links then
sbox:tag('span')
:addClass(data.linksClass)
:attr('id', data.linksId)
:wikitext(links)
end
return tostring(sbox)
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Documentation content
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

p.content = makeInvokeFunc('_content')

function p._content(args, env)
-- Displays the documentation contents
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
env = env or p.getEnvironment(args)
local docTitle = env.docTitle
local content = args.content
if not content and docTitle and docTitle.exists then
content = args._content or mw.getCurrentFrame():expandTemplate{title = docTitle.prefixedText}
end
-- The line breaks below are necessary so that "=== Headings ===" at the start and end
-- of docs are interpreted correctly.
return '\n' .. (content or '') .. '\n'
end

p.contentTitle = makeInvokeFunc('_contentTitle')

function p._contentTitle(args, env)
env = env or p.getEnvironment(args)
local docTitle = env.docTitle
if not args.content and docTitle and docTitle.exists then
return docTitle.prefixedText
else
return ''
end
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- End box
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

p.endBox = makeInvokeFunc('_endBox')

function p._endBox(args, env)
--[=[
-- This function generates the end box (also known as the link box).
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
--
--]=]

-- Get environment data.
env = env or p.getEnvironment(args)
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
local docTitle = env.docTitle
if not subjectSpace or not docTitle then
return nil
end

-- Check whether we should output the end box at all. Add the end
-- box by default if the documentation exists or if we are in the
-- user, module or template namespaces.
local linkBox = args['link box']
if linkBox == 'off'
or not (
docTitle.exists
or subjectSpace == 2
or subjectSpace == 828
or subjectSpace == 10
)
then
return nil
end

-- Assemble the link box.
local text = ''
if linkBox then
text = text .. linkBox
else
text = text .. (p.makeDocPageBlurb(args, env) or '') -- "This documentation is transcluded from [[Foo]]."
if subjectSpace == 2 or subjectSpace == 10 or subjectSpace == 828 then
-- We are in the user, template or module namespaces.
-- Add sandbox and testcases links.
-- "Editors can experiment in this template's sandbox and testcases pages."
text = text .. (p.makeExperimentBlurb(args, env) or '') .. ' '
if not args.content and not args[1] then
-- "Please add categories to the /doc subpage."
-- Don't show this message with inline docs or with an explicitly specified doc page,
-- as then it is unclear where to add the categories.
text = text .. (p.makeCategoriesBlurb(args, env) or '')
end
text = text .. ' ' .. (p.makeSubpagesBlurb(args, env) or '') --"Subpages of this template"
end
end

local box = mw.html.create('div')
-- 'documentation-metadata'
box:attr('role', 'note')
:addClass(message('end-box-class'))
-- 'plainlinks'
:addClass(message('end-box-plainlinks'))
:wikitext(text)
:done()

return '\n' .. tostring(box)
end

function p.makeDocPageBlurb(args, env)
--[=[
-- Makes the blurb "This documentation is transcluded from [[Template:Foo]] (edit, history)".
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
--
-- Messages:
-- 'edit-link-display' --> 'edit'
-- 'history-link-display' --> 'history'
-- 'transcluded-from-blurb' -->
-- 'The above [[Wikipedia:Template documentation|documentation]]
-- is [[Help:Transclusion|transcluded]] from $1.'
-- 'module-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-doc'
-- 'create-link-display' --> 'create'
-- 'create-module-doc-blurb' -->
-- 'You might want to $1 a documentation page for this [[Wikipedia:Lua|Scribunto module]].'
--]=]
local docTitle = env.docTitle
if not docTitle then
return nil
end
local ret
if docTitle.exists then
-- /doc exists; link to it.
local docLink = makeWikilink(docTitle.prefixedText)
local editUrl = docTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit'}
local editDisplay = message('edit-link-display')
local editLink = makeUrlLink(editUrl, editDisplay)
local historyUrl = docTitle:fullUrl{action = 'history'}
local historyDisplay = message('history-link-display')
local historyLink = makeUrlLink(historyUrl, historyDisplay)
ret = message('transcluded-from-blurb', {docLink})
.. ' '
.. makeToolbar(editLink, historyLink)
.. ' '
elseif env.subjectSpace == 828 then
-- /doc does not exist; ask to create it.
local createUrl = docTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit', preload = message('module-preload')}
local createDisplay = message('create-link-display')
local createLink = makeUrlLink(createUrl, createDisplay)
ret = message('create-module-doc-blurb', {createLink})
.. ' '
end
return ret
end

function p.makeExperimentBlurb(args, env)
--[[
-- Renders the text "Editors can experiment in this template's sandbox (edit | diff) and testcases (edit) pages."
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
--
-- Messages:
-- 'sandbox-link-display' --> 'sandbox'
-- 'sandbox-edit-link-display' --> 'edit'
-- 'compare-link-display' --> 'diff'
-- 'module-sandbox-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-sandbox'
-- 'template-sandbox-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-sandbox'
-- 'sandbox-create-link-display' --> 'create'
-- 'mirror-edit-summary' --> 'Create sandbox version of $1'
-- 'mirror-link-display' --> 'mirror'
-- 'mirror-link-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/mirror'
-- 'sandbox-link-display' --> 'sandbox'
-- 'testcases-link-display' --> 'testcases'
-- 'testcases-edit-link-display'--> 'edit'
-- 'template-sandbox-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-sandbox'
-- 'testcases-create-link-display' --> 'create'
-- 'testcases-link-display' --> 'testcases'
-- 'testcases-edit-link-display' --> 'edit'
-- 'module-testcases-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-module-testcases'
-- 'template-testcases-preload' --> 'Template:Documentation/preload-testcases'
-- 'experiment-blurb-module' --> 'Editors can experiment in this module's $1 and $2 pages.'
-- 'experiment-blurb-template' --> 'Editors can experiment in this template's $1 and $2 pages.'
--]]
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
local templateTitle = env.templateTitle
local sandboxTitle = env.sandboxTitle
local testcasesTitle = env.testcasesTitle
local templatePage = templateTitle.prefixedText
if not subjectSpace or not templateTitle or not sandboxTitle or not testcasesTitle then
return nil
end
-- Make links.
local sandboxLinks, testcasesLinks
if sandboxTitle.exists then
local sandboxPage = sandboxTitle.prefixedText
local sandboxDisplay = message('sandbox-link-display')
local sandboxLink = makeWikilink(sandboxPage, sandboxDisplay)
local sandboxEditUrl = sandboxTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit'}
local sandboxEditDisplay = message('sandbox-edit-link-display')
local sandboxEditLink = makeUrlLink(sandboxEditUrl, sandboxEditDisplay)
local compareUrl = env.compareUrl
local compareLink
if compareUrl then
local compareDisplay = message('compare-link-display')
compareLink = makeUrlLink(compareUrl, compareDisplay)
end
sandboxLinks = sandboxLink .. ' ' .. makeToolbar(sandboxEditLink, compareLink)
else
local sandboxPreload
if subjectSpace == 828 then
sandboxPreload = message('module-sandbox-preload')
else
sandboxPreload = message('template-sandbox-preload')
end
local sandboxCreateUrl = sandboxTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit', preload = sandboxPreload}
local sandboxCreateDisplay = message('sandbox-create-link-display')
local sandboxCreateLink = makeUrlLink(sandboxCreateUrl, sandboxCreateDisplay)
local mirrorSummary = message('mirror-edit-summary', {makeWikilink(templatePage)})
local mirrorPreload = message('mirror-link-preload')
local mirrorUrl = sandboxTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit', preload = mirrorPreload, summary = mirrorSummary}
if subjectSpace == 828 then
mirrorUrl = sandboxTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit', preload = templateTitle.prefixedText, summary = mirrorSummary}
end
local mirrorDisplay = message('mirror-link-display')
local mirrorLink = makeUrlLink(mirrorUrl, mirrorDisplay)
sandboxLinks = message('sandbox-link-display') .. ' ' .. makeToolbar(sandboxCreateLink, mirrorLink)
end
if testcasesTitle.exists then
local testcasesPage = testcasesTitle.prefixedText
local testcasesDisplay = message('testcases-link-display')
local testcasesLink = makeWikilink(testcasesPage, testcasesDisplay)
local testcasesEditUrl = testcasesTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit'}
local testcasesEditDisplay = message('testcases-edit-link-display')
local testcasesEditLink = makeUrlLink(testcasesEditUrl, testcasesEditDisplay)
-- for Modules, add testcases run link if exists
if testcasesTitle.contentModel == "Scribunto" and testcasesTitle.talkPageTitle and testcasesTitle.talkPageTitle.exists then
local testcasesRunLinkDisplay = message('testcases-run-link-display')
local testcasesRunLink = makeWikilink(testcasesTitle.talkPageTitle.prefixedText, testcasesRunLinkDisplay)
testcasesLinks = testcasesLink .. ' ' .. makeToolbar(testcasesEditLink, testcasesRunLink)
else
testcasesLinks = testcasesLink .. ' ' .. makeToolbar(testcasesEditLink)
end
else
local testcasesPreload
if subjectSpace == 828 then
testcasesPreload = message('module-testcases-preload')
else
testcasesPreload = message('template-testcases-preload')
end
local testcasesCreateUrl = testcasesTitle:fullUrl{action = 'edit', preload = testcasesPreload}
local testcasesCreateDisplay = message('testcases-create-link-display')
local testcasesCreateLink = makeUrlLink(testcasesCreateUrl, testcasesCreateDisplay)
testcasesLinks = message('testcases-link-display') .. ' ' .. makeToolbar(testcasesCreateLink)
end
local messageName
if subjectSpace == 828 then
messageName = 'experiment-blurb-module'
else
messageName = 'experiment-blurb-template'
end
return message(messageName, {sandboxLinks, testcasesLinks})
end

function p.makeCategoriesBlurb(args, env)
--[[
-- Generates the text "Please add categories to the /doc subpage."
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment
-- Messages:
-- 'doc-link-display' --> '/doc'
-- 'add-categories-blurb' --> 'Please add categories to the $1 subpage.'
--]]
local docTitle = env.docTitle
if not docTitle then
return nil
end
local docPathLink = makeWikilink(docTitle.prefixedText, message('doc-link-display'))
return message('add-categories-blurb', {docPathLink})
end

function p.makeSubpagesBlurb(args, env)
--[[
-- Generates the "Subpages of this template" link.
-- @args - a table of arguments passed by the user
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment

-- Messages:
-- 'template-pagetype' --> 'template'
-- 'module-pagetype' --> 'module'
-- 'default-pagetype' --> 'page'
-- 'subpages-link-display' --> 'Subpages of this $1'
--]]
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
local templateTitle = env.templateTitle
if not subjectSpace or not templateTitle then
return nil
end
local pagetype
if subjectSpace == 10 then
pagetype = message('template-pagetype')
elseif subjectSpace == 828 then
pagetype = message('module-pagetype')
else
pagetype = message('default-pagetype')
end
local subpagesLink = makeWikilink(
'Special:PrefixIndex/' .. templateTitle.prefixedText .. '/',
message('subpages-link-display', {pagetype})
)
return message('subpages-blurb', {subpagesLink})
end

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Tracking categories
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

function p.addTrackingCategories(env)
--[[
-- Check if {{documentation}} is transcluded on a /doc or /testcases page.
-- @env - environment table containing title objects, etc., generated with p.getEnvironment

-- Messages:
-- 'display-strange-usage-category' --> true
-- 'doc-subpage' --> 'doc'
-- 'testcases-subpage' --> 'testcases'
-- 'strange-usage-category' --> 'Wikipedia pages with strange ((documentation)) usage'
--
-- /testcases pages in the module namespace are not categorised, as they may have
-- {{documentation}} transcluded automatically.
--]]
local title = env.title
local subjectSpace = env.subjectSpace
if not title or not subjectSpace then
return nil
end
local subpage = title.subpageText
local ret = ''
if message('display-strange-usage-category', nil, 'boolean')
and (
subpage == message('doc-subpage')
or subjectSpace ~= 828 and subpage == message('testcases-subpage')
)
then
ret = ret .. makeCategoryLink(message('strange-usage-category'))
end
return ret
end

return p

Module:Category handler

2022-03-30T18:40:39Z

Zoran: Created page with "-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -- -- --..."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- --
-- CATEGORY HANDLER --
-- --
-- This module implements the {{category handler}} template in Lua, --
-- with a few improvements: all namespaces and all namespace aliases --
-- are supported, and namespace names are detected automatically for --
-- the local wiki. This module requires [[Module:Namespace detect]] --
-- and [[Module:Yesno]] to be available on the local wiki. It can be --
-- configured for different wikis by altering the values in --
-- [[Module:Category handler/config]], and pages can be blacklisted --
-- from categorisation by using [[Module:Category handler/blacklist]]. --
-- --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- Load required modules
local yesno = require('Module:Yesno')

-- Lazily load things we don't always need
local mShared, mappings

local p = {}

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Helper functions
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local function trimWhitespace(s, removeBlanks)
if type(s) ~= 'string' then
return s
end
s = s:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$')
if removeBlanks then
if s ~= '' then
return s
else
return nil
end
else
return s
end
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- CategoryHandler class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local CategoryHandler = {}
CategoryHandler.__index = CategoryHandler

function CategoryHandler.new(data, args)
local obj = setmetatable({ _data = data, _args = args }, CategoryHandler)

-- Set the title object
do
local pagename = obj:parameter('demopage')
local success, titleObj
if pagename then
success, titleObj = pcall(mw.title.new, pagename)
end
if success and titleObj then
obj.title = titleObj
if titleObj == mw.title.getCurrentTitle() then
obj._usesCurrentTitle = true
end
else
obj.title = mw.title.getCurrentTitle()
obj._usesCurrentTitle = true
end
end

-- Set suppression parameter values
for _, key in ipairs{'nocat', 'categories'} do
local value = obj:parameter(key)
value = trimWhitespace(value, true)
obj['_' .. key] = yesno(value)
end
do
local subpage = obj:parameter('subpage')
local category2 = obj:parameter('category2')
if type(subpage) == 'string' then
subpage = mw.ustring.lower(subpage)
end
if type(category2) == 'string' then
subpage = mw.ustring.lower(category2)
end
obj._subpage = trimWhitespace(subpage, true)
obj._category2 = trimWhitespace(category2) -- don't remove blank values
end
return obj
end

function CategoryHandler:parameter(key)
local parameterNames = self._data.parameters[key]
local pntype = type(parameterNames)
if pntype == 'string' or pntype == 'number' then
return self._args[parameterNames]
elseif pntype == 'table' then
for _, name in ipairs(parameterNames) do
local value = self._args[name]
if value ~= nil then
return value
end
end
return nil
else
error(string.format(
'invalid config key "%s"',
tostring(key)
), 2)
end
end

function CategoryHandler:isSuppressedByArguments()
return
-- See if a category suppression argument has been set.
self._nocat == true
or self._categories == false
or (
self._category2
and self._category2 ~= self._data.category2Yes
and self._category2 ~= self._data.category2Negative
)

-- Check whether we are on a subpage, and see if categories are
-- suppressed based on our subpage status.
or self._subpage == self._data.subpageNo and self.title.isSubpage
or self._subpage == self._data.subpageOnly and not self.title.isSubpage
end

function CategoryHandler:shouldSkipBlacklistCheck()
-- Check whether the category suppression arguments indicate we
-- should skip the blacklist check.
return self._nocat == false
or self._categories == true
or self._category2 == self._data.category2Yes
end

function CategoryHandler:matchesBlacklist()
if self._usesCurrentTitle then
return self._data.currentTitleMatchesBlacklist
else
mShared = mShared or require('Module:Category handler/shared')
return mShared.matchesBlacklist(
self.title.prefixedText,
mw.loadData('Module:Category handler/blacklist')
)
end
end

function CategoryHandler:isSuppressed()
-- Find if categories are suppressed by either the arguments or by
-- matching the blacklist.
return self:isSuppressedByArguments()
or not self:shouldSkipBlacklistCheck() and self:matchesBlacklist()
end

function CategoryHandler:getNamespaceParameters()
if self._usesCurrentTitle then
return self._data.currentTitleNamespaceParameters
else
if not mappings then
mShared = mShared or require('Module:Category handler/shared')
mappings = mShared.getParamMappings(true) -- gets mappings with mw.loadData
end
return mShared.getNamespaceParameters(
self.title,
mappings
)
end
end

function CategoryHandler:namespaceParametersExist()
-- Find whether any namespace parameters have been specified.
-- We use the order "all" --> namespace params --> "other" as this is what
-- the old template did.
if self:parameter('all') then
return true
end
if not mappings then
mShared = mShared or require('Module:Category handler/shared')
mappings = mShared.getParamMappings(true) -- gets mappings with mw.loadData
end
for ns, params in pairs(mappings) do
for i, param in ipairs(params) do
if self._args[param] then
return true
end
end
end
if self:parameter('other') then
return true
end
return false
end

function CategoryHandler:getCategories()
local params = self:getNamespaceParameters()
local nsCategory
for i, param in ipairs(params) do
local value = self._args[param]
if value ~= nil then
nsCategory = value
break
end
end
if nsCategory ~= nil or self:namespaceParametersExist() then
-- Namespace parameters exist - advanced usage.
if nsCategory == nil then
nsCategory = self:parameter('other')
end
local ret = {self:parameter('all')}
local numParam = tonumber(nsCategory)
if numParam and numParam >= 1 and math.floor(numParam) == numParam then
-- nsCategory is an integer
ret[#ret + 1] = self._args[numParam]
else
ret[#ret + 1] = nsCategory
end
if #ret < 1 then
return nil
else
return table.concat(ret)
end
elseif self._data.defaultNamespaces[self.title.namespace] then
-- Namespace parameters don't exist, simple usage.
return self._args[1]
end
return nil
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Exports
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local p = {}

function p._exportClasses()
-- Used for testing purposes.
return {
CategoryHandler = CategoryHandler
}
end

function p._main(args, data)
data = data or mw.loadData('Module:Category handler/data')
local handler = CategoryHandler.new(data, args)
if handler:isSuppressed() then
return nil
end
return handler:getCategories()
end

function p.main(frame, data)
data = data or mw.loadData('Module:Category handler/data')
local args = require('Module:Arguments').getArgs(frame, {
wrappers = data.wrappers,
valueFunc = function (k, v)
v = trimWhitespace(v)
if type(k) == 'number' then
if v ~= '' then
return v
else
return nil
end
else
return v
end
end
})
return p._main(args, data)
end

return p

Module:Message box/configuration

2022-03-30T18:39:01Z

Zoran: Created page with "-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -- Message box configuration -- --..."

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Message box configuration --
-- --
-- This module contains configuration data for [[Module:Message box]]. --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

return {
ambox = {
types = {
speedy = {
class = 'ambox-speedy',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
delete = {
class = 'ambox-delete',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
content = {
class = 'ambox-content',
image = 'Ambox important.svg'
},
style = {
class = 'ambox-style',
image = 'Edit-clear.svg'
},
move = {
class = 'ambox-move',
image = 'Merge-split-transwiki default.svg'
},
protection = {
class = 'ambox-protection',
image = 'Semi-protection-shackle-keyhole.svg'
},
notice = {
class = 'ambox-notice',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
}
},
default = 'notice',
allowBlankParams = {'talk', 'sect', 'date', 'issue', 'fix', 'subst', 'hidden'},
allowSmall = true,
smallParam = 'left',
smallClass = 'mbox-small-left',
substCheck = true,
classes = {'metadata', 'ambox'},
imageEmptyCell = true,
imageCheckBlank = true,
imageSmallSize = '20x20px',
imageCellDiv = true,
useCollapsibleTextFields = true,
imageRightNone = true,
sectionDefault = 'article',
allowMainspaceCategories = true,
templateCategory = 'Article message templates',
templateCategoryRequireName = true,
templateErrorCategory = 'Article message templates with missing parameters',
templateErrorParamsToCheck = {'issue', 'fix', 'subst'},
removalNotice = '[[Help:Maintenance template removal|Learn how and when to remove this template message]]'
},

cmbox = {
types = {
speedy = {
class = 'cmbox-speedy',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
delete = {
class = 'cmbox-delete',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
content = {
class = 'cmbox-content',
image = 'Ambox important.svg'
},
style = {
class = 'cmbox-style',
image = 'Edit-clear.svg'
},
move = {
class = 'cmbox-move',
image = 'Merge-split-transwiki default.svg'
},
protection = {
class = 'cmbox-protection',
image = 'Semi-protection-shackle-keyhole.svg'
},
notice = {
class = 'cmbox-notice',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
}
},
default = 'notice',
showInvalidTypeError = true,
classes = {'cmbox'},
imageEmptyCell = true
},

fmbox = {
types = {
warning = {
class = 'fmbox-warning',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
editnotice = {
class = 'fmbox-editnotice',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
},
system = {
class = 'fmbox-system',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
}
},
default = 'system',
showInvalidTypeError = true,
classes = {'fmbox'},
imageEmptyCell = false,
imageRightNone = false
},

imbox = {
types = {
speedy = {
class = 'imbox-speedy',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
delete = {
class = 'imbox-delete',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
content = {
class = 'imbox-content',
image = 'Ambox important.svg'
},
style = {
class = 'imbox-style',
image = 'Edit-clear.svg'
},
move = {
class = 'imbox-move',
image = 'Merge-split-transwiki default.svg'
},
protection = {
class = 'imbox-protection',
image = 'Semi-protection-shackle-keyhole.svg'
},
license = {
class = 'imbox-license licensetpl',
image = 'Imbox license.png' -- @todo We need an SVG version of this
},
featured = {
class = 'imbox-featured',
image = 'Cscr-featured.svg'
},
notice = {
class = 'imbox-notice',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
}
},
default = 'notice',
showInvalidTypeError = true,
classes = {'imbox'},
imageEmptyCell = true,
below = true,
templateCategory = 'File message boxes'
},

ombox = {
types = {
speedy = {
class = 'ombox-speedy',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
delete = {
class = 'ombox-delete',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
content = {
class = 'ombox-content',
image = 'Ambox important.svg'
},
style = {
class = 'ombox-style',
image = 'Edit-clear.svg'
},
move = {
class = 'ombox-move',
image = 'Merge-split-transwiki default.svg'
},
protection = {
class = 'ombox-protection',
image = 'Semi-protection-shackle-keyhole.svg'
},
notice = {
class = 'ombox-notice',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
}
},
default = 'notice',
showInvalidTypeError = true,
classes = {'ombox'},
allowSmall = true,
imageEmptyCell = true,
imageRightNone = true
},

tmbox = {
types = {
speedy = {
class = 'tmbox-speedy',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
delete = {
class = 'tmbox-delete',
image = 'Ambox warning pn.svg'
},
content = {
class = 'tmbox-content',
image = 'Ambox important.svg'
},
style = {
class = 'tmbox-style',
image = 'Edit-clear.svg'
},
move = {
class = 'tmbox-move',
image = 'Merge-split-transwiki default.svg'
},
protection = {
class = 'tmbox-protection',
image = 'Semi-protection-shackle-keyhole.svg'
},
notice = {
class = 'tmbox-notice',
image = 'Information icon4.svg'
}
},
default = 'notice',
showInvalidTypeError = true,
classes = {'tmbox'},
allowSmall = true,
imageRightNone = true,
imageEmptyCell = true,
imageEmptyCellStyle = true,
templateCategory = 'Talk message boxes'
}
}

Module:Message box

2022-03-30T18:37:46Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This is a meta-module for producing message box templates, including -- {{mbox}}, {{ambox}}, {{imbox}}, {{tmbox}}, {{ombox}}, {{cmbox}} and {{fmbox}}. -- Load necessary mo..."

-- This is a meta-module for producing message box templates, including
-- {{mbox}}, {{ambox}}, {{imbox}}, {{tmbox}}, {{ombox}}, {{cmbox}} and {{fmbox}}.

-- Load necessary modules.
require('Module:No globals')
local getArgs
local yesno = require('Module:Yesno')

-- Get a language object for formatDate and ucfirst.
local lang = mw.language.getContentLanguage()

-- Define constants
local CONFIG_MODULE = 'Module:Message box/configuration'
local DEMOSPACES = {talk = 'tmbox', image = 'imbox', file = 'imbox', category = 'cmbox', article = 'ambox', main = 'ambox'}

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Helper functions
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local function getTitleObject(...)
-- Get the title object, passing the function through pcall
-- in case we are over the expensive function count limit.
local success, title = pcall(mw.title.new, ...)
if success then
return title
end
end

local function union(t1, t2)
-- Returns the union of two arrays.
local vals = {}
for i, v in ipairs(t1) do
vals[v] = true
end
for i, v in ipairs(t2) do
vals[v] = true
end
local ret = {}
for k in pairs(vals) do
table.insert(ret, k)
end
table.sort(ret)
return ret
end

local function getArgNums(args, prefix)
local nums = {}
for k, v in pairs(args) do
local num = mw.ustring.match(tostring(k), '^' .. prefix .. '([1-9]%d*)$')
if num then
table.insert(nums, tonumber(num))
end
end
table.sort(nums)
return nums
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Box class definition
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local MessageBox = {}
MessageBox.__index = MessageBox

function MessageBox.new(boxType, args, cfg)
args = args or {}
local obj = {}

-- Set the title object and the namespace.
obj.title = getTitleObject(args.page) or mw.title.getCurrentTitle()

-- Set the config for our box type.
obj.cfg = cfg[boxType]
if not obj.cfg then
local ns = obj.title.namespace
-- boxType is "mbox" or invalid input
if args.demospace and args.demospace ~= '' then
-- implement demospace parameter of mbox
local demospace = string.lower(args.demospace)
if DEMOSPACES[demospace] then
-- use template from DEMOSPACES
obj.cfg = cfg[DEMOSPACES[demospace]]
elseif string.find( demospace, 'talk' ) then
-- demo as a talk page
obj.cfg = cfg.tmbox
else
-- default to ombox
obj.cfg = cfg.ombox
end
elseif ns == 0 then
obj.cfg = cfg.ambox -- main namespace
elseif ns == 6 then
obj.cfg = cfg.imbox -- file namespace
elseif ns == 14 then
obj.cfg = cfg.cmbox -- category namespace
else
local nsTable = mw.site.namespaces[ns]
if nsTable and nsTable.isTalk then
obj.cfg = cfg.tmbox -- any talk namespace
else
obj.cfg = cfg.ombox -- other namespaces or invalid input
end
end
end

-- Set the arguments, and remove all blank arguments except for the ones
-- listed in cfg.allowBlankParams.
do
local newArgs = {}
for k, v in pairs(args) do
if v ~= '' then
newArgs[k] = v
end
end
for i, param in ipairs(obj.cfg.allowBlankParams or {}) do
newArgs[param] = args[param]
end
obj.args = newArgs
end

-- Define internal data structure.
obj.categories = {}
obj.classes = {}
-- For lazy loading of [[Module:Category handler]].
obj.hasCategories = false

return setmetatable(obj, MessageBox)
end

function MessageBox:addCat(ns, cat, sort)
if not cat then
return nil
end
if sort then
cat = string.format('[[Category:%s|%s]]', cat, sort)
else
cat = string.format('[[Category:%s]]', cat)
end
self.hasCategories = true
self.categories[ns] = self.categories[ns] or {}
table.insert(self.categories[ns], cat)
end

function MessageBox:addClass(class)
if not class then
return nil
end
table.insert(self.classes, class)
end

function MessageBox:setParameters()
local args = self.args
local cfg = self.cfg

-- Get type data.
self.type = args.type
local typeData = cfg.types[self.type]
self.invalidTypeError = cfg.showInvalidTypeError
and self.type
and not typeData
typeData = typeData or cfg.types[cfg.default]
self.typeClass = typeData.class
self.typeImage = typeData.image

-- Find if the box has been wrongly substituted.
self.isSubstituted = cfg.substCheck and args.subst == 'SUBST'

-- Find whether we are using a small message box.
self.isSmall = cfg.allowSmall and (
cfg.smallParam and args.small == cfg.smallParam
or not cfg.smallParam and yesno(args.small)
)

-- Add attributes, classes and styles.
self.id = args.id
self.name = args.name
if self.name then
self:addClass('box-' .. string.gsub(self.name,' ','_'))
end
if yesno(args.plainlinks) ~= false then
self:addClass('plainlinks')
end
for _, class in ipairs(cfg.classes or {}) do
self:addClass(class)
end
if self.isSmall then
self:addClass(cfg.smallClass or 'mbox-small')
end
self:addClass(self.typeClass)
self:addClass(args.class)
self.style = args.style
self.attrs = args.attrs

-- Set text style.
self.textstyle = args.textstyle

-- Find if we are on the template page or not. This functionality is only
-- used if useCollapsibleTextFields is set, or if both cfg.templateCategory
-- and cfg.templateCategoryRequireName are set.
self.useCollapsibleTextFields = cfg.useCollapsibleTextFields
if self.useCollapsibleTextFields
or cfg.templateCategory
and cfg.templateCategoryRequireName
then
if self.name then
local templateName = mw.ustring.match(
self.name,
'^[tT][eE][mM][pP][lL][aA][tT][eE][%s_]*:[%s_]*(.*)$'
) or self.name
templateName = 'Template:' .. templateName
self.templateTitle = getTitleObject(templateName)
end
self.isTemplatePage = self.templateTitle
and mw.title.equals(self.title, self.templateTitle)
end

-- Process data for collapsible text fields. At the moment these are only
-- used in {{ambox}}.
if self.useCollapsibleTextFields then
-- Get the self.issue value.
if self.isSmall and args.smalltext then
self.issue = args.smalltext
else
local sect
if args.sect == '' then
sect = 'This ' .. (cfg.sectionDefault or 'page')
elseif type(args.sect) == 'string' then
sect = 'This ' .. args.sect
end
local issue = args.issue
issue = type(issue) == 'string' and issue ~= '' and issue or nil
local text = args.text
text = type(text) == 'string' and text or nil
local issues = {}
table.insert(issues, sect)
table.insert(issues, issue)
table.insert(issues, text)
self.issue = table.concat(issues, ' ')
end

-- Get the self.talk value.
local talk = args.talk
-- Show talk links on the template page or template subpages if the talk
-- parameter is blank.
if talk == ''
and self.templateTitle
and (
mw.title.equals(self.templateTitle, self.title)
or self.title:isSubpageOf(self.templateTitle)
)
then
talk = '#'
elseif talk == '' then
talk = nil
end
if talk then
-- If the talk value is a talk page, make a link to that page. Else
-- assume that it's a section heading, and make a link to the talk
-- page of the current page with that section heading.
local talkTitle = getTitleObject(talk)
local talkArgIsTalkPage = true
if not talkTitle or not talkTitle.isTalkPage then
talkArgIsTalkPage = false
talkTitle = getTitleObject(
self.title.text,
mw.site.namespaces[self.title.namespace].talk.id
)
end
if talkTitle and talkTitle.exists then
local talkText
if self.isSmall then
local talkLink = talkArgIsTalkPage and talk or (talkTitle.prefixedText .. '#' .. talk)
talkText = string.format('([[%s|talk]])', talkLink)
else
talkText = 'Relevant discussion may be found on'
if talkArgIsTalkPage then
talkText = string.format(
'%s [[%s|%s]].',
talkText,
talk,
talkTitle.prefixedText
)
else
talkText = string.format(
'%s the [[%s#%s|talk page]].',
talkText,
talkTitle.prefixedText,
talk
)
end
end
self.talk = talkText
end
end

-- Get other values.
self.fix = args.fix ~= '' and args.fix or nil
local date
if args.date and args.date ~= '' then
date = args.date
elseif args.date == '' and self.isTemplatePage then
date = lang:formatDate('F Y')
end
if date then
self.date = string.format(" ''(%s)''", date)
end
self.info = args.info
if yesno(args.removalnotice) then
self.removalNotice = cfg.removalNotice
end
end

-- Set the non-collapsible text field. At the moment this is used by all box
-- types other than ambox, and also by ambox when small=yes.
if self.isSmall then
self.text = args.smalltext or args.text
else
self.text = args.text
end

-- Set the below row.
self.below = cfg.below and args.below

-- General image settings.
self.imageCellDiv = not self.isSmall and cfg.imageCellDiv
self.imageEmptyCell = cfg.imageEmptyCell
if cfg.imageEmptyCellStyle then
self.imageEmptyCellStyle = 'border:none;padding:0;width:1px'
end

-- Left image settings.
local imageLeft = self.isSmall and args.smallimage or args.image
if cfg.imageCheckBlank and imageLeft ~= 'blank' and imageLeft ~= 'none'
or not cfg.imageCheckBlank and imageLeft ~= 'none'
then
self.imageLeft = imageLeft
if not imageLeft then
local imageSize = self.isSmall
and (cfg.imageSmallSize or '30x30px')
or '40x40px'
self.imageLeft = string.format('[[File:%s|%s|link=|alt=]]', self.typeImage
or 'Imbox notice.png', imageSize)
end
end

-- Right image settings.
local imageRight = self.isSmall and args.smallimageright or args.imageright
if not (cfg.imageRightNone and imageRight == 'none') then
self.imageRight = imageRight
end
end

function MessageBox:setMainspaceCategories()
local args = self.args
local cfg = self.cfg

if not cfg.allowMainspaceCategories then
return nil
end

local nums = {}
for _, prefix in ipairs{'cat', 'category', 'all'} do
args[prefix .. '1'] = args[prefix]
nums = union(nums, getArgNums(args, prefix))
end

-- The following is roughly equivalent to the old {{Ambox/category}}.
local date = args.date
date = type(date) == 'string' and date
local preposition = 'from'
for _, num in ipairs(nums) do
local mainCat = args['cat' .. tostring(num)]
or args['category' .. tostring(num)]
local allCat = args['all' .. tostring(num)]
mainCat = type(mainCat) == 'string' and mainCat
allCat = type(allCat) == 'string' and allCat
if mainCat and date and date ~= '' then
local catTitle = string.format('%s %s %s', mainCat, preposition, date)
self:addCat(0, catTitle)
catTitle = getTitleObject('Category:' .. catTitle)
if not catTitle or not catTitle.exists then
self:addCat(0, 'Articles with invalid date parameter in template')
end
elseif mainCat and (not date or date == '') then
self:addCat(0, mainCat)
end
if allCat then
self:addCat(0, allCat)
end
end
end

function MessageBox:setTemplateCategories()
local args = self.args
local cfg = self.cfg

-- Add template categories.
if cfg.templateCategory then
if cfg.templateCategoryRequireName then
if self.isTemplatePage then
self:addCat(10, cfg.templateCategory)
end
elseif not self.title.isSubpage then
self:addCat(10, cfg.templateCategory)
end
end

-- Add template error categories.
if cfg.templateErrorCategory then
local templateErrorCategory = cfg.templateErrorCategory
local templateCat, templateSort
if not self.name and not self.title.isSubpage then
templateCat = templateErrorCategory
elseif self.isTemplatePage then
local paramsToCheck = cfg.templateErrorParamsToCheck or {}
local count = 0
for i, param in ipairs(paramsToCheck) do
if not args[param] then
count = count + 1
end
end
if count > 0 then
templateCat = templateErrorCategory
templateSort = tostring(count)
end
if self.categoryNums and #self.categoryNums > 0 then
templateCat = templateErrorCategory
templateSort = 'C'
end
end
self:addCat(10, templateCat, templateSort)
end
end

function MessageBox:setAllNamespaceCategories()
-- Set categories for all namespaces.
if self.invalidTypeError then
local allSort = (self.title.namespace == 0 and 'Main:' or '') .. self.title.prefixedText
self:addCat('all', 'Wikipedia message box parameter needs fixing', allSort)
end
if self.isSubstituted then
self:addCat('all', 'Pages with incorrectly substituted templates')
end
end

function MessageBox:setCategories()
if self.title.namespace == 0 then
self:setMainspaceCategories()
elseif self.title.namespace == 10 then
self:setTemplateCategories()
end
self:setAllNamespaceCategories()
end

function MessageBox:renderCategories()
if not self.hasCategories then
-- No categories added, no need to pass them to Category handler so,
-- if it was invoked, it would return the empty string.
-- So we shortcut and return the empty string.
return ""
end
-- Convert category tables to strings and pass them through
-- [[Module:Category handler]].
return require('Module:Category handler')._main{
main = table.concat(self.categories[0] or {}),
template = table.concat(self.categories[10] or {}),
all = table.concat(self.categories.all or {}),
nocat = self.args.nocat,
page = self.args.page
}
end

function MessageBox:export()
local root = mw.html.create()

-- Add the subst check error.
if self.isSubstituted and self.name then
root:tag('b')
:addClass('error')
:wikitext(string.format(
'Template <code>%s[[Template:%s|%s]]%s</code> has been incorrectly substituted.',
mw.text.nowiki('{{'), self.name, self.name, mw.text.nowiki('}}')
))
end

-- Create the box table.
local boxTable = root:tag('table')
boxTable:attr('id', self.id or nil)
for i, class in ipairs(self.classes or {}) do
boxTable:addClass(class or nil)
end
boxTable
:cssText(self.style or nil)
:attr('role', 'presentation')

if self.attrs then
boxTable:attr(self.attrs)
end

-- Add the left-hand image.
local row = boxTable:tag('tr')
if self.imageLeft then
local imageLeftCell = row:tag('td'):addClass('mbox-image')
if self.imageCellDiv then
-- If we are using a div, redefine imageLeftCell so that the image
-- is inside it. Divs use style="width: 52px;", which limits the
-- image width to 52px. If any images in a div are wider than that,
-- they may overlap with the text or cause other display problems.
imageLeftCell = imageLeftCell:tag('div'):css('width', '52px')
end
imageLeftCell:wikitext(self.imageLeft or nil)
elseif self.imageEmptyCell then
-- Some message boxes define an empty cell if no image is specified, and
-- some don't. The old template code in templates where empty cells are
-- specified gives the following hint: "No image. Cell with some width
-- or padding necessary for text cell to have 100% width."
row:tag('td')
:addClass('mbox-empty-cell')
:cssText(self.imageEmptyCellStyle or nil)
end

-- Add the text.
local textCell = row:tag('td'):addClass('mbox-text')
if self.useCollapsibleTextFields then
-- The message box uses advanced text parameters that allow things to be
-- collapsible. At the moment, only ambox uses this.
textCell:cssText(self.textstyle or nil)
local textCellDiv = textCell:tag('div')
textCellDiv
:addClass('mbox-text-span')
:wikitext(self.issue or nil)
if (self.talk or self.fix) then
textCellDiv:tag('span')
:addClass('hide-when-compact')
:wikitext(self.talk and (' ' .. self.talk) or nil)
:wikitext(self.fix and (' ' .. self.fix) or nil)
end
textCellDiv:wikitext(self.date and (' ' .. self.date) or nil)
if self.info and not self.isSmall then
textCellDiv
:tag('span')
:addClass('hide-when-compact')
:wikitext(self.info and (' ' .. self.info) or nil)
end
if self.removalNotice then
textCellDiv:tag('span')
:addClass('hide-when-compact')
:tag('i')
:wikitext(string.format(" (%s)", self.removalNotice))
end
else
-- Default text formatting - anything goes.
textCell
:cssText(self.textstyle or nil)
:wikitext(self.text or nil)
end

-- Add the right-hand image.
if self.imageRight then
local imageRightCell = row:tag('td'):addClass('mbox-imageright')
if self.imageCellDiv then
-- If we are using a div, redefine imageRightCell so that the image
-- is inside it.
imageRightCell = imageRightCell:tag('div'):css('width', '52px')
end
imageRightCell
:wikitext(self.imageRight or nil)
end

-- Add the below row.
if self.below then
boxTable:tag('tr')
:tag('td')
:attr('colspan', self.imageRight and '3' or '2')
:addClass('mbox-text')
:cssText(self.textstyle or nil)
:wikitext(self.below or nil)
end

-- Add error message for invalid type parameters.
if self.invalidTypeError then
root:tag('div')
:css('text-align', 'center')
:wikitext(string.format(
'This message box is using an invalid "type=%s" parameter and needs fixing.',
self.type or ''
))
end

-- Add categories.
root:wikitext(self:renderCategories() or nil)

return tostring(root)
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Exports
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local p, mt = {}, {}

function p._exportClasses()
-- For testing.
return {
MessageBox = MessageBox
}
end

function p.main(boxType, args, cfgTables)
local box = MessageBox.new(boxType, args, cfgTables or mw.loadData(CONFIG_MODULE))
box:setParameters()
box:setCategories()
return box:export()
end

function mt.__index(t, k)
return function (frame)
if not getArgs then
getArgs = require('Module:Arguments').getArgs
end
return t.main(k, getArgs(frame, {trim = false, removeBlanks = false}))
end
end

return setmetatable(p, mt)

Module:Module wikitext

2022-03-30T18:37:08Z

Zoran: Created page with "local p = {} p.text = '' function p.main() return p.text end function p._addText(text, preprocessFrame) if preprocessFrame ~= false then text = (preprocessFrame or mw.g..."

local p = {}

p.text = ''

function p.main()
return p.text
end

function p._addText(text, preprocessFrame)
if preprocessFrame ~= false then
text = (preprocessFrame or mw.getCurrentFrame()):preprocess(text)
end
p.text = p.text .. text
end

return p

Module:Documentation/styles.css

2022-03-30T18:36:42Z

Zoran: Created page with "/* {{pp|small=yes}} */ .documentation, .documentation-metadata { border: 1px solid #a2a9b1; background-color: #ecfcf4; clear: both; } .documentation { margin: 1em 0 0 0;..."

/* {{pp|small=yes}} */
.documentation,
.documentation-metadata {
border: 1px solid #a2a9b1;
background-color: #ecfcf4;
clear: both;
}

.documentation {
margin: 1em 0 0 0;
padding: 1em;
}

.documentation-metadata {
margin: 0.2em 0; /* same margin left-right as .documentation */
font-style: italic;
padding: 0.4em 1em; /* same padding left-right as .documentation */
}

.documentation-startbox {
padding-bottom: 3px;
border-bottom: 1px solid #aaa;
margin-bottom: 1ex;
}

.documentation-heading {
font-weight: bold;
font-size: 125%;
}

.documentation-clear { /* Don't want things to stick out where they shouldn't. */
clear: both;
}

.documentation-toolbar {
font-style: normal;
font-size: 85%;
}

Module:If preview/styles.css

2022-03-30T18:35:14Z

Zoran: Created page with "/* {{pp|small=yes}} */ .preview-warning { font-style: italic; /* @noflip */ padding-left: 1.6em; margin-bottom: 0.5em; color: red; } /* The templatestyles element insert..."

/* {{pp|small=yes}} */
.preview-warning {
font-style: italic;
/* @noflip */
padding-left: 1.6em;
margin-bottom: 0.5em;
color: red;
}

/* The templatestyles element inserts a link element before hatnotes.
* TODO: Remove link if/when WMF resolves T200206 */
.preview-warning + link + .preview-warning {
margin-top: -0.5em;
}

Module:If preview/configuration

2022-03-30T18:34:51Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- We perform the actual check for whether this is a preview here since preprocessing is relatively expensive. local frame = mw.getCurrentFrame() local function is_previ..."

--[[
We perform the actual check for whether this is a preview here since
preprocessing is relatively expensive.
]]
local frame = mw.getCurrentFrame()

local function is_preview()
local revision_id = frame:preprocess('{{REVISIONID}}')
-- {{REVISIONID}} is usually the empty string when previewed.
-- I don't know why we're checking for nil but hey, maybe someday things
-- would have broken
return revision_id == nil or revision_id == ''
end

local function templatestyles()
return frame:extensionTag{
name = 'templatestyles', args = { src = 'Module:If preview/styles.css' }
}
end

return {
preview = is_preview(),
templatestyles = templatestyles(),
warning_infrastructure = '%s<div class="preview-warning">Preview warning: %s</div>',
missing_warning = 'The template has no warning text. Please add a warning.'
}

Module:If preview

2022-03-30T18:34:25Z

Zoran: Created page with "local p = {} local cfg = mw.loadData('Module:If preview/configuration') --[[ main This function returns either the first argument or second argument passed to this module,..."

local p = {}

local cfg = mw.loadData('Module:If preview/configuration')

--[[
main

This function returns either the first argument or second argument passed to
this module, depending on whether the page is being previewed.

]]
function p.main(frame)
if cfg.preview then
return frame.args[1] or ''
else
return frame.args[2] or ''
end
end

--[[
pmain

This function returns either the first argument or second argument passed to
this module's parent (i.e. template using this module), depending on whether it
is being previewed.

]]
function p.pmain(frame)
return p.main(frame:getParent())
end

local function warning_text(warning)
return mw.ustring.format(
cfg.warning_infrastructure,
cfg.templatestyles,
warning
)
end

function p._warning(args)

local warning = args[1] and args[1]:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$') or ''
if warning == '' then
return warning_text(cfg.missing_warning)
end

if not cfg.preview then return '' end

return warning_text(warning)
end

--[[
warning

This function returns a "preview warning", which is the first argument marked
up with HTML and some supporting text, depending on whether the page is being previewed.

disabled since we'll implement the template version in general

]]
--function p.warning(frame)
-- return p._warning(frame.args)
--end

--[[
warning, but for pass-through templates like {{preview warning}}
]]
function p.pwarning(frame)
return p._warning(frame:getParent().args)
end

return p

Module:Check for unknown parameters

2022-03-30T18:33:09Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module may be used to compare the arguments passed to the parent -- with a list of arguments, returning a specified result if an argument is -- not on the list local p..."

-- This module may be used to compare the arguments passed to the parent
-- with a list of arguments, returning a specified result if an argument is
-- not on the list
local p = {}

local function trim(s)
return s:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$')
end

local function isnotempty(s)
return s and s:match('%S')
end

local function clean(text)
-- Return text cleaned for display and truncated if too long.
-- Strip markers are replaced with dummy text representing the original wikitext.
local pos, truncated
local function truncate(text)
if truncated then
return ''
end
if mw.ustring.len(text) > 25 then
truncated = true
text = mw.ustring.sub(text, 1, 25) .. '...'
end
return mw.text.nowiki(text)
end
local parts = {}
for before, tag, remainder in text:gmatch('([^\127]*)\127[^\127]*%-(%l+)%-[^\127]*\127()') do
pos = remainder
table.insert(parts, truncate(before) .. '<' .. tag .. '>...</' .. tag .. '>')
end
table.insert(parts, truncate(text:sub(pos or 1)))
return table.concat(parts)
end

function p._check(args, pargs)
if type(args) ~= "table" or type(pargs) ~= "table" then
-- TODO: error handling
return
end

-- create the list of known args, regular expressions, and the return string
local knownargs = {}
local regexps = {}
for k, v in pairs(args) do
if type(k) == 'number' then
v = trim(v)
knownargs[v] = 1
elseif k:find('^regexp[1-9][0-9]*$') then
table.insert(regexps, '^' .. v .. '$')
end
end

-- loop over the parent args, and make sure they are on the list
local ignoreblank = isnotempty(args['ignoreblank'])
local showblankpos = isnotempty(args['showblankpositional'])
local values = {}
for k, v in pairs(pargs) do
if type(k) == 'string' and knownargs[k] == nil then
local knownflag = false
for _, regexp in ipairs(regexps) do
if mw.ustring.match(k, regexp) then
knownflag = true
break
end
end
if not knownflag and ( not ignoreblank or isnotempty(v) ) then
table.insert(values, clean(k))
end
elseif type(k) == 'number' and knownargs[tostring(k)] == nil then
local knownflag = false
for _, regexp in ipairs(regexps) do
if mw.ustring.match(tostring(k), regexp) then
knownflag = true
break
end
end
if not knownflag and ( showblankpos or isnotempty(v) ) then
table.insert(values, k .. ' = ' .. clean(v))
end
end
end

-- add results to the output tables
local res = {}
if #values > 0 then
local unknown_text = args['unknown'] or 'Found _VALUE_, '

if mw.getCurrentFrame():preprocess( "{{REVISIONID}}" ) == "" then
local preview_text = args['preview']
if isnotempty(preview_text) then
preview_text = require('Module:If preview')._warning({preview_text})
elseif preview == nil then
preview_text = unknown_text
end
unknown_text = preview_text
end
for _, v in pairs(values) do
-- Fix odd bug for | = which gets stripped to the empty string and
-- breaks category links
if v == '' then v = ' ' end

-- avoid error with v = 'example%2' ("invalid capture index")
local r = unknown_text:gsub('_VALUE_', {_VALUE_ = v})
table.insert(res, r)
end
end

return table.concat(res)
end

function p.check(frame)
local args = frame.args
local pargs = frame:getParent().args
return p._check(args, pargs)
end

return p

Template:Blockquote/styles.css

2022-03-30T18:27:48Z

Zoran: Zoran changed the content model of the page Template:Blockquote/styles.css from "wikitext" to "Sanitized CSS": Styling related page

/* {{pp-template}} */
.templatequote {
overflow: hidden;
margin: 1em 0;
padding: 0 40px;
}

.templatequote .templatequotecite {
line-height: 1.5em;
/* @noflip */
text-align: left;
/* @noflip */
padding-left: 1.6em;
margin-top: 0;
}

Template:TOC right/styles.css

2022-03-30T18:18:52Z

Zoran: Zoran changed the content model of the page Template:TOC right/styles.css from "wikitext" to "Sanitized CSS": Styling related page

/* {{pp-template}} */
/* The TOC is hidden on Minerva (mobile skin) for width < 720px so must also hide this wrapper */
@media all and (max-width: 720px) {
body.skin-minerva .tocright {
display: none;
}

.tocright {
width: 100% !important; /* fix the inline width while at small resolution */
}
}
@media all and (min-width: 720px) {
.tocright {
float: right;
clear: right;
width: auto;
margin: 0 0 0.5em 1em;
}

.tocright-clear-left {
clear: left;
}

.tocright-clear-both {
clear: both;
}

.tocright-clear-none {
clear: none;
}
}

Module:Protection banner/config

2022-03-29T15:38:05Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module provides configuration data for Module:Protection banner. return { -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -- --..."

-- This module provides configuration data for [[Module:Protection banner]].

return {

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
-- BANNER DATA
--
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--[[
-- Banner data consists of six fields:
-- * text - the main protection text that appears at the top of protection
-- banners.
-- * explanation - the text that appears below the main protection text, used
-- to explain the details of the protection.
-- * tooltip - the tooltip text you see when you move the mouse over a small
-- padlock icon.
-- * link - the page that the small padlock icon links to.
-- * alt - the alt text for the small padlock icon. This is also used as tooltip
-- text for the large protection banners.
-- * image - the padlock image used in both protection banners and small padlock
-- icons.
--
-- The module checks in three separate tables to find a value for each field.
-- First it checks the banners table, which has values specific to the reason
-- for the page being protected. Then the module checks the defaultBanners
-- table, which has values specific to each protection level. Finally, the
-- module checks the masterBanner table, which holds data for protection
-- templates to use if no data has been found in the previous two tables.
--
-- The values in the banner data can take parameters. These are specified
-- using ${TEXTLIKETHIS} (a dollar sign preceding a parameter name
-- enclosed in curly braces).
--
-- Available parameters:
--
-- ${CURRENTVERSION} - a link to the page history or the move log, with the
-- display message "current-version-edit-display" or
-- "current-version-move-display".
--
-- ${EDITREQUEST} - a link to create an edit request for the current page.
--
-- ${EXPLANATIONBLURB} - an explanation blurb, e.g. "Please discuss any changes
-- on the talk page; you may submit a request to ask an administrator to make
-- an edit if it is minor or supported by consensus."
--
-- ${IMAGELINK} - a link to set the image to, depending on the protection
-- action and protection level.
--
-- ${INTROBLURB} - the PROTECTIONBLURB parameter, plus the expiry if an expiry
-- is set. E.g. "Editing of this page by new or unregistered users is currently
-- disabled until dd Month YYYY."
--
-- ${INTROFRAGMENT} - the same as ${INTROBLURB}, but without final punctuation
-- so that it can be used in run-on sentences.
--
-- ${PAGETYPE} - the type of the page, e.g. "article" or "template".
-- Defined in the cfg.pagetypes table.
--
-- ${PROTECTIONBLURB} - a blurb explaining the protection level of the page, e.g.
-- "Editing of this page by new or unregistered users is currently disabled"
--
-- ${PROTECTIONDATE} - the protection date, if it has been supplied to the
-- template.
--
-- ${PROTECTIONLEVEL} - the protection level, e.g. "fully protected" or
-- "semi-protected".
--
-- ${PROTECTIONLOG} - a link to the protection log or the pending changes log,
-- depending on the protection action.
--
-- ${TALKPAGE} - a link to the talk page. If a section is specified, links
-- straight to that talk page section.
--
-- ${TOOLTIPBLURB} - uses the PAGETYPE, PROTECTIONTYPE and EXPIRY parameters to
-- create a blurb like "This template is semi-protected", or "This article is
-- move-protected until DD Month YYYY".
--
-- ${VANDAL} - links for the specified username (or the root page name)
-- using Module:Vandal-m.
--
-- Functions
--
-- For advanced users, it is possible to use Lua functions instead of strings
-- in the banner config tables. Using functions gives flexibility that is not
-- possible just by using parameters. Functions take two arguments, the
-- protection object and the template arguments, and they must output a string.
--
-- For example:
--
-- text = function (protectionObj, args)
-- if protectionObj.level == 'autoconfirmed' then
-- return 'foo'
-- else
-- return 'bar'
-- end
-- end
--
-- Some protection object properties and methods that may be useful:
-- protectionObj.action - the protection action
-- protectionObj.level - the protection level
-- protectionObj.reason - the protection reason
-- protectionObj.expiry - the expiry. Nil if unset, the string "indef" if set
-- to indefinite, and the protection time in unix time if temporary.
-- protectionObj.protectionDate - the protection date in unix time, or nil if
-- unspecified.
-- protectionObj.bannerConfig - the banner config found by the module. Beware
-- of editing the config field used by the function, as it could create an
-- infinite loop.
-- protectionObj:isProtected - returns a boolean showing whether the page is
-- protected.
-- protectionObj:isTemporary - returns a boolean showing whether the expiry is
-- temporary.
-- protectionObj:isIncorrect - returns a boolean showing whether the protection
-- template is incorrect.
--]]

-- The master banner data, used if no values have been found in banners or
-- defaultBanners.
masterBanner = {
text = '${INTROBLURB}',
explanation = '${EXPLANATIONBLURB}',
tooltip = '${TOOLTIPBLURB}',
link = '${IMAGELINK}',
alt = 'Page ${PROTECTIONLEVEL}'
},

-- The default banner data. This holds banner data for different protection
-- levels.
-- *required* - this table needs edit, move, autoreview and upload subtables.
defaultBanners = {
edit = {},
move = {},
autoreview = {
default = {
alt = 'Page protected with pending changes',
tooltip = 'All edits by unregistered and new users are subject to review prior to becoming visible to unregistered users',
image = 'Pending-protection-shackle.svg'
}
},
upload = {}
},

-- The banner data. This holds banner data for different protection reasons.
-- In fact, the reasons specified in this table control which reasons are
-- valid inputs to the first positional parameter.
--
-- There is also a non-standard "description" field that can be used for items
-- in this table. This is a description of the protection reason for use in the
-- module documentation.
--
-- *required* - this table needs edit, move, autoreview and upload subtables.
banners = {
edit = {
blp = {
description = 'For pages protected to promote compliance with the'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Biographies of living persons'
.. '|biographies of living persons]] policy',
text = '${INTROFRAGMENT} to promote compliance with'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Biographies of living persons'
.. "|Wikipedia's policy on the biographies"
.. ' of living people]].',
tooltip = '${TOOLTIPFRAGMENT} to promote compliance with the policy on'
.. ' biographies of living persons',
},
dmca = {
description = 'For pages protected by the Wikimedia Foundation'
.. ' due to [[Digital Millennium Copyright Act]] takedown requests',
explanation = function (protectionObj, args)
local ret = 'Pursuant to a rights owner notice under the Digital'
.. ' Millennium Copyright Act (DMCA) regarding some content'
.. ' in this article, the Wikimedia Foundation acted under'
.. ' applicable law and took down and restricted the content'
.. ' in question.'
if args.notice then
ret = ret .. ' A copy of the received notice can be found here: '
.. args.notice .. '.'
end
ret = ret .. ' For more information, including websites discussing'
.. ' how to file a counter-notice, please see'
.. " [[Wikipedia:Office actions]] and the article's ${TALKPAGE}."
.. "'''Do not remove this template from the article until the"
.. " restrictions are withdrawn'''."
return ret
end,
image = 'Office-protection-shackle.svg',
},
dispute = {
description = 'For pages protected due to editing disputes',
text = function (protectionObj, args)
-- Find the value of "disputes".
local display = 'disputes'
local disputes
if args.section then
disputes = string.format(
'[[%s:%s#%s|%s]]',
mw.site.namespaces[protectionObj.title.namespace].talk.name,
protectionObj.title.text,
args.section,
display
)
else
disputes = display
end

-- Make the blurb, depending on the expiry.
local msg
if type(protectionObj.expiry) == 'number' then
msg = '${INTROFRAGMENT} or until editing %s have been resolved.'
else
msg = '${INTROFRAGMENT} until editing %s have been resolved.'
end
return string.format(msg, disputes)
end,
explanation = "This protection is '''not''' an endorsement of the"
.. ' ${CURRENTVERSION}. ${EXPLANATIONBLURB}',
tooltip = '${TOOLTIPFRAGMENT} due to editing disputes',
},
ecp = {
description = 'For articles in topic areas authorized by'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Arbitration Committee|ArbCom]] or'
.. ' meets the criteria for community use',
tooltip = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is extended-confirmed protected',
alt = 'Extended-protected ${PAGETYPE}',
},
mainpage = {
description = 'For pages protected for being displayed on the [[Main Page]]',
text = 'This file is currently'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:This page is protected|protected]] from'
.. ' editing because it is currently or will soon be displayed'
.. ' on the [[Main Page]].',
explanation = 'Images on the Main Page are protected due to their high'
.. ' visibility. Please discuss any necessary changes on the ${TALKPAGE}.'
.. ' '
.. "'''Administrators:''' Once this image is definitely off the Main Page,"
.. ' please unprotect this file, or reduce to semi-protection,'
.. ' as appropriate.',
},
office = {
description = 'For pages protected by the Wikimedia Foundation',
text = function (protectionObj, args)
local ret = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is currently under the'
.. ' scrutiny of the'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Office actions|Wikimedia Foundation Office]]'
.. ' and is protected.'
if protectionObj.protectionDate then
ret = ret .. ' It has been protected since ${PROTECTIONDATE}.'
end
return ret
end,
explanation = "If you can edit this page, please discuss all changes and"
.. " additions on the ${TALKPAGE} first. '''Do not remove protection from this"
.. " page unless you are authorized by the Wikimedia Foundation to do"
.. " so.'''",
image = 'Office-protection-shackle.svg',
},
reset = {
description = 'For pages protected by the Wikimedia Foundation and'
.. ' "reset" to a bare-bones version',
text = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is currently under the'
.. ' scrutiny of the'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Office actions|Wikimedia Foundation Office]]'
.. ' and is protected.',
explanation = function (protectionObj, args)
local ret = ''
if protectionObj.protectionDate then
ret = ret .. 'On ${PROTECTIONDATE} this ${PAGETYPE} was'
else
ret = ret .. 'This ${PAGETYPE} has been'
end
ret = ret .. ' reduced to a'
.. ' simplified, "bare bones" version so that it may be completely'
.. ' rewritten to ensure it meets the policies of'
.. ' [[WP:NPOV|Neutral Point of View]] and [[WP:V|Verifiability]].'
.. ' Standard Wikipedia policies will apply to its rewriting—which'
.. ' will eventually be open to all editors—and will be strictly'
.. ' enforced. The ${PAGETYPE} has been ${PROTECTIONLEVEL} while'
.. ' it is being rebuilt.\n\n'
.. 'Any insertion of material directly from'
.. ' pre-protection revisions of the ${PAGETYPE} will be removed, as'
.. ' will any material added to the ${PAGETYPE} that is not properly'
.. ' sourced. The associated talk page(s) were also cleared on the'
.. " same date.\n\n"
.. "If you can edit this page, please discuss all changes and"
.. " additions on the ${TALKPAGE} first. '''Do not override"
.. " this action, and do not remove protection from this page,"
.. " unless you are authorized by the Wikimedia Foundation"
.. " to do so. No editor may remove this notice.'''"

return ret
end,
image = 'Office-protection-shackle.svg',
},
sock = {
description = 'For pages protected due to'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Sock puppetry|sock puppetry]]',
text = '${INTROFRAGMENT} to prevent [[Wikipedia:Sock puppetry|sock puppets]] of'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Blocking policy|blocked]] or'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Banning policy|banned users]]'
.. ' from editing it.',
tooltip = '${TOOLTIPFRAGMENT} to prevent sock puppets of blocked or banned users from'
.. ' editing it',
},
template = {
description = 'For [[Wikipedia:High-risk templates|high-risk]]'
.. ' templates and Lua modules',
text = 'This is a permanently [[Help:Protection|protected]] ${PAGETYPE},'
.. ' as it is [[Wikipedia:High-risk templates|high-risk]].',
explanation = 'Please discuss any changes on the ${TALKPAGE}; you may'
.. ' ${EDITREQUEST} to ask an'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Administrators|administrator]] or'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Template editor|template editor]] to make an edit if'
.. ' it is [[Help:Minor edit#When to mark an edit as a minor edit'
.. '|uncontroversial]] or supported by'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Consensus|consensus]]. You can also'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection|request]] that the page be'
.. ' unprotected.',
tooltip = 'This high-risk ${PAGETYPE} is permanently ${PROTECTIONLEVEL}'
.. ' to prevent vandalism',
alt = 'Permanently protected ${PAGETYPE}',
},
usertalk = {
description = 'For pages protected against disruptive edits by a'
.. ' particular user',
text = '${INTROFRAGMENT} to prevent ${VANDAL} from using it to make disruptive edits,'
.. ' such as abusing the'
.. ' {{[[Template:unblock|unblock]]}} template.',
explanation = 'If you cannot edit this user talk page and you need to'
.. ' make a change or leave a message, you can'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection'
.. '#Current requests for edits to a protected page'
.. '|request an edit]],'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection'
.. '#Current requests for reduction in protection level'
.. '|request unprotection]],'
.. ' [[Special:Userlogin|log in]],'
.. ' or [[Special:UserLogin/signup|create an account]].',
},
vandalism = {
description = 'For pages protected against'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Vandalism|vandalism]]',
text = '${INTROFRAGMENT} due to [[Wikipedia:Vandalism|vandalism]].',
explanation = function (protectionObj, args)
local ret = ''
if protectionObj.level == 'sysop' then
ret = ret .. "This protection is '''not''' an endorsement of the"
.. ' ${CURRENTVERSION}. '
end
return ret .. '${EXPLANATIONBLURB}'
end,
tooltip = '${TOOLTIPFRAGMENT} due to vandalism',
}
},
move = {
dispute = {
description = 'For pages protected against page moves due to'
.. ' disputes over the page title',
explanation = "This protection is '''not''' an endorsement of the"
.. ' ${CURRENTVERSION}. ${EXPLANATIONBLURB}',
image = 'Move-protection-shackle.svg'
},
vandalism = {
description = 'For pages protected against'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Vandalism#Page-move vandalism'
.. ' |page-move vandalism]]'
}
},
autoreview = {},
upload = {}
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
-- GENERAL DATA TABLES
--
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Protection blurbs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table produces the protection blurbs available with the
-- ${PROTECTIONBLURB} parameter. It is sorted by protection action and
-- protection level, and is checked by the module in the following order:
-- 1. page's protection action, page's protection level
-- 2. page's protection action, default protection level
-- 3. "edit" protection action, default protection level
--
-- It is possible to use banner parameters inside this table.
-- *required* - this table needs edit, move, autoreview and upload subtables.
protectionBlurbs = {
edit = {
default = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is currently [[Help:Protection|'
.. 'protected]] from editing',
autoconfirmed = 'Editing of this ${PAGETYPE} by [[Wikipedia:User access'
.. ' levels#New users|new]] or [[Wikipedia:User access levels#Unregistered'
.. ' users|unregistered]] users is currently [[Help:Protection|disabled]]',
extendedconfirmed = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is currently under extended confirmed protection',
},
move = {
default = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is currently [[Help:Protection|protected]]'
.. ' from [[Help:Moving a page|page moves]]'
},
autoreview = {
default = 'All edits made to this ${PAGETYPE} by'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:User access levels#New users|new]] or'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:User access levels#Unregistered users|unregistered]]'
.. ' users are currently'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Pending changes|subject to review]]'
},
upload = {
default = 'Uploading new versions of this ${PAGETYPE} is currently disabled'
}
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Explanation blurbs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table produces the explanation blurbs available with the
-- ${EXPLANATIONBLURB} parameter. It is sorted by protection action,
-- protection level, and whether the page is a talk page or not. If the page is
-- a talk page it will have a talk key of "talk"; otherwise it will have a talk
-- key of "subject". The table is checked in the following order:
-- 1. page's protection action, page's protection level, page's talk key
-- 2. page's protection action, page's protection level, default talk key
-- 3. page's protection action, default protection level, page's talk key
-- 4. page's protection action, default protection level, default talk key
--
-- It is possible to use banner parameters inside this table.
-- *required* - this table needs edit, move, autoreview and upload subtables.
explanationBlurbs = {
edit = {
autoconfirmed = {
subject = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details. If you'
.. ' cannot edit this ${PAGETYPE} and you wish to make a change, you can'
.. ' ${EDITREQUEST}, discuss changes on the ${TALKPAGE},'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection'
.. '#Current requests for reduction in protection level'
.. '|request unprotection]], [[Special:Userlogin|log in]], or'
.. ' [[Special:UserLogin/signup|create an account]].',
default = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details. If you'
.. ' cannot edit this ${PAGETYPE} and you wish to make a change, you can'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection'
.. '#Current requests for reduction in protection level'
.. '|request unprotection]], [[Special:Userlogin|log in]], or'
.. ' [[Special:UserLogin/signup|create an account]].',
},
extendedconfirmed = {
default = 'Extended confirmed protection prevents edits from all unregistered editors'
.. ' and registered users with fewer than 30 days tenure and 500 edits.'
.. ' The [[Wikipedia:Protection policy#extended|policy on community use]]'
.. ' specifies that extended confirmed protection can be applied to combat'
.. ' disruption, if semi-protection has proven to be ineffective.'
.. ' Extended confirmed protection may also be applied to enforce'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Arbitration Committee|arbitration sanctions]].'
.. ' Please discuss any changes on the ${TALKPAGE}; you may'
.. ' ${EDITREQUEST} to ask for uncontroversial changes supported by'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Consensus|consensus]].'
},
default = {
subject = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' Please discuss any changes on the ${TALKPAGE}; you'
.. ' may ${EDITREQUEST} to ask an'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Administrators|administrator]] to make an edit if it'
.. ' is [[Help:Minor edit#When to mark an edit as a minor edit'
.. '|uncontroversial]] or supported by [[Wikipedia:Consensus'
.. '|consensus]]. You may also [[Wikipedia:Requests for'
.. ' page protection#Current requests for reduction in protection level'
.. '|request]] that this page be unprotected.',
default = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' You may [[Wikipedia:Requests for page'
.. ' protection#Current requests for edits to a protected page|request an'
.. ' edit]] to this page, or [[Wikipedia:Requests for'
.. ' page protection#Current requests for reduction in protection level'
.. '|ask]] for it to be unprotected.'
}
},
move = {
default = {
subject = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' The page may still be edited but cannot be moved'
.. ' until unprotected. Please discuss any suggested moves on the'
.. ' ${TALKPAGE} or at [[Wikipedia:Requested moves]]. You can also'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection|request]] that the page be'
.. ' unprotected.',
default = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' The page may still be edited but cannot be moved'
.. ' until unprotected. Please discuss any suggested moves at'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requested moves]]. You can also'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection|request]] that the page be'
.. ' unprotected.'
}
},
autoreview = {
default = {
default = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' Edits to this ${PAGETYPE} by new and unregistered users'
.. ' will not be visible to readers until they are accepted by'
.. ' a reviewer. To avoid the need for your edits to be'
.. ' reviewed, you may'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection'
.. '#Current requests for reduction in protection level'
.. '|request unprotection]], [[Special:Userlogin|log in]], or'
.. ' [[Special:UserLogin/signup|create an account]].'
},
},
upload = {
default = {
default = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' The page may still be edited but new versions of the file'
.. ' cannot be uploaded until it is unprotected. You can'
.. ' request that a new version be uploaded by using a'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Edit requests|protected edit request]], or you'
.. ' can [[Wikipedia:Requests for page protection|request]]'
.. ' that the file be unprotected.'
}
}
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Protection levels
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table provides the data for the ${PROTECTIONLEVEL} parameter, which
-- produces a short label for different protection levels. It is sorted by
-- protection action and protection level, and is checked in the following
-- order:
-- 1. page's protection action, page's protection level
-- 2. page's protection action, default protection level
-- 3. "edit" protection action, default protection level
--
-- It is possible to use banner parameters inside this table.
-- *required* - this table needs edit, move, autoreview and upload subtables.
protectionLevels = {
edit = {
default = 'protected',
templateeditor = 'template-protected',
extendedconfirmed = 'extended-protected',
autoconfirmed = 'semi-protected',
},
move = {
default = 'move-protected'
},
autoreview = {
},
upload = {
default = 'upload-protected'
}
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Images
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table lists different padlock images for each protection action and
-- protection level. It is used if an image is not specified in any of the
-- banner data tables, and if the page does not satisfy the conditions for using
-- the ['image-filename-indef'] image. It is checked in the following order:
-- 1. page's protection action, page's protection level
-- 2. page's protection action, default protection level
images = {
edit = {
default = 'Full-protection-shackle.svg',
templateeditor = 'Template-protection-shackle.svg',
extendedconfirmed = 'Extended-protection-shackle.svg',
autoconfirmed = 'Semi-protection-shackle.svg'
},
move = {
default = 'Move-protection-shackle.svg',
},
autoreview = {
default = 'Pending-protection-shackle.svg'
},
upload = {
default = 'Upload-protection-shackle.svg'
}
},

-- Pages with a reason specified in this table will show the special "indef"
-- padlock, defined in the 'image-filename-indef' message, if no expiry is set.
indefImageReasons = {
template = true
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Image links
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table provides the data for the ${IMAGELINK} parameter, which gets
-- the image link for small padlock icons based on the page's protection action
-- and protection level. It is checked in the following order:
-- 1. page's protection action, page's protection level
-- 2. page's protection action, default protection level
-- 3. "edit" protection action, default protection level
--
-- It is possible to use banner parameters inside this table.
-- *required* - this table needs edit, move, autoreview and upload subtables.
imageLinks = {
edit = {
default = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#full',
templateeditor = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#template',
extendedconfirmed = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#extended',
autoconfirmed = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#semi'
},
move = {
default = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#move'
},
autoreview = {
default = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#pending'
},
upload = {
default = 'Wikipedia:Protection policy#upload'
}
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Padlock indicator names
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table provides the "name" attribute for the <indicator> extension tag
-- with which small padlock icons are generated. All indicator tags on a page
-- are displayed in alphabetical order based on this attribute, and with
-- indicator tags with duplicate names, the last tag on the page wins.
-- The attribute is chosen based on the protection action; table keys must be a
-- protection action name or the string "default".
padlockIndicatorNames = {
autoreview = 'pp-autoreview',
default = 'pp-default'
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Protection categories
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--[[
-- The protection categories are stored in the protectionCategories table.
-- Keys to this table are made up of the following strings:
--
-- 1. the expiry date
-- 2. the namespace
-- 3. the protection reason (e.g. "dispute" or "vandalism")
-- 4. the protection level (e.g. "sysop" or "autoconfirmed")
-- 5. the action (e.g. "edit" or "move")
--
-- When the module looks up a category in the table, first it will will check to
-- see a key exists that corresponds to all five parameters. For example, a
-- user page semi-protected from vandalism for two weeks would have the key
-- "temp-user-vandalism-autoconfirmed-edit". If no match is found, the module
-- changes the first part of the key to "all" and checks the table again. It
-- keeps checking increasingly generic key combinations until it finds the
-- field, or until it reaches the key "all-all-all-all-all".
--
-- The module uses a binary matrix to determine the order in which to search.
-- This is best demonstrated by a table. In this table, the "0" values
-- represent "all", and the "1" values represent the original data (e.g.
-- "indef" or "file" or "vandalism").
--
-- expiry namespace reason level action
-- order
-- 1 1 1 1 1 1
-- 2 0 1 1 1 1
-- 3 1 0 1 1 1
-- 4 0 0 1 1 1
-- 5 1 1 0 1 1
-- 6 0 1 0 1 1
-- 7 1 0 0 1 1
-- 8 0 0 0 1 1
-- 9 1 1 1 0 1
-- 10 0 1 1 0 1
-- 11 1 0 1 0 1
-- 12 0 0 1 0 1
-- 13 1 1 0 0 1
-- 14 0 1 0 0 1
-- 15 1 0 0 0 1
-- 16 0 0 0 0 1
-- 17 1 1 1 1 0
-- 18 0 1 1 1 0
-- 19 1 0 1 1 0
-- 20 0 0 1 1 0
-- 21 1 1 0 1 0
-- 22 0 1 0 1 0
-- 23 1 0 0 1 0
-- 24 0 0 0 1 0
-- 25 1 1 1 0 0
-- 26 0 1 1 0 0
-- 27 1 0 1 0 0
-- 28 0 0 1 0 0
-- 29 1 1 0 0 0
-- 30 0 1 0 0 0
-- 31 1 0 0 0 0
-- 32 0 0 0 0 0
--
-- In this scheme the action has the highest priority, as it is the last
-- to change, and the expiry has the least priority, as it changes the most.
-- The priorities of the expiry, the protection level and the action are
-- fixed, but the priorities of the reason and the namespace can be swapped
-- through the use of the cfg.bannerDataNamespaceHasPriority table.
--]]

-- If the reason specified to the template is listed in this table,
-- namespace data will take priority over reason data in the protectionCategories
-- table.
reasonsWithNamespacePriority = {
vandalism = true,
},

-- The string to use as a namespace key for the protectionCategories table for each
-- namespace number.
categoryNamespaceKeys = {
[ 2] = 'user',
[ 3] = 'user',
[ 4] = 'project',
[ 6] = 'file',
[ 8] = 'mediawiki',
[ 10] = 'template',
[ 12] = 'project',
[ 14] = 'category',
[100] = 'portal',
[828] = 'module',
},

protectionCategories = {
['all|all|all|all|all'] = 'Wikipedia fully protected pages',
['all|all|office|all|all'] = 'Wikipedia Office-protected pages',
['all|all|reset|all|all'] = 'Wikipedia Office-protected pages',
['all|all|dmca|all|all'] = 'Wikipedia Office-protected pages',
['all|all|mainpage|all|all'] = 'Wikipedia fully-protected main page files',
['all|all|all|extendedconfirmed|all'] = 'Wikipedia extended-confirmed-protected pages',
['all|all|ecp|extendedconfirmed|all'] = 'Wikipedia extended-confirmed-protected pages',
['all|template|all|all|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully protected templates',
['all|all|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected pages',
['indef|all|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia indefinitely semi-protected pages',
['all|all|blp|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia indefinitely semi-protected biographies of living people',
['temp|all|blp|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia temporarily semi-protected biographies of living people',
['all|all|dispute|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia pages semi-protected due to dispute',
['all|all|sock|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia pages semi-protected from banned users',
['all|all|vandalism|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia pages semi-protected against vandalism',
['all|category|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected categories',
['all|file|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected files',
['all|portal|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected portals',
['all|project|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected project pages',
['all|talk|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected talk pages',
['all|template|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected templates',
['all|user|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected user and user talk pages',
['all|all|all|templateeditor|edit'] = 'Wikipedia template-protected pages other than templates and modules',
['all|template|all|templateeditor|edit'] = 'Wikipedia template-protected templates',
['all|template|all|templateeditor|move'] = 'Wikipedia template-protected templates', -- move-protected templates
['all|all|blp|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia indefinitely protected biographies of living people',
['temp|all|blp|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia temporarily protected biographies of living people',
['all|all|dispute|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia pages protected due to dispute',
['all|all|sock|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia pages protected from banned users',
['all|all|vandalism|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia pages protected against vandalism',
['all|category|all|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully protected categories',
['all|file|all|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully-protected files',
['all|project|all|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully-protected project pages',
['all|talk|all|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully-protected talk pages',
['all|template|all|extendedconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia extended-confirmed-protected templates',
['all|template|all|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully protected templates',
['all|user|all|sysop|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully protected user and user talk pages',
['all|module|all|all|edit'] = 'Wikipedia fully-protected modules',
['all|module|all|templateeditor|edit'] = 'Wikipedia template-protected modules',
['all|module|all|extendedconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia extended-confirmed-protected modules',
['all|module|all|autoconfirmed|edit'] = 'Wikipedia semi-protected modules',
['all|all|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia move-protected pages',
['indef|all|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia indefinitely move-protected pages',
['all|all|dispute|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia pages move-protected due to dispute',
['all|all|vandalism|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia pages move-protected due to vandalism',
['all|portal|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia move-protected portals',
['all|project|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia move-protected project pages',
['all|talk|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia move-protected talk pages',
['all|template|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia move-protected templates',
['all|user|all|sysop|move'] = 'Wikipedia move-protected user and user talk pages',
['all|all|all|autoconfirmed|autoreview'] = 'Wikipedia pending changes protected pages',
['all|file|all|all|upload'] = 'Wikipedia upload-protected files',
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Expiry category config
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table configures the expiry category behaviour for each protection
-- action.
-- * If set to true, setting that action will always categorise the page if
-- an expiry parameter is not set.
-- * If set to false, setting that action will never categorise the page.
-- * If set to nil, the module will categorise the page if:
-- 1) an expiry parameter is not set, and
-- 2) a reason is provided, and
-- 3) the specified reason is not blacklisted in the reasonsWithoutExpiryCheck
-- table.

expiryCheckActions = {
edit = nil,
move = false,
autoreview = true,
upload = false
},

reasonsWithoutExpiryCheck = {
blp = true,
template = true,
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Pagetypes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table produces the page types available with the ${PAGETYPE} parameter.
-- Keys are namespace numbers, or the string "default" for the default value.
pagetypes = {
[0] = 'article',
[6] = 'file',
[10] = 'template',
[14] = 'category',
[828] = 'module',
default = 'page'
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Strings marking indefinite protection
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table contains values passed to the expiry parameter that mean the page
-- is protected indefinitely.
indefStrings = {
['indef'] = true,
['indefinite'] = true,
['indefinitely'] = true,
['infinite'] = true,
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Group hierarchy
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table maps each group to all groups that have a superset of the original
-- group's page editing permissions.
hierarchy = {
sysop = {},
reviewer = {'sysop'},
filemover = {'sysop'},
templateeditor = {'sysop'},
extendedconfirmed = {'sysop'},
autoconfirmed = {'reviewer', 'filemover', 'templateeditor', 'extendedconfirmed'},
user = {'autoconfirmed'},
['*'] = {'user'}
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Wrapper templates and their default arguments
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This table contains wrapper templates used with the module, and their
-- default arguments. Templates specified in this table should contain the
-- following invocation, and no other template content:
--
-- {{#invoke:Protection banner|main}}
--
-- If other content is desired, it can be added between
-- <noinclude>...</noinclude> tags.
--
-- When a user calls one of these wrapper templates, they will use the
-- default arguments automatically. However, users can override any of the
-- arguments.
wrappers = {
['Template:Pp'] = {},
['Template:Pp-extended'] = {'ecp'},
['Template:Pp-blp'] = {'blp'},
-- we don't need Template:Pp-create
['Template:Pp-dispute'] = {'dispute'},
['Template:Pp-main-page'] = {'mainpage'},
['Template:Pp-move'] = {action = 'move', catonly = 'yes'},
['Template:Pp-move-dispute'] = {'dispute', action = 'move', catonly = 'yes'},
-- we don't need Template:Pp-move-indef
['Template:Pp-move-vandalism'] = {'vandalism', action = 'move', catonly = 'yes'},
['Template:Pp-office'] = {'office'},
['Template:Pp-office-dmca'] = {'dmca'},
['Template:Pp-pc'] = {action = 'autoreview', small = true},
['Template:Pp-pc1'] = {action = 'autoreview', small = true},
['Template:Pp-reset'] = {'reset'},
['Template:Pp-semi-indef'] = {small = true},
['Template:Pp-sock'] = {'sock'},
['Template:Pp-template'] = {'template', small = true},
['Template:Pp-upload'] = {action = 'upload'},
['Template:Pp-usertalk'] = {'usertalk'},
['Template:Pp-vandalism'] = {'vandalism'},
},

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
-- MESSAGES
--
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

msg = {

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Intro blurb and intro fragment
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- These messages specify what is produced by the ${INTROBLURB} and
-- ${INTROFRAGMENT} parameters. If the protection is temporary they use the
-- intro-blurb-expiry or intro-fragment-expiry, and if not they use
-- intro-blurb-noexpiry or intro-fragment-noexpiry.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in these messages.
['intro-blurb-expiry'] = '${PROTECTIONBLURB} until ${EXPIRY}.',
['intro-blurb-noexpiry'] = '${PROTECTIONBLURB}.',
['intro-fragment-expiry'] = '${PROTECTIONBLURB} until ${EXPIRY},',
['intro-fragment-noexpiry'] = '${PROTECTIONBLURB}',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Tooltip blurb
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- These messages specify what is produced by the ${TOOLTIPBLURB} parameter.
-- If the protection is temporary the tooltip-blurb-expiry message is used, and
-- if not the tooltip-blurb-noexpiry message is used.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in these messages.
['tooltip-blurb-expiry'] = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is ${PROTECTIONLEVEL} until ${EXPIRY}.',
['tooltip-blurb-noexpiry'] = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is ${PROTECTIONLEVEL}.',
['tooltip-fragment-expiry'] = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is ${PROTECTIONLEVEL} until ${EXPIRY},',
['tooltip-fragment-noexpiry'] = 'This ${PAGETYPE} is ${PROTECTIONLEVEL}',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Special explanation blurb
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- An explanation blurb for pages that cannot be unprotected, e.g. for pages
-- in the MediaWiki namespace.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in this message.
['explanation-blurb-nounprotect'] = 'See the [[Wikipedia:Protection policy|'
.. 'protection policy]] and ${PROTECTIONLOG} for more details.'
.. ' Please discuss any changes on the ${TALKPAGE}; you'
.. ' may ${EDITREQUEST} to ask an'
.. ' [[Wikipedia:Administrators|administrator]] to make an edit if it'
.. ' is [[Help:Minor edit#When to mark an edit as a minor edit'
.. '|uncontroversial]] or supported by [[Wikipedia:Consensus'
.. '|consensus]].',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Protection log display values
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- These messages determine the display values for the protection log link
-- or the pending changes log link produced by the ${PROTECTIONLOG} parameter.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in these messages.
['protection-log-display'] = 'protection log',
['pc-log-display'] = 'pending changes log',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Current version display values
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- These messages determine the display values for the page history link
-- or the move log link produced by the ${CURRENTVERSION} parameter.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in these messages.
['current-version-move-display'] = 'current title',
['current-version-edit-display'] = 'current version',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Talk page
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This message determines the display value of the talk page link produced
-- with the ${TALKPAGE} parameter.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in this message.
['talk-page-link-display'] = 'talk page',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Edit requests
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This message determines the display value of the edit request link produced
-- with the ${EDITREQUEST} parameter.
-- It is possible to use banner parameters in this message.
['edit-request-display'] = 'submit an edit request',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Expiry date format
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- This is the format for the blurb expiry date. It should be valid input for
-- the first parameter of the #time parser function.
['expiry-date-format'] = 'F j, Y "at" H:i e',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Tracking categories
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- These messages determine which tracking categories the module outputs.
['tracking-category-incorrect'] = 'Wikipedia pages with incorrect protection templates',
['tracking-category-template'] = 'Wikipedia template-protected pages other than templates and modules',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Images
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-- These are images that are not defined by their protection action and protection level.
['image-filename-indef'] = 'Full-protection-shackle.svg',
['image-filename-default'] = 'Transparent.gif',

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- End messages
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
}

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- End configuration
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
}

Module:Effective protection expiry

2022-03-29T15:37:15Z

Zoran: Created page with "local p = {} -- Returns the expiry of a restriction of an action on a given title, or unknown if it cannot be known. -- If no title is specified, the title of the page being..."

local p = {}

-- Returns the expiry of a restriction of an action on a given title, or unknown if it cannot be known.
-- If no title is specified, the title of the page being displayed is used.
function p._main(action, pagename)
local title
if type(pagename) == 'table' and pagename.prefixedText then
title = pagename
elseif pagename then
title = mw.title.new(pagename)
else
title = mw.title.getCurrentTitle()
end
pagename = title.prefixedText
if action == 'autoreview' then
local stabilitySettings = mw.ext.FlaggedRevs.getStabilitySettings(title)
return stabilitySettings and stabilitySettings.expiry or 'unknown'
elseif action ~= 'edit' and action ~= 'move' and action ~= 'create' and action ~= 'upload' then
error( 'First parameter must be one of edit, move, create, upload, autoreview', 2 )
end
local rawExpiry = mw.getCurrentFrame():callParserFunction('PROTECTIONEXPIRY', action, pagename)
if rawExpiry == 'infinity' then
return 'infinity'
elseif rawExpiry == '' then
return 'unknown'
else
local year, month, day, hour, minute, second = rawExpiry:match(
'^(%d%d%d%d)(%d%d)(%d%d)(%d%d)(%d%d)(%d%d)$'
)
if year then
return string.format(
'%s-%s-%sT%s:%s:%s',
year, month, day, hour, minute, second
)
else
error('internal error in Module:Effective protection expiry; malformed expiry timestamp')
end
end
end

setmetatable(p, { __index = function(t, k)
return function(frame)
return t._main(k, frame.args[1])
end
end })

return p

Module:Effective protection level

2022-03-29T15:36:51Z

Zoran: Created page with "local p = {} -- Returns the permission required to perform a given action on a given title. -- If no title is specified, the title of the page being displayed is used. functi..."

local p = {}

-- Returns the permission required to perform a given action on a given title.
-- If no title is specified, the title of the page being displayed is used.
function p._main(action, pagename)
local title
if type(pagename) == 'table' and pagename.prefixedText then
title = pagename
elseif pagename then
title = mw.title.new(pagename)
else
title = mw.title.getCurrentTitle()
end
pagename = title.prefixedText
if action == 'autoreview' then
local level = mw.ext.FlaggedRevs.getStabilitySettings(title)
level = level and level.autoreview
if level == 'review' then
return 'reviewer'
elseif level ~= '' then
return level
else
return nil -- not '*'. a page not being PC-protected is distinct from it being PC-protected with anyone able to review. also not '', as that would mean PC-protected but nobody can review
end
elseif action ~= 'edit' and action ~= 'move' and action ~= 'create' and action ~= 'upload' and action ~= 'undelete' then
error( 'First parameter must be one of edit, move, create, upload, undelete, autoreview', 2 )
end
if title.namespace == 8 then -- MediaWiki namespace
if title.text:sub(-3) == '.js' or title.text:sub(-4) == '.css' or title.contentModel == 'javascript' or title.contentModel == 'css' then -- site JS or CSS page
return 'interfaceadmin'
else -- any non-JS/CSS MediaWiki page
return 'sysop'
end
elseif title.namespace == 2 and title.isSubpage then
if title.contentModel == 'javascript' or title.contentModel == 'css' then -- user JS or CSS page
return 'interfaceadmin'
elseif title.contentModel == 'json' then -- user JSON page
return 'sysop'
end
end
if action == 'undelete' then
return 'sysop'
end
local level = title.protectionLevels[action] and title.protectionLevels[action][1]
if level == 'sysop' or level == 'editprotected' then
return 'sysop'
elseif title.cascadingProtection.restrictions[action] and title.cascadingProtection.restrictions[action][1] then -- used by a cascading-protected page
return 'sysop'
elseif level == 'templateeditor' then
return 'templateeditor'
elseif action == 'move' then
local blacklistentry = mw.ext.TitleBlacklist.test('edit', pagename) -- Testing action edit is correct, since this is for the source page. The target page name gets tested with action move.
if blacklistentry and not blacklistentry.params.autoconfirmed then
return 'templateeditor'
elseif title.namespace == 6 then
return 'filemover'
elseif level == 'extendedconfirmed' then
return 'extendedconfirmed'
else
return 'autoconfirmed'
end
end
local blacklistentry = mw.ext.TitleBlacklist.test(action, pagename)
if blacklistentry then
if not blacklistentry.params.autoconfirmed then
return 'templateeditor'
elseif level == 'extendedconfirmed' then
return 'extendedconfirmed'
else
return 'autoconfirmed'
end
elseif level == 'editsemiprotected' then -- create-semiprotected pages return this for some reason
return 'autoconfirmed'
elseif level then
return level
elseif action == 'upload' then
return 'autoconfirmed'
elseif action == 'create' and title.namespace % 2 == 0 and title.namespace ~= 118 then -- You need to be registered, but not autoconfirmed, to create non-talk pages other than drafts
return 'user'
else
return '*'
end
end

setmetatable(p, { __index = function(t, k)
return function(frame)
return t._main(k, frame.args[1])
end
end })

return p

Module:Arguments

2022-03-29T15:35:06Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module provides easy processing of arguments passed to Scribunto from -- #invoke. It is intended for use by other Lua modules, and should not be -- called from #invoke..."

-- This module provides easy processing of arguments passed to Scribunto from
-- #invoke. It is intended for use by other Lua modules, and should not be
-- called from #invoke directly.

local libraryUtil = require('libraryUtil')
local checkType = libraryUtil.checkType

local arguments = {}

-- Generate four different tidyVal functions, so that we don't have to check the
-- options every time we call it.

local function tidyValDefault(key, val)
if type(val) == 'string' then
val = val:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$')
if val == '' then
return nil
else
return val
end
else
return val
end
end

local function tidyValTrimOnly(key, val)
if type(val) == 'string' then
return val:match('^%s*(.-)%s*$')
else
return val
end
end

local function tidyValRemoveBlanksOnly(key, val)
if type(val) == 'string' then
if val:find('%S') then
return val
else
return nil
end
else
return val
end
end

local function tidyValNoChange(key, val)
return val
end

local function matchesTitle(given, title)
local tp = type( given )
return (tp == 'string' or tp == 'number') and mw.title.new( given ).prefixedText == title
end

local translate_mt = { __index = function(t, k) return k end }

function arguments.getArgs(frame, options)
checkType('getArgs', 1, frame, 'table', true)
checkType('getArgs', 2, options, 'table', true)
frame = frame or {}
options = options or {}

--[[
-- Set up argument translation.
--]]
options.translate = options.translate or {}
if getmetatable(options.translate) == nil then
setmetatable(options.translate, translate_mt)
end
if options.backtranslate == nil then
options.backtranslate = {}
for k,v in pairs(options.translate) do
options.backtranslate[v] = k
end
end
if options.backtranslate and getmetatable(options.backtranslate) == nil then
setmetatable(options.backtranslate, {
__index = function(t, k)
if options.translate[k] ~= k then
return nil
else
return k
end
end
})
end

--[[
-- Get the argument tables. If we were passed a valid frame object, get the
-- frame arguments (fargs) and the parent frame arguments (pargs), depending
-- on the options set and on the parent frame's availability. If we weren't
-- passed a valid frame object, we are being called from another Lua module
-- or from the debug console, so assume that we were passed a table of args
-- directly, and assign it to a new variable (luaArgs).
--]]
local fargs, pargs, luaArgs
if type(frame.args) == 'table' and type(frame.getParent) == 'function' then
if options.wrappers then
--[[
-- The wrappers option makes Module:Arguments look up arguments in
-- either the frame argument table or the parent argument table, but
-- not both. This means that users can use either the #invoke syntax
-- or a wrapper template without the loss of performance associated
-- with looking arguments up in both the frame and the parent frame.
-- Module:Arguments will look up arguments in the parent frame
-- if it finds the parent frame's title in options.wrapper;
-- otherwise it will look up arguments in the frame object passed
-- to getArgs.
--]]
local parent = frame:getParent()
if not parent then
fargs = frame.args
else
local title = parent:getTitle():gsub('/sandbox$', '')
local found = false
if matchesTitle(options.wrappers, title) then
found = true
elseif type(options.wrappers) == 'table' then
for _,v in pairs(options.wrappers) do
if matchesTitle(v, title) then
found = true
break
end
end
end

-- We test for false specifically here so that nil (the default) acts like true.
if found or options.frameOnly == false then
pargs = parent.args
end
if not found or options.parentOnly == false then
fargs = frame.args
end
end
else
-- options.wrapper isn't set, so check the other options.
if not options.parentOnly then
fargs = frame.args
end
if not options.frameOnly then
local parent = frame:getParent()
pargs = parent and parent.args or nil
end
end
if options.parentFirst then
fargs, pargs = pargs, fargs
end
else
luaArgs = frame
end

-- Set the order of precedence of the argument tables. If the variables are
-- nil, nothing will be added to the table, which is how we avoid clashes
-- between the frame/parent args and the Lua args.
local argTables = {fargs}
argTables[#argTables + 1] = pargs
argTables[#argTables + 1] = luaArgs

--[[
-- Generate the tidyVal function. If it has been specified by the user, we
-- use that; if not, we choose one of four functions depending on the
-- options chosen. This is so that we don't have to call the options table
-- every time the function is called.
--]]
local tidyVal = options.valueFunc
if tidyVal then
if type(tidyVal) ~= 'function' then
error(
"bad value assigned to option 'valueFunc'"
.. '(function expected, got '
.. type(tidyVal)
.. ')',
2
)
end
elseif options.trim ~= false then
if options.removeBlanks ~= false then
tidyVal = tidyValDefault
else
tidyVal = tidyValTrimOnly
end
else
if options.removeBlanks ~= false then
tidyVal = tidyValRemoveBlanksOnly
else
tidyVal = tidyValNoChange
end
end

--[[
-- Set up the args, metaArgs and nilArgs tables. args will be the one
-- accessed from functions, and metaArgs will hold the actual arguments. Nil
-- arguments are memoized in nilArgs, and the metatable connects all of them
-- together.
--]]
local args, metaArgs, nilArgs, metatable = {}, {}, {}, {}
setmetatable(args, metatable)

local function mergeArgs(tables)
--[[
-- Accepts multiple tables as input and merges their keys and values
-- into one table. If a value is already present it is not overwritten;
-- tables listed earlier have precedence. We are also memoizing nil
-- values, which can be overwritten if they are 's' (soft).
--]]
for _, t in ipairs(tables) do
for key, val in pairs(t) do
if metaArgs[key] == nil and nilArgs[key] ~= 'h' then
local tidiedVal = tidyVal(key, val)
if tidiedVal == nil then
nilArgs[key] = 's'
else
metaArgs[key] = tidiedVal
end
end
end
end
end

--[[
-- Define metatable behaviour. Arguments are memoized in the metaArgs table,
-- and are only fetched from the argument tables once. Fetching arguments
-- from the argument tables is the most resource-intensive step in this
-- module, so we try and avoid it where possible. For this reason, nil
-- arguments are also memoized, in the nilArgs table. Also, we keep a record
-- in the metatable of when pairs and ipairs have been called, so we do not
-- run pairs and ipairs on the argument tables more than once. We also do
-- not run ipairs on fargs and pargs if pairs has already been run, as all
-- the arguments will already have been copied over.
--]]

metatable.__index = function (t, key)
--[[
-- Fetches an argument when the args table is indexed. First we check
-- to see if the value is memoized, and if not we try and fetch it from
-- the argument tables. When we check memoization, we need to check
-- metaArgs before nilArgs, as both can be non-nil at the same time.
-- If the argument is not present in metaArgs, we also check whether
-- pairs has been run yet. If pairs has already been run, we return nil.
-- This is because all the arguments will have already been copied into
-- metaArgs by the mergeArgs function, meaning that any other arguments
-- must be nil.
--]]
if type(key) == 'string' then
key = options.translate[key]
end
local val = metaArgs[key]
if val ~= nil then
return val
elseif metatable.donePairs or nilArgs[key] then
return nil
end
for _, argTable in ipairs(argTables) do
local argTableVal = tidyVal(key, argTable[key])
if argTableVal ~= nil then
metaArgs[key] = argTableVal
return argTableVal
end
end
nilArgs[key] = 'h'
return nil
end

metatable.__newindex = function (t, key, val)
-- This function is called when a module tries to add a new value to the
-- args table, or tries to change an existing value.
if type(key) == 'string' then
key = options.translate[key]
end
if options.readOnly then
error(
'could not write to argument table key "'
.. tostring(key)
.. '"; the table is read-only',
2
)
elseif options.noOverwrite and args[key] ~= nil then
error(
'could not write to argument table key "'
.. tostring(key)
.. '"; overwriting existing arguments is not permitted',
2
)
elseif val == nil then
--[[
-- If the argument is to be overwritten with nil, we need to erase
-- the value in metaArgs, so that __index, __pairs and __ipairs do
-- not use a previous existing value, if present; and we also need
-- to memoize the nil in nilArgs, so that the value isn't looked
-- up in the argument tables if it is accessed again.
--]]
metaArgs[key] = nil
nilArgs[key] = 'h'
else
metaArgs[key] = val
end
end

local function translatenext(invariant)
local k, v = next(invariant.t, invariant.k)
invariant.k = k
if k == nil then
return nil
elseif type(k) ~= 'string' or not options.backtranslate then
return k, v
else
local backtranslate = options.backtranslate[k]
if backtranslate == nil then
-- Skip this one. This is a tail call, so this won't cause stack overflow
return translatenext(invariant)
else
return backtranslate, v
end
end
end

metatable.__pairs = function ()
-- Called when pairs is run on the args table.
if not metatable.donePairs then
mergeArgs(argTables)
metatable.donePairs = true
end
return translatenext, { t = metaArgs }
end

local function inext(t, i)
-- This uses our __index metamethod
local v = t[i + 1]
if v ~= nil then
return i + 1, v
end
end

metatable.__ipairs = function (t)
-- Called when ipairs is run on the args table.
return inext, t, 0
end

return args
end

return arguments

Module:Yesno

2022-03-29T15:34:36Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- Function allowing for consistent treatment of boolean-like wikitext input. -- It works similarly to the template {{yesno}}. return function (val, default) -- If your wiki..."

-- Function allowing for consistent treatment of boolean-like wikitext input.
-- It works similarly to the template {{yesno}}.

return function (val, default)
-- If your wiki uses non-ascii characters for any of "yes", "no", etc., you
-- should replace "val:lower()" with "mw.ustring.lower(val)" in the
-- following line.
val = type(val) == 'string' and val:lower() or val
if val == nil then
return nil
elseif val == true
or val == 'yes'
or val == 'y'
or val == 'true'
or val == 't'
or val == 'on'
or tonumber(val) == 1
then
return true
elseif val == false
or val == 'no'
or val == 'n'
or val == 'false'
or val == 'f'
or val == 'off'
or tonumber(val) == 0
then
return false
else
return default
end
end

Module:File link

2022-03-29T15:33:58Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module provides a library for formatting file wikilinks. local yesno = require('Module:Yesno') local checkType = require('libraryUtil').checkType local p = {} funct..."

-- This module provides a library for formatting file wikilinks.

local yesno = require('Module:Yesno')
local checkType = require('libraryUtil').checkType

local p = {}

function p._main(args)
checkType('_main', 1, args, 'table')

-- This is basically libraryUtil.checkTypeForNamedArg, but we are rolling our
-- own function to get the right error level.
local function checkArg(key, val, level)
if type(val) ~= 'string' then
error(string.format(
"type error in '%s' parameter of '_main' (expected string, got %s)",
key, type(val)
), level)
end
end

local ret = {}

-- Adds a positional parameter to the buffer.
local function addPositional(key)
local val = args[key]
if not val then
return nil
end
checkArg(key, val, 4)
ret[#ret + 1] = val
end

-- Adds a named parameter to the buffer. We assume that the parameter name
-- is the same as the argument key.
local function addNamed(key)
local val = args[key]
if not val then
return nil
end
checkArg(key, val, 4)
ret[#ret + 1] = key .. '=' .. val
end

-- Filename
checkArg('file', args.file, 3)
ret[#ret + 1] = 'File:' .. args.file

-- Format
if args.format then
checkArg('format', args.format)
if args.formatfile then
checkArg('formatfile', args.formatfile)
ret[#ret + 1] = args.format .. '=' .. args.formatfile
else
ret[#ret + 1] = args.format
end
end

-- Border
if yesno(args.border) then
ret[#ret + 1] = 'border'
end

addPositional('location')
addPositional('alignment')
addPositional('size')
addNamed('upright')
addNamed('link')
addNamed('alt')
addNamed('page')
addNamed('class')
addNamed('lang')
addNamed('start')
addNamed('end')
addNamed('thumbtime')
addPositional('caption')

return string.format('[[%s]]', table.concat(ret, '|'))
end

function p.main(frame)
local origArgs = require('Module:Arguments').getArgs(frame, {
wrappers = 'Template:File link'
})
if not origArgs.file then
error("'file' parameter missing from [[Template:File link]]", 0)
end

-- Copy the arguments that were passed to a new table to avoid looking up
-- every possible parameter in the frame object.
local args = {}
for k, v in pairs(origArgs) do
-- Make _BLANK a special argument to add a blank parameter. For use in
-- conditional templates etc. it is useful for blank arguments to be
-- ignored, but we still need a way to specify them so that we can do
-- things like [[File:Example.png|link=]].
if v == '_BLANK' then
v = ''
end
args[k] = v
end
return p._main(args)
end

return p

Module:No globals

2022-03-29T15:33:20Z

Zoran: Created page with "local mt = getmetatable(_G) or {} function mt.__index (t, k) if k ~= 'arg' then error('Tried to read nil global ' .. tostring(k), 2) end return nil end function mt.__newi..."

local mt = getmetatable(_G) or {}
function mt.__index (t, k)
if k ~= 'arg' then
error('Tried to read nil global ' .. tostring(k), 2)
end
return nil
end
function mt.__newindex(t, k, v)
if k ~= 'arg' then
error('Tried to write global ' .. tostring(k), 2)
end
rawset(t, k, v)
end
setmetatable(_G, mt)

Module:Protection banner

2022-03-29T15:30:52Z

Zoran: Created page with "-- This module implements {{pp-meta}} and its daughter templates such as -- {{pp-dispute}}, {{pp-vandalism}} and {{pp-sock}}. -- Initialise necessary modules. require('Module..."

-- This module implements {{pp-meta}} and its daughter templates such as
-- {{pp-dispute}}, {{pp-vandalism}} and {{pp-sock}}.

-- Initialise necessary modules.
require('Module:No globals')
local makeFileLink = require('Module:File link')._main
local effectiveProtectionLevel = require('Module:Effective protection level')._main
local effectiveProtectionExpiry = require('Module:Effective protection expiry')._main
local yesno = require('Module:Yesno')

-- Lazily initialise modules and objects we don't always need.
local getArgs, makeMessageBox, lang

-- Set constants.
local CONFIG_MODULE = 'Module:Protection banner/config'

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Helper functions
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local function makeCategoryLink(cat, sort)
if cat then
return string.format(
'[[%s:%s|%s]]',
mw.site.namespaces[14].name,
cat,
sort
)
end
end

-- Validation function for the expiry and the protection date
local function validateDate(dateString, dateType)
if not lang then
lang = mw.language.getContentLanguage()
end
local success, result = pcall(lang.formatDate, lang, 'U', dateString)
if success then
result = tonumber(result)
if result then
return result
end
end
error(string.format(
'invalid %s: %s',
dateType,
tostring(dateString)
), 4)
end

local function makeFullUrl(page, query, display)
return string.format(
'[%s %s]',
tostring(mw.uri.fullUrl(page, query)),
display
)
end

-- Given a directed graph formatted as node -> table of direct successors,
-- get a table of all nodes reachable from a given node (though always
-- including the given node).
local function getReachableNodes(graph, start)
local toWalk, retval = {[start] = true}, {}
while true do
-- Can't use pairs() since we're adding and removing things as we're iterating
local k = next(toWalk) -- This always gets the "first" key
if k == nil then
return retval
end
toWalk[k] = nil
retval[k] = true
for _,v in ipairs(graph[k]) do
if not retval[v] then
toWalk[v] = true
end
end
end
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Protection class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local Protection = {}
Protection.__index = Protection

Protection.supportedActions = {
edit = true,
move = true,
autoreview = true,
upload = true
}

Protection.bannerConfigFields = {
'text',
'explanation',
'tooltip',
'alt',
'link',
'image'
}

function Protection.new(args, cfg, title)
local obj = {}
obj._cfg = cfg
obj.title = title or mw.title.getCurrentTitle()

-- Set action
if not args.action then
obj.action = 'edit'
elseif Protection.supportedActions[args.action] then
obj.action = args.action
else
error(string.format(
'invalid action: %s',
tostring(args.action)
), 3)
end

-- Set level
obj.level = args.demolevel or effectiveProtectionLevel(obj.action, obj.title)
if not obj.level or (obj.action == 'move' and obj.level == 'autoconfirmed') then
-- Users need to be autoconfirmed to move pages anyway, so treat
-- semi-move-protected pages as unprotected.
obj.level = '*'
end

-- Set expiry
local effectiveExpiry = effectiveProtectionExpiry(obj.action, obj.title)
if effectiveExpiry == 'infinity' then
obj.expiry = 'indef'
elseif effectiveExpiry ~= 'unknown' then
obj.expiry = validateDate(effectiveExpiry, 'expiry date')
end

-- Set reason
if args[1] then
obj.reason = mw.ustring.lower(args[1])
if obj.reason:find('|') then
error('reasons cannot contain the pipe character ("|")', 3)
end
end

-- Set protection date
if args.date then
obj.protectionDate = validateDate(args.date, 'protection date')
end

-- Set banner config
do
obj.bannerConfig = {}
local configTables = {}
if cfg.banners[obj.action] then
configTables[#configTables + 1] = cfg.banners[obj.action][obj.reason]
end
if cfg.defaultBanners[obj.action] then
configTables[#configTables + 1] = cfg.defaultBanners[obj.action][obj.level]
configTables[#configTables + 1] = cfg.defaultBanners[obj.action].default
end
configTables[#configTables + 1] = cfg.masterBanner
for i, field in ipairs(Protection.bannerConfigFields) do
for j, t in ipairs(configTables) do
if t[field] then
obj.bannerConfig[field] = t[field]
break
end
end
end
end
return setmetatable(obj, Protection)
end

function Protection:isUserScript()
-- Whether the page is a user JavaScript or CSS page.
local title = self.title
return title.namespace == 2 and (
title.contentModel == 'javascript' or title.contentModel == 'css'
)
end

function Protection:isProtected()
return self.level ~= '*'
end

function Protection:shouldShowLock()
-- Whether we should output a banner/padlock
return self:isProtected() and not self:isUserScript()
end

-- Whether this page needs a protection category.
Protection.shouldHaveProtectionCategory = Protection.shouldShowLock

function Protection:isTemporary()
return type(self.expiry) == 'number'
end

function Protection:makeProtectionCategory()
if not self:shouldHaveProtectionCategory() then
return ''
end

local cfg = self._cfg
local title = self.title

-- Get the expiry key fragment.
local expiryFragment
if self.expiry == 'indef' then
expiryFragment = self.expiry
elseif type(self.expiry) == 'number' then
expiryFragment = 'temp'
end

-- Get the namespace key fragment.
local namespaceFragment = cfg.categoryNamespaceKeys[title.namespace]
if not namespaceFragment and title.namespace % 2 == 1 then
namespaceFragment = 'talk'
end

-- Define the order that key fragments are tested in. This is done with an
-- array of tables containing the value to be tested, along with its
-- position in the cfg.protectionCategories table.
local order = {
{val = expiryFragment, keypos = 1},
{val = namespaceFragment, keypos = 2},
{val = self.reason, keypos = 3},
{val = self.level, keypos = 4},
{val = self.action, keypos = 5}
}

--[[
-- The old protection templates used an ad-hoc protection category system,
-- with some templates prioritising namespaces in their categories, and
-- others prioritising the protection reason. To emulate this in this module
-- we use the config table cfg.reasonsWithNamespacePriority to set the
-- reasons for which namespaces have priority over protection reason.
-- If we are dealing with one of those reasons, move the namespace table to
-- the end of the order table, i.e. give it highest priority. If not, the
-- reason should have highest priority, so move that to the end of the table
-- instead.
--]]
table.insert(order, table.remove(order, self.reason and cfg.reasonsWithNamespacePriority[self.reason] and 2 or 3))

--[[
-- Define the attempt order. Inactive subtables (subtables with nil "value"
-- fields) are moved to the end, where they will later be given the key
-- "all". This is to cut down on the number of table lookups in
-- cfg.protectionCategories, which grows exponentially with the number of
-- non-nil keys. We keep track of the number of active subtables with the
-- noActive parameter.
--]]
local noActive, attemptOrder
do
local active, inactive = {}, {}
for i, t in ipairs(order) do
if t.val then
active[#active + 1] = t
else
inactive[#inactive + 1] = t
end
end
noActive = #active
attemptOrder = active
for i, t in ipairs(inactive) do
attemptOrder[#attemptOrder + 1] = t
end
end

--[[
-- Check increasingly generic key combinations until we find a match. If a
-- specific category exists for the combination of key fragments we are
-- given, that match will be found first. If not, we keep trying different
-- key fragment combinations until we match using the key
-- "all-all-all-all-all".
--
-- To generate the keys, we index the key subtables using a binary matrix
-- with indexes i and j. j is only calculated up to the number of active
-- subtables. For example, if there were three active subtables, the matrix
-- would look like this, with 0 corresponding to the key fragment "all", and
-- 1 corresponding to other key fragments.
--
-- j 1 2 3
-- i
-- 1 1 1 1
-- 2 0 1 1
-- 3 1 0 1
-- 4 0 0 1
-- 5 1 1 0
-- 6 0 1 0
-- 7 1 0 0
-- 8 0 0 0
--
-- Values of j higher than the number of active subtables are set
-- to the string "all".
--
-- A key for cfg.protectionCategories is constructed for each value of i.
-- The position of the value in the key is determined by the keypos field in
-- each subtable.
--]]
local cats = cfg.protectionCategories
for i = 1, 2^noActive do
local key = {}
for j, t in ipairs(attemptOrder) do
if j > noActive then
key[t.keypos] = 'all'
else
local quotient = i / 2 ^ (j - 1)
quotient = math.ceil(quotient)
if quotient % 2 == 1 then
key[t.keypos] = t.val
else
key[t.keypos] = 'all'
end
end
end
key = table.concat(key, '|')
local attempt = cats[key]
if attempt then
return makeCategoryLink(attempt, title.text)
end
end
return ''
end

function Protection:isIncorrect()
local expiry = self.expiry
return not self:shouldHaveProtectionCategory()
or type(expiry) == 'number' and expiry < os.time()
end

function Protection:isTemplateProtectedNonTemplate()
local action, namespace = self.action, self.title.namespace
return self.level == 'templateeditor'
and (
(action ~= 'edit' and action ~= 'move')
or (namespace ~= 10 and namespace ~= 828)
)
end

function Protection:makeCategoryLinks()
local msg = self._cfg.msg
local ret = {self:makeProtectionCategory()}
if self:isIncorrect() then
ret[#ret + 1] = makeCategoryLink(
msg['tracking-category-incorrect'],
self.title.text
)
end
if self:isTemplateProtectedNonTemplate() then
ret[#ret + 1] = makeCategoryLink(
msg['tracking-category-template'],
self.title.text
)
end
return table.concat(ret)
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Blurb class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local Blurb = {}
Blurb.__index = Blurb

Blurb.bannerTextFields = {
text = true,
explanation = true,
tooltip = true,
alt = true,
link = true
}

function Blurb.new(protectionObj, args, cfg)
return setmetatable({
_cfg = cfg,
_protectionObj = protectionObj,
_args = args
}, Blurb)
end

-- Private methods --

function Blurb:_formatDate(num)
-- Formats a Unix timestamp into dd Month, YYYY format.
lang = lang or mw.language.getContentLanguage()
local success, date = pcall(
lang.formatDate,
lang,
self._cfg.msg['expiry-date-format'] or 'j F Y',
'@' .. tostring(num)
)
if success then
return date
end
end

function Blurb:_getExpandedMessage(msgKey)
return self:_substituteParameters(self._cfg.msg[msgKey])
end

function Blurb:_substituteParameters(msg)
if not self._params then
local parameterFuncs = {}

parameterFuncs.CURRENTVERSION = self._makeCurrentVersionParameter
parameterFuncs.EDITREQUEST = self._makeEditRequestParameter
parameterFuncs.EXPIRY = self._makeExpiryParameter
parameterFuncs.EXPLANATIONBLURB = self._makeExplanationBlurbParameter
parameterFuncs.IMAGELINK = self._makeImageLinkParameter
parameterFuncs.INTROBLURB = self._makeIntroBlurbParameter
parameterFuncs.INTROFRAGMENT = self._makeIntroFragmentParameter
parameterFuncs.PAGETYPE = self._makePagetypeParameter
parameterFuncs.PROTECTIONBLURB = self._makeProtectionBlurbParameter
parameterFuncs.PROTECTIONDATE = self._makeProtectionDateParameter
parameterFuncs.PROTECTIONLEVEL = self._makeProtectionLevelParameter
parameterFuncs.PROTECTIONLOG = self._makeProtectionLogParameter
parameterFuncs.TALKPAGE = self._makeTalkPageParameter
parameterFuncs.TOOLTIPBLURB = self._makeTooltipBlurbParameter
parameterFuncs.TOOLTIPFRAGMENT = self._makeTooltipFragmentParameter
parameterFuncs.VANDAL = self._makeVandalTemplateParameter

self._params = setmetatable({}, {
__index = function (t, k)
local param
if parameterFuncs[k] then
param = parameterFuncs[k](self)
end
param = param or ''
t[k] = param
return param
end
})
end

msg = msg:gsub('${(%u+)}', self._params)
return msg
end

function Blurb:_makeCurrentVersionParameter()
-- A link to the page history or the move log, depending on the kind of
-- protection.
local pagename = self._protectionObj.title.prefixedText
if self._protectionObj.action == 'move' then
-- We need the move log link.
return makeFullUrl(
'Special:Log',
{type = 'move', page = pagename},
self:_getExpandedMessage('current-version-move-display')
)
else
-- We need the history link.
return makeFullUrl(
pagename,
{action = 'history'},
self:_getExpandedMessage('current-version-edit-display')
)
end
end

function Blurb:_makeEditRequestParameter()
local mEditRequest = require('Module:Submit an edit request')
local action = self._protectionObj.action
local level = self._protectionObj.level

-- Get the edit request type.
local requestType
if action == 'edit' then
if level == 'autoconfirmed' then
requestType = 'semi'
elseif level == 'extendedconfirmed' then
requestType = 'extended'
elseif level == 'templateeditor' then
requestType = 'template'
end
end
requestType = requestType or 'full'

-- Get the display value.
local display = self:_getExpandedMessage('edit-request-display')

return mEditRequest._link{type = requestType, display = display}
end

function Blurb:_makeExpiryParameter()
local expiry = self._protectionObj.expiry
if type(expiry) == 'number' then
return self:_formatDate(expiry)
else
return expiry
end
end

function Blurb:_makeExplanationBlurbParameter()
-- Cover special cases first.
if self._protectionObj.title.namespace == 8 then
-- MediaWiki namespace
return self:_getExpandedMessage('explanation-blurb-nounprotect')
end

-- Get explanation blurb table keys
local action = self._protectionObj.action
local level = self._protectionObj.level
local talkKey = self._protectionObj.title.isTalkPage and 'talk' or 'subject'

-- Find the message in the explanation blurb table and substitute any
-- parameters.
local explanations = self._cfg.explanationBlurbs
local msg
if explanations[action][level] and explanations[action][level][talkKey] then
msg = explanations[action][level][talkKey]
elseif explanations[action][level] and explanations[action][level].default then
msg = explanations[action][level].default
elseif explanations[action].default and explanations[action].default[talkKey] then
msg = explanations[action].default[talkKey]
elseif explanations[action].default and explanations[action].default.default then
msg = explanations[action].default.default
else
error(string.format(
'could not find explanation blurb for action "%s", level "%s" and talk key "%s"',
action,
level,
talkKey
), 8)
end
return self:_substituteParameters(msg)
end

function Blurb:_makeImageLinkParameter()
local imageLinks = self._cfg.imageLinks
local action = self._protectionObj.action
local level = self._protectionObj.level
local msg
if imageLinks[action][level] then
msg = imageLinks[action][level]
elseif imageLinks[action].default then
msg = imageLinks[action].default
else
msg = imageLinks.edit.default
end
return self:_substituteParameters(msg)
end

function Blurb:_makeIntroBlurbParameter()
if self._protectionObj:isTemporary() then
return self:_getExpandedMessage('intro-blurb-expiry')
else
return self:_getExpandedMessage('intro-blurb-noexpiry')
end
end

function Blurb:_makeIntroFragmentParameter()
if self._protectionObj:isTemporary() then
return self:_getExpandedMessage('intro-fragment-expiry')
else
return self:_getExpandedMessage('intro-fragment-noexpiry')
end
end

function Blurb:_makePagetypeParameter()
local pagetypes = self._cfg.pagetypes
return pagetypes[self._protectionObj.title.namespace]
or pagetypes.default
or error('no default pagetype defined', 8)
end

function Blurb:_makeProtectionBlurbParameter()
local protectionBlurbs = self._cfg.protectionBlurbs
local action = self._protectionObj.action
local level = self._protectionObj.level
local msg
if protectionBlurbs[action][level] then
msg = protectionBlurbs[action][level]
elseif protectionBlurbs[action].default then
msg = protectionBlurbs[action].default
elseif protectionBlurbs.edit.default then
msg = protectionBlurbs.edit.default
else
error('no protection blurb defined for protectionBlurbs.edit.default', 8)
end
return self:_substituteParameters(msg)
end

function Blurb:_makeProtectionDateParameter()
local protectionDate = self._protectionObj.protectionDate
if type(protectionDate) == 'number' then
return self:_formatDate(protectionDate)
else
return protectionDate
end
end

function Blurb:_makeProtectionLevelParameter()
local protectionLevels = self._cfg.protectionLevels
local action = self._protectionObj.action
local level = self._protectionObj.level
local msg
if protectionLevels[action][level] then
msg = protectionLevels[action][level]
elseif protectionLevels[action].default then
msg = protectionLevels[action].default
elseif protectionLevels.edit.default then
msg = protectionLevels.edit.default
else
error('no protection level defined for protectionLevels.edit.default', 8)
end
return self:_substituteParameters(msg)
end

function Blurb:_makeProtectionLogParameter()
local pagename = self._protectionObj.title.prefixedText
if self._protectionObj.action == 'autoreview' then
-- We need the pending changes log.
return makeFullUrl(
'Special:Log',
{type = 'stable', page = pagename},
self:_getExpandedMessage('pc-log-display')
)
else
-- We need the protection log.
return makeFullUrl(
'Special:Log',
{type = 'protect', page = pagename},
self:_getExpandedMessage('protection-log-display')
)
end
end

function Blurb:_makeTalkPageParameter()
return string.format(
'[[%s:%s#%s|%s]]',
mw.site.namespaces[self._protectionObj.title.namespace].talk.name,
self._protectionObj.title.text,
self._args.section or 'top',
self:_getExpandedMessage('talk-page-link-display')
)
end

function Blurb:_makeTooltipBlurbParameter()
if self._protectionObj:isTemporary() then
return self:_getExpandedMessage('tooltip-blurb-expiry')
else
return self:_getExpandedMessage('tooltip-blurb-noexpiry')
end
end

function Blurb:_makeTooltipFragmentParameter()
if self._protectionObj:isTemporary() then
return self:_getExpandedMessage('tooltip-fragment-expiry')
else
return self:_getExpandedMessage('tooltip-fragment-noexpiry')
end
end

function Blurb:_makeVandalTemplateParameter()
return mw.getCurrentFrame():expandTemplate{
title="vandal-m",
args={self._args.user or self._protectionObj.title.baseText}
}
end

-- Public methods --

function Blurb:makeBannerText(key)
-- Validate input.
if not key or not Blurb.bannerTextFields[key] then
error(string.format(
'"%s" is not a valid banner config field',
tostring(key)
), 2)
end

-- Generate the text.
local msg = self._protectionObj.bannerConfig[key]
if type(msg) == 'string' then
return self:_substituteParameters(msg)
elseif type(msg) == 'function' then
msg = msg(self._protectionObj, self._args)
if type(msg) ~= 'string' then
error(string.format(
'bad output from banner config function with key "%s"'
.. ' (expected string, got %s)',
tostring(key),
type(msg)
), 4)
end
return self:_substituteParameters(msg)
end
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- BannerTemplate class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local BannerTemplate = {}
BannerTemplate.__index = BannerTemplate

function BannerTemplate.new(protectionObj, cfg)
local obj = {}
obj._cfg = cfg

-- Set the image filename.
local imageFilename = protectionObj.bannerConfig.image
if imageFilename then
obj._imageFilename = imageFilename
else
-- If an image filename isn't specified explicitly in the banner config,
-- generate it from the protection status and the namespace.
local action = protectionObj.action
local level = protectionObj.level
local namespace = protectionObj.title.namespace
local reason = protectionObj.reason

-- Deal with special cases first.
if (
namespace == 10
or namespace == 828
or reason and obj._cfg.indefImageReasons[reason]
)
and action == 'edit'
and level == 'sysop'
and not protectionObj:isTemporary()
then
-- Fully protected modules and templates get the special red "indef"
-- padlock.
obj._imageFilename = obj._cfg.msg['image-filename-indef']
else
-- Deal with regular protection types.
local images = obj._cfg.images
if images[action] then
if images[action][level] then
obj._imageFilename = images[action][level]
elseif images[action].default then
obj._imageFilename = images[action].default
end
end
end
end
return setmetatable(obj, BannerTemplate)
end

function BannerTemplate:renderImage()
local filename = self._imageFilename
or self._cfg.msg['image-filename-default']
or 'Transparent.gif'
return makeFileLink{
file = filename,
size = (self.imageWidth or 20) .. 'px',
alt = self._imageAlt,
link = self._imageLink,
caption = self.imageCaption
}
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Banner class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local Banner = setmetatable({}, BannerTemplate)
Banner.__index = Banner

function Banner.new(protectionObj, blurbObj, cfg)
local obj = BannerTemplate.new(protectionObj, cfg) -- This doesn't need the blurb.
obj.imageWidth = 40
obj.imageCaption = blurbObj:makeBannerText('alt') -- Large banners use the alt text for the tooltip.
obj._reasonText = blurbObj:makeBannerText('text')
obj._explanationText = blurbObj:makeBannerText('explanation')
obj._page = protectionObj.title.prefixedText -- Only makes a difference in testing.
return setmetatable(obj, Banner)
end

function Banner:__tostring()
-- Renders the banner.
makeMessageBox = makeMessageBox or require('Module:Message box').main
local reasonText = self._reasonText or error('no reason text set', 2)
local explanationText = self._explanationText
local mbargs = {
page = self._page,
type = 'protection',
image = self:renderImage(),
text = string.format(
"'''%s'''%s",
reasonText,
explanationText and ' ' .. explanationText or ''
)
}
return makeMessageBox('mbox', mbargs)
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Padlock class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local Padlock = setmetatable({}, BannerTemplate)
Padlock.__index = Padlock

function Padlock.new(protectionObj, blurbObj, cfg)
local obj = BannerTemplate.new(protectionObj, cfg) -- This doesn't need the blurb.
obj.imageWidth = 20
obj.imageCaption = blurbObj:makeBannerText('tooltip')
obj._imageAlt = blurbObj:makeBannerText('alt')
obj._imageLink = blurbObj:makeBannerText('link')
obj._indicatorName = cfg.padlockIndicatorNames[protectionObj.action]
or cfg.padlockIndicatorNames.default
or 'pp-default'
return setmetatable(obj, Padlock)
end

function Padlock:__tostring()
local frame = mw.getCurrentFrame()
-- The nowiki tag helps prevent whitespace at the top of articles.
return frame:extensionTag{name = 'nowiki'} .. frame:extensionTag{
name = 'indicator',
args = {name = self._indicatorName},
content = self:renderImage()
}
end

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Exports
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

local p = {}

function p._exportClasses()
-- This is used for testing purposes.
return {
Protection = Protection,
Blurb = Blurb,
BannerTemplate = BannerTemplate,
Banner = Banner,
Padlock = Padlock,
}
end

function p._main(args, cfg, title)
args = args or {}
cfg = cfg or require(CONFIG_MODULE)

local protectionObj = Protection.new(args, cfg, title)

local ret = {}

-- If a page's edit protection is equally or more restrictive than its
-- protection from some other action, then don't bother displaying anything
-- for the other action (except categories).
if not yesno(args.catonly) and (protectionObj.action == 'edit' or
args.demolevel or
not getReachableNodes(
cfg.hierarchy,
protectionObj.level
)[effectiveProtectionLevel('edit', protectionObj.title)])
then
-- Initialise the blurb object
local blurbObj = Blurb.new(protectionObj, args, cfg)

-- Render the banner
if protectionObj:shouldShowLock() then
ret[#ret + 1] = tostring(
(yesno(args.small) and Padlock or Banner)
.new(protectionObj, blurbObj, cfg)
)
end
end

-- Render the categories
if yesno(args.category) ~= false then
ret[#ret + 1] = protectionObj:makeCategoryLinks()
end

return table.concat(ret)
end

function p.main(frame, cfg)
cfg = cfg or require(CONFIG_MODULE)

-- Find default args, if any.
local parent = frame.getParent and frame:getParent()
local defaultArgs = parent and cfg.wrappers[parent:getTitle():gsub('/sandbox$', '')]

-- Find user args, and use the parent frame if we are being called from a
-- wrapper template.
getArgs = getArgs or require('Module:Arguments').getArgs
local userArgs = getArgs(frame, {
parentOnly = defaultArgs,
frameOnly = not defaultArgs
})

-- Build the args table. User-specified args overwrite default args.
local args = {}
for k, v in pairs(defaultArgs or {}) do
args[k] = v
end
for k, v in pairs(userArgs) do
args[k] = v
end
return p._main(args, cfg)
end

return p

File:Check-saira-green.svg

2022-03-29T14:49:14Z

Zoran: Zoran reverted File:Check-saira-green.svg to an old version

File:Check-saira-green.svg

2022-03-29T14:45:08Z

Zoran: Zoran uploaded a new version of File:Check-saira-green.svg